T h e A m e r i c a n Y aw p

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

The
A meric a n
Y aw pA Massively Collaborative Open U.S. History Textbook

v ol . 2 : si n c e 1 8 7 7

e di t e d by jose ph l . l ock e a n d be n w r igh t

sta n f or d u n i v e r si t y pr e s s•

sta n f or d, c a l i f or n i a© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Stanford University Press
Stanford, California© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Some rights reserved.
[[[Insert logo]]]This book is licensed under the Creative Commons license CC BY-SA 4.0, AttributionShareAlike. This license permits commercial and non-commercial use of this work,
so long as attribution is given. For more information about the license, visit
https://​creativecommons​.org/​licenses/​by​-sa/​4​.0/.
Printed in the United States of America on acid-free, archival-quality paper
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Names: Locke, Joseph L., editor. | Wright, Ben, editor.
Title: The American yawp : a massively collaborative open U.S. history textbook /edited by Joseph L. Locke and Ben Wright.
Description: Stanford, California : Stanford University Press, 2019. |Includes bibliographical references and index.
Identifiers: LCCN 2018015206 (print) | LCCN 2018017638 (ebook) |ISBN 9781503608139 (e-book) | ISBN 9781503606715 | ISBN 9781503606715(v. 1 :pbk. :alk. paper) | ISBN 9781503606883(v. 2 :pbk. :alk. paper) |ISBN 9781503608139(v. 1 :ebook) | ISBN 9781503608146(v. 2 :ebook)
Subjects: LCSH: United States—History—Textbooks.
Classification: LCC E178.1 (ebook) | LCC E178.1 .A493673 2019 (print) |DDC 973—dc23
LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2018015206
Bruce Lundquist
Typeset by Newgen in Sabon LT 11/15
Cover illustration: Detail from “Victory!” by M.F. Tobin, ca. 1884. Source: Susan H.
Douglas Political Americana Collection, Division of Rare and Manuscript Collections,
Cornell University Library.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Yawp \yôp\ n: 1: a raucous noise 2: rough vigorous language“I sound my barbaric yawp over the roofs of the world.”
Walt Whitman, 1854

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Contents
Prefaceix
16. Capital and Labor

1

17. Conquering the West28

18. Life in Industrial America

56

19. American Empire

82

20. The Progressive Era

109

21. World War I and Its Aftermath140

22. The New Era

163

23. The Great Depression

192

24. World War II

225

25. The Cold War

257

26. The Affluent Society288

27. The Sixties

314

28. The Unraveling343

29. The Triumph of the Right

376

30. The Recent Past

411

Contributors441© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Preface
We are the heirs of our history. Our communities, our politics, our culture: it is all a product of the past. As William Faulkner wrote, “The pastis never dead. It’s not even past.”1 To understand who we are, we must
therefore understand our history.
But what is history? What does it mean to study the past? History
can never be the simple memorizing of names and dates (how would weeven know what names and dates are worth studying?). It is too complex a task and too dynamic a process to be reduced to that. It must be
something more because, in a sense, it is we who give life to the past.
Historians ask historical questions, weigh evidence from primary sources(material produced in the era under study), grapple with rival interpretations, and argue for their conclusions. History, then, is our ongoing
conversation about the past.
Every generation must write its own history. Old conclusions—say,about the motives of European explorers or the realities of life on slave
plantations—fall before new evidence and new outlooks. Names ofCivil rights marchfrom Selma toMontgomery,
Alabama, in
1965. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

xP r ef acel­eaders and dates of events may not change, but the weight we give themand the context with which we frame them invariably evolves. History isa conversation between the past and the present. To understand a global
society, we must explore a history of transnational forces. To understandthe lived experiences of ordinary Americans, we must look beyond theelites who framed older textbooks and listen to the poor and disadvantaged from all generations.
But why study history in the first place? History can cultivate essential
and relevant—or, in more utilitarian terms, “marketable”—skills: carefulreading, creative thinking, and clear communication. Many are familiar
with a famous quote of philosopher George Santayana: “Those who failto learn from history are doomed to repeat it.”2 The role of history inshaping current events is more complicated than this quote implies, but
Santayana was right in arguing that history offers important lessons. The
historical sensibility yields perspective and context and broader awareness. It liberates us from our narrow experiences and pulls us into, in thewords of historian Peter Stearns, “the laboratory of human experience.”3
Perhaps a better way to articulate the importance of studying history
would be, “Those who fail to understand their history will fail to understand themselves.”
Historical interpretation is never wholly subjective: it requires method,
rigor, and perspective. The open nature of historical discourse does notmean that all arguments—and certainly not all “opinions”—about thepast are equally valid. Some are simply wrong. And yet good historicalquestions will not always have easy answers. Asking “When did Christopher Columbus first sail across the Atlantic?” will tell us far less than
“What inspired Columbus to attempt his voyage?” or “How did Native
Americans interpret the arrival of Europeans?” Crafting answers to thesequestions reveals far greater insights into our history.
But how can any textbook encapsulate American history? Should itorganize around certain themes or surrender to the impossibility of synthesis and retreat toward generality? In the oft-cited lines of the American poet Walt Whitman, we found as good an organizing principle as anyother: “I too am not a bit tamed—I too am untranslatable,” he wrote,“I sound my barbaric yawp over the roofs of the world.”4 Long before
Whitman and long after, Americans have sung something collectively
amid the deafening roar of their many individual voices. Here we findboth chorus and cacophony together, as one. This textbook therefore
offers the story of that barbaric, untranslatable American yawp by con-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

P re f a c e  x i

structing a coherent and accessible narrative from all the best of recent
historical scholarship. Without losing sight of politics and power, it incorporates transnational perspectives, integrates diverse voices, recovers
narratives of resistance, and explores the complex process of cultural
creation. It looks for America in crowded slave cabins, bustling markets,congested tenements, and marbled halls. It navigates between maternity
wards, prisons, streets, bars, and boardrooms. Whitman’s America, like
ours, cut across the narrow boundaries that can strangle narratives ofAmerican history.
We have produced The American Yawp to help guide students in theirencounter with American history. The American Yawp is a collaboratively built, open American history textbook designed for general readersand college-level history courses. Over three hundred academic historians—scholars and experienced college-level instructors—have cometogether and freely volunteered their expertise to help democratize theAmerican past for twenty-first century readers. The project is freely accessible online at www​.AmericanYawp​.com, and in addition to providing
a peer review of the text, Stanford University Press has partnered with
The American Yawp to publish a low-cost print edition. Furthermore,
The American Yawp remains an evolving, collaborative text: you are encouraged to help us improve by offering comments on our feedback page,available through AmericanYawp​.com.
The American Yawp is a fully open resource: you are encouraged touse it, download it, distribute it, and modify it as you see fit. The project
is formally operated under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike
4.0 International (CC-BY-SA) License and is designed to meet the standards of a “Free Cultural Work.” We are happy to share it and we hope
you will do the same.
Joseph Locke & Ben Wright, editors
N o t e s t o p r e fac e
1. William Faulkner, Requiem for a Nun (New York: Random House,1954), 73.
2. George Santayana, The Life of Reason: Or the Phases of Human Progress,
Volume I (New York: Scribner, 1905), 284.
3. Peter N. Stearns, “Why Study History,” American Historical Association (July 11, 2008). https://​www​.historians​.org/​about​-aha​-and​-membership/​aha​-history​-and​-archives/​archives/​why​-study​-history​-​(1998.
4. Walt Whitman, Leaves of Grass (Brooklyn: Rome, 1855), 55.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e A m e r i c a n Y aw p

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

16
Capital and Labor
I. Introduction
The Great Railroad Strike of 1877 heralded a new era of labor conflict in the United States. That year, mired in the stagnant economy that
followed the bursting of the railroads’ financial bubble in 1873, raillines slashed workers’ wages (even, workers complained, as they reaped
enormous government subsidies and paid shareholders lucrative stock
dividends). Workers struck from Baltimore to St. Louis, shutting down
railroad ­traffic—the nation’s economic lifeblood—across the country.
Panicked business leaders and friendly political officials reacted
quickly. When local police forces would not or could not suppress thestrikes, governors called out state militias to break them and restore rail
service. Many strikers destroyed rail property rather than allow militias
to reopen the rails. The protests approached a class war. The governor of

A Maryland National Guard unit
fires on strikers
during the Great
Railroad Strike of
1877. Harper’s
Weekly, via
Wikimedia.

Maryland deployed the state’s militia. In Baltimore, the militia fired intoa crowd of striking workers, killing eleven and wounding many more.
Strikes convulsed towns and cities across Pennsylvania. The head of thePennsylvania Railroad, Thomas Andrew Scott, suggested that if workers© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 chapter 16

were unhappy with their wages, they should be given “a rifle diet for a
few days and see how they like that kind of bread.”1 Law enforcement in
Pittsburgh refused to put down the protests, so the governor called out
the state militia, who killed twenty strikers with bayonets and rifle fire. A
month of chaos erupted. Strikers set fire to the city, destroying dozens ofbuildings, over a hundred engines, and over a thousand cars. In Reading,strikers destroyed rail property and an angry crowd bombarded militiamen with rocks and bottles. The militia fired into the crowd, killing ten.
A general strike erupted in St. Louis, and strikers seized rail depots anddeclared for the eight-hour day and the abolition of child labor. Federal
troops and vigilantes fought their way into the depot, killing eighteen andbreaking the strike. Rail lines were shut down all across neighboring Illinois, where coal miners struck in sympathy, tens of thousands gathered
to protest under the aegis of the Workingmen’s Party, and twenty protesters were killed in Chicago by special police and militiamen.
Courts, police, and state militias suppressed the strikes, but it wasfederal troops that finally defeated them. When Pennsylvania militiamen
were unable to contain the strikes, federal troops stepped in. When militia in West Virginia refused to break the strike, federal troops broke it
instead. On the orders of the president, American soldiers were deployed
all across northern rail lines. Soldiers moved from town to town, suppressing protests and reopening rail lines. Six weeks after it had begun,
the strike had been crushed. Nearly 100 Americans died in “The Great
Upheaval.” Workers destroyed nearly $40 million worth of property. The
strike galvanized the country. It convinced laborers of the need for institutionalized unions, persuaded businesses of the need for even greater
political influence and government aid, and foretold a half century oflabor conflict in the United States.2

II. The March of Capital
Growing labor unrest accompanied industrialization. The greatest strikes
first hit the railroads only because no other industry had so effectively
marshaled together capital, government support, and bureaucratic management. Many workers perceived their new powerlessness in the coming industrial order. Skills mattered less and less in an industrialized,
mass-producing economy, and their strength as individuals seemed eversmaller and more insignificant when companies grew in size and power
and managers grew flush with wealth and influence. Long hours, dangerous working conditions, and the difficulty of supporting a family on© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r 3

meager and unpredictable wages compelled armies of labor to organize
and battle against the power of capital.
The post–Civil War era saw revolutions in American industry. Technological innovations and national investments slashed the costs of production and distribution. New administrative frameworks sustained theweight of vast firms. National credit agencies eased the uncertainties
surrounding rapid movement of capital between investors, manufacturers, and retailers. Plummeting transportation and communication costs
opened new national media, which advertising agencies used to nationalize various products.
By the turn of the century, corporate leaders and wealthy industrialists embraced the new principles of scientific management, or Taylorism,
after its noted proponent, Frederick Taylor. The precision of steel parts,
the harnessing of electricity, the innovations of machine tools, and themass markets wrought by the railroads offered new avenues for efficiency. To match the demands of the machine age, Taylor said, firms
needed a scientific organization of production. He urged all manufacturers to increase efficiency by subdividing tasks. Rather than having thirtymechanics individually making thirty machines, for instance, a manufacturer could assign thirty laborers to perform thirty distinct tasks. Such ashift would not only make workers as interchangeable as the parts they
were using, it would also dramatically speed up the process of production. If managed by trained experts, specific tasks could be done quicker

John Pierpont
Morgan with
two friends, c.
1907. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 chapter 16

Glazier Stove
Company
moulding room,
Chelsea, Michigan,c. 1900–1910. Library of Congress.

and more efficiently. Taylorism increased the scale and scope of manufacturing and allowed for the flowering of mass production. Building on theuse of interchangeable parts in Civil War–era weapons manufacturing,
American firms advanced mass production techniques and technologies.
Singer sewing machines, Chicago packers’ “disassembly” lines, McCormick grain reapers, Duke cigarette rollers: all realized unprecedented efficiencies and achieved unheard-of levels of production that propelled theircompanies into the forefront of American business. Henry Ford made theassembly line famous, allowing the production of automobiles to skyrocket as their cost plummeted, but various American firms had been
paving the way for decades.3
Cyrus McCormick had overseen the construction of mechanical reapers (used for harvesting wheat) for decades. He had relied on skilled
blacksmiths, skilled machinists, and skilled woodworkers to handcraft
horse-drawn machines. But production was slow and the machines were
expensive. The reapers still enabled massive efficiency gains in grain
farming, but their high cost and slow production times put them out ofreach of most American wheat farmers. But then, in 1880, McCormick
hired a production manager who had overseen the manufacturing of Colt
firearms to transform his system of production. The Chicago plant introduced new jigs, steel gauges, and pattern machines that could makeprecise duplicates of new, interchangeable parts. The company had produced twenty-one thousand machines in 1880. It made twice as many in© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r 51885, and by 1889, less than a decade later, it was producing over one
hundred thousand a year.4
Industrialization and mass production pushed the United States into
the forefront of the world. The American economy had lagged behind
Britain, Germany, and France as recently as the 1860s, but by 1900 theUnited States was the world’s leading manufacturing nation. Thirteen
years later, by 1913, the United States produced one third of the world’s
industrial output—more than Britain, France, and Germany combined.5
Firms such as McCormick’s realized massive economies of scale: after
accounting for their initial massive investments in machines and marketing, each additional product lost the company relatively little in production costs. The bigger the production, then, the bigger the profits.
New industrial companies therefore hungered for markets to keep theirhigh-volume production facilities operating. Retailers and advertisers
sustained the massive markets needed for mass production, and corporate bureaucracies meanwhile allowed for the management of giant new
firms. A new class of managers—comprising what one prominent economic historian called the “visible hand”—operated between the worlds
of workers and owners and ensured the efficient operation and administration of mass production and mass distribution. Even more importantto the growth and maintenance of these new companies, however, werethe legal creations used to protect investors and sustain the power ofmassed capital.6
The costs of mass production were prohibitive for all but the very
wealthiest individuals, and, even then, the risks would be too great tobear individually. The corporation itself was ages old, but the actual rightto incorporate had generally been reserved for public works projects orgovernment-sponsored monopolies. After the Civil War, however, thecorporation, using new state incorporation laws passed during the Market Revolution of the early nineteenth century, became a legal mechanism for nearly any enterprise to marshal vast amounts of capital while
limiting the liability of shareholders. By washing their hands of legal andfinancial obligations while still retaining the right to profit massively,
investors flooded corporations with the capital needed to industrialize.
But a competitive marketplace threatened the promise of investments.
Once the efficiency gains of mass production were realized, profit margins could be undone by cutthroat competition, which kept costs low as
price cutting sank into profits. Companies rose and fell—and investors
suffered losses—as manufacturing firms struggled to maintain supremacy© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

6 chapter 16

in their particular industries. Economies of scale were a double-edged
sword: while additional production provided immense profits, the highfixed costs of operating expensive factories dictated that even modest
losses from selling underpriced goods were preferable to not selling profitably priced goods at all. And as market share was won and lost, profits
proved unstable. American industrial firms tried everything to avoid competition: they formed informal pools and trusts, they entered price-fixing
agreements, they divided markets, and, when blocked by antitrust laws
and renegade price cutting, merged into consolidations. Rather than suffer from ruinous competition, firms combined and bypassed it altogether.
Between 1895 and 1904, and particularly in the four years between
1898 and 1902, a wave of mergers rocked the American economy. Competition melted away in what is known as “the great merger movement.”
In nine years, four thousand companies—nearly 20 percent of the American economy—were folded into rival firms. In nearly every major industry, newly consolidated firms such as General Electric and DuPont
utterly dominated their market. Forty-one separate consolidations eachcontrolled over 70 percent of the market in their respective industries. In
1901, financier J. P. Morgan oversaw the formation of United States Steel,built from eight leading steel companies. Industrialization was built on
steel, and one firm—the world’s first billion-dollar company—­controlled
the market. Monopoly had arrived.7

III. The Rise of Inequality
Industrial capitalism realized the greatest advances in efficiency and productivity that the world had ever seen. Massive new companies marshaled capital on an unprecedented scale and provided enormous profitsthat created unheard-of fortunes. But it also created millions of low-paid,
unskilled, unreliable jobs with long hours and dangerous working conditions. Industrial capitalism confronted Gilded Age Americans with unprecedented inequalities. The sudden appearance of the extreme wealthof industrial and financial leaders alongside the crippling squalor of theurban and rural poor shocked Americans. “This association of poverty
with progress is the great enigma of our times,” economist Henry George
wrote in his 1879 bestseller, Progress and Poverty.8
The great financial and industrial titans, the so-called robber barons,
including railroad operators such as Cornelius Vanderbilt, oilmen such
as J. D. Rockefeller, steel magnates such as Andrew Carnegie, and bank-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r 7

ers such as J. P. Morgan, won fortunes that, adjusted for inflation, arestill among the largest the nation has ever seen. According to various
measurements, in 1890 the wealthiest 1 percent of Americans owned one
fourth of the nation’s assets; the top 10 percent owned over 70 percent.
And inequality only accelerated. By 1900, the richest 10 percent controlled perhaps 90 percent of the nation’s wealth.9
As these vast and unprecedented new fortunes accumulated amonga small number of wealthy Americans, new ideas arose to bestow moral
legitimacy upon them. In 1859, British naturalist Charles Darwin published his theory of evolution through natural selection in his On theOrigin of Species. It was not until the 1870s, however, that those theories gained widespread traction among biologists, naturalists, and otherscientists in the United States and, in turn, challenged the social, political, and religious beliefs of many Americans. One of Darwin’s greatest
popularizers, the British sociologist and biologist Herbert Spencer, applied Darwin’s theories to society and popularized the phrase survivalof the fittest. The fittest, Spencer said, would demonstrate their superiority through economic success, while state welfare and private charity
would lead to social degeneration—it would encourage the survival of
the weak.10“There must be complete surrender to the law of natural selection,”the Baltimore Sun journalist H. L. Mencken wrote in 1907. “All growthmust occur at the top. The strong must grow stronger, and that they may

Vanderbilt
mansion, The
Breakers. Newport, Rhode
Island, c. 1904.
Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

8 chapter 16“Five Cents aSpot”: unauthorized immigrantlodgings in a
Bayard Street tenement. New York
City, c. 1890. Library of Congress.

do so, they must waste no strength in the vain task of trying to uplift the
weak.”11 By the time Mencken wrote those words, the ideas of social
Darwinism had spread among wealthy Americans and their defenders.
Social Darwinism identified a natural order that extended from the lawsof the cosmos to the workings of industrial society. All species and allsocieties, including modern humans, the theory went, were governed bya relentless competitive struggle for survival. The inequality of outcomes
was to be not merely tolerated but encouraged and celebrated. It signified
the progress of species and societies. Spencer’s major work, Synthetic Philosophy, sold nearly four hundred thousand copies in the United Statesby the time of his death in 1903. Gilded Age industrial elites, such as steel
magnate Andrew Carnegie, inventor Thomas Edison, and Standard Oil’s
John D. Rockefeller, were among Spencer’s prominent followers. Other
American thinkers, such as Yale’s William Graham Sumner, echoed his
ideas. Sumner said, “Before the tribunal of nature a man has no more
right to life than a rattlesnake; he has no more right to liberty than any
wild beast; his right to pursuit of happiness is nothing but a license tomaintain the struggle for existence.”12
But not all so eagerly welcomed inequalities. The spectacular growthof the U.S. economy and the ensuing inequalities in living conditions andincomes confounded many Americans. But as industrial capitalism overtook the nation, it achieved political protections. Although both major
political parties facilitated the rise of big business and used state power to© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r 9

support the interests of capital against labor, big business looked primarily to the Republican Party.
The Republican Party had risen as an antislavery faction committed
to “free labor,” but it was also an ardent supporter of American business.
Abraham Lincoln had been a corporate lawyer who defended railroads,
and during the Civil War the Republican national government took advantage of the wartime absence of southern Democrats to push through a
pro-business agenda. The Republican congress gave millions of acres anddollars to railroad companies. Republicans became the party of business,and they dominated American politics throughout the Gilded Age andthe first several decades of the twentieth century. Of the sixteen presidential elections between the Civil War and the Great Depression, Republican candidates won all but four. Republicans controlled the Senate intwenty-seven out of thirty-two sessions in the same period. Republican
dominance maintained a high protective tariff, an import tax designed
to shield American businesses from foreign competition; southern planters had vehemently opposed this policy before the war but now could
do nothing to prevent. It provided the protective foundation for a new
American industrial order, while Spencer’s social Darwinism provided
moral justification for national policies that minimized government interference in the economy for anything other than the protection andsupport of business.

IV. The Labor Movement
The ideas of social Darwinism attracted little support among the massof American industrial laborers. American workers toiled in difficult
jobs for long hours and little pay. Mechanization and mass production
threw skilled laborers into unskilled positions. Industrial work ebbed andflowed with the economy. The typical industrial laborer could expect tobe unemployed one month out of the year. They labored sixty hours aweek and could still expect their annual income to fall below the poverty
line. Among the working poor, wives and children were forced into thelabor market to compensate. Crowded cities, meanwhile, failed to accommodate growing urban populations and skyrocketing rents trappedfamilies in crowded slums.
Strikes ruptured American industry throughout the late nineteenth andearly twentieth centuries. Workers seeking higher wages, shorter hours,
and safer working conditions had struck throughout the a­ ntebellum era,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

1 0 chapter 16

The Lawrence
textile strike,
1912. Library ofCongress.

but organized unions were fleeting and transitory. The Civil War andReconstruction seemed to briefly distract the nation from the plight oflabor, but the end of the sectional crisis and the explosive growth of big
business, unprecedented fortunes, and a vast industrial workforce in thelast quarter of the nineteenth century sparked the rise of a vast American
labor movement.
The failure of the Great Railroad Strike of 1877 convinced workersof the need to organize. Union memberships began to climb. The Knights
of Labor enjoyed considerable success in the early 1880s, due in part toits efforts to unite skilled and unskilled workers. It welcomed all laborers, including women (the Knights only barred lawyers, bankers, andliquor dealers). By 1886, the Knights had over seven hundred thousand
members. The Knights envisioned a cooperative producer-centered society that rewarded labor, not capital, but, despite their sweeping vision,
the Knights focused on practical gains that could be won through theorganization of workers into local unions.13
In Marshall, Texas, in the spring of 1886, one of Jay Gould’s rail companies fired a Knights of Labor member for attending a union meeting. His
local union walked off the job, and soon others joined. From Texas andArkansas into Missouri, Kansas, and Illinois, nearly two hundred thousand workers struck against Gould’s rail lines. Gould hired strikebreakers
and the Pinkerton Detective Agency, a kind of private security contractor,
to suppress the strikes and get the rails moving again. Political leaders© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  11

An 1892 cover of Harper’s Weekly depicted
Pinkerton detectives, who had surrendered tosteel mill workers during the Homestead Strike,navigating a gauntlet of violent strikers. Libraryof Congress.

helped him, and state militias were called in support of Gould’s companies. The Texas governor called out the Texas Rangers. Workers countered by destroying property, only winning them negative headlines andfor many justifying the use of strikebreakers and militiamen. The strikebroke, briefly undermining the Knights of Labor, but the organization regrouped and set its eyes on a national campaign for the eight-hour day.14
In the summer of 1886, the campaign for an eight-hour day, longa rallying cry that united American laborers, culminated in a national
strike on May 1, 1886. Somewhere between three hundred thousand andfive hundred thousand workers struck across the country.
In Chicago, police forces killed several workers while breaking up
protesters at the McCormick reaper works. Labor leaders and radicals
called for a protest at Haymarket Square the following day, which police
also proceeded to break up. But as they did, a bomb exploded and killed
seven policemen. Police fired into the crowd, killing four. The deaths of
the Chicago policemen sparked outrage across the nation, and the sensationalization of the Haymarket Riot helped many Americans to associateunionism with radicalism. Eight Chicago anarchists were arrested and,despite no direct evidence implicating them in the bombing, were charged
and found guilty of conspiracy. Four were hanged (and one committed© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

1 2 chapter 16

suicide before he could be executed). Membership in the Knights had
peaked earlier that year but fell rapidly after Haymarket; the group became associated with violence and radicalism. The national movement
for an eight-hour day collapsed.15
The American Federation of Labor (AFL) emerged as a conservative
alternative to the vision of the Knights of Labor. An alliance of craft
unions (unions composed of skilled workers), the AFL rejected theKnights’ expansive vision of a “producerist” economy and advocated“pure and simple trade unionism,” a program that aimed for practical
gains (higher wages, fewer hours, and safer conditions) through a conservative approach that tried to avoid strikes. But workers continued to
strike.
In 1892, the Amalgamated Association of Iron and Steel Workers
struck at one of Carnegie’s steel mills in Homestead, Pennsylvania. After
repeated wage cuts, workers shut the plant down and occupied the mill.
The plant’s operator, Henry Clay Frick, immediately called in hundreds
of Pinkerton detectives, but the steel workers fought back. The Pinkertons tried to land by river and were besieged by the striking steel workers.
After several hours of pitched battle, the Pinkertons surrendered, ran abloody gauntlet of workers, and were kicked out of the mill grounds. But
the Pennsylvania governor called the state militia, broke the strike, andreopened the mill. The union was essentially destroyed in the aftermath.16
Still, despite repeated failure, strikes continued to roll across the industrial landscape. In 1894, workers in George Pullman’s Pullman car
factories struck when he cut wages by a quarter but kept rents and utilities in his company town constant. The American Railway Union (ARU),
led by Eugene Debs, launched a sympathy strike: the ARU would refuse
to handle any Pullman cars on any rail line anywhere in the country.
Thousands of workers struck and national railroad traffic ground to a
halt. Unlike in nearly every other major strike, the governor of Illinois
sympathized with workers and refused to dispatch the state militia. It
didn’t matter. In July, President Grover Cleveland dispatched thousandsof American soldiers to break the strike, and a federal court issued a preemptive injunction against Debs and the union’s leadership. The strikeviolated the injunction, and Debs was arrested and imprisoned. The
strike evaporated without its leadership. Jail radicalized Debs, proving
to him that political and judicial leaders were merely tools for capital in
its struggle against labor.17 But it wasn’t just Debs. In 1905, the degrading conditions of industrial labor sparked strikes across the country. The© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  13

final two decades of the nineteenth century saw over twenty thousand
strikes and lockouts in the United States. Industrial laborers struggled
to carve for themselves a piece of the prosperity lifting investors and a
rapidly expanding middle class into unprecedented standards of living.
But workers were not the only ones struggling to stay afloat in industrial
America. American farmers also lashed out against the inequalities of the
Gilded Age and denounced political corruption for enabling economic
theft.

Two female strikers picket during
the Uprising of
the 20,000 in
New York City in
1910. Library ofCongress.

V. The Populist Movement“Wall Street owns the country,” the Populist leader Mary Elizabeth Lease
told dispossessed farmers around 1890. “It is no longer a government of
the people, by the people, and for the people, but a government of WallStreet, by Wall Street, and for Wall Street.” Farmers, who remained a majority of the American population through the first decade of the twentieth century, were hit especially hard by industrialization. The expanding
markets and technological improvements that increased efficiency also decreased commodity prices. Commercialization of ­agriculture put ­farmers© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

1 4 chapter 16

in the hands of bankers, railroads, and various economic intermediaries.
As the decades passed, more and more farmers fell ever further into debt,
lost their land, and were forced to enter the industrial workforce or, especially in the South, became landless farmworkers.
The rise of industrial giants reshaped the American countryside andthe Americans who called it home. Railroad spur lines, telegraph lines,
and credit crept into farming communities and linked rural Americans,
who still made up a majority of the country’s population, with towns,
regional cities, American financial centers in Chicago and New York,
and, eventually, London and the world’s financial markets. Meanwhile,
improved farm machinery, easy credit, and the latest consumer goods
flooded the countryside. But new connections and new conveniencescame at a price.
Farmers had always been dependent on the whims of the weather andlocal markets. But now they staked their financial security on a national
economic system subject to rapid price swings, rampant speculation, andlimited regulation. Frustrated American farmers attempted to reshape thefundamental structures of the nation’s political and economic systems,
systems they believed enriched parasitic bankers and industrial monopolists at the expense of the many laboring farmers who fed the nation by
producing its many crops and farm goods. Their dissatisfaction with anerratic and impersonal system put many of them at the forefront of what
would become perhaps the most serious challenge to the established political economy of Gilded Age America. Farmers organized and launchedtheir challenge first through the cooperatives of the Farmers’ Alliance andlater through the politics of the People’s (or Populist) Party.
Mass production and business consolidations spawned giant corporations that monopolized nearly every sector of the U.S. economy in
the decades after the Civil War. In contrast, the economic power of theindividual farmer sank into oblivion. Threatened by ever-plummeting
commodity prices and ever-rising indebtedness, Texas agrarians met in
Lampasas, Texas, in 1877 and organized the first Farmers’ Alliance torestore some economic power to farmers as they dealt with railroads,
merchants, and bankers. If big business relied on its numerical strength
to exert its economic will, why shouldn’t farmers unite to counter thatpower? They could share machinery, bargain from wholesalers, and negotiate higher prices for their crops. Over the following years, organizers
spread from town to town across the former Confederacy, the Midwest,
and the Great Plains, holding evangelical-style camp meetings, distribut-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  15

ing pamphlets, and establishing over one thousand alliance newspapers.
As the alliance spread, so too did its near-religious vision of the nation’s
future as a “cooperative commonwealth” that would protect the interests of the many from the predatory greed of the few. At its peak, theFarmers’ Alliance claimed 1,500,000 members meeting in 40,000 local
sub-alliances.18
The alliance’s most innovative programs were a series of farmers’ cooperatives that enabled farmers to negotiate higher prices for their crops
and lower prices for the goods they purchased. These cooperatives spread
across the South between 1886 and 1892 and claimed more than a million
members at their high point. While most failed financially, these “philanthropic monopolies,” as one alliance speaker termed them, inspired
farmers to look to large-scale organization to cope with their economic
difficulties.19 But cooperation was only part of the alliance message.
In the South, alliance-backed Democratic candidates won four governorships and forty-eight congressional seats in 1890.20 But at a time
when falling prices and rising debts conspired against the survival of family farmers, the two political parties seemed incapable of representing theneeds of poor farmers. And so alliance members organized a politicalparty—the People’s Party, or the Populists, as they came to be known.

The banner ofthe first Texas
Farmers’ Alliance. Source: N.
A. Dunning (ed.),
Farmers’ Alliance
History and Agricultural Digest(Washington, DC:
Alliance Publishing Co., 1891), iv.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

1 6 chapter 16

The Populists attracted supporters across the nation by appealing tothose convinced that there were deep flaws in the political economy of
Gilded Age America, flaws that both political parties refused to address.
Veterans of earlier fights for currency reform, disaffected industrial laborers, proponents of the benevolent socialism of Edward Bellamy’s
popular Looking Backward, and the champions of Henry George’s
farmer-friendly “single-tax” proposal joined alliance members in the
new party. The Populists nominated former Civil War general James B.
Weaver as their presidential candidate at the party’s first national convention in Omaha, Nebraska, on July 4, 1892.21
At that meeting the party adopted a platform that crystallized thealliance’s cooperate program into a coherent political vision. The platform’s preamble, written by longtime political iconoclast and Minnesota
populist Ignatius Donnelly, warned that “the fruits of the toil of millions [had been] boldly stolen to build up colossal fortunes for a few.”22
Taken as a whole, the Omaha Platform and the larger Populist movement sought to counter the scale and power of monopolistic capitalismwith a strong, engaged, and modern federal government. The platform
proposed an unprecedented expansion of federal power. It advocated nationalizing the country’s railroad and telegraph systems to ensure thatessential services would be run in the best interests of the people. In an attempt to deal with the lack of currency available to farmers, it advocatedpostal savings banks to protect depositors and extend credit. It called forthe establishment of a network of federally managed warehouses—called­subtreasuries—which would extend government loans to farmers whostored crops in the warehouses as they awaited higher market prices. To
save debtors it promoted an inflationary monetary policy by monetizing silver. Direct election of senators and the secret ballot would ensurethat this federal government would serve the interest of the people rather
than entrenched partisan interests, and a graduated income tax would
protect Americans from the establishment of an American aristocracy.
Combined, these efforts would, Populists believed, help shift economic
and political power back toward the nation’s producing classes.
In the Populists’ first national election campaign in 1892, Weaver received over one million votes (and twenty-two electoral votes), a truly
startling performance that signaled a bright future for the Populists. And
when the Panic of 1893 sparked the worst economic depression the nation had ever yet seen, the Populist movement won further credibility
and gained even more ground. Kansas Populist Mary Lease, one of the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  17

movement’s most fervent speakers, famously, and perhaps apocryphally,called on farmers to “raise less corn and more Hell.” Populist stump
speakers crossed the country, speaking with righteous indignation, blaming the greed of business elites and corrupt party politicians for causing
the crisis fueling America’s widening inequality. Southern orators like
Texas’s James “Cyclone” Davis and Georgian firebrand Tom Watson
stumped across the South decrying the abuses of northern capitalists andthe Democratic Party. Pamphlets such as W. H. Harvey’s Coin’s Financial
School and Henry D. Lloyd’s Wealth Against Commonwealth provided
Populist answers to the age’s many perceived problems. The faltering
economy combined with the Populist’s extensive organizing. In the 1894
elections, Populists elected six senators and seven representatives to Congress. The third party seemed destined to conquer American politics.23
The movement, however, still faced substantial obstacles, especiallyin the South. The failure of alliance-backed Democrats to live up to theircampaign promises drove some southerners to break with the party of
their forefathers and join the Populists. Many, however, were unwillingto take what was, for southerners, a radical step. Southern Democrats,
for their part, responded to the Populist challenge with electoral fraud
and racial demagoguery. Both severely limited Populist gains. The alliance struggled to balance the pervasive white supremacy of the American
South with their call for a grand union of the producing class. American
racial attitudes—and their virulent southern strain—simply proved too
formidable. Democrats race-baited Populists, and Populists capitulated.
The Colored Farmers’ Alliance, which had formed as a segregated sisterorganization to the southern alliance and had as many as 250,000 members at its peak, fell prey to racial and class-based hostility. The groupwent into rapid decline in 1891 when faced with the violent white repression of a number of Colored Farmers’ Alliance–sponsored cotton picker
strikes. Racial mistrust and division remained the rule, even among Populists, and even in North Carolina, where a political marriage of convenience between Populists and Republicans resulted in the election ofPopulist Marion Butler to the Senate. Populists opposed Democratic corruption, but this did not necessarily make them champions of interracial
democracy. As Butler explained to an audience in Edgecombe County,“We are in favor of white supremacy, but we are not in favor of cheating
and fraud to get it.”24 In fact, across much of the South, Populists andFarmers’ Alliance members were often at the forefront of the movementfor disfranchisement and segregation.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

1 8 chapter 16

Populism exploded in popularity. The first major political force totap into the vast discomfort of many Americans with the disruptions
wrought by industrial capitalism, the Populist Party seemed poise to capture political victory. And yet, even as Populism gained national traction,
the movement was stumbling. The party’s often divided leadership foundit difficult to shepherd what remained a diverse and loosely organized coalition of reformers toward unified political action. The Omaha platform
was a radical document, and some state party leaders selectively embraced its reforms. More importantly, the institutionalized parties werestill too strong, and the Democrats loomed, ready to swallow Populist
frustrations and inaugurate a new era of American politics.

VI. William Jennings Bryan and the Politics of Gold

William Jennings
Bryan, 1896. Library of Congress.

William Jennings Bryan (March 19, 1860–July 26, 1925) accomplishedmany different things in his life: he was a skilled orator, a Nebraska congressman, a three-time presidential candidate, U.S. secretary of state underWoodrow Wilson, and a lawyer who supported prohibition and opposed
Darwinism (most notably in the 1925 Scopes Monkey Trial). In terms of
his political career, he won national renown for his attack on the gold standard and his tireless promotion of free silver and policies for the benefit of
the average American. Although Bryan was unsuccessful in winning thepresidency, he forever altered the course of American political history.25© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  19

Bryan was born in Salem, Illinois, in 1860 to a devout family with astrong passion for law, politics, and public speaking. At twenty, he attended Union Law College in Chicago and passed the bar shortly thereafter. After his marriage to Mary Baird in Illinois, Bryan and his young
family relocated to Nebraska, where he won a reputation among thestate’s Democratic Party leaders as an extraordinary orator. Bryan later
won recognition as one of the greatest speakers in American history.
When economic depressions struck the Midwest in the late 1880s,
despairing farmers faced low crop prices and found few politicians on
their side. While many rallied to the Populist cause, Bryan worked fromwithin the Democratic Party, using the strength of his oratory. Afterdelivering one speech, he told his wife, “Last night I found that I had apower over the audience. I could move them as I chose. I have more thanusual power as a speaker. . . . God grant that I may use it wisely.”26 He
soon won election to the Nebraska House of Representatives, where heserved for two terms. Although he lost a bid to join the Nebraska Senate, Bryan refocused on a much higher political position: the presidencyof the United States. There, he believed he could change the country
by defending farmers and urban laborers against the corruptions of big
business.
In 1895–1896, Bryan launched a national speaking tour in which
he promoted the free coinage of silver. He believed that bimetallism, by
inflating American currency, could alleviate farmers’ debts. In contrast,
Republicans championed the gold standard and a flat money supply.
American monetary standards became a leading campaign issue. Then,in July 1896, the Democratic Party’s national convention met to choose
their presidential nominee in the upcoming election. The party platform
asserted that the gold standard was “not only un-American but antiAmerican.” Bryan spoke last at the convention. He astounded his listeners. At the conclusion of his stirring speech, he declared, “Having behind
us the commercial interests and the laboring interests and all the toiling
masses, we shall answer their demands for a gold standard by saying tothem, you shall not press down upon the brow of labor this crown ofthorns. You shall not crucify mankind upon a cross of gold.”27 After a
few seconds of stunned silence, the convention went wild. Some wept,
many shouted, and the band began to play “For He’s a Jolly Good Fellow.” Bryan received the 1896 Democratic presidential nomination.
The Republicans ran William McKinley, an economic conservative who championed business interests and the gold standard. Bryancrisscrossed the country spreading the silver gospel. The election drew© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 0 chapter 16

Conservative William McKinley promised prosperity for ordinary Americans through his “sound money”
initiative during his election campaigns in 1896 and again in 1900. This election poster touts McKinley’s
gold standard policy as bringing “Prosperity at Home, Prestige Abroad.” Library of Congress.

enormous attention and much emotion. According to Bryan’s wife, he­received two thousand letters of support every day that year, an enormous amount for any politician, let alone one not currently in office.
Yet Bryan could not defeat McKinley. The pro-business Republicans
outspent Bryan’s campaign fivefold. A notably high 79.3 percent of eligible American voters cast ballots, and turnout averaged 90 percent inareas supportive of Bryan, but Republicans swayed the population-dense
Northeast and Great Lakes region and stymied the Democrats.28
In early 1900, Congress passed the Gold Standard Act, which put
the country on the gold standard, effectively ending the debate over thenation’s monetary policy. Bryan sought the presidency again in 1900 but
was again defeated, as he would be yet again in 1908.
Bryan was among the most influential losers in American political history. When the agrarian wing of the Democratic Party nominated the Nebraska congressman in 1896, Bryan’s fiery condemnation of northeastern
financial interests and his impassioned calls for “free and unlimited coinage of silver” co-opted popular Populist issues. The Democrats stood
ready to siphon off a large proportion of the Populists’ political support.
When the People’s Party held its own convention two weeks later, the party’s moderate wing, in a fiercely contested move, overrode the objections© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  21

William Jennings Bryan espoused many Populist positions while working within the two-party system as a
Democrat. Republicans argued that the Democratic Party was now a radical faction of Populists. The proRepublican magazine Judge showed Bryan (Populism) as a huge serpent swallowing a bucking mule (theDemocratic party). 1896. Wikimedia.

of more ideologically pure Populists and nominated Bryan as the Populist
candidate as well. This strategy of temporary “fusion” movement fatally
fractured the movement and the party. Populist energy moved from theradical-yet-still-weak People’s Party to the more moderate-yet-powerful
Democratic Party. And although at first glance the Populist movement
appears to have been a failure—its minor electoral gains were short-lived,
it did little to dislodge the entrenched two-party system, and the Populist
dream of a cooperative commonwealth never took shape—in terms oflasting impact, the Populist Party proved the most significant third-party
movement in American history. The agrarian revolt established the rootsof later reform, and the majority of policies outlined within the Omaha
Platform would eventually be put into law over the following decades
under the management of middle-class reformers. In large measure, thePopulist vision laid the intellectual groundwork for the coming progressive movement.29© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 2 chapter 16

VII. The Socialists

American socialist
leader Eugene
Victor Debs,
1912. Library ofCongress.

American socialists carried on the Populists’ radical tradition by uniting
farmers and workers in a sustained, decades-long political struggle to reorder American economic life. Socialists argued that wealth and power
were consolidated in the hands of too few individuals, that monopolies
and trusts controlled too much of the economy, and that owners andinvestors grew rich while the workers who produced their wealth, despite massive productivity gains and rising national wealth, still sufferedfrom low pay, long hours, and unsafe working conditions. Karl Marx
had described the new industrial economy as a worldwide class struggle
between the wealthy bourgeoisie, who owned the means of production,such as factories and farms, and the proletariat, factory workers andtenant farmers who worked only for the wealth of others. According to
Eugene Debs, socialists sought “the overthrow of the capitalist systemand the emancipation of the working class from wage slavery.”30 Under
an imagined socialist cooperative commonwealth, the means of production would be owned collectively, ensuring that all men and women
received a fair wage for their labor. According to socialist organizer andnewspaper editor Oscar Ameringer, socialists wanted “ownership of thetrust by the government, and the ownership of the government by thepeople.”31
The socialist movement drew from a diverse constituency. Party
membership was open to all regardless of race, gender, class, ethnicity, or© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  23

religion. Many prominent Americans, such as Helen Keller, Upton Sinclair, and Jack London, became socialists. They were joined by masses ofAmerican laborers from across the United States: factory workers, miners, railroad builders, tenant farmers, and small farmers all united under
the red flag of socialism. Many united with labor leader William D. “BigBill” Haywood and other radicals in 1905 to form the Industrial Workers of the World (IWW), the “Wobblies,” a radical and confrontational
union that welcomed all workers, regardless of race or gender.32 Others
turned to politics.
The Socialist Party of America (SPA), founded in 1901, carried on theAmerican third-party political tradition. Socialist mayors were elected inthirty-three cities and towns, from Berkeley, California, to Schenectady,
New York, and two socialists—Victor Berger from Wisconsin and Meyer
London from New York—won congressional seats. All told, over one
thousand socialist candidates won various American political offices. Julius A. Wayland, editor of the socialist newspaper Appeal to Reason,proclaimed that “socialism is coming. It’s coming like a prairie fire andnothing can stop it . . . you can feel it in the air.”33 By 1913 there were150,000 members of the Socialist Party and, in 1912, Eugene V. Debs,
the Indiana-born Socialist Party candidate for president, received almost
one million votes, or 6 percent of the total.34
Over the following years, however, the embrace of many socialist
policies by progressive reformers, internal ideological and tactical disagreements, a failure to dissuade most Americans of the perceived incompatibility between socialism and American values, and, especially,
government oppression and censorship, particularly during and afterWorld War I, ultimately sank the party. Like the Populists, however, socialists had tapped into a deep well of discontent, and their energy andorganizing filtered out into American culture and American politics.

VIII. Conclusion
The march of capital transformed patterns of American life. While someenjoyed unprecedented levels of wealth, and an ever-growing slice of
middle-class workers won an ever more comfortable standard of living,
vast numbers of farmers lost their land and a growing industrial working
class struggled to earn wages sufficient to support themselves and theirfamilies. Industrial capitalism brought wealth and it brought poverty;
it created owners and investors and it created employees. But whether© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 4 chapter 16­ inners or losers in the new economy, all Americans reckoned in somew
way with their new industrial world.

IX. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Joseph Locke, with content contributions by Andrew
C. Baker, Nicholas Blood, Justin Clark, Dan Du, Caroline Bunnell Harris, David
Hochfelder Scott Libson, Joseph Locke, Leah Richier, Matthew Simmons, Kate
Sohasky, Joseph Super, and Kaylynn Washnock.
Recommended citation: Andrew C. Baker et al., “Capital and Labor,” Joseph
Locke, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford,
CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N o t e s t o C h a p t e r 16
1. David T. Burbank, Reign of the Rabble: The St. Louis General Strike of
1877 (New York: Kelley, 1966), 11.
2. Robert V. Bruce, 1877: Year of Violence (New York: Dee, 1957); Philip
S. Foner, The Great Labor Uprising of 1877 (New York: Monad Press, 1977);
David Omar Stowell, ed., The Great Strikes of 1877 (Champaign: University of
Illinois Press, 2008).
3. Alfred D. Chandler Jr., The Visible Hand: The Managerial Revolution in
American Business (Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press, 1977); David A. Hounshell,
From the American System to Mass Production, 1800–1932 (Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1984).
4. Hounshell, From the American System, 153–188.
5. Alfred D. Chandler Jr., Scale and Scope: The Dynamics of Industrial Capitalism (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1990), 52.
6. Chandler, Visible Hand.
7. Naomi R. Lamoreaux, The Great Merger Movement in American Business, 1895–1904 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1985).
8. See especially Edward O’Donnell, Henry George and the Crisis of Inequality: Progress and Poverty in the Gilded Age (New York: Columbia University Press, 2015), 41–45.
9. Michael McGerr, A Fierce Discontent: The Rise and Fall of the Progressive Movement in America, 1870–1920 (New York: Free Press, 2003).
10. Richard Hofstadter, Social Darwinism in American Thought (Boston:
Beacon Books, 1955).
11. Henry Louis Mencken, The Philosophy of Friedrich Nietzsche (Boston:Luce, 1908), 102–103.
12. William Graham Sumner, Earth-Hunger, and Other Essays, ed. Albert
Galloway Keller (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1913), 234.
13. Leon Fink, Workingmen’s Democracy: The Knights of Labor and American Politics (Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1983).
14. Ruth A. Allen, The Great Southwest Strike (Austin: University of Texas
Press, 1942).

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  25

15. James R. Green, Death in the Haymarket: A Story of Chicago, the First
Labor Movement and the Bombing That Divided Gilded Age America. New
York: Pantheon Books, 2006.
16. Paul Krause, The Battle for Homestead, 1890–1892: Politics, Culture,and Steel (Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1992).
17. Almont Lindsey, The Pullman Strike: The Story of a Unique Experimentand of a Great Labor Upheaval (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1943).
18. Historians of the Populists have produced a large number of excellent
histories. See especially Lawrence Goodwyn, Democratic Promise: The Populist
Moment in America (New York: Oxford University Press, 1976); and Charles
Postel, The Populist Vision (New York: Oxford University Press, 2009).
19. Lawrence Goodwyn argued that the Populists’ “cooperative vision” wasthe central element in their hopes of a “democratic economy.” Goodwyn, Democratic Promise, 54.
20. John Donald Hicks, The Populist Revolt: A History of the Farmers’ Allianceand the People’s Party (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1931), 178.
21. Ibid., 236.
22. Edward McPherson, A Handbook of Politics for 1892 (Washington, DC:
Chapman, 1892), 269.
23. Hicks, Populist Revolt, 321–339.
24. Postel, Populist Vision, 197.
25. For William Jennings Bryan, see especially Michael Kazin, A Godly
Hero: The Life of William Jennings Bryan (New York: Knopf, 2006).
26. Ibid., 25.
27. Richard Franklin Bensel, Passion and Preferences: William Jennings
Bryan and the 1896 Democratic Convention (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2008), 232.
28. Lyn Ragsdale, Vital Statistics on the Presidency (Washington, DC: Congressional Quarterly Press, 1998), 132–138.
29. Elizabeth Sanders, The Roots of Reform: Farmers, Workers, and theAmerican State, 1877–1917 (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999).
30. Eugene V. Debs, “The Socialist Party and the Working Class,” International Socialist Review (September 1904).
31. Oscar Ameringer, Socialism: What It Is and How to Get It (Milwaukee,
WI: Political Action, 1911), 31.
32. Philip S. Foner, The Industrial Workers of the World 1905–1917 (NewYork: International Publishers, 1965).
33. R. Laurence Moore, European Socialists and the American Promised
Land (New York: Oxford University Press, 1970), 214.
34. Nick Salvatore, Eugene V. Debs, Citizen and Socialist (Chicago: University of Illinois Press, 1983).
R e c omm e n d e d R e a d i n g
Beckert, Sven. Monied Metropolis: New York City and the Consolidation of theAmerican Bourgeoisie, 1850–1896. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press, 2001.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 6 chapter 16

Benson, Susan Porter. Counter Cultures: Saleswomen, Managers, and Customers
in American Department Stores, 1890–1940. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1986.
Cameron, Ardis. Radicals of the Worst Sort: Laboring Women in Lawrence,
Massachusetts, 1860–1912. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1993.
Chambers, John W. The Tyranny of Change: America in the Progressive Era,
1890–1920, 2nd ed. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press, 2000.
Chandler, Alfred D., Jr., The Visible Hand: The Managerial Revolution in American Business. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press, 1977.
Chandler, Alfred D., Jr. Scale and Scope: The Dynamics of Industrial Capitalism.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1990.
Cronon, William. Nature’s Metropolis: Chicago and the Great West. New York:
Norton, 1991.
Edwards, Rebecca. New Spirits: Americans in the Gilded Age, 1865–1905. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Enstad, Nan. Ladies of Labor, Girls of Adventure: Working Women, Popular
Culture, and Labor Politics at the Turn of the Twentieth Century. New York:
Columbia University Press, 1999.
Fink, Leon. Workingmen’s Democracy: The Knights of Labor and American Politics. Chicago: University of Illinois Press, 1993.
Goodwyn, Lawrence. Democratic Promise: The Populist Moment in America.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1976.
Green, James. Death in the Haymarket: A Story of Chicago, the First Labor
Movement, and the Bombing That Divided Gilded Age America. New York
City: Pantheon Books, 2006.
Greene, Julie. Pure and Simple Politics: The American Federation of Labor andPolitical Activism, 1881–1917. New York: Cambridge University Press,
1998.
Hofstadter, Richard. Social Darwinism in American Thought. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1944.
Johnson, Kimberley S. Governing the American State: Congress and the New
Federalism, 1877–1929. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2006.
Kazin, Michael. A Godly Hero: The Life of William Jennings Bryan. New York:
Knopf, 2006.
Kessler-Harris, Alice. Out to Work: A History of Wage-Earning Women in the
United States. New York: Oxford University Press, 1982.
Krause, Paul. The Battle for Homestead, 1880–1892: Politics, Culture, and Steel.
Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1992.
Lamoreaux, Naomi R. The Great Merger Movement in American Business,
1895–1904. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1985.
McMath, Robert C., Jr. American Populism: A Social History, 1877–1898. New
York: Hill and Wang, 1993.
Montgomery, David. The Fall of the House of Labor: The Workplace, the State,
and American Labor Activism, 1865–1925. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1988.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C a p i t a l a n d L a bo r  27

Painter, Nell Irvin. Standing at Armageddon: The United States, 1877–1919.
New York: Norton, 1987.
Postel, Charles. The Populist Vision. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009.
Sanders, Elizabeth. Roots of Reform: Farmers, Workers, and the American State,
1877–1917. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999.
Trachtenberg, Alan. The Incorporation of America: Culture and Society in the
Gilded Age. New York: Hill and Wang, 1982.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

17
Conquering the West
I. Introduction
Native Americans long dominated the vastness of the American West.
Linked culturally and geographically by trade, travel, and warfare, various indigenous groups controlled most of the continent west of the Mississippi River deep into the nineteenth century. Spanish, French, British,and later American traders had integrated themselves into many regional
economies, and American emigrants pushed ever westward, but no imperial power had yet achieved anything approximating political or militarycontrol over the great bulk of the continent. But then the Civil War cameand went and decoupled the West from the question of slavery just as
the United States industrialized and laid down rails and pushed its everexpanding population ever farther west.
Indigenous Americans had lived in North America for over ten millennia and, into the late nineteenth century, perhaps as many as 250,000
Natives still inhabited the American West.1 But then unending waves ofAmerican settlers, the American military, and the unstoppable onrush

Edward S. Curtis,
Navajo Riders in
Canyon de Chelly,c. 1904. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  29

of American capital conquered all. The United States removed Native
groups to ever-shrinking reservations, incorporated the West first as territories and then as states, and, for the first time in its history, controlled
the enormity of land between the two oceans.
The history of the late-nineteenth-century West is many-sided. Tragedy for some, triumph for others, the many intertwined histories of theAmerican West marked a pivotal transformation in the history of theUnited States.

II. Post–Civil War Westward Migration
In the decades after the Civil War, Americans poured across the Mississippi River in record numbers. No longer simply crossing over the continent for new imagined Edens in California or Oregon, they settled now
in the vast heart of the continent.
Many of the first American migrants had come to the West in searchof quick profits during the midcentury gold and silver rushes. As in the
California rush of 1848–1849, droves of prospectors poured in after
precious-metal strikes in Colorado in 1858, Nevada in 1859, Idaho in
1860, Montana in 1863, and the Black Hills in 1874. While women often
performed housework that allowed mining families to subsist in often
difficult conditions, a significant portion of the mining workforce were
single men without families dependent on service industries in nearby
towns and cities. There, working-class women worked in shops, saloons,boardinghouses, and brothels. Many of these ancillary operations profited from the mining boom: as failed prospectors found, the rush itself
often generated more wealth than the mines. The gold that left Colorado in the first seven years after the Pikes Peak gold strike—estimated at$25.5 million—was, for instance, less than half of what outside parties
had invested in the fever. The 100,000-plus migrants who settled in the
Rocky Mountains were ultimately more valuable to the region’s development than the gold they came to find.2
Others came to the Plains to extract the hides of the great bison
herds. Millions of animals had roamed the Plains, but their tough leather
supplied industrial belting in eastern factories and raw material for thebooming clothing industry. Specialized teams took down and skinned
the herds. The infamous American bison slaughter peaked in the early
1870s. The number of American bison plummeted from over ten million
at midcentury to only a few hundred by the early 1880s. The expansion© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 0 chapter 17

While bison leather supplied America’s booming clothing industry, the skulls of the animals provided a key
ingredient in fertilizer. This 1870s photograph illustrates the massive number of bison killed in the second
half of the nineteenth century. Wikimedia.

of the railroads allowed ranching to replace the bison with cattle on theAmerican grasslands.3
The nearly seventy thousand members of the Church of Jesus Christof Latter-Day Saints (more commonly called Mormons) who migrated
west between 1846 and 1868 were similar to other Americans travelingwest on the overland trails. They faced many of the same problems, but
unlike most other American migrants, Mormons were fleeing from religious persecution.
Many historians view Mormonism as a “uniquely American faith,”
not just because it was founded by Joseph Smith in New York in the
1830s, but because of its optimistic and future-oriented tenets. Mormons
believed that Americans were exceptional—chosen by God to spread
truth across the world and to build utopia, a New Jerusalem in North
America. However, many Americans were suspicious of the Latter-Day© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  31

Saint movement and its unusual rituals, especially the practice of polygamy, and most Mormons found it difficult to practice their faith in theeastern United States. Thus began a series of migrations in the midnineteenth century, first to Illinois, then Missouri and Nebraska, and finally
into Utah Territory.
Once in the west, Mormon settlements served as important supply points for other emigrants heading on to California and Oregon.
Brigham Young, the leader of the Church after the death of Joseph Smith,
was appointed governor of the Utah Territory by the federal government
in 1850. He encouraged Mormon residents of the territory to engage in
agricultural pursuits and be cautious of the outsiders who arrived as themining and railroad industries developed in the region.4
It was land, ultimately, that drew the most migrants to the West.
Family farms were the backbone of the agricultural economy that expanded in the West after the Civil War. In 1862, northerners in Congress
passed the Homestead Act, which allowed male citizens (or those who
declared their intent to become citizens) to claim federally owned landsin the West. Settlers could head west, choose a 160-acre surveyed sectionof land, file a claim, and begin “improving” the land by plowing fields,
building houses and barns, or digging wells, and, after five years of livingon the land, could apply for the official title deed to the land. Hundredsof thousands of Americans used the Homestead Act to acquire land. The
treeless plains that had been considered unfit for settlement became the
new agricultural mecca for land-hungry Americans.5
The Homestead Act excluded married women from filing claims because they were considered the legal dependents of their husbands. Some
unmarried women filed claims on their own, but single farmers (male orfemale) were hard-pressed to run a farm and they were a small minority. Most farm households adopted traditional divisions of labor: men
worked in the fields and women managed the home and kept the family
fed. Both were essential.6
Migrants sometimes found in homesteads a self-sufficiency denied athome. Second or third sons who did not inherit land in Scandinavia, forinstance, founded farm communities in Minnesota, Dakota, and other
Midwestern territories in the 1860s. Boosters encouraged emigration by
advertising the semiarid Plains as, for instance, “a flowery meadow ofgreat fertility clothed in nutritious grasses, and watered by numerous
streams.”7 Western populations exploded. The Plains were transformed.
In 1860, for example, Kansas had about 10,000 farms; in 1880 it had© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 2 chapter 17

239,000. Texas saw enormous population growth. The federal government counted 200,000 people in Texas in 1850, 1,600,000 in 1880, and
3,000,000 in 1900, making it the sixth most populous state in the nation.

III. The Indian Wars and Federal Peace Policies
The “Indian wars,” so mythologized in western folklore, were a seriesof sporadic, localized, and often brief engagements between U.S. military forces and various Native American groups. The more sustained
and more impactful conflict, meanwhile, was economic and cultural.
The vast and cyclical movement across the Great Plains to hunt buffalo,
raid enemies, and trade goods was incompatible with new patterns ofAmerican settlement and railroad construction. Thomas Jefferson’s old
dream that Indian groups might live isolated in the West was, in the faceof American expansion, no longer a viable reality. Political, economic,
and even humanitarian concerns intensified American efforts to isolate
Indians on reservations. Although Indian removal had long been a partof federal Indian policy, following the Civil War the U.S. government
redoubled its efforts. If treaties and other forms of persistent coercion
would not work, more drastic measures were deemed necessary. Against
the threat of confinement and the extinction of traditional ways of life,
Native Americans battled the American army and the encroaching linesof American settlement.
In one of the earliest western engagements, in 1862, while the Civil
War still consumed the nation, tensions erupted between Dakota Sioux
and white settlers in Minnesota and the Dakota Territory. The 1850 U.S.
census recorded a white population of about 6,000 in Minnesota; eight
years later, when it became a state, it was more than 150,000.8 The influxof American farmers pushed the Sioux to the breaking point. Hunting
became unsustainable and those Sioux who had taken up farming foundonly poverty. Starvation wracked many. Then, on August 17, 1862, fouryoung men of the Santees, a Sioux tribe, killed five white settlers near
the Redwood Agency, an American administrative office. In the face ofan inevitable American retaliation, and over the protests of many members, the tribe chose war. On the following day, Sioux warriors attacked
settlements near the Agency. They killed thirty-one men, women, andchildren. They then ambushed a U.S. military detachment at Redwood
Ferry, killing twenty-three. The governor of Minnesota called up militia
and several thousand Americans waged war against the Sioux insurgents.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  33

Buffalo Soldiers, the nickname given to African American cavalrymen by the native Americans they fought,
were the first peacetime, all-black regiments in the regular U.S. Army. These soldiers regularly confronted
racial prejudice from civilians and other soldiers but were an essential part of American victories during theIndian Wars of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. 1890. Library of Congress.

Fighting broke out at New Ulm, Fort Ridgely, and Birch Coulee, but theAmericans broke the Indian resistance at the Battle of Wood Lake on
September 23, ending the so-called Dakota War, also known as the Sioux
Uprising.9
More than two thousand Sioux had been taken prisoner during thefighting. Many were tried at federal forts for murder, rape, and otheratrocities. Military tribunals convicted 303 Sioux and sentenced them tohang. At the last minute, President Lincoln commuted all but thirty eightof the sentences. Terrified Minnesota settlers and government officials insisted not only that the Sioux lose much of their reservation lands and beremoved farther west, but that those who had fled be hunted down andplaced on reservations as well. The American military gave chase and, on
September 3, 1863, after a year of attrition, American military units surrounded a large encampment of Dakota Sioux. American troops killed an
estimated three hundred men, women, and children. Dozens more weretaken prisoner. Troops spent the next two days burning winter food andsupply stores to starve out the Sioux resistance, which would continue
to smolder.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 4 chapter 17

Farther south, tensions flared in Colorado. In 1851, the Treaty of Fort
Laramie had secured right-of-way access for Americans passing throughon their way to California and Oregon. But a gold rush in 1858 drew
approximately 100,000 white gold seekers, and they demanded newtreaties be made with local Indian groups to secure land rights in the
newly created Colorado Territory. Cheyenne bands splintered over the
possibility of signing a new treaty that would confine them to a reservation. Settlers, already wary of raids by powerful groups of Cheyennes,
Arapahos, and Comanches, meanwhile read in their local newspapers
sensationalist accounts of the Sioux uprising in Minnesota. Militia leader
John M. Chivington warned settlers in the summer of 1864 that the
Cheyenne were dangerous savages, urged war, and promised a swift military victory. Sporadic fighting broke out. Although Chivington warnedof Cheyenne savagery, the aged Cheyenne chief Black Kettle, believingthat a peace treaty would be best for his people, traveled to Denver toarrange for peace talks. He and his followers traveled toward Fort Lyonin accordance with government instructions, but on November 29, 1864,
Chivington ordered his seven hundred militiamen to move on the Cheyenne camp near Fort Lyon at Sand Creek. The Cheyenne tried to declaretheir peaceful intentions but Chivington’s militia cut them down. It wasa slaughter. About two hundred men, women, and children were killed.10
The Sand Creek Massacre was a national scandal, alternately condemned and applauded. News of the massacre reached other Native
groups and the American frontier erupted into conflict. Americans
pushed for a new “peace policy.” Congress, confronted with these tragedies and further violence, authorized in 1868 the creation of an Indian
Peace Commission. The commission’s study of American Indians decriedprior American policy and galvanized support for reformers. After the inauguration of Ulysses S. Grant the following spring, Congress allied withprominent philanthropists to create the Board of Indian Commissioners,a permanent advisory body to oversee Indian affairs and prevent the further outbreak of violence. The board effectively Christianized American
Indian policy. Much of the reservation system was handed over to Protestant churches, which were tasked with finding agents and missionaries
to manage reservation life. Congress hoped that religiously minded men
might fare better at creating just assimilation policies and persuading
Indians to accept them. Historian Francis Paul Prucha believed that thisattempt at a new “peace policy . . . might just have properly been labelledthe ‘religious policy.’”11© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  35

Tom Torlino, a member of the Navajo Nation, entered the Carlisle Indian School, a Native Americanboarding school founded by the U.S. government in 1879, on October 21, 1882, and departed on August
28, 1886. Torlino’s student file contained photographs from 1882 and 1885. Carlisle Indian School Digital
Resource Center.

Many female Christian missionaries played a central role in cultural
reeducation programs that attempted to not only instill Protestant religion but also impose traditional American gender roles and family structures. They endeavored to replace Indians’ tribal social units with small,
patriarchal households. Women’s labor became a contentious issue because few tribes divided labor according to the gender norms of middleand upper-class Americans. Fieldwork, the traditional domain of whitemales, was primarily performed by Native women, who also usually controlled the products of their labor, if not the land that was worked, giving
them status in society as laborers and food providers. For missionaries,
the goal was to get Native women to leave the fields and engage in more
proper “women’s” work—housework. Christian missionaries performedmuch as secular federal agents had. Few American agents could meet
Native Americans on their own terms. Most viewed reservation Indians
as lazy and thought of Native cultures as inferior to their own. The viewsof J. L. Broaddus, appointed to oversee several small Indian tribes on
the Hoopa Valley reservation in California, are illustrative: in his annual
report to the Commissioner of Indian Affairs for 1875, he wrote, “Thegreat majority of them are idle, listless, careless, and improvident. They

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 6 chapter 17

seem to take no thought about provision for the future, and many ofthem would not work at all if they were not compelled to do so. They
would rather live upon the roots and acorns gathered by their womenthan to work for flour and beef.”12
If the Indians could not be forced through kindness to change theirways, most agreed that it was acceptable to use force, which Native
groups resisted. In Texas and the Southern Plains, the Comanche, theKiowa, and their allies had wielded enormous influence. The Comanche
in particular controlled huge swaths of territory and raided vast areas,
inspiring terror from the Rocky Mountains to the interior of northern
Mexico to the Texas Gulf Coast. But after the Civil War, the U.S. militaryrefocused its attention on the Southern Plains.
The American military first sent messengers to the Plains to find theelusive Comanche bands and ask them to come to peace negotiationsat Medicine Lodge Creek in the fall of 1867. But terms were muddled:
American officials believed that Comanche bands had accepted reservation life, while Comanche leaders believed they were guaranteed vastlands for buffalo hunting. Comanche bands used designated reservation
lands as a base from which to collect supplies and federal annuity goods
while continuing to hunt, trade, and raid American settlements in Texas.
Confronted with renewed Comanche raiding, particularly by the
famed war leader Quanah Parker, the U.S. military finally proclaimed
that all Indians who were not settled on the reservation by the fall of
1874 would be considered “hostile.” The Red River War began whenmany Comanche bands refused to resettle and the American military
launched expeditions into the Plains to subdue them, culminating in thedefeat of the remaining roaming bands in the canyonlands of the Texas
Panhandle. Cold and hungry, with their way of life already decimated bysoldiers, settlers, cattlemen, and railroads, the last free Comanche bands
were moved to the reservation at Fort Sill, in what is now southwestern
Oklahoma.13
On the northern Plains, the Sioux people had yet to fully surrender.
Following the troubles of 1862, many bands had signed treaties with theUnited States and drifted into the Red Cloud and Spotted Tail agencies
to collect rations and annuities, but many continued to resist American
encroachment, particularly during Red Cloud’s War, a rare victory for
the Plains people that resulted in the Treaty of 1868 and created theGreat Sioux Reservation. Then, in 1874, an American expedition to theBlack Hills of South Dakota discovered gold. White prospectors flooded© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  37

the territory. Caring very little about Indian rights and very much about
getting rich, they brought the Sioux situation again to its breaking point.
Aware that U.S. citizens were violating treaty provisions, but unwillingto prevent them from searching for gold, federal officials pressured thewestern Sioux to sign a new treaty that would transfer control of theBlack Hills to the United States while General Philip Sheridan quietly
moved U.S. troops into the region. Initial clashes between U.S. troops
and Sioux warriors resulted in several Sioux victories that, combinedwith the visions of Sitting Bull, who had dreamed of an even more triumphant victory, attracted Sioux bands who had already signed treaties but
now joined to fight.14
In late June 1876, a division of the 7th Cavalry Regiment led by
Lieutenant Colonel George Armstrong Custer was sent up a trail into
the Black Hills as an advance guard for a larger force. Custer’s men approached a camp along a river known to the Sioux as Greasy Grass but
marked on Custer’s map as Little Bighorn, and they found that the influx of “treaty” Sioux as well as aggrieved Cheyenne and other allies
had swelled the population of the village far beyond Custer’s estimation.
Custer’s 7th Cavalry was vastly outnumbered, and he and 268 of his men
were killed.15
Custer’s fall shocked the nation. Cries for a swift American response
filled the public sphere, and military expeditions were sent out to crush
Native resistance. The Sioux splintered off into the wilderness and begana campaign of intermittent resistance but, outnumbered and suffering
after a long, hungry winter, Crazy Horse led a band of Oglala Sioux tosurrender in May 1877. Other bands gradually followed until finally, in
July 1881, Sitting Bull and his followers at last laid down their weaponsand came to the reservation. Indigenous powers had been defeated. The
Plains, it seemed, had been pacified.

IV. Beyond the Plains
Plains peoples were not the only ones who suffered as a result of American expansion. Groups like the Utes and Paiutes were pushed out of the
Rocky Mountains by U.S. expansion into Colorado and away from thenorthern Great Basin by the expanding Mormon population in Utah Territory in the 1850s and 1860s. Faced with a shrinking territorial base,members of these two groups often joined the U.S. military in its campaigns in the southwest against other powerful Native groups like the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 8 chapter 17

Hopi, the Zuni, the Jicarilla Apache, and especially the Navajo, whose
population of at least ten thousand engaged in both farming and sheep
herding on some of the most valuable lands acquired by the United States
after the Mexican War.
Conflicts between the U.S. military, American settlers, and Native
populations increased throughout the 1850s. By 1862, General James
Carleton began searching for a reservation where he could remove theNavajo and end their threat to U.S. expansion in the Southwest. Carleton
selected a dry, almost treeless site in the Bosque Redondo Valley, threehundred miles from the Navajo homeland.
In April 1863, Carleton gave orders to Colonel Kit Carson to roundup the entire Navajo population and escort them to Bosque Redondo.
Those who resisted would be shot. Thus began a period of Navajo history called the Long Walk, which remains deeply important to Navajo
people today. The Long Walk was not a single event but a series of forced
marches to the reservation at Bosque Redondo between August 1863
and December 1866. Conditions at Bosque Redondo were horrible. Provisions provided by the U.S. Army were not only inadequate but often
spoiled; disease was rampant, and thousands of Navajos died.
By 1868, it had become clear that life at the reservation was unsustainable. General William Tecumseh Sherman visited the reservation andwrote of the inhumane situation in which the Navajo were essentiallykept as prisoners, but lack of cost-effectiveness was the main reason Sherman recommended that the Navajo be returned to their homeland in theWest. On June 1, 1868, the Navajo signed the Treaty of Bosque Redondo,
an unprecedented treaty in the history of U.S.-Indian relations in which
the Navajo were able to return from the reservation to their homeland.
The destruction of Indian nations in California and the Pacific Northwest received significantly less attention than the dramatic conquest of
the Plains, but Native peoples in these regions also experienced violence,
population decline, and territorial loss. For example, in 1872, the California/Oregon border erupted in violence when the Modoc people left
the reservation of their historic enemies, the Klamath Indians, and returned to an area known as Lost River. Americans had settled the region after Modoc removal several years before, and they complained
bitterly of the Natives’ return. The U.S. military arrived when fifty-two
remaining Modoc warriors, led by a man called Captain Jack, refused
to return to the reservation and holed up in defensive positions along
the state border. They fought a guerrilla war for eleven months in which© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  39

at least two hundred U.S. troops were killed before they were finallyforced to surrender.16 Four years later, in the Pacific Northwest, a branchof the Nez Percé (who, generations earlier, had aided Lewis and Clarkin their famous journey to the Pacific Ocean) refused to be moved toa reservation and, under the leadership of Chief Joseph, attempted toflee to Canada but were pursued by the U.S. Cavalry. The outnumbered
Nez Percé battled across a thousand miles and were attacked nearly twodozen times before they succumbed to hunger and exhaustion, surrendered, and were forced to return. The flight of the Nez Percé captured
the attention of the nation, and a transcript of Chief Joseph’s surrender,
as recorded by a U.S. Army officer, became a landmark of American
rhetoric. “Hear me, my chiefs,” Joseph was supposed to have said, “I amtired. My heart is sick and sad. From where the sun now stands, I willfight no more forever.”17
The history of Indian-American relations in California typified thedecline of the western Indians. The treaties that had been signed with numerous Native nations in California in the 1850s were never ratified by
the Senate. Over one hundred distinct Native groups had lived in California before the Spanish and American conquests, but by 1880, the Native
population of California had collapsed from about 150,000 on the eveof the gold rush to a little less than 20,000. A few reservation areas were
eventually set up by the U.S. government to collect what remained of the
Native population, but most were dispersed throughout California. Thiswas partly the result of state laws from the 1850s that allowed white
Californians to obtain both Native children and adults as “apprentice”
laborers by merely bringing the desired laborer before a judge and promising to feed, clothe, and eventually release them after a period of “service” that ranged from ten to twenty years. Thousands of California’s
Natives were thus pressed into a form of slave labor that supported thegrowing mining, agricultural, railroad, and cattle industries.

V. Western Economic Expansion: Railroads and Cattle
As Native peoples were pushed out, American settlers poured in. Asidefrom agriculture and the extraction of natural resources—such as timberand precious metals—two major industries fueled the new western economy: ranching and railroads. Both developed in connection with eachother and both shaped the collective American memory of the post–Civil
War “Wild West.”© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 0 chapter 17

Railroads made the settlement and growth of the West possible. By the late nineteenth century, maps of
the Midwest were filled with advertisements touting how quickly a traveler could traverse the country. The
Environment and Society Portal, a digital project from the Rachel Carson Center for Environment andSociety, a joint initiative of LMU Munich and the Deutsches Museum.

As one booster put it, “the West is purely a railroad enterprise.” No
economic enterprise rivaled the railroads in scale, scope, or sheer impact.
No other businesses had attracted such enormous sums of capital, and noother ventures ever received such lavish government subsidies (businesshistorian Alfred Chandler called the railroads the “first modern businessenterprise”).18 By “annihilating time and space”—by connecting the vastness of the continent—the railroads transformed the United States andmade the American West.
No railroad enterprise so captured the American imagination—or
federal support—as the transcontinental railroad. The transcontinental
railroad crossed western plains and mountains and linked the West Coast
with the rail networks of the eastern United States. Constructed fromthe west by the Central Pacific and from the east by the Union Pacific,
the two roads were linked in Utah in 1869 to great national fanfare. But
such a herculean task was not easy, and national legislators threw enor-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  41

mous subsidies at railroad companies, a part of the Republican Party
platform since 1856. The 1862 Pacific Railroad Act gave bonds of between $16,000 and $48,000 for each mile of construction and provided
vast land grants to railroad companies. Between 1850 and 1871 alone,railroad companies received more than 175,000,000 acres of public land,an area larger than the state of Texas. Investors reaped enormous profits.
As one congressional opponent put it in the 1870s, “If there be profit, thecorporations may take it; if there be loss, the Government must bear it.”19
If railroads attracted unparalleled subsidies and investments, they also
created enormous labor demands. By 1880, approximately four hundred
thousand men—or nearly 2.5 percent of the nation’s entire workforce—labored in the railroad industry. Much of the work was dangerous andlow-paying, and companies relied heavily on immigrant labor to build
tracks. Companies employed Irish workers in the early nineteenth century and Chinese workers in the late nineteenth century. By 1880, over
two hundred thousand Chinese migrants lived in the United States. Oncethe rails were laid, companies still needed a large workforce to keep thetrains running. Much railroad work was dangerous, but perhaps themost hazardous work was done by brakemen. Before the advent of automatic braking, an engineer would blow the “down brake” whistle andbrakemen would scramble to the top of the moving train, regardless of
the weather conditions, and run from car to car manually turning brakes.
Speed was necessary, and any slip could be fatal. Brakemen were also
responsible for coupling the cars, attaching them together with a large
pin. It was easy to lose a hand or finger and even a slight mistake could
cause cars to collide.20
The railroads boomed. In 1850, there were 9,000 miles of railroadsin the United States. In 1900 there were 190,000, including severaltranscontinental lines.21 To manage these vast networks of freight andpassenger lines, companies converged rails at hub cities. Of all the Midwestern and western cities that blossomed from the bridging of western
resources and eastern capital in the late nineteenth century, Chicago was
the most spectacular. It grew from two hundred inhabitants in 1833 toover a million by 1890. By 1893 it and the region from which it drew
were completely transformed. The World’s Columbian Exposition thatyear trumpeted the city’s progress and broader technological progress,
with typical Gilded Age ostentation. A huge, gleaming (but temporary)“White City” was built in neoclassical style to house all the features ofthe fair and cater to the needs of the visitors who arrived from all over

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 2 chapter 17

This photochrom
print depicts acattle roundup
in Cimarron,
Colorado, acrossroads of thelate-nineteenthcentury cattle
drives. Detroit
Photographic Co.,c. 1898. Libraryof Congress.

the world. Highlighted in the title of this world’s fair were the changes
that had overtaken North America since Columbus made landfall four
centuries earlier. Chicago became the most important western hub andserved as the gateway between the farm and ranch country of the Great
Plains and eastern markets. Railroads brought cattle from Texas to Chicago for slaughter, where they were then processed into packaged meats
and shipped by refrigerated rail to New York City and other eastern cities. Such hubs became the central nodes in a rapid-transit economy that
increasingly spread across the entire continent linking goods and people
together in a new national network.
This national network created the fabled cattle drives of the 1860s
and 1870s. The first cattle drives across the central Plains began soonafter the Civil War. Railroads created the market for ranching, and for the
few years after the war that railroads connected eastern markets with important market hubs such as Chicago, but had yet to reach Texas ranchlands, ranchers began driving cattle north, out of the Lone Star state, tomajor railroad terminuses in Kansas, Missouri, and Nebraska. Ranchers
used well-worn trails, such as the Chisholm Trail, for drives, but conflicts© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  43

arose with Native Americans in the Indian Territory and farmers in Kansas who disliked the intrusion of large and environmentally destructive
herds onto their own hunting, ranching, and farming lands. Other trails,
such as the Western Trail, the Goodnight-Loving Trail, and the Shawnee
Trail, were therefore blazed.
Cattle drives were difficult tasks for the crews of men who managed
the herds. Historians estimate the number of men who worked as cowboys in the late-nineteenth century to be between twelve thousand andforty thousand. Perhaps a fourth were African American, and more werelikely Mexican or Mexican American. Much about the American cowboys evolved from Mexican vaqueros: cowboys adopted Mexican practices, gear, and terms such as rodeo, bronco, and lasso.
While most cattle drivers were men, there are at least sixteen verifiable accounts of women participating in the drives. Some, like Molly
Dyer Goodnight, accompanied their husbands. Others, like Lizzie Johnson Williams, helped drive their own herds. Williams made at least threeknown trips with her herds up the Chisholm Trail.

Cowboys such as the one pictured here, c. 1888, worked the cattle drives that supplied the meatpacking industry in Chicago and other midwestern cities. Their work was obsolete by the turn of the century, yet theirimage lived on through the romanticization of the West in American popular culture. Library of Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 4 chapter 17

Many cowboys hoped one day to become ranch owners themselves,
but employment was insecure and wages were low. Beginners could expect to earn around $20–$25 per month, and those with years of experience might earn $40–$45. Trail bosses could earn over $50 per month.
And it was tough work. On a cattle drive, cowboys worked long hours
and faced extremes of heat and cold and intense blowing dust. They subsisted on limited diets with irregular supplies.22
But if workers of cattle earned low wages, owners and investors could
receive riches. At the end of the Civil War, a steer worth $4 in Texas could
fetch $40 in Kansas. Although profits slowly leveled off, large profits
could still be made. And yet, by the 1880s, the great cattle drives werelargely done. The railroads had created them, and the railroads ended
them: railroad lines pushed into Texas and made the great drives obsolete. But ranching still brought profits and the Plains were better suitedfor grazing than for agriculture, and western ranchers continued supplying beef for national markets.
Ranching was just one of many western industries that depended on
the railroads. By linking the Plains with national markets and rapidly
moving people and goods, the railroads made the modern American West.

VI. The Allotment Era and Resistance in the Native WestAs the rails moved into the West, and more and more Americans followed, the situation for Native groups deteriorated even further. Treaties
negotiated between the United States and Native groups had typicallypromised that if tribes agreed to move to specific reservation lands, theywould hold those lands collectively. But as American westward migration mounted and open lands closed, white settlers began to argue thatIndians had more than their fair share of land, that the reservations were
too big, that Indians were using the land “inefficiently,” and that they still
preferred nomadic hunting instead of intensive farming and ranching.
By the 1880s, Americans increasingly championed legislation to allow
the transfer of Indian lands to farmers and ranchers, while many argued
that allotting Indian lands to individual Native Americans, rather thanto tribes, would encourage American-style agriculture and finally put Indians who had previously resisted the efforts of missionaries and federal
officials on the path to “civilization.”
Passed by Congress on February 8, 1887, the Dawes General Allotment Act splintered Native American reservations into individual family
homesteads. Each head of a Native family was to be allotted 160 acres, the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  45

typical size of a claim that any settler could establish on federal lands under
the provisions of the Homestead Act. Single individuals over age eighteen
would receive an eighty-acre allotment, and orphaned children received
forty acres. A four-year timeline was established for Indian peoples to maketheir allotment selections. If at the end of that time no selection had been
made, the act authorized the secretary of the interior to appoint an agent tomake selections for the remaining tribal members. To protect Indians frombeing swindled by unscrupulous land speculators, all allotments were to beheld in trust—they could not be sold by allottees—for twenty-five years.
Lands that remained unclaimed by tribal members after allotment would
revert to federal control and be sold to American settlers.23
Americans touted the Dawes Act as an uplifting humanitarian reform, but it upended Indian lifestyles and left Indian groups without
sovereignty over their lands. The act claimed that to protect Indian property rights, it was necessary to extend “the protection of the laws of
the United States . . . over the Indians.” Tribal governments and legal
principles could be superseded, or dissolved and replaced, by U.S. laws.
Under the terms of the Dawes Act, Native groups struggled to hold on tosome measure of tribal sovereignty.
The stresses of conquest unsettled generations of Native Americans.
Many took comfort from the words of prophets and holy men. In Nevada, on January 1, 1889, Northern Paiute prophet Wovoka experienced
a great revelation. He had traveled, he said, from his earthly home inwestern Nevada to heaven and returned during a solar eclipse to prophesy to his people. “You must not hurt anybody or do harm to anyone.
You must not fight. Do right always,” he exhorted. And they must, hesaid, participate in a religious ceremony that came to be known as the
Ghost Dance. If the people lived justly and danced the Ghost Dance,
Wovoka said, their ancestors would rise from the dead, droughts would
dissipate, the whites in the West would vanish, and the buffalo would
once again roam the Plains.
Native American prophets had often confronted American imperial power. Some prophets, including Wovoka, incorporated Christianelements like heaven and a Messiah figure into indigenous spiritual traditions. And so, though it was far from unique, Wovoka’s prophecy nevertheless caught on quickly and spread beyond the Paiutes. From acrossthe West, members of the Arapaho, Bannock, Cheyenne, and Shoshone
nations, among others, adopted the Ghost Dance religion. Perhaps themost avid Ghost Dancers—and certainly the most famous—were the Lakota Sioux.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 6 chapter 17

Red Cloud and American Horse—two of
the most renowned Oglala chiefs—are seen
clasping hands in front of a tipi on the Pine
Ridge Reservation in South Dakota. Bothmen served as delegates to Washington, D.C.,
after years of actively fighting the American government. John C. Grabill, “‘Red
Cloud and American Horse.’ The two mostnoted chiefs now living,” 1891. Library ofCongress.

The Lakota Sioux were in dire straits. South Dakota, formed out ofland that had once belonged by treaty to the Lakotas, became a state in1889. White homesteaders had poured in, reservations were carved up
and diminished, starvation set in, corrupt federal agents cut food rations,and drought hit the Plains. Many Lakotas feared a future as the landlesssubjects of a growing American empire when a delegation of eleven men,
led by Kicking Bear, joined Ghost Dance pilgrims on the rails westward
to Nevada and returned to spread the revival in the Dakotas.
The energy and message of the revivals frightened Indian agents, whobegan arresting Indian leaders. Then Chief Sitting Bull and with several
other whites and Indians, were killed in December 1890 during a botchedarrest, convincing many bands to flee the reservations to join the fugitive
bands farther west, where Lakota adherents of the Ghost Dance werepreaching that the Ghost Dancers would be immune to bullets.
Two weeks later, an American cavalry unit intercepted a band of 350
Lakotas, including over 100 women and children, under Chief Spotted Elk (later known as Bigfoot). They were escorted to Wounded Knee
Creek, where they camped for the night. The following morning, December 29, the American cavalrymen entered the camp to disarm Spot-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  47

ted Elk’s band. Tensions flared, a shot was fired, and a skirmish became
a massacre. The Americans fired their heavy weaponry indiscriminately
into the camp. Two dozen cavalrymen had been killed by the Lakotas’
concealed weapons or by friendly fire, but when the guns went silent,between 150 and 300 Native men, women, and children were dead.24
Wounded Knee marked the end of sustained, armed Native American resistance in the West. Individuals continued to resist the pressuresof assimilation and preserve traditional cultural practices, but sustained
military defeats, the loss of sovereignty over land and resources, and theonset of crippling poverty on the reservations marked the final decadesof the nineteenth century as a particularly dark era for America’s western
tribes. But for Americans, it became mythical.

Burial of the deadafter the massacreof Wounded Knee.
South Dakota,
1891. Library ofCongress.

VII. Rodeos, Wild West Shows, and theMythic American West
“The American West” conjures visions of tipis, cabins, cowboys, Indians,
farm wives in sunbonnets, and outlaws with six-shooters. Such images
pervade American culture, but they are as old as the West itself: novels,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 8 chapter 17

American frontierswoman and professional scout Martha Jane Canary wasbetter known to Americans as Calamity
Jane. A Figure in western folklore, Calamity Jane was a central character in manyof the increasingly popular novels andfilms that romanticized western life in thetwentieth century. C. 1895. Library ofCongress.

rodeos, and Wild West shows mythologized the American West throughout the post–Civil War era.
In the 1860s, Americans devoured dime novels that embellished thelives of real-life individuals such as Calamity Jane and Billy the Kid.
Owen Wister’s novels, especially The Virginian, established the characterof the cowboy as a gritty stoic with a rough exterior but the courage andheroism needed to rescue people from train robbers, Indians, and cattle
rustlers. Such images were later reinforced when the emergence of rodeo
added to popular conceptions of the American West. Rodeos began as
small roping and riding contests among cowboys in towns near ranches
or at camps at the end of the cattle trails. In Pecos, Texas, on July 4,
1883, cowboys from two ranches, the Hash Knife and the W Ranch,competed in roping and riding contests as a way to settle an argument;
this event is recognized by historians of the West as the first real rodeo.
Casual contests evolved into planned celebrations. Many were scheduledaround national holidays, such as Independence Day, or during traditional roundup times in the spring and fall. Early rodeos took place inopen grassy areas—not arenas—and included calf and steer roping and© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  49

roughstock events such as bronc riding. They gained popularity and soon
dedicated rodeo circuits developed. Although about 90 percent of rodeo
contestants were men, women helped popularize the rodeo and several
popular female bronc riders, such as Bertha Kaepernick, entered men’s
events, until around 1916 when women’s competitive participation was
curtailed. Americans also experienced the “Wild West”—the mythicalWest imagined in so many dime novels—by attending traveling Wild
West shows, arguably the unofficial national entertainment of the UnitedStates from the 1880s to the 1910s. Wildly popular across the country,
the shows traveled throughout the eastern United States and even acrossEurope and showcased what was already a mythic frontier life. William
Frederick “Buffalo Bill” Cody was the first to recognize the broad national appeal of the stock “characters” of the American West—cowboys,
Indians, sharpshooters, cavalrymen, and rangers—and put them all together into a single massive traveling extravaganza. Operating out of
Omaha, Nebraska, Buffalo Bill launched his touring show in 1883. Cody
himself shunned the word show, fearing that it implied an exaggeration
or misrepresentation of the West. He instead called his production “Buffalo Bill’s Wild West.” He employed real cowboys and Indians in his

William Frederick“Buffalo Bill”
Cody helped
commercialize thecowboy lifestyleby building a profitable mythology
around life in the
Old West. 1900.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

5 0 chapter 17

productions. But it was still, of course, a show. It was entertainment,
little different in its broad outlines from contemporary theater. Storylines
depicted westward migration, life on the Plains, and Indian attacks, allpunctuated by “cowboy fun”: bucking broncos, roping cattle, and sharpshooting contests.25
Buffalo Bill, joined by shrewd business partners skilled in marketing,turned his shows into a sensation. But he was not alone. Gordon William“Pawnee Bill” Lillie, another popular Wild West showman, got his startin 1886 when Cody employed him as an interpreter for Pawnee members of the show. Lillie went on to create his own production in 1888,“Pawnee Bill’s Historic Wild West.” He was Cody’s only real competitor
in the business until 1908, when the two men combined their shows tocreate a new extravaganza, “Buffalo Bill’s Wild West and Pawnee Bill’sGreat Far East” (most people called it the “Two Bills Show”). It was anunparalleled spectacle. The cast included American cowboys, Mexican
vaqueros, Native Americans, Russian Cossacks, Japanese acrobats, andan Australian aboriginal.
Cody and Lillie knew that Native Americans fascinated audiences in
the United States and Europe, and both featured them prominently intheir Wild West shows. Most Americans believed that Native cultures
were disappearing or had already, and felt a sense of urgency to see theirdances, hear their song, and be captivated by their bareback riding skills
and their elaborate buckskin and feather attire. The shows certainly
veiled the true cultural and historic value of so many Native demonstrations, and the Indian performers were curiosities to white Americans, but
the shows were one of the few ways for many Native Americans to makea living in the late nineteenth century.
In an attempt to appeal to women, Cody recruited Annie Oakley, afemale sharpshooter who thrilled onlookers with her many stunts. Billed
as “Little Sure Shot,” she shot apples off her poodle’s head and the ash
from her husband’s cigar, clenched trustingly between his teeth. Gordon
Lillie’s wife, May Manning Lillie, also became a skilled shot and performed as “World’s Greatest Lady Horseback Shot.” Female sharpshooters were Wild West show staples. As many as eighty toured the country
at the shows’ peak. But if such acts challenged expected Victorian genderroles, female performers were typically careful to blunt criticism by maintaining their feminine identity—for example, by riding sidesaddle andwearing full skirts and corsets—during their acts.
The western “cowboys and Indians” mystique, perpetuated in novels,
rodeos, and Wild West shows, was rooted in romantic nostalgia and, per-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  51

haps, in the anxieties that many felt in the late nineteenth century’s new
seemingly “soft” industrial world of factory and office work. The mythical cowboy’s “aggressive masculinity” was the seemingly perfect antidote
for middle- and upper-class, city-dwelling Americans who feared they
“had become over-civilized” and longed for what Theodore Roosevelt
called the “strenuous life.” Roosevelt himself, a scion of a wealthy New
York family and later a popular American president, turned a brief tenure
as a failed Dakota ranch owner into a potent part of his political image.
Americans looked longingly to the West, whose romance would continue
to pull at generations of Americans.

VIII. The West as History: The Turner Thesis
In 1893, the American Historical Association met during that year’sWorld’s Columbian Exposition in Chicago. The young Wisconsin historian Frederick Jackson Turner presented his “frontier thesis,” one of themost influential theories of American history, in his essay “The Significance of the Frontier in American History.”
Turner looked back at the historical changes in the West and saw,
instead of a tsunami of war and plunder and industry, waves of “civilization” that washed across the continent. A frontier line “between savagery
and civilization” had moved west from the earliest English settlements in
Massachusetts and Virginia across the Appalachians to the Mississippi

Americananthropologist
and ethnographer
Frances Densmore
plays a recording
for the Blackfootchief Mountain
Chief in 1916
for the Bureau of
American Ethnology. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

5 2 chapter 17

and finally across the Plains to California and Oregon. Turner invited his
audience to “stand at Cumberland Gap [the famous pass through the Appalachian Mountains], and watch the procession of civilization, marching
single file—the buffalo following the trail to the salt springs, the Indian,
the fur trader and hunter, the cattle-raiser, the pioneer farmer—and thefrontier has passed by.”26
Americans, Turner said, had been forced by necessity to build a roughhewn civilization out of the frontier, giving the nation its exceptional hustle and its democratic spirit and distinguishing North America from thestale monarchies of Europe. Moreover, the style of history Turner called
for was democratic as well, arguing that the work of ordinary people (inthis case, pioneers) deserved the same study as that of great statesmen.
Such was a novel approach in 1893.
But Turner looked ominously to the future. The Census Bureau in1890 had declared the frontier closed. There was no longer a discernibleline running north to south that, Turner said, any longer divided civilization from savagery. Turner worried for the United States’ future: what
would become of the nation without the safety valve of the frontier?
It was a common sentiment. Theodore Roosevelt wrote to Turner that
his essay “put into shape a good deal of thought that has been floatingaround rather loosely.”27
The history of the West was many-sided and it was made by many persons and peoples. Turner’s thesis was rife with faults, not only in its bald
Anglo-Saxon chauvinism—in which nonwhites fell before the march of“civilization” and Chinese and Mexican immigrants were invisible—butin its utter inability to appreciate the impact of technology and government subsidies and large-scale economic enterprises alongside the workof hardy pioneers. Still, Turner’s thesis held an almost canonical position
among historians for much of the twentieth century and, more importantly, captured Americans’ enduring romanticization of the West and thesimplification of a long and complicated story into a march of progress.

IX. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Lauren Brand, with content contributions by Lauren
Brand, Carole Butcher, Josh Garrett-Davis, Tracey Hanshew, Nick Roland, David
Schley, Emma Teitelman, and Alyce Webb.
Recommended citation: Lauren Brand et al., “Conquering the West,” Lauren
Brand, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford,
CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  53

N o t e s t o C h a p t e r 17
1. Based on U.S. Census figures from 1900. See, for instance, Donald Lee
Parman, Indians and the American West in the Twentieth Century (Bloomington:
Indiana University Press, 1994), ix.
2. Rodman W. Paul, The Mining Frontiers of the West, 1848–1880 (NewYork: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1963); Richard Lingenfelter, The Hard Rock
Miners (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979).
3. Richard White, It’s Your Misfortune and None of My Own: A New History of the American West (Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1991),
216–220.
4. Matthew Bowman, The Mormon People: The Making of an American
Faith (New York: Random House, 2012).
5. White, It’s Your Misfortune, 142–148; Patricia Nelson Limerick, The Legacy of Conquest: The Unbroken Past of the American West (New York: Norton,
1987), 161–162.
6. White, It’s Your Misfortune; Limerick, Legacy of Conquest.
7. John D. Hicks, The Populist Revolt: A History of the Farmers’ Allianceand the People’s Party (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1931), 6.
8. Robert Utley, The Indian Frontier 1846–1890 (Albuquerque: Universityof New Mexico Press, 1984), 76.
9. Jeffrey Ostler, The Plains Sioux and U.S. Colonialism from Lewis and
Clark to Wounded Knee (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2004).
10. Elliott West, The Contested Plains: Indians, Goldseekers, and the Rushto Colorado (Lawrence: Kansas University Press, 1998).
11. Francis Paul Prucha, The Great Father: The United States Government
and the American Indians (Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1995), 482.
12. Bureau of Indian Affairs, Annual Report of the Commissioner of IndianAffairs to the Secretary of the Interior (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1875), 221.
13. For the Comanche, see especially Pekka Hämäläinen, The Comanche
Empire (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2008).
14. Ostler, The Plains Sioux and U.S. Colonialism.
15. Utley, The Indian Frontier.
16. Boyd Cothran, Remembering the Modoc War: Redemptive Violence andthe Making of American Innocence (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina
Press, 2014).
17. Report of the Secretary of War, Being Part of the Message and Documents Communicated to the Two Houses of Congress, Beginning of the Second
Session of the Forty-Fifth Congress. Volume I (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office 1877), 630.
18. Alfred D. Chandler Jr. The Visible Hand: The Managerial Revolution in
American Business (Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press, 1977).
19. Richard White, Railroaded: The Transcontinentals and the Making ofModern America (New York: Norton, 2011), 107.
20. Walter Licht, Working on the Railroad: The Organization of Work in the
Nineteenth Century (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2014), chap. 5.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

5 4 chapter 17

21. John F. Stover, The Routledge Historical Atlas of the American Railroads(New York: Routledge, 1999), 15, 17, 39, 49.
22. Richard W. Slatta, Cowboys of the Americas (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1994).
23. Limerick, Legacy of Conquest, 195–199; White, It’s Your Misfortune,
115.
24. Dee Brown, Bury My Heart at Wounded Knee: An Indian History of theAmerican West (New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1970).
25. Joy S. Kasson, Buffalo Bill’s Wild West: Celebrity, Memory, and Popular
History (New York: Macmillan, 2001).
26. Frederick Jackson Turner, The Frontier in American History (New York:
Holt, 1921), 12.
27. Kasson, Buffalo Bill’s Wild West, 117.
R e c o mm e n d e d R e a di n g
Aarim, Najia. Chinese Immigrants, African Americans, and Racial Anxiety in
the United States, 1848–1882. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 2006.
Andrews, Thomas. Killing for Coal: America’s Deadliest Labor War. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, 2009.
Brown, Dee. Bury My Heart at Wounded Knee: An Indian History of the American West. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1970.
Cahill, Cathleen. Federal Fathers and Mothers: A Social History of the UnitedStates Indian Service, 1869–1933. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina
Press, 2011.
Cronon, William. Nature’s Metropolis: Chicago and the Great West. New York:
Norton, 1991.
Gordan, Linda. The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999.
Hämäläinen, Pekka. The Comanche Empire. New Haven, CT: Yale University
Press, 2008.
Hine, Robert V. The American West: A New Interpretive History. New Haven,
CT: Yale University Press, 2000.
Huhndorf, Shari M. Going Native: Indians in the American Cultural Imagination. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2001.
Isenberg, Andrew C. The Destruction of the Bison: An Environmental History,
1750–1920. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2000.
Jacobs, Margaret D. White Mother to a Dark Race: Settler Colonialism, Maternalism, and the Removal of Indigenous Children in the American West andAustralia, 1880–1940. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 2009.
Johnson, Benjamin Heber. Revolution in Texas: How a Forgotten Rebellion and
Its Bloody Suppression Turned Mexicans into Americans. New Haven, CT:
Yale University Press, 2003.
Kelman, Ari. A Misplaced Massacre: Struggling over the Memory of Sand Creek.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2013.
Krech, Shepard. The Ecological Indian: Myth and History. New York: Norton,
1999.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

C on qu er i n g t h e W e s t  55

Limerick, Patricia Nelson. The Legacy of Conquest: The Unbroken Past of theAmerican West. New York: Norton, 1987.
Marks, Paula Mitchell. In a Barren Land: American Indian Dispossession andSurvival. New York: Morrow, 1998.
Montejano, David. Anglos and Mexicans in the Making of Texas, 1836–1986.
Austin: University of Texas Press, 1987.
Pascoe, Peggy. Relations of Rescue: The Search for Female Moral Authority in
the American West, 1874–1939. New York: Oxford University Press, 1990.
Prucha, Francis Paul. The Great Father: The United States Government and theAmerican Indians. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1984.
Schulten, Susan. The Geographical Imagination in America, 1880–1950. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2001.
Shah, Nayan. Stranger Intimacy: Contesting Race, Sexuality, and the Law in the
North American West. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2011.
Smith, Henry Nash. Virgin Land: The American West as Symbol and Myth. New
York: Vintage Books, 1957.
Taylor, Quintard. In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in theAmerican West, 1528–1990. New York: Norton, 1999.
Warren, Louis S. Buffalo Bill’s America: William Cody and the Wild West Show.
New York: Knopf, 2005.
White, Richard. “It’s Your Misfortune and None of My Own”: A New History of
the American West. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1991.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

18
Life in Industrial America
I. Introduction
When British author Rudyard Kipling visited Chicago in 1889, he described a city captivated by technology and blinded by greed. He ­describeda rushed and crowded city, a “huge wilderness” with “scores of milesof these terrible streets” and their “hundred thousand of these terrible
people.” “The show impressed me with a great horror,” he wrote. “There
was no color in the street and no beauty—only a maze of wire ropes
overhead and dirty stone flagging under foot.” He took a cab “and thecabman said that these things were the proof of progress.” Kipling visited a “gilded and mirrored” hotel “crammed with people talking aboutmoney, and spitting about everywhere.” He visited extravagant churches
and spoke with their congregants. “I listened to people who said that themere fact of spiking down strips of iron to wood, and getting a steam
and iron thing to run along them was progress, that the telephone was

Mulberry Street,
New York City,c. 1900. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  57

progress, and the network of wires overhead was progress. They repeatedtheir statements again and again.” Kipling said American newspapers
report “that the snarling together of telegraph-wires, the heaving up ofhouses, and the making of money is progress.”1
Chicago embodied the triumph of American industrialization. Its
meatpacking industry typified the sweeping changes occurring in American life. The last decades of the nineteenth century, a new era for big
business, saw the formation of large corporations, run by trained bureaucrats and salaried managers, doing national and international business. Chicago, for instance, became America’s butcher. The Chicago meat
processing industry, a cartel of five firms, produced four fifths of the meatbought by American consumers. Kipling described in intimate detail theUnion Stock Yards, the nation’s largest meat processing zone, a square
mile just southwest of the city whose pens and slaughterhouses linked
the city’s vast agricultural hinterland to the nation’s dinner tables. “Oncehaving seen them,” he concluded, “you will never forget the sight.” Likeother notable Chicago industries, such as agricultural machinery andsteel production, the meatpacking industry was closely tied to urbanization and immigration. In 1850, Chicago had a population of about thirty
thousand. Twenty years later, it had three hundred thousand. Nothing
could stop the city’s growth. The Great Chicago Fire leveled 3.5 square
miles and left a third of its residents homeless in 1871, but the city

Wabash Avenue,
Chicago,c. 1907. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

58

ch apter 18

quickly recovered and resumed its spectacular growth. By the turn of thetwentieth century, the city was home to 1.7 million people.
Chicago’s explosive growth reflected national trends. In 1870, a quarter of the nation’s population lived in towns or cities with populations
greater than 2,500. By 1920, a majority did. But if many who flocked to
Chicago and other American cities came from rural America, many others emigrated from overseas. Mirroring national immigration patterns,
Chicago’s newcomers had at first come mostly from Germany, the British
Isles, and Scandinavia, but, by 1890, Poles, Italians, Czechs, Hungarians,
Lithuanians, and others from southern and eastern Europe made up amajority of new immigrants. Chicago, like many other American industrial cities, was also an immigrant city. In 1900, nearly 80 percent ofChicago’s population was either foreign-born or the children of foreignborn immigrants.2
Kipling visited Chicago just as new industrial modes of production
revolutionized the United States. The rise of cities, the evolution ofAmerican immigration, the transformation of American labor, the further making of a mass culture, the creation of great concentrated wealth,
the growth of vast city slums, the conquest of the West, the emergenceof a middle class, the problem of poverty, the triumph of big business,widening inequalities, battles between capital and labor, the final destruction of independent farming, breakthrough technologies, environmental
destruction: industrialization created a new America.

II. Industrialization and Technological Innovation
The railroads created the first great concentrations of capital, spawned
the first massive corporations, made the first of the vast fortunes thatwould define the Gilded Age, unleashed labor demands that united thousands of farmers and immigrants, and linked many towns and cities.
National railroad mileage tripled in the twenty years after the outbreakof the Civil War, and tripled again over the four decades that followed.
Railroads impelled the creation of uniform time zones across the country,
gave industrialists access to remote markets, and opened the AmericanWest. Railroad companies were the nation’s largest businesses. Their vastnational operations demanded the creation of innovative new corporate
organization, advanced management techniques, and vast sums of capital. Their huge expenditures spurred countless industries and attracted
droves of laborers. And as they crisscrossed the nation, they created a© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  59

national market, a truly national economy, and, seemingly, a new national culture.3
The railroads were not natural creations. Their vast capital requirements required the use of incorporation, a legal innovation that protectedshareholders from losses. Enormous amounts of government support followed. Federal, state, and local governments offered unrivaled handouts
to create the national rail networks. Lincoln’s Republican Party—which
dominated government policy during the Civil War and Reconstruction—passed legislation granting vast subsidies. Hundreds of millions of acresof land and millions of dollars’ worth of government bonds were freely
given to build the great transcontinental railroads and the innumerable
trunk lines that quickly annihilated the vast geographic barriers that had
so long sheltered American cities from one another.
As railroad construction drove economic development, new means of
production spawned new systems of labor. Many wage earners had traditionally seen factory work as a temporary stepping-stone to ­attaining

This print shows the four stages of pork packing in nineteenth-century Cincinnati. Streamlined production
marked meatpacking as an innovative industry, one of great interest to the era’s industrialists. This chromolithograph was exhibited by the Cincinnati Pork Packers’ Association at the International Exposition in
Vienna, Austria. 1873. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

60

ch apter 18

their own small businesses or farms. After the war, however, new technology and greater mechanization meant fewer and fewer workers could legitimately aspire to economic independence. Stronger and more organizedlabor unions formed to fight for a growing, more-permanent working
class. At the same time, the growing scale of economic enterprises increasingly disconnected owners from their employees and day-to-day business
operations. To handle their vast new operations, owners turned to managers. Educated bureaucrats swelled the ranks of an emerging middle class.
Industrialization also remade much of American life outside theworkplace. Rapidly growing industrialized cities knit together urban
consumers and rural producers into a single, integrated national market.
Food production and consumption, for instance, were utterly nationalized. Chicago’s stockyards seemingly tied it all together. Between 1866
and 1886, ranchers drove a million head of cattle annually overland from
Texas ranches to railroad depots in Kansas for shipment by rail to Chicago. After travelling through modern “disassembly lines,” the animals
left the adjoining slaughterhouses as slabs of meat to be packed into refrigerated rail cars and sent to butcher shops across the continent. By
1885, a handful of large-scale industrial meatpackers in Chicago were
producing nearly five hundred million pounds of “dressed” beef annually.4 The new scale of industrialized meat production transformed thelandscape. Buffalo herds, grasslands, and old-growth forests gave way tocattle, corn, and wheat. Chicago became the Gateway City, a crossroads
connecting American agricultural goods, capital markets in New Yorkand London, and consumers from all corners of the United States.
Technological innovation accompanied economic development. For
April Fool’s Day in 1878, the New York Daily Graphic published a fictitious interview with the celebrated inventor Thomas A. Edison. The piecedescribed the “biggest invention of the age”—a new Edison machine that
could create forty different kinds of food and drink out of only air, water,and dirt. “Meat will no longer be killed and vegetables no longer grown,
except by savages,” Edison promised. The machine would end “famineand pauperism.” And all for $5 or $6 per machine! The story was ajoke, of course, but Edison nevertheless received inquiries from readers
wondering when the food machine would be ready for the market. Americans had apparently witnessed such startling technological advances—advances that would have seemed far-fetched mere years earlier—that the
Edison food machine seemed entirely plausible.5
In September 1878, Edison announced a new and ambitious line ofresearch and development—electric power and lighting. The scientific© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  61

principles behind dynamos and electric motors—the conversion of mechanical energy to electrical power, and vice versa—were long known,
but Edison applied the age’s bureaucratic and commercial ethos to the
problem. Far from a lone inventor gripped by inspiration toiling in isolation, Edison advanced the model of commercially minded managementof research and development. Edison folded his two identities, business
manager and inventor, together. He called his Menlo Park research laboratory an “invention factory” and promised to turn out “a minor invention every ten days and a big thing every six months or so.” He brought
his fully equipped Menlo Park research laboratory and the skilled machinists and scientists he employed to bear on the problem of building
an electric power system—and commercializing it.
By late fall 1879, Edison exhibited his system of power generationand electrical light for reporters and investors. Then he scaled up production. He sold generators to businesses. By the middle of 1883, Edison
had overseen construction of 330 plants powering over sixty thousandlamps in factories, offices, printing houses, hotels, and theaters aroundthe world. He convinced municipal officials to build central power stations and run power lines. New York’s Pearl Street central station opened
in September 1882 and powered a square mile of downtown Manhattan.
Electricity revolutionized the world. It not only illuminated the night, it
powered the Second Industrial Revolution. Factories could operate anywhere at any hour. Electric rail cars allowed for cities to build out andelectric elevators allowed for them to build up.
Economic advances, technological innovation, social and cultural evolution, demographic changes: the United States was a nation transformed.
Industry boosted productivity, railroads connected the nation, more andmore Americans labored for wages, new bureaucratic occupations createda vast “white collar” middle class, and unprecedented fortunes rewarded
the owners of capital. These revolutionary changes, of course, would notoccur without conflict or consequence (see Chapter 16), but they demonstrated the profound transformations remaking the nation. Change was
not confined to economics alone. Change gripped the lives of everyday
Americans and fundamentally reshaped American culture.6

III. Immigration and Urbanization
Industry pulled ever more Americans into cities. Manufacturing needed
the labor pool and the infrastructure. America’s urban population increased sevenfold in the half century after the Civil War. Soon the United© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

62

ch apter 18

State Street, southfrom Lake Street,
Chicago, Illinois,c. 1900–1910. Library of Congress.

States had more large cities than any country in the world. The 1920
U.S. census revealed that, for the first time, a majority of Americans lived
in urban areas. Much of that urban growth came from the millions of immigrants pouring into the nation. Between 1870 and 1920, over twentyfive million immigrants arrived in the United States.
By the turn of the twentieth century, new immigrant groups such as
Italians, Poles, and Eastern European Jews made up a larger percentage of arrivals than the Irish and Germans. The specific reasons that
immigrants left their particular countries and the reasons they came to
the United States (what historians call push and pull factors) varied. For
example, a young husband and wife living in Sweden in the 1880s andunable to purchase farmland might read an advertisement for inexpensive land in the American Midwest and immigrate to the United States
to begin a new life. A young Italian man might simply hope to labor in asteel factory long enough to save up enough money to return home andpurchase land for a family. A Russian Jewish family persecuted in European pogroms might look to the United States as a sanctuary. Or perhaps
a Japanese migrant might hear of fertile farming land on the West Coastand choose to sail for California. But if many factors pushed people awayfrom their home countries, by far the most important factor drawing immigrants was economics. Immigrants came to the United States looking
for work.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  63

Industrial capitalism was the most important factor that drew immigrants to the United States between 1880 and 1920. Immigrant workers
labored in large industrial complexes producing goods such as steel, textiles, and food products, replacing smaller and more local workshops.
The influx of immigrants, alongside a large movement of Americans fromthe countryside to the city, helped propel the rapid growth of cities like
New York, Pittsburgh, Cleveland, Milwaukee, and St. Louis. By 1890,
immigrants and their children accounted for roughly 60 percent of the
population in most large northern cities (and sometimes as high as 80 or
90 percent). Many immigrants, especially from Italy and the Balkans, always intended to return home with enough money to purchase land. But
what about those who stayed? Did the new arrivals assimilate together
in the American melting pot—becoming just like those already in the
United States—or did they retain, and sometimes even strengthen, theirtraditional ethnic identities? The answer lies somewhere in between. Immigrants from specific countries—and often even specific communities—
often clustered together in ethnic neighborhoods. They formed vibrantorganizations and societies, such as Italian workmen’s clubs, Eastern
European Jewish mutual aid societies, and Polish Catholic churches, toease the transition to their new American home. Immigrant communities
published newspapers in dozens of languages and purchased spaces tomaintain their arts, languages, and traditions alive. And from these foundations they facilitated even more immigration: after staking out a claim
to some corner of American life, they wrote home and encouraged others
to follow them (historians call this chain migration).
Many cities’ politics adapted to immigrant populations. The infamous urban political machines often operated as a kind of mutual aid
society. New York City’s Democratic Party machine, popularly known
as Tammany Hall, drew the greatest ire from critics and seemed to embody all of the worst of city machines, but it also responded to immigrant needs. In 1903, journalist William Riordon published a book,
Plunkitt of Tammany Hall, which chronicled the activities of ward heeler
George Washington Plunkitt. Plunkitt elaborately explained to Riordon
the difference between “honest graft” and “dishonest graft”: “I mademy pile in politics, but, at the same time, I served the organization andgot more big improvements for New York City than any other livin’man.” While exposing corruption, Riordon also revealed the hard work
Plunkitt undertook on behalf of his largely immigrant constituency. Ona typical day, Riordon wrote, Plunkitt was awakened at two a.m. to bail© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

64

ch apter 18

out a saloonkeeper who stayed open too late, was awakened again at six
a.m. because of a fire in the neighborhood and spent time finding lodgings for the families displaced by the fire, and, after spending the rest of
the morning in court to secure the release of several of his constituents,
found jobs for four unemployed men, attended an Italian funeral, visiteda church social, and dropped in on a Jewish wedding. He returned homeat midnight.7
Tammany Hall’s corruption, especially under the reign of William“Boss” Tweed, was legendary, but the public works projects that funded
Tammany Hall’s graft also provided essential infrastructure and public
services for the city’s rapidly expanding population. Water, sewer, andgas lines; schools, hospitals, civic buildings, and museums; police andfire departments; roads, parks (notably Central Park), and bridges (notably the Brooklyn Bridge): all could, in whole or in part, be credited toTammany’s reign. Still, machine politics could never be enough. As theurban population exploded, many immigrants found themselves trappedin crowded, crime-ridden slums. Americans eventually took notice of thisurban crisis and proposed municipal reforms but also grew concerned
about the declining quality of life in rural areas.
While cities boomed, rural worlds languished. Some Americans
scoffed at rural backwardness and reveled in the countryside’s decay, butmany romanticized the countryside, celebrated rural life, and wondered
what had been lost in the cities. Sociologist Kenyon Butterfield, concerned by the sprawling nature of industrial cities and suburbs, regretted
the eroding social position of rural citizens and farmers: “Agriculture
does not hold the same relative rank among our industries that it did informer years.” Butterfield saw “the farm problem” as part of “the wholequestion of democratic civilization.”8 He and many others thought therise of the cities and the fall of the countryside threatened traditional
American values. Many proposed conservation. Liberty Hyde Bailey,a botanist and rural scholar selected by Theodore Roosevelt to chair afederal Commission on Country Life in 1907, believed that rural places
and industrial cities were linked: “Every agricultural question is a cityquestion.”9
Many longed for a middle path between the cities and the country.
New suburban communities on the outskirts of American cities definedthemselves in opposition to urban crowding. Americans contemplated
the complicated relationships between rural places, suburban living, andurban spaces. Los Angeles became a model for the suburban develop-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  65

ment of rural places. Dana Barlett, a social reformer in Los Angeles,
noted that the city, stretching across dozens of small towns, was “a better city” because of its residential identity as a “city of homes.”10 This
language was seized upon by many suburbs that hoped to avoid bothurban sprawl and rural decay. In Glendora, one of these small towns
on the outskirts of Los Angeles, local leaders were “loath as anyone tosee it become cosmopolitan.” Instead, in order to have Glendora “growalong the lines necessary to have it remain an enjoyable city of homes,”
they needed to “bestir ourselves to direct its growth” by encouraging notindustry or agriculture but residential development.11

IV. The New South and the Problem of Race
“There was a South of slavery and secession,” Atlanta Constitution editor
Henry Grady proclaimed in an 1886 speech in New York. “That South isdead.”12 Grady captured the sentiment of many white southern businessand political leaders who imagined a New South that could turn its backto the past by embracing industrialization and diversified agriculture. He
promoted the region’s economic possibilities and mutual future prosperity through an alliance of northern capital and southern labor. Grady
and other New South boosters hoped to shape the region’s economy in
the North’s image. They wanted industry and they wanted infrastructure.
But the past could not be escaped. Economically and socially, the “NewSouth” would still be much like the old.
A “New South” seemed an obvious need. The Confederacy’s failed
insurrection wreaked havoc on the southern economy and crippled
southern prestige. Property was destroyed. Lives were lost. Politicalpower vanished. And four million enslaved Americans—representing thewealth and power of the antebellum white South—threw off their chains
and walked proudly forward into freedom.
Emancipation unsettled the southern social order. When Reconstruction regimes attempted to grant freedpeople full citizenship rights,
anxious whites struck back. From their fear, anger, and resentment theylashed out, not only in organized terrorist organizations such as theKu Klux Klan but in political corruption, economic exploitation, andviolent intimidation. White southerners took back control of state andlocal governments and used their reclaimed power to disenfranchise African Americans and pass “Jim Crow” laws segregating schools, transportation, employment, and various public and private facilities. The© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

66

ch apter 18

The ambitions ofAtlanta, seen in
the constructionof such grandbuildings as the
Kimball House
Hotel, reflected
the larger regional
aspirations of theso-called New
South. 1890.
Wikimedia.

r­ eestablishment of white supremacy after the “redemption” of the South
from Reconstruction contradicted proclamations of a “New” South. Perhaps nothing harked so forcefully back to the barbaric southern pastthan the wave of lynchings—the extralegal murder of individuals by vigilantes—that washed across the South after Reconstruction. Whether for
actual crimes or fabricated crimes or for no crimes at all, white mobs
murdered roughly five thousand African Americans between the 1880s
and the 1950s.
Lynching was not just murder, it was a ritual rich with symbolism.
Victims were not simply hanged, they were mutilated, burned alive, andshot. Lynchings could become carnivals, public spectacles attended bythousands of eager spectators. Rail lines ran special cars to accommodate the rush of participants. Vendors sold goods and keepsakes. Perpetrators posed for photos and collected mementos. And it was increasingly
common. One notorious example occurred in Georgia in 1899. Accusedof killing his white employer and raping the man’s wife, Sam Hose wascaptured by a mob and taken to the town of Newnan. Word of theimpending lynching quickly spread, and specially chartered passenger
trains brought some four thousand visitors from Atlanta to witness the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  67

gruesome affair. Members of the mob tortured Hose for about an hour.
They sliced off pieces of his body as he screamed in agony. Then they
poured a can of kerosene over his body and burned him alive.13
At the barbaric height of southern lynching, in the last years of thenineteenth century, southerners lynched two to three African Americans
every week. In general, lynchings were most frequent in the Cotton Beltof the Lower South, where southern blacks were most numerous andwhere the majority worked as tenant farmers and field hands on the cotton farms of white landowners. The states of Mississippi and Georgia
had the greatest number of recorded lynchings: from 1880 to 1930, Mississippi lynch mobs killed over five hundred African Americans; Georgia
mobs murdered more than four hundred.
Throughout the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, a number of prominent southerners openly supported lynching, arguing that it
was a necessary evil to punish black rapists and deter others. In the late
1890s, Georgia newspaper columnist and noted women’s rights activist Rebecca Latimer Felton—who would later become the first woman
to serve in the U.S. Senate—endorsed such extrajudicial killings. She
said, “If it takes lynching to protect women’s dearest possession fromdrunken, ravening beasts, then I say lynch a thousand a week.”14 When
opponents argued that lynching violated victims’ constitutional rights,
South Carolina governor Coleman Blease angrily responded, “Whenever
the Constitution comes between me and the virtue of the white womenof South Carolina, I say to hell with the Constitution.”15
Black activists and white allies worked to outlaw lynching. Ida B.
Wells, an African American woman born in the last years of slavery anda pioneering anti-lynching advocate, lost three friends to a lynch mob
in Memphis, Tennessee, in 1892. That year, Wells published Southern
Horrors: Lynch Law in All Its Phases, a groundbreaking work that documented the South’s lynching culture and exposed the myth of the black
rapist.16 The Tuskegee Institute and the NAACP both compiled and publicized lists of every reported lynching in the United States. In 1918, Representative Leonidas Dyer of Missouri introduced federal anti-lynchinglegislation that would have made local counties where lynchings took
place legally liable for such killings. Throughout the early 1920s, theDyer Bill was the subject of heated political debate, but, fiercely opposedby southern congressmen and unable to win enough northern champions, the proposed bill was never enacted.
Lynching was only the violent worst of the southern racial world.
Discrimination in employment and housing and the legal segregation of© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

68

ch apter 18

This photograph captures the lynching of Laura and Lawrence Nelson, a mother and son, on May 25,
1911, in Okemah, Oklahoma. In response to national attention, the local white newspaper in Okemah simply wrote, “While the general sentiment is adverse to the method, it is generally thought that the negroes
got what would have been due them under due process of law.” Wikimedia.

public and private life reflected the rise of a new Jim Crow South. Socalled Jim Crow laws legalized what custom had long dictated. Southernstates and municipalities enforced racial segregation in public places andin private lives. Separate coach laws were some of the first such laws to
appear, beginning in Tennessee in the 1880s. Soon schools, stores, theaters, restaurants, bathrooms, and nearly every other part of public life
were segregated. So too were social lives. The sin of racial mixing, critics
said, had to be heavily guarded against. Marriage laws regulated againstinterracial couples, and white men, ever anxious of relationships between
black men and white women, passed miscegenation laws and justified
lynching as an appropriate extralegal tool to police the racial divide.
In politics, de facto limitations of black voting had suppressed black
voters since Reconstruction. Whites stuffed ballot boxes and intimidated
black voters with physical and economic threats. And then, from roughly1890 to 1908, southern states implemented de jure, or legal, disfranchisement. They passed laws requiring voters to pass literacy tests (which
could be judged arbitrarily) and pay poll taxes (which hit poor whites© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  69

and poor blacks alike), effectively denying black men the franchise thatwas supposed to have been guaranteed by the Fifteenth Amendment.
Those responsible for such laws posed as reformers and justified voting
restrictions as for the public good, a way to clean up politics by purging
corrupt African Americans from the voting rolls.
With white supremacy secured, prominent white southerners looked
outward for support. New South boosters hoped to confront postReconstruction uncertainties by rebuilding the South’s economy and convincing the nation that the South could be more than an economically
backward, race-obsessed backwater. And as they did, they began to retell the history of the recent past. A kind of civic religion known as the“Lost Cause” glorified the Confederacy and romanticized the Old South.
White southerners looked forward while simultaneously harking back to
an imagined past inhabited by contented and loyal slaves, benevolent andgenerous masters, chivalric and honorable men, and pure and faithfulsouthern belles. Secession, they said, had little to do with the institutionof slavery, and soldiers fought only for home and honor, not the continued ownership of human beings. The New South, then, would be built
physically with new technologies, new investments, and new industries,
but undergirded by political and social custom.
Henry Grady might have declared the Confederate South dead, but
its memory pervaded the thoughts and actions of white southerners.
Lost Cause champions overtook the South. Women’s groups, such as
the United Daughters of the Confederacy, joined with Confederate veterans to preserve a pro-Confederate past. They built Confederate monuments and celebrated Confederate veterans on Memorial Day. Across theSouth, towns erected statues of General Robert E. Lee and other Confederate figures. By the turn of the twentieth century, the idealized Lost
Cause past was entrenched not only in the South but across the country.
In 1905, for instance, North Carolinian Thomas F. Dixon published anovel, The Clansman, which depicted the Ku Klux Klan as heroic defenders of the South against the corruption of African American and northern“carpetbag” misrule during Reconstruction. In 1915, acclaimed film director David W. Griffith adapted Dixon’s novel into the groundbreaking
blockbuster film, Birth of a Nation. (The film almost singlehandedly rejuvenated the Ku Klux Klan.) The romanticized version of the antebellum
South and the distorted version of Reconstruction dominated popularimagination.17
While Lost Cause defenders mythologized their past, New Southboosters struggled to wrench the South into the modern world. The© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

70

ch apter 18r­ ailroads became their focus. The region had lagged behind the North in
the railroad building boom of the midnineteenth century, and postwar
expansion facilitated connections between the most rural segments ofthe population and the region’s rising urban areas. Boosters campaigned
for the construction of new hard-surfaced roads as well, arguing that
improved roads would further increase the flow of goods and people andentice northern businesses to relocate to the region. The rising popularityof the automobile after the turn of the century only increased pressure forthe construction of reliable roads between cities, towns, county seats, andthe vast farmlands of the South.
Along with new transportation networks, New South boosters continued to promote industrial growth. The region witnessed the rise ofvarious manufacturing industries, predominantly textiles, tobacco, furniture, and steel. While agriculture—cotton in particular—remained themainstay of the region’s economy, these new industries provided new
wealth for owners, new investments for the region, and new opportunities for the exploding number of landless farmers to finally flee the land.
Industries offered low-paying jobs but also opportunity for rural poor
who could no longer sustain themselves through subsistence farming.
Men, women, and children all moved into wage work. At the turn of
the twentieth century, nearly one fourth of southern mill workers werechildren aged six to sixteen.
In most cases, as in most aspects of life in the New South, new factory jobs were racially segregated. Better-paying jobs were reserved forwhites, while the most dangerous, labor-intensive, dirtiest, and lowestpaying positions were relegated to African Americans. African American
women, shut out of most industries, found employment most often as
domestic help for white families. As poor as white southern mill workers were, southern blacks were poorer. Some white mill workers could
even afford to pay for domestic help in caring for young children, cleaning houses, doing laundry, and cooking meals. Mill villages that grewup alongside factories were whites-only, and African American families
were pushed to the outer perimeter of the settlements.
That a “New South” emerged in the decades between Reconstruction and World War I is debatable. If measured by industrial output andrailroad construction, the New South was a reality but if measured relative to the rest of the nation, it was a limited one. If measured in termsof racial discrimination, however, the New South looked much like theOld. Boosters such as Henry Grady said the South was done with racial© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  71

questions but lynching and segregation and the institutionalization of Jim
Crow exposed the South’s lingering racial obsessions. Meanwhile, mostsoutherners still toiled in agriculture and still lived in poverty. Industrial
development and expanding infrastructure, rather than re-creating theSouth, coexisted easily with white supremacy and an impoverished agricultural economy. The trains came, factories were built, and capital wasinvested, but the region remained mired in poverty and racial apartheid.
Much of the “New South,” then, was anything but new.

V. Gender, Religion, and Culture
In 1905, Standard Oil tycoon John D. Rockefeller donated $100,000(about $2.5 million today) to the American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions. Rockefeller was the richest man in America but also
one of the most hated and mistrusted. Even admirers conceded that heachieved his wealth through often illegal and usually immoral businesspractices. Journalist Ida Tarbell had made waves describing Standard

Visitors to the
ColumbianExposition of1893 took in theview of the Courtof Honor from theroof of the Manufacturers Building.
Art Institute ofChicago, via
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

72

ch apter 18

Oil’s long-standing ruthlessness and predilections for political corruption. Clergymen, led by reformer Washington Gladden, fiercely protested
the donation. A decade earlier, Gladden had asked of such donations, “Is
this clean money? Can any man, can any institution, knowing its origin,
touch it without being defiled?” Gladden said, “In the cool brutality withwhich properties are wrecked, securities destroyed, and people by thehundreds robbed of their little all to build up the fortunes of the multimillionaires, we have an appalling revelation of the kind of monster thata human being may become.”18
Despite widespread criticism, the board accepted Rockefeller’s donation. Board president Samuel Capen did not defend Rockefeller, arguingthat the gift was charitable and the board could not assess the origin of
every donation, but the dispute shook Capen. Was a corporate background incompatible with a religious organization? The “tainted money
debate” reflected questions about the proper relationship between religion and capitalism. With rising income inequality, would religious
groups be forced to support either the elite or the disempowered? What
was moral in the new industrial United States? And what obligations did
wealth bring? Steel magnate Andrew Carnegie popularized the idea of a“gospel of wealth” in an 1889 article, claiming that “the true antidote forthe temporary unequal distribution of wealth” was the moral obligationof the rich to give to charity.19 Farmers and labor organizers, meanwhile,argued that God had blessed the weak and that new Gilded Age fortunes
and corporate management were inherently immoral. As time passed,
American churches increasingly adapted themselves to the new industrial
order. Even Gladden came to accept donations from the so-called robberbarons, such as the Baptist John D. Rockefeller, who increasingly touted
the morality of business. Meanwhile, as many churches wondered about
the compatibility of large fortunes with Christian values, others wereconcerned for the fate of traditional American masculinity.
The economic and social changes of the late nineteenth and earlytwentieth centuries—including increased urbanization, immigration, advancements in science and technology, patterns of consumption and the
new availability of goods, and new awareness of economic, racial, andgender inequalities—challenged traditional gender norms. At the sametime, urban spaces and shifting cultural and social values presented newopportunities to challenge traditional gender and sexual norms. Many
women, carrying on a campaign that stretched long into the past, viedfor equal rights. They became activists: they targeted municipal reforms,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  73

launched labor rights campaigns, and, above all, bolstered the suffrage
movement.
Urbanization and immigration fueled anxieties that old social mores
were being subverted and that old forms of social and moral policing
were increasingly inadequate. The anonymity of urban spaces presented
an opportunity in particular for female sexuality and for male and female
sexual experimentation along a spectrum of orientations and gender
identities. Anxiety over female sexuality reflected generational tensions
and differences, as well as racial and class ones. As young women pushed
back against social mores through premarital sexual exploration andexpression, social welfare experts and moral reformers labeled such girls
feeble-minded, believing even that such unfeminine behavior could be
symptomatic of clinical insanity rather than free-willed expression. Generational differences exacerbated the social and familial tensions provoked by shifting gender norms. Youths challenged the norms of theirparents’ generations by donning new fashions and enjoying the delightsof the city. Women’s fashion loosed its physical constraints: corsets relaxed and hemlines rose. The newfound physical freedom enabled bylooser dress was also mimicked in the pursuit of other freedoms.

Taken in 1895, a few years after the
publication of The Yellow Wallpaper,
this portrait photograph shows activist
Charlotte Perkins Gilman’s feminine
poise and respectability even as shesought massive change to women’splace in society. Gilman, an outspoken supporter of women’s rights,
wrote short stories, novels, and poetrythat challenged the supposedly naturalinferiority of women. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

74

ch apter 18

While many women worked to liberate themselves, many, sometimes
simultaneously, worked to uplift others. Women’s work against alcohol
propelled temperance into one of the foremost moral reforms of the period. Middle-class, typically Protestant women based their assault on alcohol on the basis of their feminine virtue, Christian sentiment, and theirprotective role in the family and home. Others, like Jane Addams andsettlement house workers, sought to impart a middle-class education on
immigrant and working-class women through the establishment of settlement homes. Other reformers touted a “scientific motherhood”: the newscience of hygiene was deployed as a method of both social uplift andmoralizing, particularly of working-class and immigrant women.
Women vocalized new discontents through literature. Charlotte Perkins Gilman’s short story “The Yellow Wallpaper” attacked the “naturalness” of feminine domesticity and critiqued Victorian psychologicalremedies administered to women, such as the “rest cure.” Kate Chopin’s The Awakening, set in the American South, likewise criticized thedomestic and familial role ascribed to women by society and gave expression to feelings of malaise, desperation, and desire. Such literature
directly challenged the status quo of the Victorian era’s constructions offemininity and feminine virtue, as well as established feminine roles.
While many men worried about female activism, they worried too
about their own masculinity. To anxious observers, industrial capitalism
was withering American manhood. Rather than working on farms and infactories, where young men formed physical muscle and spiritual grit, newgenerations of workers labored behind desks, wore white collars, and, inthe words of Supreme Court Justice Oliver Wendell Holmes, appeared“black-coated, stiff-jointed, soft-muscled, [and] paste-complexioned.”20
Neurologist George Beard even coined a medical term, neurasthenia, fora new emasculated condition that was marked by depression, indigestion,
hypochondria, and extreme nervousness. The philosopher William Jamescalled it “Americanitis.” Academics increasingly warned that America
had become a nation of emasculated men.
Churches too worried about feminization. Women had always comprised a clear majority of church memberships in the United States, but
now the theologian Washington Gladden said, “A preponderance of female influence in the Church or anywhere else in society is unnatural andinjurious.” Many feared that the feminized church had feminized Christ
himself. Rather than a rough-hewn carpenter, Jesus had been made“mushy” and “sweetly effeminate,” in the words of Walter Rauschen-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  75

busch. Advocates of a so-called muscular Christianity sought to stiffen
young men’s backbones by putting them back in touch with their primal
manliness. Pulling from contemporary developmental theory, they believed that young men ought to evolve as civilization evolved, advancing from primitive nature-dwelling to modern industrial enlightenment.
To facilitate “primitive” encounters with nature, muscular Christians
founded summer camps and outdoor boys’ clubs like the Woodcraft Indians, the Sons of Daniel Boone, and the Boy Brigades—all precursors of
the Boy Scouts. Other champions of muscular Christianity, such as the
newly formed Young Men’s Christian Association, built gymnasiums,
often attached to churches, where youths could strengthen their bodies as well as their spirits. It was a Young Men’s Christian Association(YMCA) leader who coined the term bodybuilding, and others invented
the sports of basketball and volleyball.21
Muscular Christianity, though, was about even more than building
strong bodies and minds. Many advocates also ardently championed
Western imperialism, cheering on attempts to civilize non-Western peoples. Gilded Age men were encouraged to embrace a particular vision of
masculinity connected intimately with the rising tides of nationalism, militarism, and imperialism. Contemporary ideals of American m­ asculinity

Amusement-hungry Americans flocked to new entertainments at the turn of the twentieth century. In thisearly-twentieth-century photograph, visitors enjoy Luna Park, one of the original amusement parks on
Brooklyn’s famous Coney Island. C. 1910–1915. Library of Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

76

ch apter 18

at the turn of the century developed in concert with the United States’
imperial and militaristic endeavors in the West and abroad. During the
Spanish-American War in 1898, Teddy Roosevelt and his Rough Riders
embodied the idealized image of the tall, strong, virile, and fit American
man that simultaneously epitomized the ideals of power that informed theUnited States’ imperial agenda. Roosevelt and others like him believed areinvigorated masculinity would preserve the American race’s superiority
against foreign foes and the effeminizing effects of overcivilization.
But while many fretted about traditional American life, others lostthemselves in new forms of mass culture. Vaudeville signaled new cultural worlds. A unique variety of popular entertainments, these travelingcircuit shows first appeared during the Civil War and peaked between
1880 and 1920. Vaudeville shows featured comedians, musicians, actors, jugglers, and other talents that could captivate an audience. Unlike earlier rowdy acts meant for a male audience that included alcohol,
vaudeville was considered family-friendly, “polite” entertainment,
though the acts involved offensive ethnic and racial caricatures of African Americans and recent immigrants. Vaudeville performances were
often small and quirky, though venues such as the renowned Palace Theatre in New York City signaled true stardom for many performers. Popular entertainers such as silent film star Charlie Chaplin and magician
Harry Houdini made names for themselves on the vaudeville circuit. But
if live entertainment still captivated audiences, others looked to entirely
new technologies.
By the turn of the century, two technologies pioneered by Edison—
the phonograph and motion pictures—stood ready to revolutionize
leisure and help create the mass entertainment culture of the twentiethcentury. The phonograph was the first reliable device capable of recording and reproducing sound. But it was more than that. The phonographcould create multiple copies of recordings, sparking a great expansion of
the market for popular music. Although the phonograph was a technicalsuccess, Edison at first had trouble developing commercial applications
for it. He thought it might be used for dictation, recording audio letters,preserving speeches and dying words of great men, producing talking
clocks, or teaching elocution. He did not anticipate that its greatest use
would be in the field of mass entertainment, but Edison’s sales agents
soon reported that many phonographs were being used for just that, especially in so-called phonograph parlors, where customers could pay anickel to hear a piece of music. By the turn of the century, Americans© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  77

were purchasing phonographs for home use. Entertainment became thephonograph’s major market.
Inspired by the success of the phonograph as an entertainment device, Edison decided in 1888 to develop “an instrument which does
for the Eye what the phonograph does for the Ear.” In 1888, he patented the concept of motion pictures. In 1889, he innovated the rollingof film. By 1891, he was exhibiting a motion-picture camera (a kinetograph) and a viewer (a kinetoscope). By 1894, the Edison Company had
produced about seventy-five films suitable for sale and viewing. They
could be viewed through a small eyepiece in an arcade or parlor. They
were short, typically about three minutes long. Many of the early films
depicted athletic feats and competitions. One 1894 film, for example,
showed a six-round boxing match. The catalog description gave a senseof the appeal it had for male viewers: “Full of hard fighting, clever hits,
punches, leads, dodges, body blows and some slugging.” Other earlykinetoscope subjects included Indian dances, nature and outdoor scenes,
re-creations of historical events, and humorous skits. By 1896, theEdison Vitascope could project film, shifting audiences away from arcades and pulling them into theaters. Edison’s film catalog meanwhilegrew in sophistication. He sent filmmakers to distant and exotic locales
like Japan and China. Long-form fictional films created a demand for“movie stars,” such as the glamorous Mary Pickford, the swashbuckling
Douglas Fairbanks, the acrobatic comedian Buster Keaton, who began
to appear in the popular imagination beginning around 1910. Alongside professional boxing and baseball, the film industry was creating themodern culture of celebrity that would characterize twentieth-century
mass entertainment.22

VI. Conclusion
After enduring four bloody years of warfare and a strained, decade-longeffort to reconstruct the defeated South, the United States abandoned
itself to industrial development. Businesses expanded in scale and scope.
The nature of labor shifted. A middle class rose. Wealth concentrated.
Immigrants crowded into the cities, which grew upward and outward.
The Jim Crow South stripped away the vestiges of Reconstruction, and
New South boosters papered over the scars. Industrialists hunted profits. Evangelists appealed to people’s morals. Consumers lost themselvesin new goods and new technologies. Women emerging into new urban© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

78

ch apter 18

Designers of the 1893 Columbian Exposition in Chicago built the White City in a neoclassical architectural
style. The integrated design of buildings, walkways, and landscapes propelled the burgeoning City Beautiful
movement. The Fair itself was a huge success, bringing more than twenty-seven million people to Chicago
and helping to establish the ideology of American exceptionalism. Wikimedia.

spaces embraced new social possibilities. In all of its many facets, by
the turn of the twentieth century, the United States had been radicallytransformed. And the transformations continued to ripple outward into
the West and overseas, and inward into radical protest and progressive
reforms. For Americans at the twilight of the nineteenth century and thedawn of the twentieth, a bold new world loomed.

VII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by David Hochfelder, with content contributions by Jacob
Betz, David Hochfelder, Gerard Koeppel, Scott Libson, Kyle Livie, Paul Matzko,
Isabella Morales, Andrew Robichaud, Kate Sohasky, Joseph Super, Susan Thomas,
Kaylynn Washnock, and Kevin Young.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  79

Recommended citation: Jacob Betz et al., “Life in Industrial America,” David
Hochfelder, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright(Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N o t e s t o C h a p t e r 18
1. Rudyard Kipling, The Works of Rudyard Kipling, Volume II (New York:
Doubleday, 1899), 141.
2. For the transformation of Chicago, see William Cronon’s defining work,
Nature’s Metropolis: Chicago and the West (New York: Norton, 1991).
3. See Richard White, Railroaded: The Transcontinentals and the Making ofModern America (New York: Norton, 2011).
4. Cronon, Nature’s Metropolis, 239.
5. David Hochfelder, “Edison and the Age of Invention,” in A Companion
to the Reconstruction Presidents 1865–1881, ed. Edward O. Frantz (Chichester,
UK: Blackwell, 2014), 499.
6. Ibid., 499–517.
7. William L. Riordon, Plunkitt of Tammany Hall: A Series of Very Plain
Talks on Very Practical Politics (New York: McClure, Phillips, 1905).
8. Kenyon L. Butterfield, Chapters in Rural Progress (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1908), 15.
9. L. H. Bailey, The Harvest of the Year to the Tiller of the Soil (New York:
Macmillan, 1927), 60.
10. Oscar Osburn Winther, “The Rise of Metropolitan Los Angeles, 1870–
1900,” Huntington Library Quarterly 10 (August 1947), 391–405.
11. “Chamber Meeting,” Glendora Gleaner, September 28, 1923.
12. Henry Grady, The Complete Orations and Speeches of Henry Grady, ed.
Edwin DuBois Shurter (New York: Hinds, Noble and Eldredge, 1910), 7.
13. William Fitzhugh Brundage, Lynching in the New South: Georgia andVirginia, 1880–1930 (Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1993), 82–84.
14. Grace Elizabeth Hale, Making Whiteness: The Culture of Segregation in
the South, 1890–1940 (New York: Pantheon Books, 1998), 201.
15. Jacquelyn Dowd Hall, Revolt Against Chivalry: Jessie Daniel Ames andthe Women’s Campaign Against Lynching (New York: Columbia University
Press, 1993), 195.
16. Ida B. Wells, Crusade for Justice: The Autobiography of Ida B. Wells(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970).
17. Charles Reagan Wilson, Baptized in Blood: The Religion of the Lost
Cause, 1865–1920 (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1980).
18. Washington Gladden, The New Idolatry and Other Discussions (NewYork: McClure, Phillips, 1905), 21.
19. Andrew Carnegie, “Wealth,” North American Review 391 (June 1889):
656, 660.
20. Michael S. Kimmel, Manhood in America: A Cultural History (NewYork: Oxford University Press, 2006), 41.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

80

ch apter 18

21. Norman Vance, The Sinews of the Spirit: The Ideal of Christian Manliness in Victorian Literature and Religious Thought (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1985).
22. Hochfelder, “Edison and the Age of Invention,” 499–517.
R e c o m m e n d e d R e a di n g
Ayers, Edward. The Promise of the New South. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1992.
Beckert, Sven. Monied Metropolis: New York City and the Consolidation of theAmerican Bourgeoisie, 1850–1896. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press, 2001.
Bederman, Gail. Manliness and Civilization: A Cultural History of Gender andRace in the United States, 1880–1917. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1995.
Blight, David. Race and Reunion: The Civil War in American Memory. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001.
Briggs, Laura. “The Race of Hysteria: ‘Overcivilization’ and the ‘Savage’ Woman
in Late Nineteenth-Century Obstetrics and Gynecology.” American Quarterly 52 (June 2000). 246–273.
Chauncey, George. Gay New York: Gender, Urban Culture, and the Making of
the Gay Male World, 1890–1940. New York: Basic Books, 1995.
Cole, Stephanie, and Natalie J. Ring, eds. The Folly of Jim Crow: Rethinking the
Segregated South. College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 2012.
Cott, Nancy. The Grounding of Modern Feminism. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1987.
Cronon, William. Nature’s Metropolis: Chicago and the Great West. New York:
Norton, 1991.
Edwards, Rebecca. New Spirits: Americans in the Gilded Age, 1865–1905. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Gilmore, Glenda Elizabeth. Gender and Jim Crow: Women and the Politics ofWhite Supremacy in North Carolina, 1896–1920. Chapel Hill: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 1996.
Gutman, Herbert. Work, Culture and Society in Industrializing America: Essays
in American Working-Class and Social History. New York: Knopf, 1976.
Hale, Grace Elizabeth. Making Whiteness: The Culture of Segregation in theSouth, 1890–1940. New York: Pantheon Books, 1998.
Hicks, Cheryl. Talk with You Like a Woman: African American Women, Justice,and Reform in New York, 1890–1935. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2010.
Kasson, John F. Amusing the Million: Coney Island at the Turn of the Century.
New York: Hill and Wang, 1978.
Leach, William. Land of Desire: Merchants, Power, and the Rise of a New American Culture. New York: Random House, 1993.
Lears, T. J. Jackson. No Place of Grace: Antimodernism and the Transformation of American Culture, 1880–1920. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1981.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

L i f e i n I n d u s t r ial A m e r i c a  81

Odem, Mary. Delinquent Daughters: Protecting and Policing Adolescent Female
Sexuality in the United States, 1885–1920. Chapel Hill: University of North
Carolina Press, 1995.
Peiss, Kathy. Cheap Amusements. Working Women and Leisure in Turn-of-theCentury New York. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1986.
Peiss, Kathy. Hope in a Jar: The Making of America’s Beauty Culture. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1999.
Putney, Clifford. Manhood and Sports in Protestant America, 1880–1920. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001.
Silber, Nina. The Romance of Reunion: Northerners and the South, 1865–1900.
Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1997.
Strouse, Jean. Alice James: A Biography. New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1980.
Trachtenberg, Alan. The Incorporation of America: Culture and Society in the
Gilded Age. New York: Hill and Wang, 2007.
Woodward, C. Vann. Origins of the New South, 1877–1913. Baton Rouge: LSU
Press, 1951.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

19
American Empire
I. Introduction
The word empire might conjure images of ancient Rome, the Persian
Empire, or the British Empire—powers that depended variously on
military conquest, colonization, occupation, or direct resource exploitation—but empires can take many forms and imperial processes can occur
in many contexts. One hundred years after the United States won its independence from the British Empire, had it become an empire of its own?
In the decades after the American Civil War, the United States exerted
itself in the service of American interests around the world. In the Pacific,
Latin America, and the Middle East, and most explicitly in the SpanishAmerican War and under the foreign policy of Theodore Roosevelt andWilliam Howard Taft, the United States expanded on a long history of
exploration, trade, and cultural exchange to practice something thatlooked remarkably like empire. The question of American imperialism,

A political cartoon
in Puck magazine
on January 25,
1899, captures
the mindset ofAmerican imperialists. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  83

then, seeks to understand not only direct American interventions in suchplaces as Cuba, the Philippines, Hawaii, Guam, and Puerto Rico, but also
the deeper history of American engagement with the wider world and thesubsequent ways in which American economic, political, and cultural
power has shaped the actions, choices, and possibilities of other groups
and nations.
Meanwhile, as the United States asserted itself abroad, it acquired
increasingly higher numbers of foreign peoples at home. European andAsian immigrants poured into the United States. In a sense, imperialism
and immigration raised similar questions about American identity: Who
was an “American,” and who wasn’t? What were the nation’s obligations to foreign powers and foreign peoples? And how accessible—and
how fluid—should American identity be for newcomers? All such questions confronted late-nineteenth-century Americans with unprecedented
urgency.

II. Patterns of American Interventions
American interventions in Mexico, China, and the Middle East reflected
the United States’ new eagerness to intervene in foreign governments toprotect American economic interests abroad.
The United States had long been involved in Pacific commerce.
American ships had been traveling to China, for instance, since 1784.
As a percentage of total American foreign trade, Asian trade remained
comparatively small, and yet the idea that Asian markets were vital toAmerican commerce affected American policy and, when those markets
were threatened, prompted interventions.1 In 1899, secretary of state
John Hay articulated the Open Door Policy, which called for all Western powers to have equal access to Chinese markets. Hay feared that
other imperial powers—Japan, Great Britain, Germany, France, Italy,
and Russia—planned to carve China into spheres of influence. It was in
the economic interest of American business to maintain China for free
trade. The following year, in 1900, American troops joined a multinational force that intervened to prevent the closing of trade by putting
down the Boxer Rebellion, a movement opposed to foreign businesses
and missionaries operating in China. President McKinley sent the U.S.
Army without consulting Congress, setting a precedent for U.S. presidents to order American troops to action around the world under their
executive powers.2© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

84

ch apt er 19

The United States was not only ready to intervene in foreign affairs
to preserve foreign markets, it was willing to take territory. The UnitedStates acquired its first Pacific territories with the Guano Islands Act of1856. Guano—collected bird excrement—was a popular fertilizer integral to industrial farming. The act authorized and encouraged Americans
to venture into the seas and claim islands with guano deposits for theUnited States. These acquisitions were the first insular, unincorporated
territories of the United States: they were neither part of a state nor afederal district, and they were not on the path to ever attain such a status.
The act, though little known, offered a precedent for future Americanacquisitions.3
Merchants, of course, weren’t the only American travelers in the Pacific. Christian missionaries soon followed explorers and traders. The
first American missionaries arrived in Hawaii in 1820 and China in
1830, for instance. Missionaries, though, often worked alongside business interests, and American missionaries in Hawaii, for instance, obtained large tracts of land and started lucrative sugar plantations. During
the nineteenth century, Hawaii was ruled by an oligarchy based on thesugar companies, together known as the “Big Five.” This white American(haole) elite was extremely powerful, but they still operated outside theformal expression of American state power.4
As many Americans looked for empire across the Pacific, others
looked to Latin America. The United States, long a participant in an
increasingly complex network of economic, social, and cultural interactions in Latin America, entered the late nineteenth century with a new
aggressive and interventionist attitude toward its southern neighbors.
American capitalists invested enormous sums of money in Mexico
during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, during the long
reign of the corrupt yet stable regime of the modernization-hungry president Porfirio Diaz. But in 1910 the Mexican people revolted against
Díaz, ending his authoritarian regime but also his friendliness toward
the business interests of the United States. In the midst of the terrible
destruction wrought by the fighting, Americans with investment interests pleaded for governmental help. But the U.S. government tried tocontrol events and politics that could not be controlled. More and more
American businessmen called for military intervention. When the brutal
strongman Victoriano Huerta executed the revolutionary, democraticallyelected president Francisco Madero in 1913, newly inaugurated American president Woodrow Wilson put pressure on Mexico’s new regime.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  85

Wilson refused to recognize the new government and demanded that
Huerta step aside and allow free elections to take place. Huerta refused.5
When Mexican forces mistakenly arrested American sailors in theport city of Tampico in April 1914, Wilson saw the opportunity to apply
additional pressure on Huerta. Huerta refused to make amends, and Wilson therefore asked Congress for authority to use force against Mexico.
But even before Congress could respond, Wilson invaded and took theport city of Veracruz to prevent, he said, a German shipment of arms
from reaching Huerta’s forces. The Huerta government fell in July 1914,
and the American occupation lasted until November, when Venustiano
Carranza, a rival of Huerta, took power. When Wilson threw American
support behind Carranza, and not his more radical and now-rival Pancho
Villa, Villa and several hundred supporters attacked American interests
and raided the town of Columbus, New Mexico, in March 1916, andkilled over a dozen soldiers and civilians. Wilson ordered a punitive expedition of several thousand soldiers led by General John J. “Blackjack”
Pershing to enter northern Mexico and capture Villa. But Villa eluded
Pershing for nearly a year and, in 1917, with war in Europe looming andgreat injury done to U.S.-Mexican relations, Pershing left Mexico.6
The United States’ actions during the Mexican Revolution reflectedlong-standing American policy that justified interventionist actions in
Latin American politics because of their potential bearing on the UnitedStates: on citizens, on shared territorial borders, and, perhaps most significantly, on economic investments. This example highlights the role ofgeography, or perhaps proximity, in the pursuit of imperial outcomes.
But American interactions in more distant locations, in the Middle East,for instance, look quite different.
In 1867, Mark Twain traveled to the Middle East as part of a large
tour group of Americans. In his satirical travelogue, The Innocents
Abroad, he wrote, “The people [of the Middle East] stared at us everywhere, and we [Americans] stared at them. We generally made them feelrather small, too, before we got done with them, because we bore downon them with America’s greatness until we crushed them.”7 When Americans later intervened in the Middle East, they would do so convinced of
their own superiority.
The U.S. government had traditionally had little contact with the
Middle East. Trade was limited, too limited for an economic relationshipto be deemed vital to the national interest, but treaties were neverthelesssigned between the U.S. and powers in the Middle East. Still, the majority© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

86

ch apt er 19of American involvement in the Middle East prior to World War I camenot in the form of trade but in education, science, and humanitarian aid.
American missionaries led the way. The first Protestant missionaries had
arrived in 1819. Soon the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions and the boards of missions of the Reformed Church of America
became dominant in missionary enterprises. Missions were established inalmost every country of the Middle East, and even though their efforts
resulted in relatively few converts, missionaries helped establish hospitals
and schools, and their work laid the foundation for the establishmentof Western-style universities, such as Robert College in Istanbul, Turkey(1863), the American University of Beirut (1866), and the American University of Cairo (1919).8

III. 1898
Although the United States had a long history of international economic,
military, and cultural engagement that stretched back deep into the eighteenth century, the Spanish-American and Philippine-American Wars
(1898–1902) marked a crucial turning point in American interventions
abroad. In pursuing war with Spain, and then engaging in counterrevolutionary conflict in the Philippines, the United States expanded the scopeand strength of its global reach. Over the next two decades, the UnitedStates would become increasingly involved in international politics,
particularly in Latin America. These new conflicts and ensuing territorial problems forced Americans to confront the ideological elements ofimperialism. Should the United States act as an empire? Or were foreign interventions and the taking of territory antithetical to its founding
democratic ideals? What exactly would be the relationship between the
United States and its territories? And could colonial subjects be successfully and safely incorporated into the body politic as American citizens?
The Spanish-American and Philippine-American Wars brought thesequestions, which had always lurked behind discussions of American expansion, out into the open.
In 1898, Americans began in earnest to turn their attention southward to problems plaguing their neighbor Cuba. Since the middle of thenineteenth century, Cubans had tried unsuccessfully again and again
to gain independence from Spain. The latest uprising, and the one thatwould prove fatal to Spain’s colonial designs, began in 1895 and was still
raging in the winter of 1898. By that time, in an attempt to crush the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  87

In this political cartoon, Uncle Sam, loaded with the implements of modern civilization, uses the Philippines as a stepping-stone to cross the Pacific to China, which excitedly awaits Sam’s arrival. Such cartoons
captured Americans’ growing infatuation with imperialist and expansionist policies. C. 1900–1902.
Wikimedia.

uprising, Spanish general Valeriano Weyler y Nicolau had been conducting a policy of reconcentration—forcing Cubans living in certain cities
to relocate en masse to military camps—for about two years. Prominent
newspaper publishers sensationalized Spanish atrocities. Cubans in the
United States and their allies raised cries of Cuba Libre! And while theU.S. government proclaimed a wish to avoid armed conflict with Spain,
President McKinley became increasingly concerned about the safety ofAmerican lives and property in Cuba. He ordered the battleship Maine
to Havana harbor in January 1898.
The Maine sat undisturbed in the harbor for about two weeks. Then,on the evening of February 15, a titanic explosion tore open the ship andsent it to the bottom of the ocean. Three quarters of the ship’s 354 occupants died. A naval board of inquiry immediately began an investigation© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

88

ch apt er 19

to ascertain the cause of the explosion, but the loudest Americans had
already decided that Spanish treachery was to blame. Capitalizing on
the outrage, “yellow journals”—newspapers that promoted sensational
stories, notoriously at the cost of accuracy—such as William Randolph
Hearst’s New York Journal called for war with Spain. When urgent negotiations failed to produce a mutually agreeable settlement, Congress
officially declared war on April 25.
Although America’s war effort began haphazardly, Spain’s decaying
military crumbled. Military victories for the United States came quickly.
In the Pacific, on May 1, Commodore George Dewey engaged the Spanish
fleet outside Manila, the capital of the Philippines (another Spanish colonial possession), destroyed it, and proceeded to blockade Manila harbor.
Two months later, American troops took Cuba’s San Juan Heights in what
would become the most well-known battle of the war, winning fame notfor regular soldiers but for the irregular, especially Theodore Roosevelt
and his Rough Riders. Roosevelt had been the assistant secretary of thenavy but had resigned his position in order to see action in the war. His actions in Cuba made him a national celebrity. As disease began to eat away
at American troops, the Spanish suffered the loss of Santiago de Cuba on
July 17, effectively ending the war. The two nations agreed to a cease-fire on
August 12 and formally signed the Treaty of Paris in December. The termsof the treaty stipulated, among other things, that the United States would
acquire Spain’s former holdings of Guam, Puerto Rico, and the Philippines.
Secretary of state John Hay memorably referred to the conflict asa “splendid little war,” and at the time it certainly appeared that way.
Fewer than four hundred Americans died in battle in a war that lasted
about fifteen weeks. Contemporaries celebrated American victories as
the providential act of God. The influential Brooklyn minister Lyman
Abbott, for instance, declared that Americans were “an elect people ofGod” and saw divine providence in Dewey’s victory at Manila.9 Some,such as Senator Albert J. Beveridge of Indiana, took matters one stepfurther, seeing in American victory an opportunity for imperialism. In
Beveridge’s view, America had a “mission to perform” and a “duty todischarge” around the world.10 What Beveridge envisioned was nothing
less than an American empire.
But the question of whether the United States should become an
empire was sharply debated across the nation in the aftermath of the
Spanish-American War and the acquisition of Hawaii in July 1898. At
the behest of American businessmen who had overthrown the Hawaiian© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  89

This 1914 political cartoon shows abefore and after: the Spanish colonies
before intervention by America andthose same former colonies after. The
differences are obvious and exaggerated, with the top Figure s describedas “oppressed” by the weight ofindustrial slavery until America“rescued” them, turning them into therespectable and successful businessmen
seen on the bottom half. Those who
claimed that American imperialism
brought civilization and prosperity todestitute peoples used such visuals to
support their cause. Wikimedia.

monarchy, the United States annexed the Hawaiian Islands and their richplantations. Between Hawaii and a number of former Spanish possessions, many Americans coveted the economic and political advantages
that increased territory would bring. Those opposed to expansion, however, worried that imperial ambitions did not accord with the nation’s
founding ideals. American actions in the Philippines brought all of these
discussions to a head.
The Philippines were an afterthought of the Spanish-American War,but when the smoke cleared, the United States found itself in possession of a key foothold in the Pacific. After Dewey’s victory over the
Spanish fleet in the Battle of Manila Bay, conversations about how toproceed occupied the attentions of President McKinley, political leaders from both parties, and the popular press. American and Philippine
forces (under the leadership of Emilio Aguinaldo) were in communication: Would the Americans offer their support to the Filipinos and their
ongoing efforts against the Spanish? Or would the Americans replace the
Spanish as a colonial occupying force? American forces were instructed
to secure Manila without allowing Philippine forces to enter the Walled© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

90

ch apt er 19

City (the seat of the Spanish colonial government), hinting, perhaps, atthings to come. Americans wondered what would happen next. Perhaps
a good many ordinary Americans shared the bewildered sentiments of
Mr. Dooley, the fictional Irish-American barkeeper whom humorist Finley Peter Dunne used to satirize American life: “I don’t know what to dowith th’ Ph’lippeens anny more thin I did las’ summer, befure I heerd telliv thim. . . . We can’t sell thim, we can’t ate thim, an’ we can’t throw thim
into the th’ alley whin no wan is lookin’.”11
As debates about American imperialism continued against the backdrop of an upcoming presidential election, tensions in the Philippines
escalated. Emilio Aguinaldo was inaugurated as president of the First
Philippine Republic (or Malolos Republic) in late January 1899; fighting
between American and Philippine forces began in early February; and in
April 1899, Congress ratified the 1898 Treaty of Paris, which concluded
the Spanish-American War and gave Spain $20 million in exchange for
the Philippine Islands.12
Like the Cubans, Filipinos had waged a long war against their Spanish colonizers. The United States could have given them the independence
they had long fought for, but, instead, at the behest of President William McKinley, the United States occupied the islands and from 1899 to1902 waged a bloody series of conflicts against Filipino insurrectioniststhat cost far more lives than the war with Spain. Under the leadershipof Emilio Aguinaldo, Filipinos who had fought for freedom against the
Spanish now fought for freedom against the very nation that had claimed
to have liberated them from Spanish tyranny.13
The Philippine Insurrection, or the Philippine-American War, was a
brutal conflict of occupation and insurgency. Contemporaries compared
the guerrilla-style warfare in challenging and unfamiliar terrain to theAmerican experiences in the Indian Wars of the late nineteenth century.
Many commented on its brutality and the uncertain mission of American
troops. An April 1899 dispatch from a Harper’s Weekly correspondent
began, “A week has passed—a week of fighting and marching, of jungles
and rivers, of incident and adventure so varied and of so rapid transition
that to sit down to write about it makes one feel as if he were trying to describe a dream where time, space, and all the logical sequences of ordinary
life are upset in the unrelenting brutality of war.”14 John Bass described
his experiences in detail, and his reportage, combined with accounts thatcame directly from soldiers, helped shape public knowledge about thewar. Reports of cruelty on both sides and a few high-profile military investigations ensured continued public attention to events across the Pacific.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  91

Amid fighting to secure the Philippine Islands, the federal government
sent two Philippine Commissions to assess the situation in the islands
and make recommendations for a civilian colonial government. A civilian administration, with William H. Taft as the first governor-general(1901–1903), was established with military support. Although President
Theodore Roosevelt declared the war to be over in 1902, resistance andoccasional fighting continued into the second decade of the twentiethcentury.15
Debates about American imperialism dominated headlines andtapped into core ideas about American identity and the proper role of
the United States in the larger world. Should a former colony, establishedon the principles of freedom, liberty, and sovereignty, become a colonizer itself? What was imperialism, anyway? Many framed the Filipino
conflict as a Protestant, civilizing mission. Others framed American imperialism in the Philippines as nothing new, as simply the extension of anever-ending westward American expansion. It was simply destiny. SomeIn this 1900 political cartoon, President McKinley measures an obese Uncle Sam for larger clothing, whileanti-expansionists like Joseph Pulitzer unsuccessfully offer him a weight-loss elixir. As the nation increased
its imperialistic presence and mission, many worried that America would grow too big for its own good.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

92

ch apt er 19

saw imperialism as a way to reenergize the nation by asserting national
authority and power around the globe. Others baldly recognized the opportunities the Philippine Islands presented for access to Asian markets.
But critics grew loud. The American Anti-Imperialist League, founded in1899 and populated by such prominent Americans as Mark Twain, Andrew Carnegie, and Jane Addams, protested American imperial actions
and articulated a platform that decried foreign subjugation and upheld
the rights of all to self-governance. Still others embraced anti-imperialist
stances because of concerns about immigration and American racial
identity, afraid that American purity stood imperiled by contact withstrange and foreign peoples. For whatever reason, however, the onset or
acceleration of imperialism was a controversial and landmark moment in
American history. America had become a preeminent force in the world.

IV. Theodore Roosevelt and American Imperialism
Under the leadership of President Theodore Roosevelt, the United States
emerged from the nineteenth century with ambitious designs on global
power through military might, territorial expansion, and economic influence. Though the Spanish-American War had begun under the administration of William McKinley, Roosevelt—the hero of San Juan Hill,
assistant secretary of the navy, vice president, and president—was arguably the most visible and influential proponent of American imperialism
at the turn of the century. Roosevelt’s emphasis on developing the American navy, and on Latin America as a key strategic area of U.S. foreign
policy, would have long-term consequences.
In return for Roosevelt’s support of the Republican nominee, William
McKinley, in the 1896 presidential election, McKinley appointed Roosevelt as assistant secretary of the navy. The head of the department, John
Long, had a competent but lackadaisical managerial style that allowed
Roosevelt a great deal of freedom that Roosevelt used to network withsuch luminaries as military theorists Alfred Thayer Mahan and naval
officer George Dewey and politicians such as Henry Cabot Lodge andWilliam Howard Taft. During his tenure he oversaw the construction of
new battleships and the implementation of new technology and laid thegroundwork for new shipyards, all with the goal of projecting America’s
power across the oceans. Roosevelt wanted to expand American influence. For instance, he advocated for the annexation of Hawaii for several
reasons: it was within the American sphere of influence, it would deny© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  93

Japanese expansion and limit potential threats to the West Coast, it had
an excellent port for battleships at Pearl Harbor, and it would act as afueling station on the way to pivotal markets in Asia.16
Roosevelt, after winning headlines in the war, ran as vice president
under McKinley and rose to the presidency after McKinley’s assassination by the anarchist Leon Czolgosz in 1901. Among his many interventions in American life, Roosevelt acted with vigor to expand the military,
bolstering naval power especially, to protect and promote Americaninterests abroad. This included the construction of eleven battleships between 1904 and 1907. Alfred Thayer Mahan’s naval theories, describedin his The Influence of Sea Power upon History, influenced Roosevelt
a great deal. In contrast to theories that advocated for commerce raiding, coastal defense, and small “brown water” ships, the imperative tocontrol the sea required battleships and a “blue water” navy that could
engage and win decisive battles with rival fleets. As president, Roosevelt continued the policies he established as assistant secretary of thenavy and expanded the U.S. fleet. The mission of the Great White Fleet,

Teddy Roosevelt,a politician
turned soldier,gained fame after
he and his RoughRiders took San
Juan Hill. Images
like this poster
praised Roosevelt
and the battle as
Americans celebrated a “splendid
little war.” 1899.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

94

ch apt er 19s­ ixteen all-white battleships that sailed around the world between 1907
and 1909, exemplified America’s new power.17
Roosevelt insisted that the “big stick” and the persuasive power of
the U.S. military could ensure U.S. hegemony over strategically important regions in the Western Hemisphere. The United States used militaryintervention in various circumstances to further its objectives, but it did
not have the ability or the inclination to militarily impose its will on theentirety of South and Central America. The United States therefore more
often used informal methods of empire, such as so-called dollar diplomacy, to assert dominance over the hemisphere.
The United States actively intervened again and again in Latin America. Throughout his time in office, Roosevelt exerted U.S. control over
Cuba (even after it gained formal independence in 1902) and Puerto
Rico, and he deployed naval forces to ensure Panama’s independence
from Colombia in 1901 in order to acquire a U.S. Canal Zone. Furthermore, Roosevelt pronounced the Roosevelt Corollary to the Monroe
Doctrine in 1904, proclaiming U.S. police power in the Caribbean. As
articulated by President James Monroe in his annual address to Congressin 1823, the United States would treat any military intervention in Latin
America by a European power as a threat to American security. Roosevelt reaffirmed the Monroe Doctrine and expanded it by declaring that
the United States had the right to preemptive action through intervention
in any Latin American nation in order to correct administrative and fiscal
deficiencies.18
Roosevelt’s policy justified numerous and repeated police actions in“dysfunctional” Caribbean and Latin American countries by U.S. Marines and naval forces and enabled the founding of the naval base at
Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. This approach is sometimes referred to as gunboat diplomacy, wherein naval forces and Marines land in a national
capital to protect American and Western personnel, temporarily seize
control of the government, and dictate policies friendly to Americanbusiness, such as the repayment of foreign loans. For example, in 1905
Roosevelt sent the Marines to occupy the Dominican Republic and established financial supervision over the Dominican government. Imperialists often framed such actions as almost humanitarian. They celebrated
white Anglo-Saxon societies such as those found in the United States andthe British Empire as advanced practitioners of nation-building and civilization, helping to uplift debtor nations in Latin America that lacked the
manly qualities of discipline and self-control. Roosevelt, for instance,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  95

preached that it was the “manly duty” of the United States to exercise
an international police power in the Caribbean and to spread the benefitsof Anglo-Saxon civilization to inferior states populated by inferior peoples. The president’s language, for instance, contrasted debtor nations’“impotence” with the United States’ civilizing influence, belying new
ideas that associated self-restraint and social stability with Anglo-Saxon
manliness.19
Dollar diplomacy offered a less costly method of empire and avoided
the troubles of military occupation. Washington worked with bankers
to provide loans to Latin American nations in exchange for some levelof control over their national fiscal affairs. Roosevelt first implemented
dollar diplomacy on a vast scale, while Presidents Taft and Wilson continued the practice in various forms during their own administrations.
All confronted instability in Latin America. Rising debts to European andAmerican bankers allowed for the inroads of modern life but destabilized
much of the region. Bankers, beginning with financial houses in London
and New York, saw Latin America as an opportunity for investment.
Lenders took advantage of the region’s newly formed governments’ needfor cash and exacted punishing interest rates on massive loans, whichwere then sold off in pieces on the secondary bond market. American
economic interests were now closely aligned with the region but also further undermined by the chronic instability of the region’s newly formed
governments, which were often plagued by mismanagement, civil wars,
and military coups in the decades following their independence. Turnoverin regimes interfered with the repayment of loans, as new governments
often repudiated the national debt or forced a renegotiation with suddenly powerless lenders.20
Creditors could not force settlements of loans until they successfully
lobbied their own governments to get involved and forcibly collect debts.
The Roosevelt administration did not want to deny the Europeans’ rightful demands of repayment of debt, but it also did not want to encourage
European policies of conquest in the hemisphere as part of that debt
collection. U.S. policy makers and military strategists within the Roosevelt administration determined that this European practice of militaryintervention posed a serious threat to American interests in the region.
Roosevelt reasoned that the United States must create and maintain fiscal and political stability within strategically important nations in Latin
America, particularly those affecting routes to and from the proposed
Panama Canal. As a result, U.S. policy makers considered intervention© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

96

ch apt er 19

in places like Cuba and the Dominican Republic a necessity to ensure
security around the region.21
The Monroe Doctrine provided the Roosevelt administration with adiplomatic and international legal tradition through which it could assert
a U.S. right and obligation to intervene in the hemisphere. The Roosevelt
Corollary to the Monroe Doctrine asserted that the United States wishedto promote stable, prosperous states in Latin America that could live
up to their political and financial obligations. Roosevelt declared that“wrongdoing, or an impotence which results in a general loosening of
the ties of civilized society, may finally require intervention by some
civilized nation, and in the Western Hemisphere the United States cannot
ignore this duty.”22 President Monroe declared what Europeans could
not do in the Western Hemisphere; Roosevelt inverted his doctrine tolegitimize direct U.S. intervention in the region.23
Though aggressive and bellicose, Roosevelt did not necessarily advocate expansion by military force. In fact, the president insisted that indealings with the Latin American nations, he did not seek national glory
or expansion of territory and believed that war or intervention should bea last resort when resolving conflicts with problematic governments. According to Roosevelt, such actions were necessary to maintain “order andcivilization.”24 Then again, Roosevelt certainly believed in using military
power to protect national interests and spheres of influence when absolutely necessary. He also believed that the American sphere included
not only Hawaii and the Caribbean but also much of the Pacific. WhenJapanese victories over Russia threatened the regional balance of power,
he sponsored peace talks between Russian and Japanese leaders, earning
him a Nobel Peace Prize in 1906.

V. Women and Imperialism
Debates over American imperialism revolved around more than just politics and economics and national self-interest. They also included notionsof humanitarianism, morality, religion, and ideas of “civilization.” And
they included significant participation by American women.
In the fall of 1903, Margaret McLeod, age twenty-one, originally of
Boston, found herself in Australia on family business and in need of income. Fortuitously, she made the acquaintance of Alexander MacWillie,
the top salesman for the H. J. Heinz Company, who happened to belooking for a young lady to serve as a “demonstrator” of Heinz products© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  97

With much satisfaction, Columbia puts on
her “Easter Bonnet,” a hat shaped like awarship and labeled World Power. By 1901,
when this political cartoon was published,
Americans felt confident in their country’s
position as a world leader. Wikimedia.

to potential consumers. McLeod proved to be such an attractive purveyor of India relish and baked beans that she accompanied MacWillieon the rest of his tour of Australia and continued on to South Africa,
India, and Japan. Wherever she went, this “dainty young girl with golden
hair in white cap and tucker” drew attention to Heinz’s products, but,in a much larger sense, she was also projecting an image of middle-class
American domesticity, of pure womanhood. Heinz saw itself not only
as purveying economical and healthful foodstuffs—it was bringing theblessings of civilization to the world.25
When commentators, such as Theodore Roosevelt in his speech on“the strenuous life,” spoke about America’s overseas ventures, they generally gave the impression that this was a strictly masculine e­ nterprise—thework of soldiers, sailors, government officials, explorers, businessmen,
and scientists. But in fact, U.S. imperialism, which focused as much on
economic and cultural influence as on military or political power, offered a range of opportunities for white, middle-class, Christian women.
In addition to working as representatives of American business, women© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

98

ch apt er 19

could serve as missionaries, teachers, and medical professionals, and as
artists and writers they were inspired by and helped transmit ideas about
imperialism.
Moreover, the rhetoric of civilization that underlay imperialism wasitself a highly gendered concept. According to the racial theory of theday, humans progressed through hierarchical stages of civilization in anorderly, linear fashion. Only Europeans and Americans had attained thehighest level of civilization, which was superficially marked by whiteness but also included an industrial economy and a gender division inwhich men and women had diverging but complementary roles. Social
and technological progress had freed women of the burdens of physicallabor and elevated them to a position of moral and spiritual authority.
White women thus potentially had important roles to play in U.S. imperialism, both as symbols of the benefits of American civilization and as
vehicles for the transmission of American values.26
Civilization, while often cloaked in the language of morality andChristianity, was very much an economic concept. The stages of civilization were primarily marked by their economic character (hunter-gatherer,
agricultural, industrial), and the consumption of industrially produced
commodities was seen as a key moment in the progress of “savages”
toward civilized life. Over the course of the nineteenth century, womenin the West, for instance, had become closely associated with consumption, particularly of those commodities used in the domestic sphere. Thus
it must have seemed natural for Alexander MacWillie to hire Margaret
McLeod to “demonstrate” ketchup and chili sauce at the same time as
she “demonstrated” white, middle-class domesticity. By adopting theuse of such progressive products in their homes, consumers could potentially absorb even the virtues of American civilization.27
In some ways, women’s work in support of imperialism can be seen as
an extension of the kind of activities many of them were already engaged
in among working-class, immigrant, and Native American communities in the United States. Many white women felt that they had a dutyto spread the benefits of Christian civilization to those less fortunate
than themselves. American overseas ventures, then, merely expanded thescope of these activities—literally, in that the geographical range of possibilities encompassed practically the entire globe, and figuratively, in thatimperialism significantly raised the stakes of women’s work. No longer
only responsible for shaping the next generation of American citizens,
white women now had a crucial role to play in the maintenance of civili-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  99

zation itself. They too would help determine whether civilization would
continue to progress.
Of course, not all women were active supporters of U.S. imperialism.
Many actively opposed it. Although the most prominent public voices
against imperialism were male, women made up a large proportion of themembership of organizations like the Anti-Imperialist League. For white
women like Jane Addams and Josephine Shaw Lowell, anti-imperialist
activism was an outgrowth of their work in opposition to violence andin support of democracy. Black female activists, meanwhile, generally
viewed imperialism as a form of racial antagonism and drew parallels
between the treatments of African Americans at home and, for example,
Filipinos abroad. Indeed, Ida B. Wells viewed her anti-lynching campaign
as a kind of anti-imperialist activism.

VI. Immigration
For Americans at the turn of the century, imperialism and immigration
were two sides of the same coin. The involvement of American womenwith imperialist and anti-imperialist activity demonstrates how foreign
policy concerns were brought home and became, in a sense, domesticated. It is also no coincidence that many of the women involved inboth imperialist and anti-imperialist organizations were also concernedwith the plight of new arrivals to the United States. Industrialization,
imperialism, and immigration were all linked. Imperialism had at its corea desire for markets for American goods, and those goods were increasingly manufactured by immigrant labor. This sense of growing dependence on “others” as producers and consumers, along with doubts about
their capability of assimilation into the mainstream of white, ProtestantAmerican society, caused a great deal of anxiety among native-born
Americans.
Between 1870 and 1920, over twenty-five million immigrants arrived
in the United States. This migration was largely a continuation of a process begun before the Civil War, though by the turn of the twentiethcentury, new groups such as Italians, Poles, and Eastern European Jews
made up a larger percentage of the arrivals while Irish and German numbers began to dwindle.
Although the growing U.S. economy needed large numbers of immigrant workers for its factories and mills, many Americans reacted
negatively to the arrival of so many immigrants. Nativists opposed mass

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

100

ch apt er 19

Nativist sentiment intensified in the late nineteenth century as immigrants streamed into American cities.
Uncle Sam’s Lodging House, published in 1882, conveys this anti-immigrant attitude, with caricatured
representations of Europeans, Asians, and African Americans creating a chaotic scene. Wikimedia.

immigration for various reasons. Some felt that the new arrivals were
unfit for American democracy, and that Irish or Italian immigrants usedviolence or bribery to corrupt municipal governments. Others (often earlier immigrants themselves) worried that the arrival of even more immigrants would result in fewer jobs and lower wages. Such fears combined
and resulted in anti-Chinese protests on the West Coast in the 1870s. Stillothers worried that immigrants brought with them radical ideas suchas socialism and communism. These fears multiplied after the Chicago
Haymarket affair in 1886, in which immigrants were accused of killing
police officers in a bomb blast.28
In September 1876, Franklin Benjamin Sanborn, a member of the
Massachusetts Board of State Charities, gave an address in support ofthe introduction of regulatory federal immigration legislation at an interstate conference of charity officials in Saratoga, New York. Immigration might bring some benefits, but “it also introduces disease, ignorance,
crime, pauperism and idleness.” Sanborn thus advocated federal action
to stop “indiscriminate and unregulated immigration.”29© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  101

Sanborn’s address was aimed at restricting only the immigration of
paupers from Europe to the East Coast, but the idea of immigration restrictions was common across the United States in the late nineteenth
century, when many variously feared that the influx of foreigners would
undermine the racial, economic, and moral integrity of American society. From the 1870s to the 1920s, the federal government passed a seriesof laws limiting or discontinuing the immigration of particular groups,
and the United States remained committed to regulating the kind of immigrants who would join American society. To critics, regulations legitimized racism, class bias, and ethnic prejudice as formal national policy.
The first move for federal immigration control came from California,
where racial hostility toward Chinese immigrants had mounted since
the midnineteenth century. In addition to accusing Chinese immigrants
of racial inferiority and unfitness for American citizenship, opponents
claimed that they were also economically and morally corrupting American society with cheap labor and immoral practices, such as prostitution. Immigration restriction was necessary for the “Caucasian race ofCalifornia,” as one anti-Chinese politician declared, and for European
Americans to “preserve and maintain their homes, their business, andtheir high social and moral position.” In 1875, the anti-Chinese crusade
in California moved Congress to pass the Page Act, which banned theentry of convicted criminals, Asian laborers brought involuntarily, andwomen imported “for the purposes of prostitution,” a stricture designed
chiefly to exclude Chinese women. Then, in May 1882, Congress suspended the immigration of all Chinese laborers with the Chinese Exclusion Act, making the Chinese the first immigrant group subject toadmission restrictions on the basis of race. They became the first illegal
immigrants.30
On the other side of the country, Atlantic Seaboard states also facilitated the formation of federal immigration policy. Since the colonial
period, East Coast states had regulated immigration through their own
passenger laws, which prohibited the landing of destitute foreigners unless shipmasters prepaid certain amounts of money in the support ofthose passengers. State-level control of pauper immigration developed
into federal policy in the early 1880s. In August 1882, Congress passed
the Immigration Act, denying admission to people who were not able tosupport themselves and those, such as paupers, people with mental illnesses, or convicted criminals, who might otherwise threaten the securityof the nation.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

102

ch apt er 19

The idea of America as a melting pot, a stillcommon metaphor, was a way of arguing forthe ethnic assimilation of all immigrants into
a nebulous “American” identity at the turnof the twentieth century. A play of the same
name premiered in 1908 to great acclaim.
The former president Theodore Roosevelt
told the playwright, “That’s a great play,
Mr. Zangwill, that’s a great play.” Cover oftheater program for Israel Zangwill’s play
The Melting Pot, 1916. Wikimedia.

The category of excludable people expanded continuously after 1882.
In 1885, in response to American workers’ complaints about cheap immigrant labor, Congress added foreign workers migrating under labor
contracts with American employers to the list of excludable people. Six
years later, the federal government included people who seemed likely to
become wards of the state, people with contagious diseases, and polygamists, and made all groups of excludable people deportable. In 1903,
those who would pose ideological threats to American republican democracy, such as anarchists and socialists, also became the subject of
new immigration restrictions.
Many immigration critics were responding to the shifting demographics of American immigration. The center of immigrant-sending regions shifted from northern and western Europe to southern and eastern
Europe and Asia. These “new immigrants” were poorer, spoke languages
other than English, and were likely Catholic or Jewish. White ProtestantAmericans typically regarded them as inferior, and American immigration policy began to reflect more explicit prejudice than ever before. One© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  103

restrictionist declared that these immigrants were “races with which theEnglish-speaking people have never hitherto assimilated, and who aremost alien to the great body of the people of the United States.” The
increased immigration of people from southern and eastern Europe, such
as Italians, Jews, Slavs, and Greeks, led directly to calls for tighter restrictive measures. In 1907, the immigration of Japanese laborers was practically suspended when the American and Japanese governments reached
the so-called Gentlemen’s Agreement, according to which Japan wouldstop issuing passports to working-class emigrants. In its forty-twovolume report of 1911, the U.S. Immigration Commission highlighted
the impossibility of incorporating these new immigrants into American
society. The report highlighted their supposed innate inferiority, asserting that they were the causes of rising social problems in America, suchas poverty, crime, prostitution, and political radicalism.31
The assault against immigrants’ Catholicism provides an excellent
example of the challenges immigrant groups faced in the United States.
By 1900, Catholicism in the United States had grown dramatically in sizeand diversity, from 1 percent of the population a century earlier to thelargest religious denomination in America (though still outnumbered byProtestants as a whole). As a result, Catholics in America faced two intertwined challenges: one external, related to Protestant anti-Catholicism,and the other internal, having to do with the challenges of assimilation.
Externally, the Church and its members remained an “outsider” religion in a nation that continued to see itself as culturally and religiously
Protestant. Torrents of anti-Catholic literature and scandalous rumors
maligned Catholics. Many Protestants doubted whether Catholics could
ever make loyal Americans because they supposedly owed primary allegiance to the pope.
Internally, Catholics in America faced the question every immigrantgroup has had to answer: to what extent should they become more likenative-born Americans? This question was particularly acute, as Catholics encompassed a variety of languages and customs. Beginning in the
1830s, Catholic immigration to the United States had exploded with theincreasing arrival of Irish and German immigrants. Subsequent Catholic
arrivals from Italy, Poland, and other Eastern European countries chafed
at Irish dominance over the Church hierarchy. Mexican and Mexican
American Catholics, whether recent immigrants or incorporated into thenation after the Mexican-American War, expressed similar frustrations.
Could all these different Catholics remain part of the same Church?

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

104

ch apt er 19

Catholic clergy approached this situation from a variety of perspectives. Some bishops advocated rapid assimilation into the Englishspeaking mainstream. These “Americanists” advocated an end to “ethnicparishes”—the unofficial practice of permitting separate congregations
for Poles, Italians, Germans, and so on—in the belief that such isolation only delayed immigrants’ entry into the American mainstream.
They anticipated that the Catholic Church could thrive in a nation thatespoused religious freedom, if only they assimilated. Meanwhile, however, more conservative clergy cautioned against assimilation. While they
conceded that the United States had no official religion, they felt that
Protestant notions of the separation of church and state and of licentious
individual liberty posed a threat to the Catholic faith. They further saw
ethnic parishes as an effective strategy protecting immigrant communities and worried that Protestants would use public schools to attack the
Catholic faith. Eventually, the head of the Catholic Church, Pope Leo
XIII, weighed in on the controversy. In 1899, he sent a special letter(an encyclical) to an archbishop in the United States. Leo reminded theAmericanists that the Catholic Church was a unified global body andthat American liberties did not give Catholics the freedom to alter church
teachings. The Americanists denied any such intention, but the conservative clergy claimed that the pope had sided with them. Tension between
Catholicism and American life, however, would continue well into thetwentieth century.32
The American encounter with Catholicism—and Catholicism’s encounter with America—testified to the tense relationship between nativeborn and foreign-born Americans, and to the larger ideas Americans used
to situate themselves in a larger world, a world of empire and immigrants.

VII. Conclusion
While American imperialism flared most brightly for a relatively brieftime at the turn of the century, new imperial patterns repeated old practices and lived on into the twentieth century. But suddenly the UnitedStates had embraced its cultural, economic, and religious influence in theworld, along with a newfound military power, to exercise varying degrees of control over nations and peoples. Whether as formal subjects or
unwilling partners on the receiving end of Roosevelt’s “big stick,” those
who experienced U.S. expansionist policies confronted new American
ambitions. At home, debates over immigration and imperialism drew attention to the interplay of international and domestic policy and the ways

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  105

in which imperial actions, practices, and ideas affected and were affectedby domestic questions. How Americans thought about the conflict in thePhilippines, for example, was affected by how they approached immigration in their own cities. And at the turn of the century, those thoughts
were very much on the minds of Americans.

VIII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Ellen Adams and Amy Kohout, with content contributions by Ellen Adams, Alvita Akiboh, Simon Balto, Jacob Betz, Tizoc Chavez,
Morgan Deane, Dan Du, Hidetaka Hirota, Amy Kohout, Jose Juan Perez Melendez, Erik Moore, and Gregory Moore.
Recommended citation: Ellen Adams et al., “American Empire,” Ellen
Adams and Amy Kohout, eds., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and
Ben Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N o t e s t o C h a p t e r 19
1. Tyler Dennett, Americans in Eastern Asia: A Critical Study of the Policy of
the United States with Reference to China, Japan and Korea in the 19th Century(New York: Macmillan, 1922), 580.
2. Robert E. Hannigan, The New World Power: American Foreign Policy,
1898–1917 (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2002).
3. Jimmy M. Skaggs, The Great Guano Rush: Entrepreneurs and American
Overseas Expansion (New York: Macmillan, 1994); Robert A. Wines, Fertilizer in America: From Waste Recycling to Resource Exploitation (Philadelphia:
Temple University Press, 1985).
4. Elvi Whittaker, The Mainland Haole: The White Experience in Hawai’i(New York: Columbia University Press, 1986).
5. John Mason Hart, Empire and Revolution: The Americans in Mexico
Since the Civil War (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002), 271–307;
Mark Benbow, Leading Them to the Promised Land: Woodrow Wilson, Covenant Theology, and the Mexican Revolution, 1913–1915 (Kent, OH: Kent
State University Press, 2010), 25–44; Lloyd C. Gardner, Safe for Democracy:
The Anglo-American Response to Revolution, 1913–1923 (New York: Oxford
University Press, 1984).
6. Hart, Empire and Revolution, 326–333.
7. Mark Twain, The Innocents Abroad, or The New Pilgrims’ Progress(Hartford, CT: American, 1869), 379.
8. Ussama Makdisi, Artillery of Heaven American Missionaries and theFailed Conversion of the Middle East (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press,
2008).
9. Lyman Abbott, Inspiration for Daily Living: Selections from the Writingsof Lyman Abbott (Boston: Pilgrim Press, 1919), 175.
10. Albert J. Beveridge, The Meaning of the Times: And Other Speeches (Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1908), 48.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

106

ch apt er 19

11. Finley Peter Dunne, Mr. Dooley in the Hearts of His Countrymen (Boston: Small, Maynard, 1899), 6.
12. Susan K. Harris, God’s Arbiters: Americans and the Philippines, 1898–
1902 (New York: Oxford University Press, 2011); Paul A. Kramer, The Blood of
Government: Race, Empire, the United States, and the Philippines (Chapel Hill:
University of North Carolina Press, 2006).
13. Harris, God’s Arbiters; Kramer, Blood of Government.
14. John F. Bass, compiled in Marrion Wilcox, Harper’s History of the War
in the Philippines (New York: Harper, 1900), 162.
15. Harris, God’s Arbiters; Kramer, Blood of Government.
16. William Henry Harbaugh, The Life and Times of Theodore Roosevelt(London: Oxford University Press, 1961); Morton Keller, Theodore Roosevelt; A
Profile (New York: Hill and Wang, 1967).
17. R. A. Hart, The Great White Fleet: Its Voyage Around the World, 1907–
1909 (New York: Little, Brown, 1965).
18. Richard Collin, Theodore Roosevelt’s Caribbean: The Panama Canal,
The Monroe Doctrine, and the Latin American Context (Baton Rouge: LSU
Press, 1990).
19. Ibid.
20. Emily S. Rosenberg, Financial Missionaries to the World: The Politics
and Culture of Dollar Diplomacy, 1900–1930 (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999), 3.
21. William Everett Kane, Civil Strife in Latin America: A Legal History of
U.S. Involvement (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1972), 73.
22. Theodore Roosevelt to Elihu Root, May 20, 1904, in The Letters of
Theodore Roosevelt, vol. 4, ed. Elting E. Morrison (Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1951), 801.
23. Hannigan, New World Power.
24. Theodore Roosevelt to William Bayard Hale, February 26, 1904, inMorrison, Letters of Theodore Roosevelt, vol. 4, 740.
25. Mona Domosh, American Commodities in an Age of Empire (NewYork: Routledge, 2006).
26. Kristin L. Hoganson, Fighting for American Manhood: How Gender
Politics Provoked the Spanish-American and Philippine-American Wars (NewHaven, CT: Yale University Press, 1998).
27. Domosh, American Commodities.
28. Matthew Frye Jacobson, Barbarian Virtues: The United States Encounters Foreign Peoples at Home and Abroad, 1876–1917 (New York: Hill andWang, 2000).
29. Massachusetts Board of State Charities, Annual Report of the State
Board of Charity of Massachusetts (Boston: Wright, 1877), xlvii.
30. Jacobson, Barbarian Virtues.
31. Roger Daniels, The Politics of Prejudice: The Anti-Japanese Movementin California and the Struggle for Japanese Exclusion (Berkeley: University ofCalifornia Press, 1999).

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Am e r i c a n E m p i r e  107

32. James M. O’Toole, The Faithful: A History of Catholics in America(Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2009).
Re c om m e n d e d Rea di n g
Bederman, Gail. Manliness and Civilization: A Cultural History of Gender andRace in the United States, 1880–1917. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1995.
Brooks, Charlotte. Alien Neighbors, Foreign Friends: Asian Americans, Housing,and the Transformation of Urban California. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 2009.
Gabaccia, Donna. Foreign Relations: American Immigration in Global Perspective. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2012.
Greene, Julie. The Canal Builders: Making America’s Empire at the Panama
Canal. New York: Penguin, 2009.
Guglielmo, Thomas A. White on Arrival: Italians, Race, Color, and Power in
Chicago, 1890–1945. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004.
Harris, Susan K. God’s Arbiters: Americans and the Philippines, 1898–1902.
New York: Oxford University Press, 2011.
Higham, John. Strangers in the Land: Patterns of American Nativism, 1860–
1925. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press, 1988.
Hirota, Hidetaka. Expelling the Poor: Atlantic Seaboard States and the­Nineteenth-Century Origins of American Immigration Policy. New York:
Oxford University Press, 2016.
Hoganson, Kristin. Consumers’ Imperium: The Global Production of American Domesticity, 1865–1920. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2007.
Hoganson, Kristin L. Fighting for American Manhood: How Gender Politics Provoked the Spanish-American and Philippine-American Wars. New Haven,
CT: Yale University Press, 1998.
Jacobson, Matthew Frye. Barbarian Virtues: The United States Encounters Foreign People at Home and Abroad, 1876–1917. New York: Hill and Wang,
2001.
Jacobson, Matthew Frye. Whiteness of a Different Color: European Immigrants
and the Alchemy of Race. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999.
Kaplan, Amy. The Anarchy of Empire in the Making of U.S. Culture. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, 2002.
Kramer, Paul A. The Blood of Government: Race, Empire, the United States, and
the Philippines. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2006.
Lafeber, Walter. The New Empire: An Interpretation of American Expansion,
1860–1898. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1963.
Lears, T. J. Jackson. Rebirth of a Nation: The Making of Modern America, 1877–
1920. New York: HarperCollins, 2009.
Linn, Brian McAllister. The Philippine War, 1899–1902. Lawrence: University
Press of Kansas, 2000.
Love, Eric T. L. Race over Empire: Racism and U.S. Imperialism, 1865–1900.
Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2004.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

108

ch apt er 19

Pascoe, Peggy. What Comes Naturally: Miscegenation Law and the Making ofRace in America. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009.
Perez, Louis A., Jr. The War of 1898: The United States and Cuba in History andHistoriography. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2000.
Renda, Mary. Taking Haiti: Military Occupation and the Culture of US Imperialism, 1915–40. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2001.
Rosenberg, Emily S. Spreading the American Dream: American Economic andCultural Expansion, 1890–1945. New York: Hill and Wang, 1982.
Silbey, David. A War of Frontier and Empire: The Philippine-American War,
1899–1902. New York: Hill and Wang, 2007.
Wexler, Laura. Tender Violence: Domestic Visions in an Age of US Imperialism.
Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2000.
Williams, William Appleman. The Tragedy of American Diplomacy, 50th Anniversary Edition. New York: Norton, 2009 [1959].

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

20
The Progressive Era
I. Introduction“Never in the history of the world was society in so terrific flux as it isright now,” Jack London wrote in The Iron Heel, his 1908 dystopiannovel in which a corporate oligarchy comes to rule the United States. He
wrote, “The swift changes in our industrial system are causing equallyswift changes in our religious, political, and social structures. An unseen
and fearful revolution is taking place in the fiber and structure of society.
One can only dimly feel these things, but they are in the air, now, today.”1
The many problems associated with the Gilded Age—the rise of
unprecedented fortunes and unprecedented poverty, controversies overimperialism, urban squalor, a near-war between capital and labor, loosening social mores, unsanitary food production, the onrush of foreign

An undated
William Jennings
Bryan campaign
print titled
Shall the People
Rule? Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

110

chapte r 20

immigration, environmental destruction, and the outbreak of political
radicalism—confronted Americans. Terrible forces seemed out of control
and the nation seemed imperiled. Farmers and workers had been waging
political war against capitalists and political conservatives for decades,
but then, slowly, toward the end of the nineteenth century a new generation of middle-class Americans interjected themselves into public life andadvocated new reforms to tame the runaway world of the Gilded Age.
Widespread dissatisfaction with new trends in American society
spurred the Progressive Era, named for the various progressive movementsthat attracted various constituencies around various reforms. Americans
had many different ideas about how the country’s development should bemanaged and whose interests required the greatest protection. Reformers sought to clean up politics; black Americans continued their longstruggle for civil rights; women demanded the vote with greater intensity
while also demanding a more equal role in society at large; and workers demanded higher wages, safer workplaces, and the union recognition
that would guarantee these rights. Whatever their goals, reform became
the word of the age, and the sum of their efforts, whatever their ultimate
impact or original intentions, gave the era its name.

II. Mobilizing for Reform
In 1911 the Triangle Shirtwaist Factory in Manhattan caught fire. The
doors of the factory had been chained shut to prevent employees fromtaking unauthorized breaks (the managers who held the keys saved
themselves, but left over two hundred women behind). A rickety fire ladder on the side of the building collapsed immediately. Women lined therooftop and windows of the ten-story building and jumped, landing in a“mangled, bloody pulp.” Life nets held by firemen tore at the impact of
the falling bodies. Among the onlookers, “women were hysterical, scores
fainted; men wept as, in paroxysms of frenzy, they hurled themselves
against the police lines.” By the time the fire burned itself out, 71 workers
were injured and 146 had died.2
A year before, the Triangle workers had gone on strike demanding
union recognition, higher wages, and better safety conditions. Remembering their workers’ “chief value,” the owners of the factory decided
that a viable fire escape and unlocked doors were too expensive andcalled in the city police to break up the strike. After the 1911 fire, reporter Bill Shepherd reflected, “I looked upon the heap of dead bod-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  111

Policemen place the bodies of workers who were burned alive in the 1911 Triangle Shirtwaist fire into
coffins. Photographs like this made real the atrocities that could result from unsafe working conditions.
March 25, 1911. Library of Congress.

ies and I remembered these girls were shirtwaist makers. I remembered
their great strike last year in which the same girls had demanded moresanitary conditions and more safety precautions in the shops. These
dead bodies were the answer.”3 Former Triangle worker and labor organizer Rose Schneiderman said, “This is not the first time girls havebeen burned alive in this city. Every week I must learn of the untimely
death of one of my sister workers . . . the life of men and women is socheap and property is so sacred! There are so many of us for one job, itmatters little if 140-odd are burned to death.”4 After the fire, Triangle
owners Max Blanck and Isaac Harris were brought up on manslaughter
charges. They were acquitted after less than two hours of deliberation.
The outcome continued a trend in the industrializing economy that saw
workers’ deaths answered with little punishment of the business owners responsible for such dangerous conditions. But as such tragedies
mounted and working and living conditions worsened and inequality
grew, it became increasingly difficult to develop justifications for thisnew modern order.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

112

chapte r 20

Events such as the Triangle Shirtwaist fire convinced many Americansof the need for reform, but the energies of activists were needed to spreada new commitment to political activism and government interference inthe economy. Politicians, journalists, novelists, religious leaders, and activists all raised their voices to push Americans toward reform.
Reformers turned to books and mass-circulation magazines to publicize the plight of the nation’s poor and the many corruptions endemic to
the new industrial order. Journalists who exposed business practices, poverty, and corruption—labeled by Theodore Roosevelt as “muckrakers”—
aroused public demands for reform. Magazines such as McClure’s detailed political corruption and economic malfeasance. The muckrakers
confirmed Americans’ suspicions about runaway wealth and politicalcorruption. Ray Stannard Baker, a journalist whose reports on U.S. Steelexposed the underbelly of the new corporate capitalism, wrote, “I think
I can understand now why these exposure articles took such a hold upon
the American people. It was because the country, for years, had been
swept by the agitation of soap-box orators, prophets crying in the wilderness, and political campaigns based upon charges of corruption andprivilege which everyone believed or suspected had some basis of truth,
but which were largely unsubstantiated.”5
Journalists shaped popular perceptions of Gilded Age injustice. In
1890, New York City journalist Jacob Riis published How the Other
Half Lives, a scathing indictment of living and working conditions in thecity’s slums. Riis not only vividly described the squalor he saw, he documented it with photography, giving readers an unflinching view of urban
poverty. Riis’s book led to housing reform in New York and other cities
and helped instill the idea that society bore at least some responsibility
for alleviating poverty.6 In 1906, Upton Sinclair published The Jungle, anovel dramatizing the experiences of a Lithuanian immigrant family who
moved to Chicago to work in the stockyards. Although Sinclair intended
the novel to reveal the brutal exploitation of labor in the meatpacking
industry, and thus to build support for the socialist movement, its major
impact was to lay bare the entire process of industrialized food production. The growing invisibility of slaughterhouses and livestock production for urban consumers had enabled unsanitary and unsafe conditions.
“The slaughtering machine ran on, visitors or no visitors,” wrote Sinclair,“like some horrible crime committed in a dungeon, all unseen and unheeded, buried out of sight and of memory.”7 Sinclair’s exposé led to thepassage of the Meat Inspection Act and Pure Food and Drug Act in 1906.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  113

Of course, it was not only journalists who raised questions about
American society. One of the most popular novels of the nineteenth century, Edward Bellamy’s 1888 Looking Backward, was a national sensation. In it, a man falls asleep in Boston in 1887 and awakens in 2000 tofind society radically altered. Poverty and disease and competition gave
way as new industrial armies cooperated to build a utopia of social harmony and economic prosperity. Bellamy’s vision of a reformed society
enthralled readers, inspired hundreds of Bellamy clubs, and pushed many
young readers onto the road to reform.8 It led countless Americans toquestion the realities of American life in the nineteenth century:

Jacob Riis,“Home of an Italian Ragpicker,”
1896. Wikimedia.

I am aware that you called yourselves free in the nineteenth century.
The meaning of the word could not then, however, have been at all
what it is at present, or you certainly would not have applied it toa society of which nearly every member was in a position of gallingpersonal dependence upon others as to the very means of life, the poor
upon the rich, or employed upon employer, women upon men, children
upon parents.9© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

114

chapte r 20

But Americans were urged to action not only by books and magazines
but by preachers and theologians, too. Confronted by both the benefits
and the ravages of industrialization, many Americans asked themselves,“What Would Jesus Do?” In 1896, Charles Sheldon, a Congregational
minister in Topeka, Kansas, published In His Steps: What Would Jesus
Do? The novel told the story of Henry Maxwell, a pastor in a small
Midwestern town one day confronted by an unemployed migrant who
criticized his congregation’s lack of concern for the poor and downtrodden. Moved by the man’s plight, Maxwell preached a series of sermons
in which he asked his congregation: “Would it not be true, think you,that if every Christian in America did as Jesus would do, society itself,
the business world, yes, the very political system under which our commercial and government activity is carried on, would be so changed thathuman suffering would be reduced to a minimum?”10 Sheldon’s novel
became a best seller, not only because of its story but because the book’s
plot connected with a new movement transforming American religion:
the social gospel.
The social gospel emerged within Protestant Christianity at the endof the nineteenth century. It emphasized the need for Christians to beconcerned for the salvation of society, and not simply individual souls.
Instead of just caring for family or fellow church members, social gospel advocates encouraged Christians to engage society; challenge social,political, and economic structures; and help those less fortunate thanthemselves. Responding to the developments of the industrial revolutionin America and the increasing concentration of people in urban spaces,with its attendant social and economic problems, some social gospelers
went so far as to advocate a form of Christian socialism, but all urged
Americans to confront the sins of their society.
One of the most notable advocates of the social gospel was Walter
Rauschenbusch. After graduating from Rochester Theological Seminary,in 1886 Rauschenbusch accepted the pastorate of a German Baptist
church in the Hell’s Kitchen section of New York City, where he confronted rampant crime and stark poverty, problems not adequately addressed by the political leaders of the city. Rauschenbusch joined withfellow reformers to elect a new mayoral candidate, but he also realizedthat a new theological framework had to reflect his interest in society andits problems. He revived Jesus’s phrase, “the Kingdom of God,” claimingthat it encompassed every aspect of life and made every part of society
a purview of the proper Christian. Like Charles Sheldon’s fictional Rev.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  115

Maxwell, Rauschenbusch believed that every Christian, whether they
were a businessperson, a politician, or a stay-at-home parent, should
ask themselves what they could to enact the kingdom of God on Earth.11
The social gospel is the old message of salvation, but enlarged and intensified. The individualistic gospel has taught us to see the sinfulness ofevery human heart and has inspired us with faith in the willingness andpower of God to save every soul that comes to him. But it has not given
us an adequate understanding of the sinfulness of the social order and its
share in the sins of all individuals within it. It has not evoked faith in thewill and power of God to redeem the permanent institutions of humansociety from their inherited guilt of oppression and extortion. Both oursense of sin and our faith in salvation have fallen short of the realities
under its teaching. The social gospel seeks to bring men under repentancefor their collective sins and to create a more sensitive and more modern
conscience. It calls on us for the faith of the old prophets who believed in
the salvation of nations.12

Glaring blind spots persisted within the proposals of most social gospel advocates. As men, they often ignored the plight of women, and thus
most refused to support women’s suffrage. Many were also silent on theplight of African Americans, Native Americans, and other oppressed minority groups. However, the writings of Rauschenbusch and other social
gospel proponents a profound influence on twentieth-century American
life. Most immediately, they fueled progressive reform. But they also inspired future activists, including Martin Luther King Jr., who envisioned
a “beloved community” that resembled Rauschenbusch’s “Kingdom ofGod.”

III. Women’s Movements
Reform opened new possibilities for women’s activism in American public life and gave new impetus to the long campaign for women’s suffrage.
Much energy for women’s work came from female “clubs,” social organizations devoted to various purposes. Some focused on intellectual
development; others emphasized philanthropic activities. Increasingly,
these organizations looked outward, to their communities and to theplace of women in the larger political sphere.
Women’s clubs flourished in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. In the 1890s women formed national women’s club federations. Particularly significant in campaigns for suffrage and women’s© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

116

chapte r 20

Suffragists campaigned tirelessly for the vote during the first two decades of the twentieth century. They
took to the streets in public displays such as this 1915 pre-election parade in New York City. During thisevent, twenty thousand women defied the norms that relegated them to the private sphere and denied themthe vote. Wikimedia.

rights were the General Federation of Women’s Clubs (formed in New
York City in 1890) and the National Association of Colored Women (organized in Washington, D.C., in 1896), both of which were dominatedby upper-middle-class, educated, northern women. Few of these organizations were biracial, a legacy of the sometimes uneasy midnineteenthcentury relationship between socially active African Americans andwhite women. Rising American prejudice led many white female activists
to ban inclusion of their African American sisters. The segregation of
black women into distinct clubs nonetheless still produced vibrant organizations that could promise racial uplift and civil rights for all blacks
as well as equal rights for women.
Other women worked through churches and moral reform organizations to clean up American life. And still others worked as moral vigilantes. The fearsome Carrie A. Nation, an imposing woman who believed
she worked God’s will, won headlines for destroying saloons. In Wichita,
Kansas, on December 27, 1900, Nation took a hatchet and broke bottles© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  117

and bars at the luxurious Carey Hotel. Arrested and charged with causing $3,000 in damages, Nation spent a month in jail before the county
dismissed the charges on account of “a delusion to such an extent as tobe practically irresponsible.” But Nation’s “hatchetation” drew national
attention. Describing herself as “a bulldog running along at the feet of
Jesus, barking at what He doesn’t like,” she continued her assaults, anddays later she smashed two more Wichita bars.13
Few women followed in Nation’s footsteps, and many more worked
within more reputable organizations. Nation, for instance, had foundeda chapter of the Woman’s Christian Temperance Union (WCTU), but theorganization’s leaders described her as “unwomanly and unchristian.”
The WCTU was founded in 1874 as a modest temperance organization
devoted to combating the evils of drunkenness. But then, from 1879 to
1898, Frances Willard invigorated the organization by transforming
it into a national political organization, embracing a “do everything”
policy that adopted any and all reasonable reforms that would improvesocial welfare and advance women’s rights. Temperance, and then thefull prohibition of alcohol, however, always loomed large.
Many American reformers associated alcohol with nearly every social ill. Alcohol was blamed for domestic abuse, poverty, crime, anddisease. The 1912 Anti-Saloon League Yearbook, for instance, presented
charts indicating comparable increases in alcohol consumption alongside
rising divorce rates. The WCTU called alcohol a “home wrecker.” Moreinsidiously, perhaps, reformers also associated alcohol with cities andimmigrants, necessarily maligning America’s immigrants, Catholics, andworking classes in their crusade against liquor. Still, reformers believedthat the abolition of “strong drink” would bring about social progress,
obviate the need for prisons and insane asylums, save women and children from domestic abuse, and usher in a more just, progressive society.
Powerful female activists emerged out of the club movement and temperance campaigns. Perhaps no American reformer matched Jane Addams in fame, energy, and innovation. Born in Cedarville, Illinois, in
1860, Addams lost her mother by age two and lived under the attentive
care of her father. At seventeen, she left home to attend Rockford Female
Seminary. An idealist, Addams sought the means to make the world abetter place. She believed that well-educated women of means, such as
herself, lacked practical strategies for engaging everyday reform. After
four years at Rockford, Addams embarked on a multiyear “grand tour”
of Europe. She found herself drawn to English settlement houses, a kind

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

118

chapte r 20

of prototype for social work in which philanthropists embedded themselves among communities and offered services to disadvantaged populations. After visiting London’s Toynbee Hall in 1887, Addams returned to
the United States and in 1889 founded Hull House in Chicago with her
longtime confidant and companion Ellen Gates Starr.14
The Settlement . . . is an experimental effort to aid in the solution of
the social and industrial problems which are engendered by the modern
conditions of life in a great city. It insists that these problems are not confined to any one portion of the city. It is an attempt to relieve, at the sametime, the overaccumulation at one end of society and the destitution at
the other. . . . It must be grounded in a philosophy whose foundation is on
the solidarity of the human race, a philosophy which will not waver when
the race happens to be represented by a drunken woman or an idiot boy.15

Hull House workers provided for their neighbors by running a nursery and a kindergarten, administering classes for parents and clubs forchildren, and organizing social and cultural events for the community.
Reformer Florence Kelley, who stayed at Hull House from 1891 to
1899, convinced Addams to move into the realm of social reform.16 Hull
House began exposing conditions in local sweatshops and advocating forthe organization of workers. She called the conditions caused by urban
poverty and industrialization a “social crime.” Hull House workers surveyed their community and produced statistics on poverty, disease, andliving conditions. Addams began pressuring politicians. Together Kelley and Addams petitioned legislators to pass antisweatshop legislationthat limited the hours of work for women and children to eight per day.
Yet Addams was an upper-class white Protestant woman who, like manyreformers, refused to embrace more radical policies. While Addams
called labor organizing a “social obligation,” she also warned the labor
movement against the “constant temptation towards class warfare.” Addams, like many reformers, favored cooperation between rich and poorand bosses and workers, whether cooperation was a realistic possibility
or not.17
Addams became a kind of celebrity. In 1912, she became the firstwoman to give a nominating speech at a major party convention when
she seconded the nomination of Theodore Roosevelt as the Progressive
Party’s candidate for president. Her campaigns for social reform andwomen’s rights won headlines and her voice became ubiquitous in progressive politics.18© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  119

Addams’s advocacy grew beyond domestic concerns. Beginning withher work in the Anti-Imperialist League during the Spanish-American
War, Addams increasingly began to see militarism as a drain on resources
better spent on social reform. In 1907 she wrote Newer Ideals of Peace,a book that would become for many a philosophical foundation of pacifism. Addams emerged as a prominent opponent of America’s entry into
World War I. She received the Nobel Peace Prize in 1931.19
It would be suffrage, ultimately, that would mark the full emergenceof women in American public life. Generations of women—and, occasionally, men—had pushed for women’s suffrage. Suffragists’ hard work
resulted in slow but encouraging steps forward during the last decadesof the nineteenth century. Notable victories were won in the West, where
suffragists mobilized large numbers of women and male politicians wereopen to experimental forms of governance. By 1911, six western states
had passed suffrage amendments to their constitutions.
Women’s suffrage was typically entwined with a wide range of reform
efforts. Many suffragists argued that women’s votes were necessary toclean up politics and combat social evils. By the 1890s, for example, theWCTU, then the largest women’s organization in America, endorsed suffrage. An alliance of working-class and middle- and upper-class womenorganized the Women’s Trade Union League (WTUL) in 1903 and campaigned for the vote alongside the National American Suffrage Association, a leading suffrage organization composed largely of middle- andWomen protested
silently in front of
the White Housefor over two years
before passage of
the Nineteenth
Amendment.
Here, women
represent theiralma maters as
they picket theWhite House
in support ofwomen’s suffragein 1917. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

120

chapte r 20

upper-class women. WTUL members viewed the vote as a way to further
their economic interests and to foster a new sense of respect for workingclass women. “What the woman who labors wants is the right to live, notsimply exist,” said Ruth Schneiderman, a WTUL leader, during a 1912
speech. “The worker must have bread, but she must have roses, too.”20
Many suffragists adopted a much crueler message. Some, even outside
the South, argued that white women’s votes were necessary to maintainwhite supremacy. Many white American women argued that enfranchising white upper- and middle-class women would counteract black voters.
These arguments even stretched into international politics. But whether
the message advocated gender equality, class politics, or white supremacy, the suffrage campaign was winning.
The final push for women’s suffrage came on the eve of World War I.
Determined to win the vote; the National American Suffrage Association
developed a dual strategy that focused on the passage of state voting
rights laws and on the ratification of an amendment to the U.S. Constitution. Meanwhile, a new, more militant, suffrage organization emergedon the scene. Led by Alice Paul, the National Woman’s Party took to thestreets to demand voting rights, organizing marches and protests thatmobilized thousands of women. Beginning in January 1917, National
Woman’s Party members also began to picket the White House, an actionthat led to the arrest and imprisonment of over 150 women.21
In January 1918, President Woodrow Wilson declared his support for
the women’s suffrage amendment, and two years later women’s suffrage
became a reality. After the ratification of the Nineteenth Amendment,
women from all walks of life mobilized to vote. They were driven by thepromise of change but also in some cases by their anxieties about the
future. Much had changed since their campaign began; the United States
was now more industrial than not, increasingly more urban than rural.
The activism and activities of these new urban denizens also gave rise to
a new American culture.

IV. Targeting the Trusts
In one of the defining books of the Progressive Era, The Promise of
American Life, Herbert Croly argued that because “the corrupt politician has usurped too much of the power which should be exercised by
the people,” the “millionaire and the trust have appropriated too manyof the economic opportunities formerly enjoyed by the people.” Croly© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  121

and other reformers believed that wealth inequality eroded democracy
and reformers had to win back for the people the power usurped by themoneyed trusts. But what exactly were these “trusts,” and why did it
suddenly seem so important to reform them?22
In the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, a trust was a monopoly or cartel associated with the large corporations of the Gilded andProgressive Eras who entered into agreements—legal or otherwise—or
consolidations to exercise exclusive control over a specific product orindustry under the control of a single entity. Certain types of monopolies,
specifically for intellectual property like copyrights, patents, trademarks,
and trade secrets, are protected under the Constitution “to promote theprogress of science and useful arts,” but for powerful entities to control entire national markets was something wholly new, and, for many
Americans, wholly unsettling.
The rapid industrialization, technological advancement, and urban
growth of the 1870s and 1880s triggered major changes in the way
businesses structured themselves. The Second Industrial Revolution,
made possible by available natural resources, growth in the labor supply through immigration, increasing capital, new legal economic entities,

This illustration shows a Standard Oil storage tank as an octopus with tentacles wrapped around the steel,copper, and shipping industries, as well as a state house and the U.S. Capitol. The only building not yet
within reach of the octopus is the White House—President Teddy Roosevelt had won a reputation as a trust
buster. Udo Keppler, Next!, 1904. Library of Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

122

chapte r 20

novel production strategies, and a growing national market, was commonly asserted to be the natural product of the federal government’s
laissez faire, or “hands off,” economic policy. An unregulated businessclimate, the argument went, allowed for the growth of major trusts, mostnotably Andrew Carnegie’s Carnegie Steel (later consolidated with otherproducers as U.S. Steel) and John D. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil Company. Each displayed the vertical and horizontal integration strategies
common to the new trusts: Carnegie first used vertical integration by controlling every phase of business (raw materials, transportation, manufacturing, distribution), and Rockefeller adhered to horizontal integration
by buying out competing refineries. Once dominant in a market, critics
alleged, the trusts could artificially inflate prices, bully rivals, and bribe
politicians.
Between 1897 and 1904, over four thousand companies were consolidated down into 257 corporate firms. As one historian wrote, “By 1904
a total of 318 trusts held 40% of US manufacturing assets and boasted
a capitalization of $7 billion, seven times bigger than the US national
debt.”23 With the twentieth century came the age of monopoly. Mergers
and the aggressive business policies of wealthy men such as Carnegie andRockefeller earned them the epithet robber barons. Their cutthroat stifling of economic competition, mistreatment of workers, and corruptionof politics sparked an opposition that pushed for regulations to rein in
the power of monopolies. The great corporations became a major targetof reformers.
Big business, whether in meatpacking, railroads, telegraph lines, oil, or
steel, posed new problems for the American legal system. Before the Civil
War, most businesses operated in a single state. They might ship goods
across state lines or to other countries, but they typically had offices andfactories in just one state. Individual states naturally regulated industry
and commerce. But extensive railroad routes crossed several state lines
and new mass-producing corporations operated across the nation, raising questions about where the authority to regulate such practices rested.
During the 1870s, many states passed laws to check the growing power ofvast new corporations. In the Midwest, farmers formed a network of organizations that were part political pressure group, part social club, andpart mutual aid society. Together they pushed for so-called Granger lawsthat regulated railroads and other new companies. Railroads and others
opposed these regulations because they restrained profits and because of
the difficulty of meeting the standards of each state’s separate regulatory© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  123

laws. In 1877, the U.S. Supreme Court upheld these laws in a series ofrulings, finding in cases such as Munn v. Illinois and Stone v. Wisconsinthat railroads and other companies of such size necessarily affected the
public interest and could thus be regulated by individual states. In Munn,
the court declared, “Property does become clothed with a public interest
when used in a manner to make it of public consequence, and affect thecommunity at large. When, therefore, one devoted his property to a use
in which the public has an interest, he, in effect, grants to the public aninterest in that use, and must submit to be controlled by the public for thecommon good, to the extent of the interest he has thus created.”24
Later rulings, however, conceded that only the federal government
could constitutionally regulate interstate commerce and the new national
businesses operating it. And as more and more power and capital andmarket share flowed to the great corporations, the onus of regulation
passed to the federal government. In 1887, Congress passed the Interstate
Commerce Act, which established the Interstate Commerce Commission
to stop discriminatory and predatory pricing practices. The Sherman
Anti-Trust Act of 1890 aimed to limit anticompetitive practices, such as
those institutionalized in cartels and monopolistic corporations. It statedthat a “trust . . . or conspiracy, in restraint of trade or commerce . . . isdeclared to be illegal” and that those who “monopolize . . . any part of
the trade or commerce . . . shall be deemed guilty.”25 The Sherman AntiTrust Act declared that not all monopolies were illegal, only those that
“unreasonably” stifled free trade. The courts seized on the law’s vague
language, however, and the act was turned against itself, manipulated
and used, for instance, to limit the growing power of labor unions. Only
in 1914, with the Clayton Anti-Trust Act, did Congress attempt to closeloopholes in previous legislation.
Aggression against the trusts—and the progressive vogue for “trust
busting”—took on new meaning under the presidency of Theodore Roosevelt, a reform-minded Republican who ascended to the presidency after
the death of William McKinley in 1901. Roosevelt’s youthful energy andconfrontational politics captivated the nation.26 Roosevelt was by nomeans antibusiness. Instead, he envisioned his presidency as a mediator
between opposing forces, such as between labor unions and corporate
executives. Despite his own wealthy background, Roosevelt pushed for
antitrust legislation and regulations, arguing that the courts could not
be relied on to break up the trusts. Roosevelt also used his own moral
judgment to determine which monopolies he would pursue. Roosevelt© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

124

chapte r 20

believed that there were good and bad trusts, necessary monopolies andcorrupt ones. Although his reputation as a trust buster was wildly exaggerated, he was the first major national politician to go after the trusts.
“The great corporations which we have grown to speak of rather loosely
as trusts,” he said, “are the creatures of the State, and the State not only
has the right to control them, but it is in duty bound to control themwherever the need of such control is shown.”27
His first target was the Northern Securities Company, a “holding”
trust in which several wealthy bankers, most famously J. P. Morgan,
used to hold controlling shares in all the major railroad companies in theAmerican Northwest. Holding trusts had emerged as a way to circumvent the Sherman Anti-Trust Act: by controlling the majority of shares,
rather than the principal, Morgan and his collaborators tried to claimthat it was not a monopoly. Roosevelt’s administration sued and won
in court, and in 1904 the Northern Securities Company was ordered todisband into separate competitive companies. Two years later, in 1906,
Roosevelt signed the Hepburn Act, allowing the Interstate CommerceCommission to regulate best practices and set reasonable rates for therailroads.
Roosevelt was more interested in regulating corporations than breaking them apart. Besides, the courts were slow and unpredictable. However, his successor after 1908, William Howard Taft, firmly believed incourt-oriented trust busting and during his four years in office more thandoubled the number of monopoly breakups that occurred during Roosevelt’s seven years in office. Taft notably went after Carnegie’s U.S. Steel,the world’s first billion-dollar corporation formed from the consolidationof nearly every major American steel producer.
Trust busting and the handling of monopolies dominated the election of 1912. When the Republican Party spurned Roosevelt’s return topolitics and renominated the incumbent Taft, Roosevelt left and formed
his own coalition, the Progressive or “Bull Moose” Party. Whereas Tafttook an all-encompassing view on the illegality of monopolies, Roosevelt
adopted a New Nationalism program, which once again emphasized theregulation of already existing corporations or the expansion of federal
power over the economy. In contrast, Woodrow Wilson, the Democratic
Party nominee, emphasized in his New Freedom agenda neither trust
busting nor federal regulation but rather small-business incentives so that
individual companies could increase their competitive chances. Yet once
he won the election, Wilson edged nearer to Roosevelt’s position, signing© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  125

the Clayton Anti-Trust Act of 1914. The Clayton Anti-Trust Act substantially enhanced the Sherman Act, specifically regulating mergers andprice discrimination and protecting labor’s access to collective bargaining
and related strategies of picketing, boycotting, and protesting. Congress
further created the Federal Trade Commission to enforce the Clayton
Act, ensuring at least some measure of implementation.28
While the three presidents—Roosevelt, Taft, and Wilson—pushed
the development and enforcement of antitrust law, their commitments
were uneven, and trust busting itself manifested the political pressure
put on politicians by the workers, farmers, and progressive writers who
so strongly drew attention to the ramifications of trusts and corporate
capital on the lives of everyday Americans.

V. Progressive Environmentalism
The potential scope of environmental destruction wrought by industrial
capitalism was unparalleled in human history. Professional bison hunting expeditions nearly eradicated an entire species, industrialized logging
companies denuded whole forests, and chemical plants polluted an entire
region’s water supply. As American development and industrialization
marched westward, reformers embraced environmental protections.
Historians often cite preservation and conservation as two competing strategies that dueled for supremacy among environmental reformers
during the Progressive Era. The tensions between these two approaches
crystalized in the debate over a proposed dam in the Hetch Hetchy Valley
in California. The fight revolved around the provision of water for San
Francisco. Engineers identified the location where the Tuolumne Riverran through Hetch Hetchy as an ideal site for a reservoir. The project
had been suggested in the 1880s but picked up momentum in the earlytwentieth century. But the valley was located inside Yosemite National
Park. (Yosemite was designated a national park in 1890, though the land
had been set aside earlier in a grant approved by President Lincoln in
1864.) The debate over Hetch Hetchy revealed two distinct positions on
the value of the valley and on the purpose of public lands.
John Muir, a naturalist, a writer, and founder of the Sierra Club, invoked the “God of the Mountains” in his defense of the valley in its
supposedly pristine condition. Gifford Pinchot, arguably the father ofAmerican forestry and a key player in the federal management of national
forests, meanwhile emphasized what he understood to be the p­ urpose of© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

126

chapte r 20

Photograph of
the Hetch Hetchy
Valley before
damming, January
1908. Wikimedia.

conservation: “to take every part of the land and its resources and put
it to that use in which it will serve the most people.” Muir took a wider
view of what the people needed, writing that “everybody needs beauty
as well as bread.”29 These dueling arguments revealed the key differencesin environmental thought: Muir, on the side of the preservationists, advocated setting aside pristine lands for their aesthetic and spiritual value,
for those who could take his advice to “[get] in touch with the nerves ofMother Earth.”30 Pinchot, on the other hand, led the charge for conservation, a kind of environmental utilitarianism that emphasized the efficientuse of available resources, through planning and control and “the prevention of waste.”31 In Hetch Hetchy, conservation won out. Congressapproved the project in 1913. The dam was built and the valley flooded
for the benefit of San Francisco residents.
While preservation was often articulated as an escape from an increasingly urbanized and industrialized way of life and as a welcome
respite from the challenges of modernity (at least, for those who had themeans to escape), the conservationists were more closely aligned withbroader trends in American society. Although the “greatest good for thegreatest number” was very nearly the catchphrase of conservation, con-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  127

servationist policies most often benefited the nation’s financial interests.
For example, many states instituted game laws to regulate hunting andprotect wildlife, but laws could be entirely unbalanced. In Pennsylvania, local game laws included requiring firearm permits for noncitizens,barred hunting on Sundays, and banned the shooting of songbirds. Theselaws disproportionately affected Italian immigrants, critics said, as Italians often hunted songbirds for subsistence, worked in mines for low
wages every day but Sunday, and were too poor to purchase permits or
to pay the fines levied against them when game wardens caught thembreaking these new laws. Other laws, for example, offered up resources
to businesses at costs prohibitive to all but the wealthiest companies andindividuals, or with regulatory requirements that could be met only bycompanies with extensive resources.
But Progressive Era environmentalism addressed more than the management of American public lands. After all, reformers addressing issues
facing the urban poor were also doing environmental work. Settlement
house workers like Jane Addams and Florence Kelley focused on questions of health and sanitation, while activists concerned with working
conditions, most notably Dr. Alice Hamilton, investigated both worksite
hazards and occupational and bodily harm. The progressives’ commitment to the provision of public services at the municipal level meant
more coordination and oversight in matters of public health, waste management, and even playgrounds and city parks. Their work focused on
the intersection of communities and their material environments, highlighting the urgency of urban environmental concerns.
While reform movements focused their attention on the urban poor,other efforts targeted rural communities. The Country Life movement,
spearheaded by Liberty Hyde Bailey, sought to support agrarian families and encourage young people to stay in their communities and run
family farms. Early-twentieth-century educational reforms included a

Taken almosta century after
the previous
image, this 2002
photograph shows
the difference
caused by thevalley’s damming.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

128

chapte r 20

commitment to environmentalism at the elementary level. Led by Bailey
and Anna Botsford Comstock, the nature study movement took students
outside to experience natural processes and to help them develop observational skills and an appreciation for the natural world.
Other examples highlight the interconnectedness of urban and ruralcommunities in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. The
extinction of the North American passenger pigeon reveals the complexity of Progressive Era relationships between people and nature. Passenger
pigeons were actively hunted, prepared at New York’s finest restaurants
and in the humblest of farm kitchens. Some hunted them for pay; others
shot them in competitions at sporting clubs. And then they were gone,
their ubiquity giving way only to nostalgia. Many Americans took noticeat the great extinction of a species that had perhaps numbered in thebillions and then was eradicated. Women in Audubon Society chaptersorganized against the fashion of wearing feathers—even whole birds—on
ladies’ hats. Upper- and middle-class women made up the lion’s share of
the membership of these societies. They used their social standing tofight for birds. Pressure created national wildlife refuges and key laws
and regulations that included the Lacey Act of 1900, banning the shipment of species killed illegally across state lines. Examining how women
mobilized contemporary notions of womanhood in the service of protecting birds reveals a tangle of cultural and economic processes. Suchexamples also reveal the range of ideas, policies, and practices wrapped
up in figuring out what—and who—American nature should be for.

VI. Jim Crow and African American Life
America’s tragic racial history was not erased by the Progressive Era. In
fact, in all too many ways, reform removed African Americans ever farther from American public life. In the South, electoral politics remained
a parade of electoral fraud, voter intimidation, and race-baiting. Democratic Party candidates stirred southern whites into frenzies with warnings
of “negro domination” and of black men violating white women. The
region’s culture of racial violence and the rise of lynching as a mass public spectacle accelerated. And as the remaining African American votersthreatened the dominance of Democratic leadership in the South, southern Democrats turned to what many white southerners understood asa series of progressive electoral and social reforms—­disenfranchisement
and segregation. Just as reformers would clean up politics by taming city

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  129

political machines, white southerners would “purify” the ballot box byrestricting black voting, and they would prevent racial strife by legislating the social separation of the races. The strongest supporters of suchmeasures in the South were progressive Democrats and former Populists,
both of whom saw in these reforms a way to eliminate the racial demagoguery that conservative Democratic party leaders had so effectively
wielded. Leaders in both the North and South embraced and proclaimed
the reunion of the sections on the basis of white supremacy. As the nation took up the “white man’s burden” to uplift the world’s racially inferior peoples, the North looked to the South as an example of how tomanage nonwhite populations. The South had become the nation’s racial
vanguard.32
The question was how to accomplish disfranchisement. The Fifteenth
Amendment clearly prohibited states from denying any citizen the rightto vote on the basis of race. In 1890, a Mississippi state newspaper calledon politicians to devise “some legal defensible substitute for the abhorrent and evil methods on which white supremacy lies.”33 The state’s
Democratic Party responded with a new state constitution designed topurge corruption at the ballot box through disenfranchisement. African
Americans hoping to vote in Mississippi would have to jump through aseries of hurdles designed with the explicit purpose of excluding themfrom political power. The state first established a poll tax, which required
voters to pay for the privilege of voting. Second, it stripped suffrage fromthose convicted of petty crimes most common among the state’s African
Americans. Next, the state required voters to pass a literacy test. Local
voting officials, who were themselves part of the local party machine,
were responsible for judging whether voters were able to read and understand a section of the Constitution. In order to protect illiterate whites
from exclusion, the so-called “understanding clause” allowed a voter toqualify if they could adequately explain the meaning of a section thatwas read to them. In practice these rules were systematically abused tothe point where local election officials effectively wielded the power topermit and deny suffrage at will. The disenfranchisement laws effectively
moved electoral conflict from the ballot box, where public attention was
greatest, to the voting registrar, where supposedly color-blind laws allowed local party officials to deny the ballot without the appearance offraud.34
Between 1895 and 1908, the rest of the states in the South approved
new constitutions including these disenfranchisement tools. Six southern© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

130

chapte r 20

states also added a grandfather clause, which bestowed suffrage on anyone whose grandfather was eligible to vote in 1867. This ensured thatwhites who would have been otherwise excluded through mechanisms
such as poll taxes or literacy tests would still be eligible, at least until
grandfather clauses were struck down by the Supreme Court in 1915.
Finally, each southern state adopted an all-white primary and excluded
blacks from the Democratic primary, the only political contests that mattered across much of the South.35
For all the legal double-talk, the purpose of these laws was plain.
James Kimble Vardaman, later governor of Mississippi, boasted that“there is no use to equivocate or lie about the matter. Mississippi’s constitutional convention was held for no other purpose than to eliminate
the nigger from politics; not the ignorant—but the nigger.”36 These
technically color-blind tools did their work well. In 1900 Alabama had
121,159 literate black men of voting age. Only 3,742 were registered tovote. Louisiana had 130,000 black voters in the contentious election of1896. Only 5,320 voted in 1900. Blacks were clearly the target of theselaws, but that did not prevent some whites from being disenfranchised aswell. Louisiana dropped 80,000 white voters over the same period. Most
politically engaged southern whites considered this a price worth paying
to prevent the alleged fraud that plagued the region’s elections.37
At the same time that the South’s Democratic leaders were adopting
the tools to disenfranchise the region’s black voters, these same legislatures were constructing a system of racial segregation even more pernicious. While it built on earlier practice, segregation was primarily amodern and urban system of enforcing racial subordination and deference. In rural areas, white and black southerners negotiated the meaning of racial difference within the context of personal relationships ofkinship and patronage. An African American who broke the local community’s racial norms could expect swift personal sanction that often
included violence. The crop lien and convict lease systems were the mostimportant legal tools of racial control in the rural South. Maintaining
white supremacy there did not require segregation. Maintaining white
supremacy within the city, however, was a different matter altogether.
As the region’s railroad networks and cities expanded, so too did theanonymity and therefore freedom of southern blacks. Southern cities
were becoming a center of black middle-class life that was an implicit
threat to racial hierarchies. White southerners created the system of segregation as a way to maintain white supremacy in restaurants, theaters,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  131

public restrooms, schools, water fountains, train cars, and hospitals. Segregation inscribed the superiority of whites and the deference of blacks
into the very geography of public spaces.
As with disenfranchisement, segregation violated a plain reading of theConstitution—in this case the Fourteenth Amendment. Here the Supreme
Court intervened, ruling in the Civil Rights Cases (1883) that the Fourteenth Amendment only prevented discrimination directly by states. It did
not prevent discrimination by individuals, businesses, or other entities.
Southern states exploited this interpretation with the first legal segregationof railroad cars in 1888. In a case that reached the Supreme Court in 1896,
New Orleans resident Homer Plessy challenged the constitutionality ofLouisiana’s segregation of streetcars. The court ruled against Plessy and, inthe process, established the legal principle of separate but equal. Raciallysegregated facilities were legal provided they were equivalent. In practicethis was almost never the case. The court’s majority defended its position
with logic that reflected the racial assumptions of the day. “If one race
be inferior to the other socially,” the court explained, “the Constitutionof the United States cannot put them upon the same plane.” Justice John
Harlan, the lone dissenter, countered, “Our Constitution is color-blind,and neither knows nor tolerates classes among citizens. In respect of civilrights, all citizens are equal before the law.” Harlan went on to warn thatthe court’s decision would “permit the seeds of race hatred to be planted
under the sanction of law.”38 In their rush to fulfill Harlan’s prophecy,
southern whites codified and enforced the segregation of public spaces.
Segregation was built on a fiction—that there could be a white Southsocially and culturally distinct from African Americans. Its legal basis
rested on the constitutional fallacy of “separate but equal.” Southernwhites erected a bulwark of white supremacy that would last for nearly
sixty years. Segregation and disenfranchisement in the South rejectedblack citizenship and relegated black social and cultural life to segregated spaces. African Americans lived divided lives, acting the part whites
demanded of them in public, while maintaining their own world apartfrom whites. This segregated world provided a measure of independence
for the region’s growing black middle class, yet at the cost of poisoning
the relationship between black and white. Segregation and disenfranchisement created entrenched structures of racism that completed thetotal rejection of the promises of Reconstruction.
And yet many black Americans of the Progressive Era fought back.
Just as activists such as Ida Wells worked against southern lynching,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

132

chapte r 20

Booker T. Washington and W. E. B. Du Bois vied for leadership among
African American activists, resulting in years of intense rivalry and debated strategies for the uplifting of black Americans.
Born into the world of bondage in Virginia in 1856, Booker Taliaferro
Washington was subjected to the degradation and exploitation of slavery
early in life. But Washington also developed an insatiable thirst to learn.
Working against tremendous odds, Washington matriculated into Hampton University in Virginia and thereafter established a southern institution that would educate many black Americans, the Tuskegee Institute,
located in Alabama. Washington envisioned that Tuskegee’s contribution
to black life would come through industrial education and vocational
training. He believed that such skills would help African Americans accomplish economic independence while developing a sense of self-worth
and pride of accomplishment, even while living within the putrid confines of Jim Crow. Washington poured his life into Tuskegee, and thereby
connected with leading white philanthropic interests. Individuals such as
Andrew Carnegie, for instance, financially assisted Washington and his
educational ventures.

The strategies of Booker T. Washington and W. E. B. Du Bois differed, but
their desire was the same: better lives
for African Americans. Photograph ofBooker T. Washington taken between
1905 and 1915. Library of Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  133

Washington became a leading spokesperson for black Americans at
the turn of the twentieth century, particularly after Frederick Douglass’s
death in early 1895. Washington’s famous “Atlanta Compromise” speechfrom that same year encouraged black Americans to “cast your bucketdown” to improve life’s lot under segregation. In the same speech, delivered one year before the Supreme Court’s Plessy v. Ferguson decisionthat legalized segregation under the “separate but equal” doctrine, Washington said to white Americans, “In all things that are purely social we
can be as separate as the fingers, yet one as the hand in all things essential
to mutual progress.”39 Washington was both praised as a race leader andpilloried as an accommodationist to America’s unjust racial hierarchy;
his public advocacy of a conciliatory posture toward white supremacy
concealed the efforts to which he went to assist African Americans in
the legal and economic quest for racial justice. In addition to founding
Tuskegee, Washington also published a handful of influential books, including the autobiography Up from Slavery (1901). Like Du Bois, Washington was also active in black journalism, working to fund and support
black newspaper publications, most of which sought to counter Du Bois’s
growing influence. Washington died in 1915, during World War I, of ill
health in Tuskegee, Alabama.
Speaking decades later, Du Bois said Washington had, in his 1895
“Compromise” speech, “implicitly abandoned all political and social
rights. . . . I never thought Washington was a bad man . . . I believed him
to be sincere, though wrong.” Du Bois would directly attack Washington
in his classic 1903 The Souls of Black Folk, but at the turn of the century
he could never escape the shadow of his longtime rival. “I admired muchabout him,” Du Bois admitted. “Washington . . . died in 1915. A lot of
people think I died at the same time.”40
Du Bois’s criticism reveals the politicized context of the black freedom struggle and exposes the many positions available to black activists.
Born in Great Barrington, Massachusetts, in 1868, Du Bois entered theworld as a free person of color three years after the Civil War ended. He
was raised by a hardworking and independent mother; his New Englandchildhood alerted him to the reality of race even as it invested the emerging thinker with an abiding faith in the power of education. Du Bois graduated at the top of his high school class and attended Fisk University. Du
Bois’s sojourn to the South in 1880s left a distinct impression that would
guide his life’s work to study what he called the “Negro problem,” thesystemic racial and economic discrimination that Du Bois ­prophetically© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

134

chapte r 20

Photograph of W. E. B. Du Bois taken
in 1919. Library of Congress.

pronounced would be the problem of the twentieth century. After Fisk,
Du Bois’s educational path trended back North. He attended Harvard,
earned his second degree, crossed the Atlantic for graduate work in Germany, and circulated back to Harvard, and in 1895, he became the first
black American to receive a PhD there.
Du Bois became one of America’s foremost intellectual leaders onquestions of social justice by producing scholarship that underscoredthe humanity of African Americans. Du Bois’s work as an intellectual,scholar, and college professor began during the Progressive Era, a time in
American history marked by rapid social and cultural change as well ascomplex global political conflicts and developments. Du Bois addressed
these domestic and international concerns not only in his classrooms at
Wilberforce University in Ohio and Atlanta University in Georgia but
also in a number of his early publications on the history of the transatlantic slave trade and black life in urban Philadelphia. The most wellknown of these early works included The Souls of Black Folk (1903) andDarkwater (1920). In these books, Du Bois combined incisive historicalanalysis with engaging literary drama to validate black personhood andattack the inhumanity of white supremacy, particularly in the lead-up to© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  135

and during World War I. In addition to publications and teaching, Du
Bois set his sights on political organizing for civil rights, first with the
Niagara Movement and later with its offspring, the NAACP. Du Bois’s
main work with the NAACP lasted from 1909 to 1934 as editor of The
Crisis, one of America’s leading black publications. Du Bois attacked
Washington and urged black Americans to concede to nothing, to makeno compromises and advocate for equal rights under the law. Throughout his early career, he pushed for civil rights legislation, launched legal
challenges against discrimination, organized protests against injustice,
and applied his capacity for clear research and sharp prose to expose the
racial sins of Progressive Era America.
We refuse to allow the impression to remain that the Negro-American assents to inferiority, is submissive under oppression and apologetic before
insults. . . . Any discrimination based simply on race or color is barbarous,
we care not how hallowed it be by custom, expediency or prejudice . . .
discriminations based simply and solely on physical peculiarities, placeof birth, color of skin, are relics of that unreasoning human savagery ofwhich the world is and ought to be thoroughly ashamed. . . . Persistent
manly agitation is the way to liberty.41

W. E. B. Du Bois and Booker T. Washington made a tremendous
historical impact and left a notable historical legacy. They were reared
under markedly different circumstances, and thus their early life experiences and even personal temperaments oriented both leaders’ lives andoutlooks in decidedly different ways. Du Bois’s confrontational voiceboldly targeted white supremacy. He believed in the power of social
science to arrest the reach of white supremacy. Washington advocatedincremental change for longer-term gain. He contended that economic
self-sufficiency would pay off at a future date. Four years after Du Bois
directly spoke out against Washington in the chapter “Of Mr. Booker T.
Washington” in Souls of Black Folk, the two men shared the same lectern at Philadelphia Divinity School to address matters of race, history,
and culture in the American South. Although their philosophies often
differed, both men inspired others to demand that America live up to its
democratic creed.

VII. Conclusion
Industrial capitalism unleashed powerful forces in American life. Alongwith wealth, technological innovation, and rising standards of living, a© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

136

chapte r 20

host of social problems unsettled many who turned to reform politics
to set the world right again. The Progressive Era signaled that a turning
point had been reached for many Americans who were suddenly willingto confront the age’s problems with national political solutions. Reformers sought to bring order to chaos, to bring efficiency to inefficiency,
and to bring justice to injustice. Causes varied, constituencies shifted,
and the tangible effects of so much energy was difficult to measure, but
the Progressive Era signaled a bursting of long-simmering tensions andintroduced new patterns in the relationship between American society,
American culture, and American politics.

VIII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Mary Anne Henderson, with content contributions
by Andrew C. Baker, Peter Catapano, Blaine Hamilton, Mary Anne Henderson,
Amanda Hughett, Amy Kohout, Maria Montalvo, Brent Ruswick, Philip Luke
Sinitiere, Nora Slonimsky, Whitney Stewart, and Brandy Thomas Wells.
Recommended citation: Andrew C. Baker et al., “The Progressive Era,” Mary
Anne Henderson, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright(Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N o te s t o C h a pte r 2 0
1. Jack London, The Iron Heel (New York: Macmillan, 1908), 104.
2. Philip Foner, Women and the American Labor Movement: From Colonial
Times to the Eve of World War I (New York: Free Press, 1979).
3. Leon Stein, The Triangle Fire (Ithaca, NY: Syracuse University Press,
1962), 20.
4. Ibid., 144.
5. Ray Stannard Baker, American Chronicle: The Autobiography of Ray
Stannard Baker (New York: Scribner, 1945), 183.
6. Jacob A. Riis, How the Other Half Lives: Studies Among the Tenementsof New York (New York: Scribner, 1890).
7. Upton Sinclair, The Jungle (New York: Doubleday, 1906), 40.
8. Edward Bellamy, Looking Backward: 2000–1887 (Boston: Ticknor,1888).
9. Ibid., 368.
10. Charles M. Sheldon, In His Steps: “What Would Jesus Do?” (Chicago:
Advance, 1896), 273.
11. Walter Rauschenbusch, A Theology for the Social Gospel (New York:
Macmillan, 1917).
12. Ibid., 5.
13. John Kobler, Ardent Spirits: The Rise and Fall of Prohibition (Boston: Da
Capo Press, 1993), 147.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  137

14. Toynbee Hall was the first settlement house. It was built in 1884 by Samuel Barnett as a place for Oxford students to live while at the same time working
in the house’s poor neighborhood. Daniel Rodgers, Atlantic Crossings: Social
Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press, 1998), 64–65;
Victoria Bissell Brown, The Education of Jane Addams (Philadelphia: Universityof Pennsylvania Press, 2004).
15. Jane Addams, Twenty Years at Hull House (New York: Macmillan,
1911), 125–126.
16. Allen Davis, American Heroine: The Life and Legend of Jane Addams(New York: Oxford University Press, 1979), 77.
17. Jane Addams, “The Settlement as a Factor in the Labor Movement,”
reprinted in Hull-House Maps and Papers: A Presentation of Nationalities andWages in a Congested District of Chicago Together with Comments and Essayson Problems Growing out of the Social Conditions (Chicago: University of Illinois Press, 2007), 145, 149.
18. Kathryn Kish Sklar, “‘Some of Us Who Deal with the Social Fabric’: Jane
Addams Blends Peace and Social Justice, 1907–1919,” Journal of the Gilded Ageand Progressive Era 2, no. 1 (January 2003).
19. Karen Manners Smith, “New Paths to Power: 1890–1920,” in No Small
Courage: A History of Women in the United States, ed. Nancy Cott (New York:
Oxford University Press, 2000), 392.
20. Sarah Eisenstein, Give Us Bread but Give Us Roses: Working Women’s
Consciousness in the United States, 1890 to the First World War (New York:
Routledge, 1983), 32.
21. Ellen Carol Dubois, Women’s Suffrage and Women’s Rights (New York:New York University Press, 1998).
22. Herbert Croly, The Promise of American Life (New York: Macmillan,
1911), 145.
23. Kevin P. Phillips, Wealth and Democracy: A Political History of theAmerican Rich (New York: Broadway Books, 2003), 307.
24. Munn v. Illinois, 94 U.S. 113 (1877).
25. Interstate Commerce Act of 1887.
26. The writer Henry Adams said that he “showed the singular primitive
quality that belongs to ultimate matter—the quality that medieval theology assigned to God—he was pure act.” Henry Adams, The Education of Henry Adams(New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1918), 413.
27. Theodore Roosevelt, Addresses and Presidential Messages of Theodore
Roosevelt, 1902–1904, 15.
28. The historiography on American progressive politics is vast. See, for instance, Michael McGerr, A Fierce Discontent: The Rise and Fall of the Progressive Movement in America, 1870–1920 (New York: Free Press, 2003).
29. Roderick Nash, Wilderness and the American Mind, 4th ed. (NewHaven, CT: Yale University Press, 2001), 167–168, 171, 165.
30. John Muir, Our National Parks (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1901).
31. Gifford Pinchot, The Fight for Conservation (New York: Doubleday
Page, 1910), 44.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

138

chapte r 20

32. Michael Perman, Struggle for Mastery: Disfranchisement in the South,
1888–1908 (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2001).
33. Edward Ayers, The Promise of the New South (New York: Oxford University Press, 1992), 147.
34. Ibid.
35. Ibid.
36. Neil R. McMillen, Dark Journey: Black Mississippians in the Age of Jim
Crow (Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1990), 43.
37. Perman, Struggle for Mastery, 147.
38. Plessy v. Ferguson, 163 U.S. 537 (1896).
39. Booker T. Washington, Up from Slavery: An Autobiography (New York:
Doubleday, 1901), 221–222.
40. Kate A. Baldwin, Beyond the Color Line and the Iron Curtain: Reading
Encounters Between Black and Red (Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 2002),
297 n. 28.
41. W. E. B. DuBois, “Niagara’s Declaration of Principles, 1905,” Gilder
Lehrman Center for the Study of Slavery, Resistance, and Abolition, https://​glc​.yale​.edu​/niagaras​-declaration​-principles​-1905, accessed June 15, 2018.
Re c o mmen d e d Re a din gAyers, Edward. The Promise of the New South. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1992.
Bay, Mia. To Tell the Truth Freely: The Life of Ida B. Wells. New York: Hill andWang, 2010.
Cott, Nancy. The Grounding of Modern Feminism. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1987.
Dawley, Alan. Struggles for Justice: Social Responsibility and the Liberal State.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1991.
Dubois, Ellen Carol. Women’s Suffrage and Women’s Rights. New York: NewYork University Press, 1998.
Filene, Peter. “An Obituary for ‘The Progressive Movement,’” American Quarterly 22 (Spring 1970): 20–34.
Flanagan, Maureen. America Reformed: Progressives and Progressivisms, 1890s–
1920s. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007.
Foley, Neil. The White Scourge: Mexicans, Blacks, and Poor Whites in Texas
Cotton Culture. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1997.
Gilmore, Glenda E. Gender and Jim Crow: Women and the Politics of White Supremacy in North Carolina, 1896–1920. Chapel Hill: University of North
Carolina Press, 1996.
Hale, Grace Elizabeth. Making Whiteness: The Culture of Segregation in theSouth, 1890–1940. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998.
Hicks, Cheryl. Talk with You Like a Woman: African American Women, Justice,and Reform in New York, 1890–1935. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2010.
Hofstadter, Richard. The Age of Reform: From Bryan to F.D.R. New York:
Knopf, 1955.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e P ro gr e s s i v e E r a  139

Johnson, Kimberley. Governing the American State: Congress and the New Federalism, 1877–1929. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2006.
Kessler-Harris, Alice. In Pursuit of Equity: Women, Men, and the Quest for Economic Citizenship in 20th-Century America. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2001.
Kloppenberg, James T. Uncertain Victory: Social Democracy and Progressivism
in European and American Thought, 1870–1920. New York: Oxford University Press, 1986.
Kolko, Gabriel. The Triumph of Conservatism. New York: Free Press, 1963.
Kousser, J. Morgan. The Shaping of Southern Politics: Suffrage Restriction andthe Establishment of the One-Party South, 1880–1910. New Haven, CT:
Yale University Press, 1974.
McGerr, Michael. A Fierce Discontent: The Rise and Fall of the Progressive
Movement in America, 1870–1920. New York: Free Press, 2003.
Molina, Natalia. Fit to Be Citizens?: Public Health and Race in Los Angeles,
1879–1939. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2006.
Muncy, Robyn. Creating a Female Dominion in American Reform, 1890–1935.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1991.
Rodgers, Daniel T. Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2000.
Sanders, Elizabeth. The Roots of Reform: Farmers, Workers, and the American
State, 1877–1917. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999.
Stromquist, Shelton. Re-Inventing “The People”: The Progressive Movement, theClass Problem, and the Origins of Modern Liberalism. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 2006.
White, Deborah. Too Heavy a Load: In Defense of Themselves. New York: Norton, 1999.
Wiebe, Robert. The Search for Order, 1877–1920. New York: Hill and Wang,
1967.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

21World War I and Its
Aftermath
I. Introduction
World War I (“The Great War”) toppled empires, created new nations,and sparked tensions that would explode across future years. On thebattlefield, gruesome modern weaponry wrecked an entire generation ofyoung men. The United States entered the conflict in 1917 and was neveragain the same. The war heralded to the world the United States’ potential
as a global military power, and, domestically, it advanced but then beatback American progressivism by unleashing vicious waves of repression.
The war simultaneously stoked national pride and fueled disenchantments that burst Progressive Era hopes for the modern world. And it laid
the groundwork for a global depression, a second world war, and an entire history of national, religious, and cultural conflict around the globe.

Striking steel
mill workers
holding bulletins in Chicago,
Illinois, on September 22, 1919.
Explore­PAhistory​.com.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 141

II. Prelude to War
As the German empire rose in power and influence at the end of thenineteenth century, skilled diplomats maneuvered this disruption of traditional powers and influences into several decades of European peace. In
Germany, however, a new ambitious monarch would overshadow yearsof tactful diplomacy. Wilhelm II rose to the German throne in 1888. He
admired the British Empire of his grandmother, Queen Victoria, and envied the Royal Navy of Great Britain so much that he attempted to build
a rival German navy and plant colonies around the globe. The British
viewed the prospect of a German navy as a strategic threat, but, jealousof what he perceived as a lack of prestige in the world, Wilhelm II pressed
Germany’s case for access to colonies and symbols of status suitable fora world power. Wilhelm’s maneuvers and Germany’s rise spawned a new
system of alliances as rival nations warily watched Germany’s expansion.
In 1892, German posturing worried the leaders of Russia and France
and prompted a defensive alliance to counter the existing triple threat
between Germany, Austria-Hungary, and Italy. Britain’s Queen Victoria
remained unassociated with the alliances until a series of diplomatic crises and an emerging German naval threat led to British agreements with
Tsar Nicholas II and French President Émile Loubet in the early twentiethcentury. (The alliance between Great Britain, France, and Russia became
known as the Triple Entente.)
The other great threat to European peace was the Ottoman Empire,in Turkey. While the leaders of the Austrian-Hungarian Empire showed
little interest in colonies elsewhere, Turkish lands on its southern borderappealed to their strategic goals. However, Austrian-Hungarian expansion in Europe worried Tsar Nicholas II, who saw Russia as both thehistoric guarantor of the Slavic nations in the Balkans and the competitor
for territories governed by the Ottoman Empire.
By 1914, the Austrian-Hungarian Empire had control of Bosnia andHerzegovina and viewed Slavic Serbia, a nation protected by Russia, as
its next challenge. On June 28, 1914, after Serbian Gavrilo Princip assassinated the Austrian-Hungarian heirs to the throne, Archduke Franz Ferdinand and his wife, Grand Duchess Sophie, vengeful nationalist leadersbelieved the time had arrived to eliminate the rebellious ethnic Serbian
threat.1
On the other side of the Atlantic, the United States played an insignificant role in global diplomacy—it rarely forayed into internal European
politics. The federal government did not participate in international© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

142

ch apter 21

diplomatic alliances but nevertheless championed and assisted with the
expansion of the transatlantic economy. American businesses and consumers benefited from the trade generated as the result of the extended
period of European peace.
Stated American attitudes toward international affairs followed
the advice given by President George Washington in his 1796 Farewell
Address, 120 years before America’s entry into World War I. He hadrecommended that his fellow countrymen avoid “foreign alliances, attachments, and intrigues” and “those overgrown military establishments
which, under any form of government, are inauspicious to liberty, andwhich are to be regarded as particularly hostile to republican liberty.”2
A foreign policy of neutrality reflected America’s inward-looking
focus on the construction and management of its new powerful industrial economy (built in large part with foreign capital). The federal
government possessed limited diplomatic tools with which to engage ininternational struggles for world power. America’s small and increasingly
antiquated military precluded forceful coercion and left American diplomats to persuade by reason, appeals to justice, or economic coercion.
But in the 1880s, as Americans embarked upon empire, Congress authorized the construction of a modern navy. The army nevertheless remained
small and underfunded compared to the armies of many industrializing
nations.
After the turn of the century, the army and navy faced a great dealof organizational uncertainty. New technologies—airplanes, motor vehicles, submarines, modern artillery—stressed the capability of army andnavy personnel to effectively procure and use them. The nation’s army
could police Native Americans in the West and garrison recent overseas
acquisitions, but it could not sustain a full-blown conflict of any size. The
Davis Act of 1908 and the National Defense Act of 1916 inaugurated therise of the modern versions of the National Guard and military reserves.
A system of state-administered units available for local emergencies thatreceived conditional federal funding for training could be activated foruse in international wars. The National Guard program encompassed individual units separated by state borders. The program supplied summer
training for college students as a reserve officer corps. Federal and state
governments now had a long-term strategic reserve of trained soldiersand sailors.3
Border troubles in Mexico served as an important field test for modern American military forces. Revolution and chaos threatened American© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 143

business interests in Mexico. Mexican reformer Francisco Madero challenged Porfirio Diaz’s corrupt and unpopular conservative regime. He
was jailed, fled to San Antonio, and penned the Plan of San Luis Potosí,paving the way for the Mexican Revolution and the rise of armed revolutionaries across the country.
In April 1914, President Woodrow Wilson ordered Marines to accompany a naval escort to Veracruz on the lower eastern coast of Mexico. After a brief battle, the Marines supervised the city government andprevented shipments of German arms to Mexican leader Victor Huerta
until they departed in November 1914. The raid emphasized the continued reliance on naval forces and the difficulty in modernizing the militaryduring a period of European imperial influence in the Caribbean and elsewhere. The threat of war in Europe enabled passage of the Naval Act of1916. President Wilson declared that the national goal was to build the
Navy as “incomparably, the greatest . . . in the world.” And yet Mexico
still beckoned. The Wilson administration had withdrawn its support ofDiaz but watched warily as the revolution devolved into assassinations
and deceit. In 1916, Pancho Villa, a popular revolutionary in northern
Mexico, raided Columbus, New Mexico, after being provoked by American support for his rivals. His raiders killed seventeen Americans andand burned down the town center before American soldiers forced theirretreat. In response, President Wilson commissioned Army general John
“Black Jack” Pershing to capture Villa and disperse his rebels. Motorized vehicles, reconnaissance aircraft, and the wireless telegraph aided
in the pursuit of Villa. Motorized vehicles in particular allowed General
Pershing to obtain supplies without relying on railroads controlled by the
Mexican government. The aircraft assigned to the campaign crashed orwere grounded by mechanical malfunctions, but they provided invaluable lessons in their worth and use in war. Wilson used the powers of
the new National Defense Act to mobilize over one hundred thousand
National Guard units across the country as a show of force in northern
Mexico.4
The conflict between the United States and Mexico might have escalated into full-scale war if the international crisis in Europe had not
overwhelmed the public’s attention. After the outbreak of war in Europe
in 1914, President Wilson declared American neutrality. He insisted fromthe start that the United States be neutral “in fact as well as in name,” apolicy the majority of American people enthusiastically endorsed. It was
unclear, however, what “neutrality” meant in a world of close ­economic© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

144

ch apter 21

connections. Ties to the British and French proved strong, and those nations obtained far more loans and supplies than the Germans. In October 1914, President Wilson approved commercial credit loans to the
combatants, which made it increasingly difficult for the nation to claim
impartiality as war spread through Europe. Trade and financial relations with the Allied nations ultimately drew the United States further
into the conflict. In spite of mutually declared blockades between Germany, Great Britain, and France, munitions and other war suppliers in
the United States witnessed a brisk and booming increase in business.
The British naval blockades that often stopped or seized ships proved annoying and costly, but the unrestricted and surprise torpedo attacks from
German submarines were deadly. In May 1915, Germans sank the RMS
Lusitania. Over a hundred American lives were lost. The attack, coupledwith other German attacks on American and British shipping, raised theire of the public and stoked the desire for war.5
American diplomatic tradition avoided formal alliances, and the
Army seemed inadequate for sustained overseas fighting. However, theUnited States outdistanced the nations of Europe in one important measure of world power: by 1914, the nation held the top position in the
global industrial economy. The United States was producing slightly
more than one third of the world’s manufactured goods, roughly equal tothe outputs of France, Great Britain, and Germany combined.

III. War Spreads Through Europe
After the assassination of Archduke Ferdinand and Grand Duchess Sophie, Austria secured the promise of aid from its German ally and issued
a list of ten ultimatums to Serbia. On July 28, 1914, Austria declared war
on Serbia for failure to meet all of the demands. Russia, determined toprotect Serbia, began to mobilize its armed forces. On August 1, 1914,
Germany declared war on Russia to protect Austria after warnings directed at Tsar Nicholas II failed to stop Russian preparations for war.
In spite of the central European focus of the initial crises, the first blow
was struck against neutral Belgium in northwestern Europe. Germany
planned to take advantage of sluggish Russian mobilization by focusing
the German army on France. German military leaders recycled tactics
developed earlier and activated the Schlieffen Plan, which moved German
armies rapidly by rail to march through Belgium and into France. However, this violation of Belgian neutrality also ensured that Great Britain© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 145

entered the war against Germany. On August 4, 1914, Great Britain declared war on Germany for failing to respect Belgium as a neutral nation.
In 1915, the European war had developed into a series of bloody
trench stalemates that continued through the following year. Offensives,
largely carried out by British and French armies, achieved nothing but
huge numbers of casualties. Peripheral campaigns against the Ottoman
Empire in Turkey at Gallipoli, throughout the Middle East, and in various
parts of Africa either were unsuccessful or had little bearing on the European contest for victory. The third year of the war, however, witnesseda coup for German military prospects: the regime of Tsar Nicholas II
collapsed in Russia in March 1917. At about the same time, the Germans
again pursued unrestricted submarine warfare to deprive the Allies ofreplenishment supplies from the United States.6
The Germans, realizing that submarine warfare could spark an
American intervention, hoped the European war would be over before
American soldiers could arrive in sufficient numbers to alter the balance of power. A German diplomat, Arthur Zimmermann, planned tocomplicate the potential American intervention. He offered support to
the Mexican government via a desperate bid to regain Texas, New Mexico, and Arizona. Mexican national leaders declined the offer, but the

A French assault
on German
positions inChampagne,
France, in 1917.
National Archives.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

146

ch apter 21r­ evelation of the Zimmermann Telegram helped usher the United States
into the war.

IV. America Enters the War
By the fall of 1916 and spring of 1917, President Wilson believed an imminent German victory would drastically and dangerously alter the balanceof power in Europe. Submarine warfare and the Zimmerman Telegram,
meanwhile, inflamed public opinion. Congress declared war on Germany
on April 4, 1917. The nation entered a war three thousand miles awaywith a small and unprepared military. The United States was unpreparedin nearly every respect for modern war. Considerable time elapsed before
an effective army and navy could be assembled, trained, equipped, anddeployed to the Western Front in Europe. The process of building thearmy and navy for the war proved to be different from previous conflicts.
Unlike the largest European military powers of Germany, France, andAustria-Hungary, no tradition existed in the United States to maintainlarge standing armed forces or trained military reserves during peacetime.
Moreover, there was no American counterpart to the European practiceof rapidly equipping, training, and mobilizing reservists and conscripts.

The Boy Scouts of America charge up Fifth Avenue in New York City in a Wake Up, America parade in1917 to support recruitment efforts. Nearly sixty thousand people attended the single parade. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 147

The United States historically relied solely on traditional volunteerism
to fill the ranks of the armed forces. Notions of patriotic duty and adventure appealed to many young men who not only volunteered for wartime
service but sought and paid for their own training at army camps before
the war. American labor organizations favored voluntary service overconscription. Labor leader Samuel Gompers argued for volunteerism inletters to the congressional committees considering the question. “Theorganized labor movement,” he wrote, “has always been fundamentally
opposed to compulsion.” Referring to American values as a role modelfor others, he continued, “It is the hope of organized labor to demonstrate that under voluntary conditions and institutions the Republic of theUnited States can mobilize its greatest strength, resources and efficiency.”7
Despite fears of popular resistance, Congress quickly instituted a reasonably equitable and locally administered system to draft men for the
military. On May 18, 1917, Congress approved the Selective Service Act,and President Wilson signed it a week later. The new legislation avoided
the unpopular system of bonuses and substitutes used during the Civil
War and was generally received without major objection by the American
people.8
The conscription act initially required men from ages twenty-one tothirty to register for compulsory military service. Basic physical fitness
was the primary requirement for service. The resulting tests offered theemerging fields of social science a range of data collection tools and newscreening methods. The Army Medical Department examined the generalcondition of young American men selected for service from the population. The Surgeon General compiled his findings from draft records inthe 1919 report, “Defects Found in Drafted Men,” a snapshot of the
2.5 million men examined for military service. Of that group, 1,533,937
physical defects were recorded (often more than one per individual).
More than 34 percent of those examined were rejected for service orlater discharged for neurological, psychiatric, or mental deficiencies.9
To provide a basis for the neurological, psychiatric, and mental
evaluations, the army used cognitive skills tests to determine intelligence.
About 1.9 million men were tested on intelligence. Soldiers who could
read took the Army Alpha test. Illiterates and non-English-speaking immigrants took the nonverbal equivalent, the Army Beta test, which reliedon visual testing procedures. Robert M. Yerkes, president of the American Psychological Association and chairman of the Committee on thePsychological Examination of Recruits, developed and analyzed the tests.
His data argued that the actual mental age of recruits was only about© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

148

ch apter 21

A staged sceneof two British
soldiers charging
a bunker with a“dead” Germansoldier lying infront. C. 1922. Library of Congress.

thirteen years. Among recent immigrants, he said, it was even lower. As aeugenicist, he interpreted the results as roughly equivalent to a mild levelof retardation and as an indication of racial deterioration. Years later,
experts agreed that the results misrepresented the levels of education for
the recruits and revealed defects in the design of the tests.
The experience of service in the army expanded many individual social horizons as native-born and foreign-born soldiers served together.
Immigrants had been welcomed into Union ranks during the Civil War,including large numbers of Irish and Germans who had joined and fought
alongside native-born men. Some Germans in the Civil War fought inunits where German was the main language. Between 1917 and 1918,
the army accepted immigrants with some hesitancy because of the widespread public agitation against “hyphenated Americans.” Others weresegregated.
Prevailing racial attitudes among white Americans mandated the assignment of white and black soldiers to different units. Despite racial
discrimination, many black American leaders, such as W. E. B. Du Bois,
supported the war effort and sought a place at the front for black soldiers. Black leaders viewed military service as an opportunity to demonstrate to white society the willingness and ability of black men to assume
all duties and responsibilities of citizens, including wartime sacrifice. If
black soldiers were drafted and fought and died on equal footing withwhite soldiers, then white Americans would see that they deserved fullcitizenship. The War Department, however, barred black troops from© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 149

combat and relegated black soldiers to segregated service units where
they worked as general laborers.
In France, the experiences of black soldiers during training and periods of leave proved transformative. The army often restricted the privileges of black soldiers to ensure that the conditions they encountered inEurope did not lead them to question their place in American society.
However, black soldiers were not the only ones tempted by European
vices. To ensure that American “doughboys” did not compromise their
special identity as men of the new world who arrived to save the old,several religious and progressive organizations created an extensive program designed to keep the men pure of heart, mind, and body. Withassistance from the Young Men’s Christian Association (YMCA) andother temperance organizations, the War Department put together a program of schools, sightseeing tours, and recreational facilities to provide
wholesome and educational outlets. The soldiers welcomed most of theactivities from these groups, but many still managed to find and enjoy the
traditional recreations of soldiers at war.10
Women reacted to the war preparations by joining several militaryand civilian organizations. Their enrollment and actions in these organizations proved to be a pioneering effort for American women in war.
Military leaders authorized the permanent gender transition of several
occupations that gave women opportunities to don uniforms where none
had existed before in history. Civilian wartime organizations, althoughchaired by male members of the business elite, boasted all-female volunteer workforces. Women performed the bulk of volunteer work during
the war.11
The admittance of women brought considerable upheaval. The War
and Navy Departments authorized the enlistment of women to fill positions in several established administrative occupations. The genderedtransition of these jobs freed more men to join combat units. Army
women served as telephone operators (Hello Girls) for the Signal Corps,
navy women enlisted as yeomen (clerical workers), and the first groups
of women joined the Marine Corps in July 1918. Approximately twentyfive thousand nurses served in the Army and Navy Nurse Corps for duty
stateside and overseas, and about a hundred female physicians were contracted by the army. Neither the female nurses nor the doctors served ascommissioned officers in the military. The army and navy chose to appoint them instead, which left the status of professional medical women
hovering somewhere between the enlisted and officer ranks. As a result,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

150

ch apter 21

many female nurses and doctors suffered various physical and mental
abuses at the hands of their male coworkers with no system of redress inplace.12
Millions of women also volunteered in civilian organizations suchas the American Red Cross, the Young Men’s and Women’s Christian
Associations (YMCA/YWCA), and the Salvation Army. Most women
performed their volunteer duties in communal spaces owned by the leaders of the municipal chapters of these organizations. Women met atdesignated times to roll bandages, prepare and serve meals and snacks,
package and ship supplies, and organize community fund-raisers. The
variety of volunteer opportunities gave women the ability to appear in
public spaces and promote charitable activities for the war effort. Female
volunteers encouraged entire communities, including children, to get involved in war work. While most of these efforts focused on support for
the home front, a small percentage of female volunteers served with theAmerican Expeditionary Force in France.13
Jim Crow segregation in both the military and the civilian sector
stood as a barrier for black women who wanted to give their time to thewar effort. The military prohibited black women from serving as enlisted
or appointed medical personnel. The only avenue for black women towear a military uniform existed with the armies of the allied nations. A
few black female doctors and nurses joined the French Foreign Legion toescape the racism in the American army. Black female volunteers faced
the same discrimination in civilian wartime organizations. White leadersof the American Red Cross, YMCA/YWCA, and Salvation Army municipal chapters refused to admit black women as equal participants. Black
women were forced to charter auxiliary units as subsidiary divisions andwere given little guidance on organizing volunteers. They turned insteadto the community for support and recruited millions of women for auxiliaries that supported the nearly two hundred thousand black soldiersand sailors serving in the military. While most female volunteers laboredto care for black families on the home front, three YMCA secretaries
worked with the black troops in France.14

V. On the Homefront
In the early years of the war, Americans were generally detached from theevents in Europe. Progressive Era reform politics dominated the politicallandscape, and Americans remained most concerned with the shiftingrole of government at home. However, the facts of the war could not be© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 151

A membership card for the American Protective League, issued May 28, 1918. German immigrants in the
United States aroused popular suspicions during World War I and the American Protective League (APL), agroup of private citizens, worked directly with the U.S. government to identify suspected German sympathizers and to eradicate all antiwar and politically radical activities through surveillance, public shaming,and government raids. J. Edgar Hoover, the head of the Bureau of Investigation (later the Federal Bureau of
Investigation, or FBI), used the APL to gather intelligence. Wikimedia.

ignored by the public. The destruction taking place on European battlefields and the ensuing casualty rates exposed the unprecedented brutalityof modern warfare. Increasingly, a sense that the fate of the Westernworld lay in the victory or defeat of the Allies took hold in the UnitedStates.
President Wilson, a committed progressive, articulated a global visionof democracy even as he embraced neutrality. As war engulfed Europe,
it seemed apparent that the United States’ economic power would shape
the outcome of the conflict regardless of any American military intervention. By 1916, American trade with the Allies tripled, while trade with
the Central Powers shrank to less than 1 percent of previous levels.
The progression of the war in Europe generated fierce national debates about military preparedness. The Allies and the Central Powers had
quickly raised and mobilized vast armies and navies. The United Statesstill had a small military. When America entered the war, the mobilizationof military resources and the cultivation of popular support consumed
the country, generating enormous publicity and propaganda campaigns.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

152

ch apter 21

President Wilson created the Committee on Public Information, known
as the Creel Committee, headed by Progressive George Creel, to inspire
patriotism and generate support for military adventures. Creel enlisted
the help of Hollywood studios and other budding media outlets to cultivate a view of the war that pitted democracy against imperialism andframed America as a crusading nation rescuing Western civilization frommedievalism and militarism. As war passions flared, challenges to the onrushing patriotic sentiment that America was making the world “safe fordemocracy” were considered disloyal. Wilson signed the Espionage Act
in 1917 and the Sedition Act in 1918, stripping dissenters and protestersof their rights to publicly resist the war. Critics and protesters were imprisoned. Immigrants, labor unions, and political radicals became targetsof government investigations and an ever more hostile public culture.
Meanwhile, the government insisted that individual financial contributions made a discernible difference for the men on the Western Front.
Americans lent their financial support to the war effort by purchasing
war bonds or supporting the Liberty Loan Drive. Many Americans, however, sacrificed much more than money.15

VI. Before the Armistice
European powers struggled to adapt to the brutality of modern war.
Until the spring of 1917, the Allies possessed few effective defensive measures against submarine attacks. German submarines sank more than athousand ships by the time the United States entered the war. The rapid
addition of American naval escorts to the British surface fleet and theestablishment of a convoy system countered much of the effect of German submarines. Shipping and military losses declined rapidly, just as theAmerican army arrived in Europe in large numbers. Although much of
the equipment still needed to make the transatlantic passage, the physicalpresence of the army proved to a fatal blow to German war plans.16
In July 1917, after one last disastrous offensive against the Germans,
the Russian army disintegrated. The tsarist regime collapsed and in November 1917 Vladimir Lenin’s Bolshevik party came to power. Russia
soon surrendered to German demands and exited the war, freeing Germany to finally fight the one-front war it had desired since 1914. The
German military quickly shifted hundreds of thousands of soldiers fromthe eastern theater in preparation for a new series of offensives planned
for the following year in France.17© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 153

In March 1918, Germany launched the Kaiserschlacht (Spring Offensive), a series of five major attacks. By the middle of July 1918, eachand every one had failed to break through the Western Front. On August
8, 1918, two million men of the American Expeditionary Forces joined
British and French armies in a series of successful counteroffensives thatpushed the disintegrating German lines back across France. German general Erich Ludendorff referred to the launch of the counteroffensive as
the “black day of the German army.” The German offensive gamble exhausted Germany’s faltering military effort. Defeat was inevitable. Kaiser
Wilhelm II abdicated at the request of the German military leaders andthe new democratic government agreed to an armistice (cease-fire) on
November 11, 1918. German military forces withdrew from France andBelgium and returned to a Germany teetering on the brink of chaos.18
By the end of the war, more than 4.7 million American men had
served in all branches of the military: four million in the army, six hundred thousand in the navy, and about eighty thousand in the Marine
Corps. The United States lost over one hundred thousand men (fiftythree thousand died in battle, and even more from disease). Their terrible
sacrifice, however, paled before the Europeans’. After four years of brutal
stalemate, France had suffered almost a million and a half military deadand Germany even more. Both nations lost about 4 percent of their population to the war. And death was not done.19

VII. The War and the Influenza Pandemic
Even as war raged on the Western Front, a new deadly threat loomed:
influenza. In the spring of 1918, a strain of the flu virus appeared in thefarm country of Haskell County, Kansas, and hit nearby Camp Funston,
one of the largest army training camps in the nation. The virus spread likewildfire. The camp had brought disparate populations together, shuffledthem between bases, sent them back to their homes across the nation, and,in consecutive waves, deployed them around the world. Between Marchand May 1918, fourteen of the largest American military training camps
reported outbreaks of influenza. Some of the infected soldiers carried thevirus on troop transports to France. By September 1918, influenza spreadto all training camps in the United States. And then it mutated.20
The second wave of the virus, a mutated strain, was even deadlier
than the first. It struck down those in the prime of their lives: a dispro­
portionate amount of influenza victims were between ages eighteen and© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

154

ch apter 21

thirty-five. In Europe, influenza hit both sides of the Western Front. The“Spanish Influenza,” or the “Spanish Lady,” misnamed due to accountsof the disease that first appeared in the uncensored newspapers of neutral
Spain, resulted in the deaths of an estimated fifty million people worldwide. Reports from the surgeon general of the army revealed that while
227,000 soldiers were hospitalized from wounds received in battle, almost half a million suffered from influenza. The worst part of the epidemic struck during the height of the Meuse-Argonne Offensive in thefall of 1918 and weakened the combat capabilities of the American andGerman armies. During the war, more soldiers died from influenza than
combat. The pandemic continued to spread after the armistice before
finally fading in the early 1920s. No cure was ever found.21

VIII. The Fourteen Points and the League of Nations
As the flu virus wracked the world, Europe and America rejoiced at theend of hostilities. On December 4, 1918, President Wilson became thefirst American president to travel overseas during his term. He intended
to shape the peace. The war brought an abrupt end to four great European imperial powers. The German, Russian, Austrian-Hungarian, andOttoman Empires evaporated, and the map of Europe was redrawn toaccommodate new independent nations. As part of the the armistice,
Allied forces followed the retreating Germans and occupied territories
in the Rhineland to prevent Germany from reigniting war. As Germany
disarmed, Wilson and the other Allied leaders gathered in France at Versailles for the Paris Peace Conference to dictate the terms of a settlement
to the war. After months of deliberation, the Treaty of Versailles officially ended the war.
Earlier that year, on January 8, 1918, before a joint session of Congress, President Wilson offered an ambitious statement of war aims andpeace terms known as the Fourteen Points. The plan not only dealt withterritorial issues but offered principles on which a long-term peace could
be built. But in January 1918, Germany still anticipated a favorable verdict on the battlefield and did not seriously consider accepting the termsof the Fourteen Points. The Allies were even more dismissive. French
prime minister Georges Clemenceau remarked, “The good Lord only hadten [points].”22
President Wilson labored to realize his vision of the postwar world.
The United States had entered the fray, Wilson proclaimed, “to make the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 155

world safe for democracy.” At the center of the plan was a novel international organization—the League of Nations—charged with keeping aworldwide peace by preventing the kind of destruction that tore acrossEurope and “affording mutual guarantees of political independence andterritorial integrity to great and small states alike.” This promise of collective security, that an attack on one sovereign member would be viewed
as an attack on all, was a key component of the Fourteen Points.23
But the fight for peace was daunting. While President Wilson wascelebrated in Europe and welcomed as the “God of Peace,” his fellow
statesmen were less enthusiastic about his plans for postwar Europe.
America’s closest allies had little interest in the League of Nations. Allied
leaders sought to guarantee the future safety of their own nations. Unlike
the United States, the Allies endured the horrors of the war firsthand.
They refused to sacrifice further. The negotiations made clear that British prime minister David Lloyd-George was more interested in preserving Britain’s imperial domain, while French prime minister Clemenceausought a peace that recognized the Allies’ victory and the Central Powers’
culpability: he wanted reparations—severe financial penalties—and limits on Germany’s future ability to wage war. The fight for the League of
Nations was therefore largely on the shoulders of President Wilson. By
June 1919, the final version of the treaty was signed and President Wilson
was able to return home. The treaty was a compromise that included
demands for German reparations, provisions for the League of Nations,and the promise of collective security. For President Wilson, it was animperfect peace, but an imperfect peace was better than none at all.
The real fight for the League of Nations was on the American homefront. Republican senator Henry Cabot Lodge of Massachusetts stoodas the most prominent opponent of the League of Nations. As chair of
the Senate Foreign Relations Committee and an influential Republican
Party leader, he could block ratification of the treaty. Lodge attacked
the treaty for potentially robbing the United States of its sovereignty.
Never an isolationist, Lodge demanded instead that the country deal with
its own problems in its own way, free from the collective security—andoversight—offered by the League of Nations. Unable to match Lodge’s
influence in the Senate, President Wilson took his case to the American
people in the hopes that ordinary voters might be convinced that the only
guarantee of future world peace was the League of Nations. During his
grueling cross-country trip, however, President Wilson suffered an incapacitating stroke. His opponents had the upper hand.24© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

156

ch apter 21

President Wilson’s dream for the League of Nations died on the floorof the Senate. Lodge’s opponents successfully blocked America’s entry
into the League of Nations, an organization conceived and championedby the American president. The League of Nations operated with fiftyeight sovereign members, but the United States refused to join, refused tolend it American power, and refused to provide it with the power needed
to fulfill its purpose.25

IX. Aftermath of World War I
The war transformed the world. The Middle East, for instance, was drastically changed. For centuries the Ottoman Empire had shaped life in
the region. Before the war, the Middle East had three main centers of
power: the Ottoman Empire, Egypt, and Iran. President Wilson’s call for
self-determination appealed to many under the Ottoman Empire’s rule.
In the aftermath of the war, Wilson sent a commission to investigate theregion to determine the conditions and aspirations of the populace. The
King-Crane Commission found that most of the inhabitants favored an
independent state free of European control. However, these wishes werelargely ignored, and the lands of the former Ottoman Empire were divided into mandates through the Treaty of Sèvres at the San Remo Conference in 1920. The Ottoman Empire disintegrated into several nations,many created by European powers with little regard to ethnic realities.
These Arab provinces were ruled by Britain and France, and the newnation of Turkey emerged from the former heartland of Anatolia. According to the League of Nations, mandates “were inhabited by peoples
not yet able to stand by themselves under the strenuous conditions of
the modern world.” Though allegedly for the benefit of the people ofthe Middle East, the mandate system was essentially a reimagined formof nineteenth-century imperialism. France received Syria; Britain took
control of Iraq, Palestine, and Transjordan (Jordan). The United States
was asked to become a mandate power but declined. The geographicalrealignment of the Middle East also included the formation of two newnations: the Kingdom of Hejaz and Yemen. (The Kingdom of Hejaz was
ruled by Sharif Hussein and only lasted until the 1920s, when it became
part of Saudi Arabia.)26
The 1917 Russian Revolution, meanwhile enflamed American fears
of communism. The fates of Nicola Sacco and Bartolomeo Vanzetti, two
Italian-born anarchists who were convicted of robbery and murder in© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 157

1920 epitomized a sudden American Red Scare. Their arrest, trial, andexecution, meanwhile, inspired many leftists and dissenting artists to express their sympathy with the accused, such as in Maxwell Anderson’s
Gods of the Lightning or Upton Sinclair’s Boston. The Sacco-Vanzetti
case demonstrated an exacerbated nervousness about immigrants and thepotential spread of radical ideas, especially those related to international
communism.27
When in March 1918 the Bolsheviks signed a separate peace treaty
with Germany, the Allies planned to send troops to northern Russia andSiberia to prevent German influence and fight the Bolshevik Revolution. Wilson agreed, and, in a little-known foreign intervention, American troops remained in Russia as late as 1920. Although the Bolshevik
rhetoric of self-determination followed many of the ideals of Wilson’s
Fourteen Points—Vladimir Lenin supported revolutions against imperial
rule across the world—the American commitment to self-rule was hardly
strong enough to overcome powerful strains of anticommunism.
At home, the United States grappled with harsh postwar realities.
Racial tensions culminated in the Red Summer of 1919 when violenceWith America still at war in World War I, President Wilson sent American troops to Siberia during theRussian civil war to oppose the Bolsheviks. This August 1918 photograph shows American soldiers in
Vladivostok parading before the building occupied by the staff of the Czecho-Slovaks. To the left, Japanesemarines stand to attention as the American troops march. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

158

ch apter 21

broke out in at least twenty-five cities, including Chicago and Washington, D.C. The riots originated from wartime racial tensions. Industrial
war production and massive wartime service created vast labor shortages, and thousands of black southerners traveled to the North and Midwest to escape the traps of southern poverty. But the so-called Great
Migration sparked significant racial conflict as white northerners andreturning veterans fought to reclaim their jobs and their neighborhoods
from new black migrants.28
Many black Americans, who had fled the Jim Crow South and traveled halfway around the world to fight for the United States, would notso easily accept postwar racism. The overseas experience of black Americans and their return triggered a dramatic change in black communities.
W. E. B. Du Bois wrote boldly of returning soldiers: “We return. We
return from fighting. We return fighting. Make way for Democracy!”29
But white Americans desired a return to the status quo, a world that did
not include social, political, or economic equality for black people.
In 1919, America suffered through the “Red Summer.” Riots erupted
across the country from April until October. The massive bloodshed included thousands of injuries, hundreds of deaths, and vast destruction ofprivate and public property across the nation. The Chicago Riot, from
July 27 to August 3, 1919, considered the summer’s worst, sparked aweek of mob violence, murder, and arson. Race riots had rocked the nation before, but the Red Summer was something new. Recently empowered black Americans actively defended their families and homes fromhostile white rioters, often with militant force. This behavior galvanizedmany in black communities, but it also shocked white Americans whoalternatively interpreted black resistance as a desire for total revolution
or as a new positive step in the path toward black civil rights. In theriots’ aftermath, James Weldon Johnson wrote, “Can’t they understandthat the more Negroes they outrage, the more determined the whole race
becomes to secure the full rights and privileges of freemen?” Those six
hot months in 1919 forever altered American society and roused andterrified those that experienced the sudden and devastating outbreaks ofviolence.30

X. Conclusion
World War I decimated millions and profoundly altered the course ofworld history. Postwar instabilities led directly toward a global depression and a second world war. The war sparked the Bolshevik Revolu-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 159

tion, which led to the Soviet Union and later the Cold War. It createdMiddle Eastern nations and aggravated ethnic tensions that the UnitedStates could never overcome. And the United States had fought on theEuropean mainland as a major power. America’s place in the world wasnever the same. By whipping up nationalist passions, American attitudes
toward radicalism, dissent, and immigration were poisoned. Postwar disillusionment shattered Americans’ hopes for the progress of the modern
world. The war came and went, leaving in its place the bloody wreckageof an old world through which the United States traveled to a new anduncertain future.

XI. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Paula Fortier, with content contributions by Tizoc
Chavez, Zachary W. Dresser, Blake Earle, Morgan Deane, Paula Fortier, Larry A.
Grant, Mariah Hepworth, Jun Suk Hyun, and Leah Richier.
Recommended citation: Tizoc Chavez et al., “World War I and Its Aftermath,” Paula Fortier, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben
Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N o t e s t o C h ap t e r 21
1. David Stevenson, The First World War and International Politics (London: Oxford University Press, 1988); David Stevenson, Cataclysm: The FirstWorld War as Political Tragedy (New York: Basic Books, 2004).
2. George Washington, Farewell Address, Annals of Congress, 4th Congress,
2869–2870.
3. Paul Koistinen, Mobilizing for Modern War: The Political Economy ofAmerican Warfare, 1865–1919 (Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1997).
4. John S. D. Eisenhower, Intervention! The United States and the Mexican
Revolution, 1913–1917 (New York: Norton, 1995); Friedrich Katz, The Secret
War in Mexico: Europe, the United States, and the Mexican Revolution (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981).
5. Arthur S. Link, Wilson: The Struggle for Neutrality, 1914–1915 (Prince­
ton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1960).
6. Michael S. Neiberg, Fighting the Great War: A Global History (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2005).
7. American Federation of Labor, Report of the Proceedings of the Annual
Convention (Washington, DC: Law Reporter, 1917), 112.
8. Christopher Capozzola, Uncle Sam Wants You: World War I and the Making of the Modern American Citizen (New York: Oxford University Press, 2010).
9. Albert Gallitin Love, Defects Found in Drafted Men (Washington, DC:
U.S. Government Printing Office, 1920), 73.
10. Alan Dawley, Changing the World: American Progressives in War andRevolution (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005).

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

160

ch apter 21

11. Susan Zeiger, In Uncle Sam’s Service: Women Workers with the American Expeditionary Force, 1917–1919 (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania
Press, 2004), 2–4.
12. Lettie Gavin, American Women in World War I: They Also Served (Boulder: University Press of Colorado, 1997); Kimberly Jensen, Mobilizing Minerva:
American Women in the First World War (Chicago: University of Illinois Press,
2008), 170–172.
13. Gavin, American Women, 129–240.
14. Nikki Brown, Private Politics and Public Voices: Black Women’s Activism from World War I to the New Deal (Bloomington: Indiana University Press,
2006), 66–107.
15. David Kennedy, Over Here: The First World War and American Society(New York: Oxford University Press, 1980).
16. Neiberg, Fighting the Great War.
17. Ibid.
18. Ibid.
19. Ibid.
20. Nancy K. Bristow, American Pandemic: The Lost Worlds of the 1918 Influenza Epidemic (New York: Oxford University Press, 2012); Alfred W. Crosby,
America’s Forgotten Pandemic: The Influenza of 1918 (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2003).
21. Bristow, American Pandemic; Crosby, America’s Forgotten Pandemic.
22. Dawley, Changing the World.
23. Thomas J. Knock, To End All Wars: Woodrow Wilson and the Quest fora New World Order (New York: Oxford University Press, 1992).
24. John Milton Cooper, Breaking the Heart of the World: Woodrow Wilson
and the Fight for the League of Nations (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press, 2001).
25. Ibid.
26. David Fromkin, A Peace to End All Peace: The Fall of the Ottoman
Empire and the Creation of the Modern Middle East (New York: Holt, 1989).
27. Moshik Temkin, The Sacco-Vanzetti Affair: America on Trial (NewHaven, CT: Yale University Press, 2009).
28. Isabel Wilkerson, The Warmth of Other Suns: The Epic Story of America’s Great Migration (New York: Vintage Books, 2011).
29. W. E. B. Du Bois, “Returning Soldiers,” The Crisis (May 1919): 14.
30. William Tuttle, Race Riot: Chicago in the Red Summer of 1919 (Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1970); Cameron McWhirter, Red Summer: The
Summer of 1919 and the Awakening of Black America (New York: Holt, 2011).
R e c o m m e n d e d R e a di n g
Capozzola, Christopher. Uncle Sam Wants You: World War I and the Making of
the Modern American Citizen. New York: Oxford University Press, 2010.
Coffman, Edward M. The War to End All Wars: The American Military Experience in World War I. New York: Oxford University Press, 1968.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W ar I a n d I t s A f t e r m a t h 161

Cooper, John Milton. Breaking the Heart of the World: Woodrow Wilson andthe Fight for the League of Nations. New York: Cambridge University Press,
2001.
Dawley, Alan. Changing the World: American Progressives in War and Revolution. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2003.
Doenecke, Justus D. Nothing Less than War: A New History of America’s Entry
into World War I. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 2011.
Freeberg, Ernest. Democracy’s Prisoners: Eugene V. Debs, the Great War, and theRight to Dissent. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2008.
Fussell, Paul. The Great War and Modern Memory. New York: Oxford University Press, 1975.
Gerwarth, Robert, and Erez Manela, eds. Empires at War: 1911–1923. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2015.
Greenwald, Maurine W. Women, War, and Work: The Impact of World War I
on Women Workers in the United States. Westport, CT: Greenwood, 1980.
Hahn, Steven. A Nation Under Our Feet: Black Political Struggles in the Rural
South from Slavery to the Great Migration. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2003.
Hawley, Ellis. The Great War and the Search for Modern Order. New York: St.
Martin’s Press, 1979.
Jensen, Kimberly. Mobilizing Minerva: American Women in the First World War.
Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 2009.
Keene, Jennifer. Doughboys, The Great War, and the Remaking of America. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2001.
Kennedy, David. Over Here: The First World War and American Society. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1980.
Knock, Thomas J. To End All Wars: Woodrow Wilson and the Quest for a New
World Order. New York: Oxford University Press, 1992.
MacMillan, Margaret. The War That Ended Peace: The Road to 1914. New
York: Random House, 2014.
Manela, Erez. The Wilsonian Movement: Self-Determination and the International Origins of Anticolonial Nationalism. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2007.
Montgomery, David. The Fall of the House of Labor: The Workplace, the State,
and American Labor Activism, 1865–1925. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1988.
Murphy, Paul. World War I and the Origins of Civil Liberties in the UnitedStates. New York: Norton, 1979.
Neiberg, Michael S. The Path to War: How the First World War Created Modern
America. New York: Oxford University Press, 2016.
Rosenberg, Emily. Financial Missionaries to the World: The Politics and Culture of Dollar Diplomacy, 1900–1930. Durham, NC: Duke University Press,
2003.
Smith, Tony. Why Wilson Matters: The Origin of American Liberal Internationalism and Its Crisis Today. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2017.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

162

ch apter 21

Tuttle, William. Race Riot: Chicago in the Red Summer of 1919. Champaign:
University of Illinois Press, 1970.
Wilkerson, Isabel. The Warmth of Other Sons: The Epic Story of America’s Great
Migration. New York: Vintage Books, 2010.
Williams, Chad L. Torchbearers of Democracy: African American Soldiers in
the World War I Era. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2010.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

22
The New Era
I. Introduction
On a sunny day in early March 1921, Warren G. Harding took the oathto become the twenty-ninth president of the United States. He had won
a landslide election by promising a “return to normalcy.” “Our supremetask is the resumption of our onward, normal way,” he declared in his
inaugural address. Two months later, he said, “America’s present needis not heroics, but healing; not nostrums, but normalcy; not revolution,
but restoration.” The nation still reeled from the shock of World War I,
the explosion of racial violence and political repression in 1919, and, alingering “Red Scare” sparked by the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia.
More than 115,000 American soldiers had lost their lives in barely ayear of fighting in Europe. Then, between 1918 and 1920, nearly seven
hundred thousand Americans died in a flu epidemic that hit nearly 20
percent of the American population. Waves of labor strikes, meanwhile,

Women compete
in a low hurdle
race in Washington, D.C.,
sometime during
the 1920s. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

164

chapte r 22

hit soon after the war. Radicals bellowed. Anarchists and others sent
more than thirty bombs through the mail on May 1, 1919. After wartime
controls fell, the economy tanked and national unemployment hit 20
percent. Farmers’ bankruptcy rates, already egregious, now skyrocketed.
Harding could hardly deliver the peace that he promised, but his message
nevertheless resonated among a populace wracked by instability.
The 1920s, of course, would be anything but “normal.” The decadeso reshaped American life that it came to be called by many names: the
New Era, the Jazz Age, the Age of the Flapper, the Prosperity Decade,and, most commonly, the Roaring Twenties. The mass production andconsumption of automobiles, household appliances, film, and radio
fueled a new economy and new standards of living. New mass entertainment introduced talking films and jazz while sexual and social restraints loosened. But at the same time, many Americans turned theirback on political and economic reform, denounced America’s shifting
demographics, stifled immigration, retreated toward “old-time religion,”and revived the Ku Klux Klan with millions of new members. On theother hand, many Americans fought harder than ever for equal rights
and cultural observers noted the appearance of “the New Woman” and“the New Negro.” Old immigrant communities that had predated new
immigration quotas, meanwhile, clung to their cultures and their native
faiths. The 1920s were a decade of conflict and tension. But whatever it
was, it was not “normalcy.”

II. Republican White House, 1921–1933
To deliver on his promises of stability and prosperity, Harding signed legislation to restore a high protective tariff and dismantled the last wartime
controls over industry. Meanwhile, the vestiges of America’s involvementin World War I and its propaganda and suspicions of anything less than“100 percent American” pushed Congress to address fears of immigration and foreign populations. A sour postwar economy led elites to raise
the specter of the Russian Revolution and sideline not just the various
American socialist and anarchist organizations but nearly all union activism. During the 1920s, the labor movement suffered a sharp decline inmemberships. Workers lost not only bargaining power but also the support of courts, politicians, and, in large measure, the American public.1
Harding’s presidency would go down in history as among the mostcorrupt. Many of Harding’s cabinet appointees, however, were individu-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  165

als of true stature that answered to various American constituencies.
For instance, Henry C. Wallace, the vocal editor of Wallace’s Farmer
and a well-known proponent of scientific farming, was made secretaryof agriculture. Herbert Hoover, the popular head and administrator of
the wartime Food Administration and a self-made millionaire, was madesecretary of commerce. To satisfy business interests, the conservative
businessman Andrew Mellon became secretary of the treasury. Mostly,
however, it was the appointing of friends and close supporters, dubbed“the Ohio gang,” that led to trouble.2
Harding’s administration suffered a tremendous setback when several
officials conspired to lease government land in Wyoming to oil companies
in exchange for cash. Known as the Teapot Dome scandal (named after
the nearby rock formation that resembled a teapot), interior secretary
Albert Fall and navy secretary Edwin Denby were eventually convicted
and sent to jail. Harding took vacation in the summer of 1923 so that hecould think deeply on how to deal “with my God-damned friends”—it
was his friends, and not his enemies, that kept him up walking the halls
at nights. But then, in August 1923, Harding died suddenly of a heart
attack and Vice President Calvin Coolidge ascended to the highest officein the land.3
The son of a shopkeeper, Coolidge climbed the Republican ranks fromcity councilman to governor of Massachusetts. As president, Coolidge
sought to remove the stain of scandal but otherwise continued Harding’s
economic approach, refusing to take actions in defense of workers or
consumers against American business. “The chief business of the American people,” the new president stated, “is business.” One observer called
Coolidge’s policy “active inactivity,” but Coolidge was not afraid of supporting business interests and wealthy Americans by lowering taxes ormaintaining high tariff rates. Congress, for instance, had already begun
to reduce taxes on the wealthy from wartime levels of 66 percent to 20
percent, which Coolidge championed.4
While Coolidge supported business, other Americans continued theiractivism. The 1920s, for instance, represented a time of great activism
among American women, who had won the vote with the passage of the
Nineteenth Amendment in 1920. Female voters, like their male counterparts, pursued many interests. Concerned about squalor, poverty, anddomestic violence, women had already lent their efforts to prohibition,
which went into effect under the Eighteenth Amendment in January
1920. After that point, alcohol could no longer be manufactured or sold.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

166

chapte r 22

During the 1920s, the National Women’s Party fought for the expansion of women’s rights after women’s
suffrage had been secured by the Nineteenth Amendment in 1920. They organized private events, like thetea party pictured here in 1923, and waged public campaigns, such as the introduction of the Equal Rights
Amendment to Congress, as they continued the struggle for equality. Library of Congress.

Other reformers urged government action to ameliorate high mortality rates among infants and children, provide federal aid for education,and ensure peace and disarmament. Some activists advocated protective
legislation for women and children, while Alice Paul and the National
Woman’s Party called for the elimination of all legal distinctions “onaccount of sex” through the proposed Equal Rights Amendment (ERA),
which was introduced but defeated in Congress.5
National politics in the 1920s were dominated by the Republican
Party, which held not only the presidency but both houses of Congress
as well. In a note passed to American reporters, Coolidge announced
his decision not to run in the presidential election of 1928. Republicans nominated Herbert Hoover, an orphan from Iowa who graduatedfrom Stanford, became wealthy as a mining engineer, and won a deserved
reputation as a humanitarian for his relief efforts in famine-struck, wartorn Europe. Running against Hoover was Democrat Alfred E. Smith,
the four-time governor of New York and the son of Irish immigrants.
Smith was a part of the New York machine and favored workers’ protections while also opposing prohibition and immigration restrictions.
Hoover focused on economic growth and prosperity. He had served as© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  167

secretary of commerce under Harding and Coolidge and claimed credit
for the sustained growth seen during the 1920s; Hoover claimed in 1928
that America had never been closer to eliminating poverty. Much of theelection, however, centered on Smith’s religion: he was a Catholic. And
not only was he a Catholic, he opposed Protestant America’s greatest political triumph: Prohibition. Many Protestant ministers preached against
Smith and warned that he would be enthralled to the pope. Hoover won
in a landslide. While Smith won handily in the nation’s largest cities,
portending future political trends, he lost most of the rest of the country.
Even several solidly Democratic southern states pulled the lever for a
Republican for the first time since Reconstruction.6

III. Culture of Consumption“Change is in the very air Americans breathe, and consumer changes
are the very bricks out of which we are building our new kind of civilization,” announced marketing expert and home economist Christine
Frederick in her influential 1929 monograph, Selling Mrs. Consumer.
The book, which was based on one of the earliest surveys of Americanbuying habits, advised manufacturers and advertisers how to capture thepurchasing power of women, who, according to Frederick, accounted for
90 percent of household expenditures. Aside from granting advertisers
insight into the psychology of the “average” consumer, Frederick’s text
captured the tremendous social and economic transformations that had
been wrought over the course of her lifetime.7
Indeed, the America of Frederick’s birth looked very different from theone she confronted in 1929. The consumer change she studied had resulted
from the industrial expansion of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. With the discovery of new energy sources and manufacturing technologies, industrial output flooded the market with a range of consumer
products such as ready-to-wear clothing, convenience foods, and home appliances. By the end of the nineteenth century, output had risen so dramatically that many contemporaries feared supply had outpaced demand andthat the nation would soon face the devastating financial consequences ofoverproduction. American businessmen attempted to avoid this catastrophe by developing new merchandising and marketing strategies that transformed distribution and stimulated a new culture of consumer desire.8
The department store stood at the center of this early consumer revolution. By the 1880s, several large dry-goods houses blossomed into

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

168

chapte r 22

In the 1920s,
Americans boughtmagazines like
Photoplay to learn
about the stars of
their new favorite
entertainment
media: the movies.
Advertisers took
advantage of thisbroad audience topromote a wide
range of consumer
goods and services
to both men andwomen. Source:
Archive.org.

modern retail department stores. These emporiums concentrated a broadarray of goods under a single roof, allowing customers to purchase shirtwaists and gloves alongside toy trains and washbasins. To attract customers, department stores relied on more than variety. They also employed
innovations in service (such as access to restaurants, writing rooms, andbabysitting) and spectacle (such as elaborately decorated store windows,
fashion shows, and interior merchandise displays). Marshall Field & Co.
was among the most successful of these ventures. Located on State Street
in Chicago, the company pioneered many of these strategies, including
establishing a tearoom that provided refreshment to the well-heeled female shoppers who composed the store’s clientele. Reflecting on the success of Field’s marketing techniques, Thomas W. Goodspeed, an early
trustee of the University of Chicago, wrote, “Perhaps the most notableof Mr. Field’s innovations was that he made a store in which it was a joy
to buy.”9
The joy of buying infected a growing number of Americans in theearly twentieth century as the rise of mail-order catalogs, mass-­circulation
magazines, and national branding further stoked consumer desire. The
automobile industry also fostered the new culture of consumption bypromoting the use of credit. By 1927, more than 60 percent of American
automobiles were sold on credit, and installment purchasing was madeavailable for nearly every other large consumer purchase. Spurred by© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  169

access to easy credit, consumer expenditures for household appliances,for example, grew by more than 120 percent between 1919 and 1929.
Henry Ford’s assembly line, which advanced production strategies practiced within countless industries, brought automobiles within the reachof middle-income Americans and further drove the spirit of consumerism. By 1925, Ford’s factories were turning out a Model-T every ten
seconds. The number of registered cars ballooned from just over ninemillion in 1920 to nearly twenty-seven million by the decade’s end.
Americans owned more cars than Great Britain, Germany, France, andItaly combined. In the late 1920s, 80 percent of the world’s cars droveon American roads.

IV. Culture of EscapeAs transformative as steam and iron had been in the previous century,
gasoline and electricity—embodied most dramatically for many Americans in automobiles, film, and radio—propelled not only consumption
but also the famed popular culture in the 1920s. “We wish to escape,”
wrote Edgar Burroughs, author of the Tarzan series, “. . . the restrictionsof manmade laws, and the inhibitions that society has placed upon us.”
Burroughs authored a new Tarzan story nearly every year from 1914
until 1939. “We would each like to be Tarzan,” he said. “At least I
would; I admit it.” Like many Americans in the 1920s, Burroughs sought
to challenge and escape the constraints of a society that seemed moreindustrialized with each passing day.10
Just like Burroughs, Americans escaped with great speed. Whether
through the automobile, Hollywood’s latest films, jazz records producedon Tin Pan Alley, or the hours spent listening to radio broadcasts of Jack
Dempsey’s prizefights, the public wrapped itself in popular culture. One
observer estimated that Americans belted out the silly musical hit “Yes,
We Have No Bananas” more than “The Star Spangled Banner” and all
the hymns in all the hymnals combined.11
As the automobile became more popular and more reliable, more
people traveled more frequently and attempted greater distances. Women
increasingly drove themselves to their own activities as well as those of
their children. Vacationing Americans sped to Florida to escape northern winters. Young men and women fled the supervision of courtship,exchanging the staid parlor couch for sexual exploration in the backseatof a sedan. In order to serve and capture the growing number of ­drivers,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

170

chapte r 22

Side view of a
Ford sedan withfour passengers
and a woman
getting in on
the driver’s side,c. 1923. Libraryof Congress.

Americans erected gas stations, diners, motels, and billboards along theroadside. Automobiles themselves became objects of entertainment:
nearly one hundred thousand people gathered to watch drivers compete
for the $50,000 prize of the Indianapolis 500.
Meanwhile, the United States dominated the global film industry.
By 1930, as moviemaking became more expensive, a handful of film
companies took control of the industry. Immigrants, mostly of Jewish
heritage from central and Eastern Europe, originally “invented Hollywood” because most turn-of-the-century middle- and upper-class Americans viewed cinema as lower-class entertainment. After their parents
emigrated from Poland in 1876, Harry, Albert, Sam, and Jack Warner(who were, according to family lore, given the name when an Ellis Island official could not understand their surname) founded Warner Bros.
In 1918, Universal, Paramount, Columbia, and Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer(MGM) were all founded by or led by Jewish executives. Aware of theirsocial status as outsiders, these immigrants (or sons of immigrants) purposefully produced films that portrayed American values of opportunity,
democracy, and freedom.
Not content with distributing thirty-minute films in nickelodeons,film moguls produced longer, higher-quality films and showed them inpalatial theaters that attracted those who had previously shunned thefilm industry. But as filmmakers captured the middle and upper classes,
they maintained working-class moviegoers by blending traditional andmodern values. Cecil B. DeMille’s 1923 epic The Ten Commandments© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  171

Mary Pickford’s film persona captured theglamorous and lavish lifestyle desired byfemale moviegoers of the 1920s. Library ofCongress.

depicted orgiastic revelry, for instance, while still managing to celebratea biblical story. But what good was a silver screen in a dingy theater?
Moguls and entrepreneurs soon constructed picture palaces. Samuel Rothafel’s Roxy Theater in New York held more than six thousand patrons
who could be escorted by a uniformed usher past gardens and statues
to their cushioned seat. In order to show The Jazz Singer (1927), thefirst movie with synchronized words and pictures, the Warners spent
half a million to equip two theaters. “Sound is a passing fancy,” one
MGM producer told his wife, but Warner Bros.’ assets, which increased
from just $5,000,000 in 1925 to $230,000,000 in 1930, tell a different
story.12
Americans fell in love with the movies. Whether it was the surroundings, the sound, or the production budgets, weekly movie attendance skyrocketed from sixteen million in 1912 to forty million in the early 1920s.
Hungarian immigrant William Fox, founder of Fox Film Corporation,
declared that “the motion picture is a distinctly American institution”
because “the rich rub elbows with the poor” in movie theaters. With noseating restriction, the one-price admission was accessible for nearly all© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

172

chapte r 22

Americans (African Americans, however, were either excluded or segregated). Women represented more than 60 percent of moviegoers, packing
theaters to see Mary Pickford, nicknamed “America’s Sweetheart,” whowas earning one million dollars a year by 1920 through a combination offilm and endorsements contracts. Pickford and other female stars popularized the “flapper,” a woman who favored short skirts, makeup, andcigarettes.
As Americans went to the movies more and more, at home they had
the radio. Italian scientist Guglielmo Marconi transmitted the first transatlantic wireless (radio) message in 1901, but radios in the home did not
become available until around 1920, when they boomed across the country. Around half of American homes contained a radio by 1930. Radiostations brought entertainment directly into the living room through thesale of advertisements and sponsorships, from The Maxwell House Hourto the Lucky Strike Orchestra. Soap companies sponsored daytime dramas so frequently that an entire genre—“soap operas”—was born, providing housewives with audio adventures that stood in stark contrast tocommon chores. Though radio stations were often under the control ofcorporations like the National Broadcasting Company (NBC) or the Columbia Broadcasting System (CBS), radio programs were less constrainedby traditional boundaries in order to capture as wide an audience as possible, spreading popular culture on a national level.
Radio exposed Americans to a broad array of music. Jazz, a uniquely
American musical style popularized by the African-American community
in New Orleans, spread primarily through radio stations and records.
The New York Times had ridiculed jazz as “savage” because of its racial
heritage, but the music represented cultural independence to others. As
Harlem-based musician William Dixon put it, “It did seem, to a littleboy, that . . . white people really owned everything. But that wasn’t entirely true. They didn’t own the music that I played.” The fast-paced
and spontaneity-laced tunes invited the listener to dance along. “Whena good orchestra plays a ‘rag,’” dance instructor Vernon Castle recalled,“one has simply got to move.” Jazz became a national sensation, played
and heard by whites and blacks both. Jewish Lithuanian-born singer Al
Jolson—whose biography inspired The Jazz Singer and who played thefilm’s titular character—became the most popular singer in America.13
The 1920s also witnessed the maturation of professional sports. Playby-play radio broadcasts of major collegiate and professional sporting
events marked a new era for sports, despite the institutionalization of© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  173

racial segregation in most. Suddenly, Jack Dempsey’s left crosses andright uppercuts could almost be felt in homes across the United States.
Dempsey, who held the heavyweight championship for most of the decade, drew million-dollar gates and inaugurated “Dempseymania” innewspapers across the country. Red Grange, who carried the footballwith a similar recklessness, helped popularize professional football, which
was then in the shadow of the college game. Grange left the University of
Illinois before graduating to join the Chicago Bears in 1925. “There had
never been such evidence of public interest since our professional league
began,” recalled Bears owner George Halas of Grange’s arrival.14
Perhaps no sports figure left a bigger mark than did Babe Ruth. Born
George Herman Ruth, the “Sultan of Swat” grew up in an orphanage in
Baltimore’s slums. Ruth’s emergence onto the national scene was muchneeded, as the baseball world had been rocked by the so-called Black Sox
Scandal in which eight players allegedly agreed to throw the 1919 World
Series. Ruth hit fifty-four home runs in 1920, which was more than any
other team combined. Baseball writers called Ruth a superman, and more
Americans could recognize Ruth than they could then-president Warren
G. Harding.
After an era of destruction and doubt brought about by WorldWar I, Americans craved heroes who seemed to defy convention andbreak boundaries. Dempsey, Grange, and Ruth dominated their respective sports, but only Charles Lindbergh conquered the sky. On May 21,
1927, Lindbergh concluded the first ever nonstop solo flight from New
York to Paris. Armed with only a few sandwiches, some bottles of water,
paper maps, and a flashlight, Lindbergh successfully navigated over the
Atlantic Ocean in thirty-three hours. Some historians have dubbed Lindbergh the “hero of the decade,” not only for his transatlantic journey but
because he helped to restore the faith of many Americans in individual
effort and technological advancement. In a world so recently devastatedby machine guns, submarines, and chemical weapons, Lindbergh’s flightdemonstrated that technology could inspire and accomplish great things.
Outlook Magazine called Lindbergh “the heir of all that we like to thinkis best in America.”15
The decade’s popular culture seemed to revolve around escape.
Coney Island in New York marked new amusements for young and old.
Americans drove their sedans to massive theaters to enjoy major motion pictures. Radio towers broadcasted the bold new sound of jazz, theadventures of soap operas, and the feats of amazing athletes. Dempsey© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

174

chapte r 22

Babe Ruth’s incredible talent accelerated
the popularity of baseball, cementing it as
America’s pastime. Ruth’s propensity to shatter records made him a national hero. Libraryof Congress.

and Grange seemed bigger, stronger, and faster than any who dared tochallenge them. Babe Ruth smashed home runs out of ball parks acrossthe country. And Lindbergh escaped the earth’s gravity and crossed an
entire ocean. Neither Dempsey nor Ruth nor Lindbergh made Americans
forget the horrors of World War I and the chaos that followed, but they
made it seem as if the future would be that much brighter.

V. “The New Woman”
The rising emphasis on spending and accumulation nurtured a national
ethos of materialism and individual pleasure. These impulses wereembodied in the figure of the flapper, whose bobbed hair, short skirts,
makeup, cigarettes, and carefree spirit captured the attention of American novelists such as F. Scott Fitzgerald and Sinclair Lewis. Rejecting theold Victorian values of desexualized modesty and self-restraint, young“flappers” seized opportunities for the public coed pleasures offeredby new commercial leisure institutions, such as dance halls, cabarets,
and nickelodeons, not to mention the illicit blind tigers and speakeasies
spawned by Prohibition. So doing, young American women had helped© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  175

This “new breed” of women—the flappers—
challenged traditional expectations of women
by bobbing their hair, wearing short dresses,
listening to jazz, and flouting social andsexual norms. While liberating in many ways,
these behaviors also reinforced stereotypes offemale carelessness and obsessive consumerism that would continue throughout thetwentieth century. Library of Congress.

usher in a new morality that permitted women greater independence,
freedom of movement, and access to the delights of urban living. In thewords of psychologist G. Stanley Hall, “She was out to see the world
and, incidentally, be seen of it.”Such sentiments were repeated in an oft-cited advertisement in a
1930 edition of the Chicago Tribune: “Today’s woman gets what she
wants. The vote. Slim sheaths of silk to replace voluminous petticoats.
Glassware in sapphire blue or glowing amber. The right to a career. Soap
to match her bathroom’s color scheme.” As with so much else in the
1920s, however, sex and gender were in many ways a study in contradictions. It was the decade of the “New Woman,” and one in which only 10
percent of married women—although nearly half of unmarried women—
worked outside the home.16 It was a decade in which new technologies
decreased time requirements for household chores, and one in which
standards of cleanliness and order in the home rose to often impossible
standards. It was a decade in which women finally could exercise theirright to vote, and one in which the often thinly bound women’s coalitions© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

176

chapte r 22

that had won that victory splintered into various causes. Finally, it wasa decade in which images such as the “flapper” gave women new modesof representing femininity, and one in which such representations were
often inaccessible to women of certain races, ages, and socioeconomic
classes.
Women undoubtedly gained much in the 1920s. There was a profoundand keenly felt cultural shift that, for many women, meant increased opportunity to work outside the home. The number of professional women,
for example, significantly rose in the decade. But limits still existed,even for professional women. Occupations such as law and medicine
remained overwhelmingly male: most female professionals were in feminized professions such as teaching and nursing. And even within thesefields, it was difficult for women to rise to leadership positions.
Further, it is crucial not to overgeneralize the experience of all womenbased on the experiences of a much-commented-upon subset of the population. A woman’s race, class, ethnicity, and marital status all had an
impact on both the likelihood that she worked outside the home andthe types of opportunities that were available to her. While there were
exceptions, for many minority women, work outside the home was not a
cultural statement but rather a financial necessity (or both), and physically demanding, low-paying domestic service work continued to be themost common job type. Young, working-class white women were joining
the workforce more frequently, too, but often in order to help support
their struggling mothers and fathers.
For young, middle-class, white women—those most likely to fit theimage of the carefree flapper—the most common workplace was the office. These predominantly single women increasingly became clerks, jobs
that had been primarily male earlier in the century. But here, too, there
was a clear ceiling. While entry-level clerk jobs became increasingly feminized, jobs at a higher, more lucrative level remained dominated by men.
Further, rather than changing the culture of the workplace, the entranceof women into lower-level jobs primarily changed the coding of the jobs
themselves. Such positions simply became “women’s work.”
Finally, as these same women grew older and married, social changes
became even subtler. Married women were, for the most part, expected toremain in the domestic sphere. And while new patterns of consumption
gave them more power and, arguably, more autonomy, new household
technologies and philosophies of marriage and child-rearing increased
expectations, further tying these women to the home—a paradox that© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  177

becomes clear in advertisements such as the one in the Chicago Tribune.
Of course, the number of women in the workplace cannot exclusively
measure changes in sex and gender norms. Attitudes towards sex, forexample, continued to change in the 1920s as well, a process that had
begun decades before. This, too, had significantly different impacts
on different social groups. But for many women—particularly young,­college-educated white women—an attempt to rebel against what they
saw as a repressive Victorian notion of sexuality led to an increase inpremarital sexual activity strong enough that it became, in the words of
one historian, “almost a matter of conformity.”17
In the homosexual community, meanwhile, a vibrant gay culture
grew, especially in urban centers such as New York. While gay males had
to contend with increased policing of the gay lifestyle (especially later inthe decade), in general they lived more openly in New York in the 1920s
than they would be able to for many decades following World War II.18
At the same time, for many lesbians in the decade, the increased sexualization of women brought new scrutiny to same-sex female relationships
previously dismissed as harmless.19

The frivolity,
decadence, andobliviousness ofthe 1920s wasembodied in theimage of the flapper, the stereotypeof the carefree andindulgent womanof the Roaring
Twenties depicted
here in a drawing
by Russell Patterson. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

178

chapte r 22

Ultimately, the most enduring symbol of the changing notions of gender in the 1920s remains the flapper. And indeed, that image was a “new”
available representation of womanhood in the 1920s. But it is just that:a representation of womanhood of the 1920s. There were many womenin the decade of differing races, classes, ethnicities, and experiences, justas there were many men with different experiences. For some women, the1920s were a time of reorganization, new representations, and new opportunities. For others, it was a decade of confusion, contradiction, newpressures, and struggles new and old.

VI. “The New Negro”
Just as cultural limits loosened across the nation, the 1920s represented
a period of serious self-reflection among African Americans, most especially those in northern ghettos. New York City was a popular destination of American blacks during the Great Migration. The city’s black
population grew 257 percent, from 91,709 in 1910 to 327,706 by 1930
(the white population grew only 20 percent).20 Moreover, by 1930, some
98,620 foreign-born blacks had migrated to the United States. Nearly
half made their home in Manhattan’s Harlem district.21
Harlem originally lay between Fifth Avenue and Eighth Avenue and130th Street to 145th Street. By 1930, the district had expanded to 155thStreet and was home to 164,000 people, mostly African Americans. Continuous relocation to “the greatest Negro City in the world” exacerbatedproblems with crime, health, housing, and unemployment.22 Nevertheless, it brought together a mass of black people energized by race pride,
military service in World War I, the urban environment, and, for many,ideas of Pan-Africanism or Garveyism (discussed shortly). James Weldon Johnson called Harlem “the Culture Capital.”23 The area’s cultural
ferment produced the Harlem Renaissance and fostered what was thentermed the New Negro Movement.
Alain Locke did not coin the term New Negro, but he did much topopularize it. In the 1925 book The New Negro, Locke proclaimed thatthe generation of subservience was no more—“we are achieving something like a spiritual emancipation.” Bringing together writings by men
and women, young and old, black and white, Locke produced an anthology that was of African Americans, rather than only about them. The
book joined many others. Popular Harlem Renaissance writers publishedsome twenty-six novels, ten volumes of poetry, and countless short stories© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  179

between 1922 and 1935.24 Alongside the well-known Langston Hughes
and Claude McKay, female writers like Jessie Redmon Fauset and Zora
Neale Hurston published nearly one third of these novels. While themes
varied, the literature frequently explored and countered pervading stereotypes and forms of American racial prejudice.
The Harlem Renaissance was manifested in theater, art, and music.
For the first time, Broadway presented black actors in serious roles. The
1924 production Dixie to Broadway was the first all-black show withmainstream showings.25 In art, Meta Vaux Warrick Fuller, Aaron Douglas, and Palmer Hayden showcased black cultural heritage and captured
the population’s current experience. In music, jazz rocketed in popularity. Eager to hear “real jazz,” whites journeyed to Harlem’s Cotton Cluband Smalls. Next to Greenwich Village, Harlem’s nightclubs and speakeasies (venues where alcohol was publicly consumed) presented a place
where sexual freedom and gay life thrived. Unfortunately, while headliners like Duke Ellington were hired to entertain at Harlem’s venues,

Garveyism, deemed too radical by most whiteand black Americans, nevertheless cultivateda substantial following and stimulated later
black nationalistic movements. Photographof Marcus Garvey, August 5, 1924. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

180

chapte r 22

the surrounding black community was usually excluded. Furthermore,
black performers were often restricted from restroom use and relegatedto service door entry. As the Renaissance faded to a close, several Harlem
Renaissance artists went on to produce important works indicating that
this movement was but one component in African American’s long history of cultural and intellectual achievements.26
The explosion of African American self-expression found multiple
outlets in politics. In the 1910s and 1920s, perhaps no one so attracted
disaffected black activists as Marcus Garvey. Garvey was a Jamaican
publisher and labor organizer who arrived in New York City in 1916.
Within just a few years of his arrival, he built the largest black nationalist
organization in the world, the Universal Negro Improvement Association (UNIA).27 Inspired by Pan-Africanism and Booker T. Washington’smodel of industrial education, and critical of what he saw as Du Bois’s
elitist strategies in service of black elites, Garvey sought to promote racial pride, encourage black economic independence, and root out racial
oppression in Africa and the Diaspora.28
Headquartered in Harlem, the UNIA published a newspaper, Negro
World, and organized elaborate parades in which members, known as
Garveyites, dressed in ornate, militaristic regalia and marched down city
streets. The organization criticized the slow pace of the judicial focusof the NAACP as well as its acceptance of memberships and funds fromwhites. “For the Negro to depend on the ballot and his industrial progress alone,” Garvey opined, “will be hopeless as it does not help him
when he is lynched, burned, jim-crowed, and segregated.” In 1919, theUNIA announced plans to develop a shipping company called the BlackStar Line as part of a plan that pushed for blacks to reject the politicalsystem and to “return to Africa” instead.” Most of the investments camein the form of shares purchased by UNIA members, many of whom heard
Garvey give rousing speeches across the country about the importanceof establishing commercial ventures between African Americans, AfroCaribbeans, and Africans.29
Garvey’s detractors disparaged these public displays and poorly managed business ventures, and they criticized Garvey for peddling empty
gestures in place of measures that addressed the material concerns ofAfrican Americans. NAACP leaders depicted Garvey’s plan as one that
simply said, “Give up! Surrender! The struggle is useless.” Enflamed byhis aggressive attacks on other black activists and his radical ideas of
racial independence, many African American and Afro-Caribbean lead-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  181

ers worked with government officials and launched the “Garvey Must
Go” campaign, which culminated in his 1922 indictment and 1925 imprisonment and subsequent deportation for “using the mails for fraudulent purposes.” The UNIA never recovered its popularity or financial
support, even after Garvey’s pardon in 1927, but his movement made alasting impact on black consciousness in the United States and abroad.
He inspired the likes of Malcolm X, whose parents were Garveyites, andKwame Nkrumah, the first president of Ghana. Garvey’s message, perhaps best captured by his rallying cry, “Up, you mighty race,” resonatedwith African Americans who found in Garveyism a dignity not granted
them in their everyday lives. In that sense, it was all too typical of theHarlem Renaissance.30

VII. Culture War
For all of its cultural ferment, however, the 1920s were also a difficult
time for radicals and immigrants and anything “modern.” Fear of foreign
radicals led to the executions of Nicola Sacco and Bartolomeo Vanzetti,
two Italian anarchists, in 1927. In May 1920, the two had been arrested
for robbery and murder connected with an incident at a Massachusetts
factory. Their guilty verdicts were appealed for years as the evidence surrounding their convictions was slim. For instance, while one eyewitness
claimed that Vanzetti drove the getaway car, accounts of others describeda different person altogether. Nevertheless, despite worldwide lobbying
by radicals and a respectable movement among middle-class Italian organizations in the United States, the two men were executed on August23, 1927. Vanzetti conceivably provided the most succinct reason forhis death, saying, “This is what I say . . . . I am suffering because I am aradical and indeed I am a radical; I have suffered because I was an Italian,and indeed I am an Italian.”31
Many Americans expressed anxieties about the changes that had
remade the United States and, seeking scapegoats, many middle-classwhite Americans pointed to Eastern European and Latin American immigrants (Asian immigration had already been almost completely prohibited), African Americans who now pushed harder for civil rights,
and, after migrating out of the American South to northern cities as apart of the Great Migration, the mass exodus that carried nearly half amillion blacks out of the South between 1910 and 1920. Protestants,
meanwhile, continued to denounce the Roman Catholic Church and© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

182

chapte r 22

charged that American Catholics gave their allegiance to the pope andnot to their country.
In 1921, Congress passed the Emergency Immigration Act as a stopgap immigration measure and then, three years later, permanently established country-of-origin quotas through the National Origins Act. The
number of immigrants annually admitted to the United States from eachnation was restricted to 2 percent of the population who had come fromthat country and resided in the United States in 1890. (By pushing backthree decades, past the recent waves of “new” immigrants from southern and Eastern Europe, Latin America, and Asia, the law made it extremely difficult for immigrants outside northern Europe to legally enterthe United States.) The act also explicitly excluded all Asians, although,to satisfy southern and western growers, it temporarily omitted restrictions on Mexican immigrants. The Sacco and Vanzetti trial and sweeping
immigration restrictions pointed to a rampant nativism. A great numberof Americans worried about a burgeoning America that did not resemble
the one of times past. Many wrote of an American riven by a cultural war.

VIII. Fundamentalist Christianity
In addition to alarms over immigration and the growing presence of Catholicism and Judaism, a new core of Christian fundamentalists werevery much concerned about relaxed sexual mores and increased social
freedoms, especially as found in city centers. Although never a centralized group, most fundamentalists lashed out against what they saw as asagging public morality, a world in which Protestantism seemed challenged by Catholicism, women exercised ever greater sexual freedoms,
public amusements encouraged selfish and empty pleasures, and critics
mocked Prohibition through bootlegging and speakeasies.
Christian Fundamentalism arose most directly from a doctrinal dispute among Protestant leaders. Liberal theologians sought to intertwine
religion with science and secular culture. These Modernists, influenced
by the biblical scholarship of nineteenth-century German academics, argued that Christian doctrines about the miraculous might be best understood metaphorically. The Church, they said, needed to adapt itself
to the world. According to the Baptist pastor Harry Emerson Fosdick,the “coming of Christ” might occur “slowly . . . but surely, [as] His
will and principles [are] worked out by God’s grace in human life andinstitutions.”32 The social gospel, which encouraged Christians to build© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  183

the Kingdom of God on earth by working against social and economic
inequality, was very much tied to liberal theology.
During the 1910s, funding from oil barons Lyman and Milton Stewart
enabled the evangelist A. C. Dixon to commission some ninety essays tocombat religious liberalism. The collection, known as The Fundamentals,
became the foundational documents of Christian fundamentalism, fromwhich the movement’s name is drawn. Contributors agreed that Christian faith rested on literal truths, that Jesus, for instance, would physically return to earth at the end of time to redeem the righteous and damn
the wicked. Some of the essays put forth that human endeavor would
not build the Kingdom of God, while others covered such subjects as thevirgin birth and biblical inerrancy. American fundamentalists spanned
Protestant denominations and borrowed from diverse philosophies andtheologies, most notably the holiness movement, the larger revivalism of
the nineteenth century, and new dispensationalist theology (in which history proceeded, and would end, through “dispensations” by God). They
did, however, all agree that modernism was the enemy and the Bible was
the inerrant word of God. It was a fluid movement often without clear
boundaries, but it featured many prominent clergymen, including thewell-established and extremely vocal John Roach Straton (New York),
J. Frank Norris (Texas), and William Bell Riley (Minnesota).33
On March 21, 1925, in a tiny courtroom in Dayton, Tennessee, fundamentalists gathered to tackle the issues of creation and evolution. A
young biology teacher, John T. Scopes, was being tried for teaching his
students evolutionary theory in violation of the Butler Act, a state law
preventing evolutionary theory or any theory that denied “the Divine
Creation of man as taught in the Bible” from being taught in publicly
funded Tennessee classrooms. Seeing the act as a threat to personal liberty, the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) immediately sought avolunteer for a “test” case, hoping that the conviction and subsequent appeals would lead to a day in the Supreme Court, testing the constitutionality of the law. It was then that Scopes, a part-time teacher and coach,stepped up and voluntarily admitted to teaching evolution (Scopes’s violation of the law was never in question). Thus the stage was set for thepivotal courtroom showdown—“the trial of the century”—between thechampions and opponents of evolution that marked a key moment in an
enduring American “culture war.”34
The case became a public spectacle. Clarence Darrow, an agnostic
attorney and a keen liberal mind from Chicago, volunteered to aid the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

184

chapte r 22

During the Scopes
trial, Clarence
Darrow (right)
savaged theidea of a literalinterpretation of
the Bible. The
Clarence Darrow
Digital Collection, University of
Minnesota.

defense and came up against William Jennings Bryan. Bryan, the “Great
Commoner,” was the three-time presidential candidate who in his
younger days had led the political crusade against corporate greed. He
had done so then with a firm belief in the righteousness of his cause, andnow he defended biblical literalism in similar terms. The theory of evolution, Bryan said, with its emphasis on the survival of the fittest, “would
eliminate love and carry man back to a struggle of tooth and claw.”35
Newspapermen and spectators flooded the small town of Dayton.
Across the nation, Americans tuned their radios to the national broadcasts of a trial that dealt with questions of religious liberty, academic
freedom, parental rights, and the moral responsibility of education. For
six days in July, the men and women of America were captivated as Bryanpresented his argument on the morally corrupting influence of evolutionary theory (and pointed out that Darrow made a similar argument about
the corruptive potential of education during his defense of the famed killers Nathan Leopold and Richard Loeb a year before). Darrow eloquently
fought for academic freedom.36
At the request of the defense, Bryan took the stand as an “expert witness” on the Bible. At his age, he was no match for Darrow’s famous skills
as a trial lawyer and his answers came across as blundering and incoherent,
particularly as he was not in fact a literal believer in all of the Genesis account (believing—as many anti-evolutionists did—that the meaning of theword day in the book of Genesis could be taken as allegory) and only hesi-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  185

tantly admitted as much, not wishing to alienate his fundamentalist followers. Additionally, Darrow posed a series of unanswerable questions: Was
the “great fish” that swallowed the prophet Jonah created for that specificpurpose? What precisely happened astronomically when God made thesun stand still? Bryan, of course, could cite only his faith in miracles. Tied
into logical contradictions, Bryan’s testimony was a public relations disaster, although his statements were expunged from the record the next day
and no further experts were allowed—Scopes’s guilt being established, thejury delivered a guilty verdict in minutes. The case was later thrown out
on a technicality. But few cared about the verdict. Darrow had, in many
ways, at least to his defenders, already won: the fundamentalists seemed
to have taken a beating in the national limelight. Journalist and satirist
H. L. Mencken characterized the “circus in Tennessee” as an embarrassment for fundamentalism, and modernists remembered the “Monkey
Trial” as a smashing victory. If fundamentalists retreated from the publicsphere, they did not disappear entirely. Instead, they went local, built avibrant subculture, and emerged many decades later stronger than ever.37

IX. Rebirth of the Ku Klux Klan (KKK)
Suspicions of immigrants, Catholics, and modernists contributed to astring of reactionary organizations. None so captured the imaginationsof the country as the reborn Ku Klux Klan (KKK), a white supremacist
organization that expanded beyond its Reconstruction Era antiblack
politics to now claim to protect American values and the American way
of life from blacks, feminists (and other radicals), immigrants, Catholics,
Jews, atheists, bootleggers, and a host of other imagined moral enemies.
Two events in 1915 are widely credited with inspiring the rebirth of
the Klan: the lynching of Leo Frank and the release of The Birth of a Nation, a popular and groundbreaking film that valorized the Reconstruction Era Klan as a protector of feminine virtue and white racial purity.
Taking advantage of this sudden surge of popularity, Colonel William
Joseph Simmons organized what is often called the “second” Ku Klux
Klan in Georgia in late 1915. This new Klan, modeled after other fraternal organizations with elaborate rituals and a hierarchy, remained largely
confined to Georgia and Alabama until 1920, when Simmons began aprofessional recruiting effort that resulted in individual chapters being
formed across the country and membership rising to an estimated fivemillion.38© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

186

chapte r 22

This photo taken by popular news photographers Underwood and Underwood shows a gathering of areported three hundred Ku Klux Klansmen just outside Washington, D.C., to initiate a new group of men
into their order. The proximity of the photographer to his subjects for one of the Klan’s notorious nighttime
rituals suggests that this was a conscious publicity effort by the Klan. Library of Congress.

Partly in response to the migration of southern blacks to northern cities during World War I, the KKK expanded above the MasonDixon Line. Membership soared in Philadelphia, Detroit, Chicago, andPortland, while Klan-endorsed mayoral candidates won in Indianapolis, Denver, and Atlanta.39 The Klan often recruited through fraternalorganizations such as the Freemasons and through various Protestantchurches. In many areas, local Klansmen visited churches of which they
approved and bestowed a gift of money on the presiding minister, often
during services. The Klan also enticed people to join through large picnics, parades, rallies, and ceremonies. The Klan established a women’s
auxiliary in 1923 headquartered in Little Rock, Arkansas. The Womenof the Ku Klux Klan mirrored the KKK in practice and ideology and soon
had chapters in all forty-eight states, often attracting women who werealready part of the Prohibition movement, the defense of which was acenterpiece of Klan activism.40
Contrary to its perception of as a primarily southern and lower-classphenomenon, the second Klan had a national reach composed largely of
middle-class people. Sociologist Rory McVeigh surveyed the KKK newspaper Imperial Night-Hawk for the years 1923 and 1924, at the organi-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  187

zation’s peak, and found the largest number of Klan-related activities tohave occurred in Texas, Pennsylvania, Indiana, Illinois, and Georgia. The
Klan was even present in Canada, where it was a powerful force within
Saskatchewan’s Conservative Party. In many states and localities, theKlan dominated politics to such a level that one could not be elected without the support of the KKK. For example, in 1924, the Klan supported
William Lee Cazort for governor of Arkansas, leading his opponent in the
Democratic Party primary, Thomas Terral, to seek honorary membership
through a Louisiana klavern so as not to be tagged as the anti-Klan candidate. In 1922, Texans elected Earle B. Mayfield, an avowed Klansman
who ran openly as that year’s “klandidate,” to the U.S. Senate. At its peak
the Klan claimed between four and five million members.41
Despite the breadth of its political activism, the Klan is today remembered largely as a violent vigilante group—and not without reason.
Members of the Klan and affiliated organizations often carried out acts oflynching and “nightriding”—the physical harassment of bootleggers, union
activists, civil rights workers, or any others deemed “immoral” (such assuspected adulterers) under the cover of darkness or while wearing theirhoods and robes. In fact, Klan violence was extensive enough in Oklahomathat Governor John C. Walton placed the entire state under martial law
in 1923. Witnesses testifying before the military court disclosed accountsof Klan violence ranging from the flogging of clandestine brewers to thedisfiguring of a prominent black Tulsan for registering African Americans
to vote. In Houston, Texas, the Klan maintained an extensive system ofsurveillance that included tapping telephone lines and putting spies in thelocal post office in order to root out “undesirables.” A mob organized andled by Klan members in Aiken, South Carolina, lynched Bertha Lowman
and her two brothers in 1926, but no one was ever prosecuted: the sheriff,
deputies, city attorney, and state representative all belonged to the Klan.42
The Klan dwindled in the face of scandal and diminished energy overthe last years of the 1920s. By 1930, the Klan only had about thirty thousand members and it was largely spent as a national force, only to appear
again as a much diminished force during the civil rights movement in the
1950s and 1960s.

X. Conclusion
In his inauguration speech in 1929, Herbert Hoover told Americans that
the Republican Party had brought prosperity. Even ignoring stubbornly© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

188

chapte r 22

large rates of poverty and unparalleled levels of inequality, he could
not see the weaknesses behind the decade’s economy. Even as the newculture of consumption promoted new freedoms, it also promoted new
insecurities. An economy built on credit exposed the nation to tremendous risk. Flailing European economies, high tariffs, wealth inequality, aconstruction bubble, and an ever-more flooded consumer market loomed
dangerously until the Roaring Twenties ground to a halt. In a moment
the nation’s glitz and glamour seemed to give way to decay and despair.
For farmers, racial minorities, unionized workers, and other populations
that did not share in 1920s prosperity, the veneer of a Jazz Age and abooming economy had always been a fiction. But for them, as for millions of Americans, the end of an era was close. The Great Depression
loomed.

XI. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Brandy Thomas Wells, with content contributions by
Micah Childress, Mari Crabtree, Maggie Flamingo, Guy Lancaster, Emily Remus,
Colin Reynolds, Kristopher Shields, and Brandy Thomas Wells.
Recommended citation: Micah Childress et al., “The New Era,” Brandy
Thomas Wells, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright(Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N o te s t o C h a p te r 2 2
1. David Montgomery, The Fall of the House of Labor: The Workplace,the State, and American Labor Activism, 1865–1925 (New York: Cambridge
University Press, 1988).
2. William E. Leuchtenburg, The Perils of Prosperity, 1914–1932 (Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1993).
3. Robert K. Murray, The Harding Era: Warren G. Harding and His Administration (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1969.
4. Leuchtenburg, Perils of Prosperity.
5. Nancy Cott, The Grounding of Modern Feminism (New Haven, CT: Yale
University Press, 1987).
6. Allan J. Lichtman, Prejudice and the Old Politics: The Presidential Election of 1928 (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1979).
7. Christine Frederick, Selling Mrs. Consumer, (New York: Business Bourse,
1929), 29.
8. T. J. Jackson Lears, “From Salvation to Self-Realization: Advertising and
the Therapeutic Roots of the Consumer Culture, 1880–1930,” in The Cultureof Consumption: Critical Essays in American History, 1880–1980, ed. Richard
Wightman Fox and T. J. Jackson Lears (New York: Pantheon Books, 1983), 1–38.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  189

9. Thomas W. Goodspeed, “Marshall Field,” University of Chicago Magazine, Vol. III (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1922), 48.
10. LeRoy Ashby, With Amusement for All: A History of American Popular
Culture Since 1830 (Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 2006), 177.
11. Ibid., 183.
12. Ibid., 216.
13. Ibid., 210.
14. Ibid., 181.
15. John W. Ward, “The Meaning of Lindbergh’s Flight,” in Studies in American Culture: Dominant Ideas and Images, ed. Joseph J. Kwiat and Mary C.
Turpie (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1960), 33.
16. See Lynn Dumenil, The Modern Temper: American Culture and Society
in the 1920s (New York: Hill and Wang, 1995), 113.
17. Cott, Grounding of Modern Feminism, 150.
18. George Chauncey, Gay New York: Gender, Urban Culture, and theMakings of the Gay Male World, 1890–1940 (New York: Basic Books, 1994).
19. Cott, Grounding of Modern Feminism, 160.
20. Mark R. Schneider, “We Return Fighting”: The Civil Rights Movementin the Jazz Age (Boston: Northeastern University Press, 2002), 21.
21. Philip Kasinitz, Caribbean New York: Black Immigrants and the Politics
of Race (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1992), 25.
22. James Weldon Johnson, “Harlem: The Culture Capital,” in Alain Locke,
The New Negro: An Interpretation (New York: Albert and Charles Boni, 1925),
301.
23. Ibid.
24. Joan Marter, ed., The Grove Encyclopedia of American Art, Volume 1(Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2011), 448.
25. James F. Wilson, Bulldaggers, Pansies, and Chocolate Babies: Performance, Race, and Sexuality in the Harlem Renaissance (Ann Arbor: University ofMichigan Press, 2010), 116.
26. Cary D. Wintz and Paul Finkelman, Encyclopedia of the Harlem Renaissance, Vol. 2 (New York: Routledge, 2004), 910–911.
27. For Garvey, see Colin Grant, Negro with a Hat: The Rise and Fall of
Marcus Garvey (New York: Oxford University Press, 2008); Judith Stein, The
World of Marcus Garvey: Race and Class in Modern Society (Baton Rouge: LSU
Press, 1986); and Ula Yvette Taylor, The Veiled Garvey: The Life and Times of
Amy Jacques Garvey (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2002).
28. Winston James, Holding Aloft the Banner of Ethiopia: Caribbean Radicalism in Early Twentieth-Century America (London: Verso, 1998).
29. Grant, Negro with a Hat; Stein, World of Marcus Garvey; Taylor, Veiled
Garvey.
30. Grant, Negro with a Hat; Stein, World of Marcus Garvey; Taylor, Veiled
Garvey.
31. Nicola Sacco and Bartolomeo Vanzetti, The Letters of Sacco and Vanzetti (New York: Viking, 1928), 272.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

190

chapte r 22

32. Harry Emerson Fosdick, “Shall the Fundamentalists Win?” ChristianWork 102 (June 10, 1922): 716–722.
33. George Marsden, Fundamentalism and American Culture (New York:
Oxford University Press, 1980).
34. Edward J. Larson, Summer for the Gods: The Scopes Trial and America’s
Continuing Debate over Science and Religion (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1997).
35. Leslie H. Allen, ed., Bryan and Darrow at Dayton: The Record and Documents of the “Bible-Evolution” Trial (New York: Arthur Lee, 1925).
36. Larson, Summer for the Gods.
37. Ibid.
38. Nancy MacLean, Behind the Mask of Chivalry: The Making of the Second Ku Klux Klan (New York: Oxford University Press, 1994).
39. Kenneth T. Jackson, The Ku Klux Klan in the City, 1915–1930 (NewYork: Oxford University Press, 1967).
40. MacLean, Behind the Mask of Chivalry.
41. George Brown Tindall, The Emergence of the New South: 1913–1945(Baton Rouge: LSU Press, 1967).
42. MacLean, Behind the Mask of Chivalry; Wyn Craig Wade, The Fiery
Cross: The Ku Klux Klan in America (New York: Oxford University Press, 1998).
Re c o mmen d e d Re a din gAllen, Frederick Lewis. Only Yesterday: An Informal History of the 1920s. New
York: Harper and Row, 1931.
Baldwin, Davarian. Chicago’s New Negroes: Modernity, the Great Migration,
and Black Urban Life. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2007.
Blee, Kathleen M. Women of the Klan: Racism and Gender in the 1920s. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991.
Chauncey, George. Gay New York: Gender, Urban Culture, and the Making of
the Gay Male World, 1890–1940. New York: Basic Books, 1995.
Cohen, Lizabeth. Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919–
1939. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1990.
Douglas, Ann. Terrible Honesty: Mongrel Manhattan in the 1920s. New York:
Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1995.
Dumenil, Lynn. The Modern Temper: American Culture and Society in the 1920s.
New York: Hill and Wang, 1995.
Fox, Richard Wightman, and T. J. Jackson Lears, eds. The Culture of Consumption: Critical Essays in American History, 1880–1980. New York: Pantheon
Books, 1983.
Gage, Beverly. The Day Wall Street Exploded: A Story of America in Its First Ageof Terror. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009.
Grant, Colin. Negro with a Hat: The Rise and Fall of Marcus Garvey. New York:
Oxford University Press, 2008.
Hall, Jacquelyn. Like a Family: The Making of a Southern Cotton Mill World.
Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1987.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T h e N ew E r a  191

Heap, Chad. Slumming: Sexual and Racial Encounters in American Nightlife,
1885–1940. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2010.
Hernández, Kelly Lytle. Migra! A History of the U.S. Border Patrol. New York:
University of California Press, 2010.
Huggins, Nathan. Harlem Renaissance. New York: Oxford University Press,
1971.
Larson, Edward. Summer for the Gods: The Scopes Trial and America’s Continuing Debate over Science and Religion. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press, 1997.
MacLean, Nancy. Behind the Mask of Chivalry: The Making of the Second Ku
Klux Klan. New York: Oxford University Press, 1994.
Marsden, George M. Fundamentalism and American Culture: The Shaping of
Twentieth-Century Evangelicalism: 1870–1925. New York: Oxford University Press, 1980.
McGirr, Lisa. The War on Alcohol: Prohibition and the Rise of the American
State. New York: Norton, 2016.
Montgomery, David. The Fall of the House of Labor: The Workplace, the State,
and American Labor Activism, 1865–1925. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1988.
Ngai, Mae M., Impossible Subjects: Illegal Aliens and the Making of Modern
America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2004.
Okrent, Daniel. Last Call: The Rise and Fall of Prohibition. New York: Scribner, 2010.
Sanchez, George. Becoming Mexican American: Ethnicity, Culture, and Identity
in Chicano Los Angeles, 1900–1945. New York: Oxford University Press,
1993.
Tindall, George Brown. The Emergence of the New South, 1913–1945. Baton
Rouge: LSU Press, 1967.
Weinrib, Laura. The Taming of Free Speech: America’s Civil Liberties Compromise. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2016.
Wilkerson, Isabel. The Warmth of Other Sons: The Epic Story of America’s Great
Migration. New York: Vintage Books, 2010.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

23
The Great Depression
I. Introduction
The wonder of the stock market permeated popular culture in the 1920s.
Although it was released during the first year of the Great Depression, the1930 film High Society Blues captured the speculative hope and prosperity of the previous decade. “I’m in the Market for You,” a popular musical number from the film, even used the stock market as a metaphor for
love: You’re going up, up, up in my estimation / I want a thousand sharesof your caresses, too / We’ll count the hugs and kisses / When dividends
are due / ’Cause I’m in the market for you. But just as the song was being
recorded in 1929, the stock market reached the apex of its swift climb,
crashed, and brought an abrupt end to the seeming prosperity of the
Roaring Twenties. The Great Depression had arrived.

In this famous
1936 photographby Dorothea
Lange, a destitute,
thirty-two-yearold mother ofseven captures
the agonies of theGreat Depression. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 193

II. The Origins of the Great Depression
On Thursday, October 24, 1929, stock market prices suddenly plummeted. Ten billion dollars in investments (roughly equivalent to about$100 billion today) disappeared in a matter of hours. Panicked selling
set in, stock values sank to sudden lows, and stunned investors crowded
the New York Stock Exchange demanding answers. Leading bankers met
privately at the offices of J. P. Morgan and raised millions in personaland institutional contributions to halt the slide. They marched acrossthe street and ceremoniously bought stocks at inflated prices. The market temporarily stabilized but fears spread over the weekend and thefollowing week frightened investors dumped their portfolios to avoid
further losses. On October 29, Black Tuesday, the stock market began
its long precipitous fall. Stock values evaporated. Shares of U.S. Steeldropped from $262 to $22. General Motors stock fell from $73 a share
to $8. Four fifths of J. D. Rockefeller’s fortune—the greatest in American
history—vanished.

Crowds gather
outside the New
York Stock
Exchange following the crash of
1929. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

194

chapt er 23

Although the crash stunned the nation, it exposed the deeper, underlying problems with the American economy in the 1920s. The stock
market’s popularity grew throughout the decade, but only 2.5 percentof Americans had brokerage accounts; the overwhelming majority ofAmericans had no direct personal stake in Wall Street. The stock market’s
collapse, no matter how dramatic, did not by itself depress the American
economy. Instead, the crash exposed a great number of factors that, whencombined with the financial panic, sank the American economy into thegreatest of all economic crises. Rising inequality, declining demand, rural
collapse, overextended investors, and the bursting of speculative bubbles
all conspired to plunge the nation into the Great Depression.
Despite resistance by Progressives, the vast gap between rich andpoor accelerated throughout the early twentieth century. In the aggregate, Americans were better off in 1929 than in 1920. Per capita income
had risen 10 percent for all Americans, but 75 percent for the nation’s
wealthiest citizens.1 The return of conservative politics in the 1920s reinforced federal fiscal policies that exacerbated the divide: low corporate
and personal taxes, easy credit, and depressed interest rates overwhelmingly favored wealthy investors who, flush with cash, spent their moneyon luxury goods and speculative investments in the rapidly rising stock
market.
The pro-business policies of the 1920s were designed for an American economy built on the production and consumption of durable goods.
Yet by the late 1920s, much of the market was saturated. The boom of
automobile manufacturing, the great driver of the American economy
in the 1920s, slowed as fewer and fewer Americans with the means topurchase a car had not already done so. More and more, the well-to-do
had no need for the new automobiles, radios, and other consumer goods
that fueled gross domestic product (GDP) growth in the 1920s. When
products failed to sell, inventories piled up, manufacturers scaled backproduction, and companies fired workers, stripping potential consumers of cash, blunting demand for consumer goods, and replicating thedownward economic cycle. The situation was only compounded by increased automation and rising efficiency in American factories. Despite
impressive overall growth throughout the 1920s, unemployment hoveredaround 7 percent throughout the decade, suppressing purchasing power
for a great swath of potential consumers.2
For American farmers, meanwhile, hard times began long before themarkets crashed. In 1920 and 1921, after several years of larger-than-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 195

average profits, farm prices in the South and West continued their longdecline, plummeting as production climbed and domestic and international demand for cotton, foodstuffs, and other agricultural products
stalled. Widespread soil exhaustion on western farms only compounded
the problem. Farmers found themselves unable to make payments onloans taken out during the good years, and banks in agricultural areas
tightened credit in response. By 1929, farm families were overextended,in no shape to make up for declining consumption, and in a precarious economic position even before the Depression wrecked the global
economy.3
Despite serious foundational problems in the industrial and agricultural economy, most Americans in 1929 and 1930 still believed the economy would bounce back. In 1930, amid one of the Depression’s many
false hopes, President Herbert Hoover reassured an audience that “thedepression is over.”4 But the president was not simply guilty of false optimism. Hoover made many mistakes. During his 1928 election campaign,
Hoover promoted higher tariffs as a means for encouraging domestic
consumption and protecting American farmers from foreign competition.
Spurred by the ongoing agricultural depression, Hoover signed into law
the highest tariff in American history, the Smoot-Hawley Tariff of 1930,

While a manufacturing innovation,
Henry Ford’s
assembly line
produced so manycars that it flooded
the automobile
market in the
1920s. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

196

chapt er 23

just as global markets began to crumble. Other countries responded inkind, tariff walls rose across the globe, and international trade ground toa halt. Between 1929 and 1932, international trade dropped from $36
billion to only $12 billion. American exports fell by 78 percent. Combined with overproduction and declining domestic consumption, the tariff exacerbated the world’s economic collapse.5
But beyond structural flaws, speculative bubbles, and destructive protectionism, the final contributing element of the Great Depression wasa quintessentially human one: panic. The frantic reaction to the market’s fall aggravated the economy’s other many failings. More economic
policies backfired. The Federal Reserve overcorrected in their responseto speculation by raising interest rates and tightening credit. Across thecountry, banks denied loans and called in debts. Their patrons, afraidthat reactionary policies meant further financial trouble, rushed to withdraw money before institutions could close their doors, ensuring theirfate. Such bank runs were not uncommon in the 1920s, but in 1930, withthe economy worsening and panic from the crash accelerating, 1,352
banks failed. In 1932, nearly 2,300 banks collapsed, taking personal deposits, savings, and credit with them.6
The Great Depression was the confluence of many problems, mostof which had begun during a time of unprecedented economic growth.
Fiscal policies of the Republican “business presidents” undoubtedly
widened the gap between rich and poor and fostered a standoff overinternational trade, but such policies were widely popular and, for muchof the decade, widely seen as a source of the decade’s explosive growth.
With fortunes to be won and standards of living to maintain, few Americans had the foresight or wherewithal to repudiate an age of easy credit,
rampant consumerism, and wild speculation. Instead, as the Depression
worked its way across the United States, Americans hoped to weather the
economic storm as best they could, waiting for some form of relief, any
answer to the ever-mounting economic collapse that strangled so many
Americans’ lives.

III. Herbert Hoover and the Politics of the Depression
As the Depression spread, public blame settled on President Herbert
Hoover and the conservative politics of the Republican Party. But Hoover
was as much victim as perpetrator, a man who had the misfortune of becoming a visible symbol for large invisible forces. In 1928 Hoover had© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 197

no reason to believe that his presidency would be any different than thatof his predecessor, Calvin Coolidge, whose time in office was marked byrelative government inaction, seemingly rampant prosperity, and highapproval ratings.
Coolidge had decided not to seek a second term in 1928. A man offew words, “Silent Cal” publicized this decision by handing a scrap of
paper to a reporter that simply read: “I do not choose to run for president
in 1928.” The race therefore became a contest between the Democratic
governor of New York, Al Smith, whose Catholic faith and immigrantbackground aroused nativist suspicions and whose connections to Tammany Hall and anti-Prohibition politics offended reformers, and the Republican candidate, Herbert Hoover, whose all-American, Midwestern,
Protestant background and managerial prowess during World War I endeared him to American voters.7
Hoover epitomized the “self-made man.” Orphaned at age nine, he
was raised by a strict Quaker uncle on the West Coast. He graduated from

Unemployed men
queued outside a
depression soup
kitchen opened
in Chicago by Al
Capone, February
1931. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

198

chapt er 23

Stanford University in 1895 and worked as an engineer for several multinational mining companies. He became a household name during WorldWar I when he oversaw voluntary rationing as the head of the U.S. Food
Administration and, after the armistice, served as the director-general of
the American Relief Association in Europe. Hoover’s reputation for humanitarian service and problem solving translated into popular support,
even as the public soured on Wilson’s Progressive activism. Hoover was
one of the few politicians whose career benefited from wartime public
service. After the war both the Democratic and Republican parties tried
to draft him to run for president in 1920.8
Hoover declined to run in 1920 and 1924. He served instead as secretary of commerce under both Harding and Coolidge, taking an activerole in all aspects of government. In 1928, he seemed the natural successor to Coolidge. Politically, aside from the issue of Prohibition (hewas a “dry,” Smith a “wet”), Hoover’s platform differed very little from
Smith’s, leaving little to discuss during the campaign except personality
and religion. Both benefited Hoover. Smith’s background engendered opposition from otherwise solid Democratic states, especially in the South,
where his Catholic, ethnic, urban, and anti-Prohibition background wereanathema. His popularity among urban ethnic voters counted for little.
Several southern states, in part owing to the work of itinerant evangelical politicking, voted Republican for the first time since Reconstruction.
Hoover won in a landslide, taking nearly 60 percent of the popular vote.9
Although Hoover is sometimes categorized as a “business president”
in line with his Republican predecessors, he also embraced an inherent
business progressivism, a system of voluntary action called associationalism that assumed Americans could maintain a web of voluntary cooperative organizations dedicated to providing economic assistance andservices to those in need. Businesses, the thinking went, would willingly
limit harmful practice for the greater economic good. To Hoover, directgovernment aid would discourage a healthy work ethic while associationalism would encourage the self-control and self-initiative that fueled
economic growth. But when the Depression exposed the incapacity ofsuch strategies to produce an economic recovery, Hoover proved insufficiently flexible to recognize the limits of his ideology. And when theideology failed, so too did his presidency.10
Hoover entered office on a wave of popular support, but by October 1929 the economic collapse had overwhelmed his presidency. Like
all too many Americans, Hoover and his advisors assumed—or perhaps© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 199

simply hoped—that the sharp financial and economic decline was atemporary downturn, another “bust” of the inevitable boom-bust cycles
that stretched back through America’s commercial history. Many economists argued that periodic busts culled weak firms and paved the way for
future growth. And so when suffering Americans looked to Hoover for
help, Hoover could only answer with volunteerism. He asked businessleaders to promise to maintain investments and employment and encouraged state and local charities to assist those in need. Hoover establishedthe President’s Organization for Unemployment Relief, or POUR, tohelp organize the efforts of private agencies. While POUR urged charitable giving, charitable relief organizations were overwhelmed by thegrowing needs of the many multiplying unemployed, underfed, and unhoused Americans. By mid-1932, for instance, a quarter of all of New
York’s private charities closed: they had simply run out of money. In
Atlanta, solvent relief charities could only provide $1.30 per week toneedy families. The size and scope of the Depression overpowered theradically insufficient capacity of private volunteer organizations to mediate the crisis.11
By 1932, with the economy long since stagnant and a reelection campaign looming, Hoover, hoping to stimulate American industry, createdthe Reconstruction Finance Corporation (RFC) to provide emergency
loans to banks, building-and-loan societies, railroads, and other private industries. It was radical in its use of direct government aid and outof character for the normally laissez-faire Hoover, but it also bypassed
needy Americans to bolster industrial and financial interests. New York
congressman Fiorello LaGuardia, who later served as mayor of New
York City, captured public sentiment when he denounced the RFC as a“millionaire’s dole.”12

IV. The Bonus Army
Hoover’s reaction to a major public protest sealed his legacy. In the summer of 1932, Congress debated a bill authorizing immediate paymentof long-promised cash bonuses to veterans of World War I, originallyscheduled to be paid out in 1945. Given the economic hardships facing
the country, the bonus came to symbolize government relief for the mostdeserving recipients, and from across the country more than fifteen thousand unemployed veterans and their families converged on Washington,
D.C. They erected a tent city across the Potomac River in Anacostia© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

200

chapt er 23

Shacks, put up by
the Bonus Armyon the Anacostia
flats, Washington,
D.C., burning
after the battlewith the military.
The Capitol inthe background.
1932. Wikimedia.

Flats, a “Hooverville” in the spirit of the camps of homeless and unemployed Americans then appearing in American cities.
Concerned with what immediate payment would do to the federal
budget, Hoover opposed the bill, which was eventually voted down by
the Senate. While most of the “Bonus Army” left Washington in defeat,many stayed to press their case. Hoover called the remaining veterans“insurrectionists” and ordered them to leave. When thousands failed
to heed the vacation order, General Douglas MacArthur, accompanied
by local police, infantry, cavalry, tanks, and a machine gun squadron,stormed the tent city and routed the Bonus Army. National media covered the disaster as troops chased down men and women, tear-gassed
children, and torched the shantytown.13
Hoover’s insensitivity toward suffering Americans, his unwillingness
to address widespread economic problems, and his repeated platitudes
about returning prosperity condemned his presidency. Hoover of course
was not responsible for the Depression, not personally. But neither he
nor his advisors conceived of the enormity of the crisis, a crisis his con-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 201

servative ideology could neither accommodate nor address. As a result,
Americans found little relief from Washington. They were on their own.

V. The Lived Experience of the Great Depression
In 1934 a woman from Humboldt County, California, wrote to First
Lady Eleanor Roosevelt seeking a job for her husband, a surveyor, who
had been out of work for nearly two years. The pair had survived on
the meager income she received from working at the county courthouse.
“My salary could keep us going,” she explained, “but—I am to have ababy.” The family needed temporary help, and, she explained, “after that
I can go back to work and we can work out our own salvation. But tohave this baby come to a home full of worry and despair, with no money
for the things it needs, is not fair. It needs and deserves a happy start inlife.”14
As the United States slid ever deeper into the Great Depression, suchtragic scenes played out time and time again. Individuals, families, andA Hooverville in
Seattle, Washington, between
1932 and 1937.
Washington State
Archives.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

202

chapt er 23

communities faced the painful, frightening, and often bewildering collapse of the economic institutions on which they depended. The more
fortunate were spared the worst effects, and a few even profited from it,
but by the end of 1932, the crisis had become so deep and so widespreadthat most Americans had suffered directly. Markets crashed through nofault of their own. Workers were plunged into poverty because of impersonal forces for which they shared no responsibility. With no safety net,
they were thrown into economic chaos.
With rampant unemployment and declining wages, Americans slashedexpenses. The fortunate could survive by simply deferring vacations andregular consumer purchases. Middle- and working-class Americans
might rely on disappearing credit at neighborhood stores, default on utility bills, or skip meals. Those who could borrowed from relatives or took
in boarders in homes or “doubled up” in tenements. The most desperate,
the chronically unemployed, encamped on public or marginal lands in“Hoovervilles,” spontaneous shantytowns that dotted America’s cities,
depending on bread lines and street-corner peddling. Poor women andyoung children entered the labor force, as they always had. The ideal of
the “male breadwinner” was always a fiction for poor Americans, but the
Depression decimated millions of new workers. The emotional and psychological shocks of unemployment and underemployment only added
to the shocking material depravities of the Depression. Social workers
and charity officials, for instance, often found the unemployed sufferingfrom feelings of futility, anger, bitterness, confusion, and loss of pride.
Such feelings affected the rural poor no less than the urban.15

VI. Migration and the Great Depression
On the Great Plains, environmental catastrophe deepened America’s
longstanding agricultural crisis and magnified the tragedy of the Depression. Beginning in 1932, severe droughts hit from Texas to the Dakotas
and lasted until at least 1936. The droughts compounded years of agricultural mismanagement. To grow their crops, Plains farmers had plowed
up natural ground cover that had taken ages to form over the surface ofthe dry Plains states. Relatively wet decades had protected them, but,during the early 1930s, without rain, the exposed fertile topsoil turned todust, and without sod or windbreaks such as trees, rolling winds churned
the dust into massive storms that blotted out the sky, choked settlers andlivestock, and rained dirt not only across the region but as far east as© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 203

This iconic 1936 photograph by Dorothea
Lange of a destitute, thirty-two-year-old
mother of seven made real the sufferingof millions during the Great Depression.
Library of Congress.

Washington, D.C., New England, and ships on the Atlantic Ocean. The
Dust Bowl, as the region became known, exposed all-too-late the needfor conservation. The region’s farmers, already hit by years of foreclosures and declining commodity prices, were decimated.16 For many inTexas, Oklahoma, Kansas, and Arkansas who were “baked out, blown
out, and broke,” their only hope was to travel west to California, whose
rains still brought bountiful harvests and—potentially—jobs for farmworkers. It was an exodus. Oklahoma lost 440,000 people, or a full 18.4
percent of its 1930 population, to outmigration.17
Dorothea Lange’s Migrant Mother became one of the most enduring images of the Dust Bowl and the ensuing westward exodus. Lange, aphotographer for the Farm Security Administration, captured the image
at a migrant farmworker camp in Nipomo, California, in 1936. In thephotograph a young mother stares out with a worried, weary expression. She was a migrant, having left her home in Oklahoma to follow thecrops to the Golden State. She took part in what many in the mid-1930s
were beginning to recognize as a vast migration of families out of the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

204

chapt er 23s­ outhwestern Plains states. In the image she cradles an infant and supports
two older children, who cling to her. Lange’s photo encapsulated the nation’s struggle. The subject of the photograph seemed used to hard work
but down on her luck, and uncertain about what the future might hold.
The Okies, as such westward migrants were disparagingly called bytheir new neighbors, were the most visible group who were on the move
during the Depression, lured by news and rumors of jobs in far-flung regions of the country. By 1932, sociologists were estimating that millionsof men were on the roads and rails traveling the country. Economists
sought to quantify the movement of families from the Plains. Popularmagazines and newspapers were filled with stories of homeless boys andthe veterans-turned-migrants of the Bonus Army commandeering boxcars. Popular culture, such as William Wellman’s 1933 film, Wild Boysof the Road, and, most famously, John Steinbeck’s The Grapes of Wrath,published in 1939 and turned into a hit movie a year later, captured theDepression’s dislocated populations.
These years witnessed the first significant reversal in the flow of people between rural and urban areas. Thousands of city dwellers fled thejobless cities and moved to the country looking for work. As relief efforts

During her assignment as a photographer for the Works Progress Administration (WPA), Dorothea Lange
documented the movement of migrant families forced from their homes by drought and economic depression. This family, captured by Lange in 1938, was in the process of traveling 124 miles by foot, acrossOklahoma, because the father was ill and therefore unable to receive relief or WPA work. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 205

floundered, many state and local officials threw up barriers to migration,
making it difficult for newcomers to receive relief or find work. Somestate legislatures made it a crime to bring poor migrants into the state
and allowed local officials to deport migrants to neighboring states. In
the winter of 1935–1936, California, Florida, and Colorado established“border blockades” to block poor migrants from their states and reduce
competition with local residents for jobs. A billboard outside Tulsa,
Oklahoma, informed potential migrants that there were “NO JOBS in
California” and warned them to “KEEP Out.”18
Sympathy for migrants, however, accelerated late in the Depression
with the publication of John Steinbeck’s The Grapes of Wrath. The Joadfamily’s struggles drew attention to the plight of Depression-era migrants
and, just a month after the nationwide release of the film version, Congress created the Select Committee to Investigate the Interstate Migration of Destitute Citizens. Starting in 1940, the committee held widely
publicized hearings. But it was too late. Within a year of its founding,defense industries were already gearing up in the wake of the outbreak ofWorld War II, and the “problem” of migration suddenly became a lackof migrants needed to fill war industries. Such relief was nowhere to befound in the 1930s.
Americans meanwhile feared foreign workers willing to work foreven lower wages. The Saturday Evening Post warned that foreign immigrants, who were “compelled to accept employment on any terms
and conditions offered,” would exacerbate the economic crisis.19 On
September 8, 1930, the Hoover administration issued a press release on
the administration of immigration laws “under existing conditions of
unemployment.” Hoover instructed consular officers to scrutinize carefully the visa applications of those “likely to become public charges” andsuggested that this might include denying visas to most, if not all, alienlaborers and artisans. The crisis itself had stifled foreign immigration,
but such restrictive and exclusionary actions in the first years of the Depression intensified its effects. The number of European visas issued fellroughly 60 percent while deportations dramatically increased. Between
1930 and 1932, fifty-four thousand people were deported. An additional
forty-four thousand deportable aliens left “voluntarily.”20
Exclusionary measures hit Mexican immigrants particularly hard.
The State Department made a concerted effort to reduce immigrationfrom Mexico as early as 1929, and Hoover’s executive actions arrived
the following year. Officials in the Southwest led a coordinated effort topush out Mexican immigrants. In Los Angeles, the Citizens Committee© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

206

chapt er 23

on Coordination of Unemployment Relief began working closely withfederal officials in early 1931 to conduct deportation raids, while theLos Angeles County Department of Charities began a simultaneous drive
to repatriate Mexicans and Mexican Americans on relief, negotiating acharity rate with the railroads to return Mexicans “voluntarily” to theirmother country. According to the federal census, from 1930 to 1940 the
Mexican-born population living in Arizona, California, New Mexico,and Texas fell from 616,998 to 377,433. Franklin Roosevelt did not indulge anti-immigrant sentiment as willingly as Hoover had. Under the
New Deal, the Immigration and Naturalization Service halted some of the
Hoover administration’s most divisive practices, but with jobs suddenly
scarce, hostile attitudes intensified, and official policies less than welcoming, immigration plummeted and deportations rose. Over the courseof the Depression, more people left the United States than entered it.21

VII. Franklin Delano Roosevelt and the “First” New Deal
The early years of the Depression were catastrophic. The crisis, far fromrelenting, deepened each year. Unemployment peaked at 25 percent in1932. With no end in sight, and with private firms crippled and charities
overwhelmed by the crisis, Americans looked to their government as thelast barrier against starvation, hopelessness, and perpetual poverty.
Few presidential elections in modern American history have been
more consequential than that of 1932. The United States was struggling through the third year of the Depression, and exasperated voters
overthrew Hoover in a landslide to elect the Democratic governor of
New York, Franklin Delano Roosevelt. Roosevelt came from a privileged
background in New York’s Hudson River Valley (his distant cousin,
Theodore Roosevelt, became president while Franklin was at Harvard).
Franklin Roosevelt embarked on a slow but steady ascent through stateand national politics. In 1913, he was appointed assistant secretary of thenavy, a position he held during the defense emergency of World War I. In
the course of his rise, in the summer of 1921, Roosevelt suffered a sudden
bout of lower-body pain and paralysis. He was diagnosed with polio. The
disease left him a paraplegic, but, encouraged and assisted by his wife,
Eleanor, Roosevelt sought therapeutic treatment and maintained sufficient political connections to reenter politics. In 1928, Roosevelt won
election as governor of New York. He oversaw the rise of the Depression
and drew from progressivism to address the economic crisis. During his© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 207

Posters like this 1936 production showing
the extent of the Federal Art Project wereused to prove the value of the WPA—and,by extension, the entire New Deal—to theAmerican people. Wikimedia.

gubernatorial tenure, Roosevelt introduced the first comprehensive unemployment relief program and helped pioneer efforts to expand public
utilities. He also relied on like-minded advisors. For example, Frances
Perkins, then commissioner of the state’s labor department, successfully
advocated pioneering legislation that enhanced workplace safety andreduced the use of child labor in factories. Perkins later accompanied
Roosevelt to Washington and served as the nation’s first female secretaryof labor.22
On July 1, 1932, Roosevelt, the newly designated presidential nominee of the Democratic Party, delivered the first and one of the most
famous on-site acceptance speeches in American presidential history.
Building to a conclusion, he promised, “I pledge you, I pledge myself,
to a new deal for the American people.” Newspaper editors seized on
the phrase “new deal,” and it entered the American political lexicon as
shorthand for Roosevelt’s program to address the Great Depression.23
There were, however, few hints in his political campaign that suggested
the size and scope of the “New Deal.” Regardless, Roosevelt crushed
Hoover. He won more counties than any previous candidate in ­American© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

208

chapt er 23

history. He spent the months between his election and inauguration traveling, planning, and assembling a team of advisors, the famous Brain
Trust of academics and experts, to help him formulate a plan of attack.
On March 4, 1933, in his first inaugural address, Roosevelt famously
declared, “This great Nation will endure as it has endured, will revive
and will prosper. So, first of all, let me assert my firm belief that the only
thing we have to fear is fear itself—nameless, unreasoning, unjustified
terror which paralyzes needed efforts to convert retreat into advance.”24
Roosevelt’s reassuring words would have rung hollow if he had nottaken swift action against the economic crisis. In his first days in office,Roosevelt and his advisors prepared, submitted, and secured congressional enactment of numerous laws designed to arrest the worst of the Great
Depression. His administration threw the federal government headlong
into the fight against the Depression.
Roosevelt immediately looked to stabilize the collapsing banking
system. He declared a national “bank holiday” closing American banks
and set to work pushing the Emergency Banking Act swiftly throughCongress. On March 12, the night before select banks reopened understricter federal guidelines, Roosevelt appeared on the radio in the first of
his Fireside Chats. The addresses, which the president continued delivering through four terms, were informal, even personal. Roosevelt used
his airtime to explain New Deal legislation, to encourage confidence ingovernment action, and to mobilize the American people’s support. In
the first chat, Roosevelt described the new banking safeguards and asked
the public to place their trust and their savings in banks. Americans responded and across the country, deposits outpaced withdrawals. The act
was a major success. In June, Congress passed the Glass-Steagall Banking
Act, which instituted federal deposit insurance and barred the mixing ofcommercial and investment banking.25
Stabilizing the banks was only a first step. In the remainder of his
First Hundred Days, Roosevelt and his congressional allies focused especially on relief for suffering Americans.26 Congress debated, amended,and passed what Roosevelt proposed. As one historian noted, the president “directed the entire operation like a seasoned field general.”27 And
despite some questions over the constitutionality of many of his actions,
Americans and their congressional representatives conceded that thecrisis demanded swift and immediate action. The Civilian Conservation
Corps (CCC) employed young men on conservation and reforestation
projects; the Federal Emergency Relief Administration (FERA) provided
direct cash assistance to state relief agencies struggling to care for the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 209

unemployed;28 the Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) built a series of hydroelectric dams along the Tennessee River as part of a comprehensive
program to economically develop a chronically depressed region;29 andseveral agencies helped home and farm owners refinance their mortgages. And Roosevelt wasn’t done.
The heart of Roosevelt’s early recovery program consisted of two massive efforts to stabilize and coordinate the American economy: the Agricultural Adjustment Administration (AAA) and the National Recovery
Administration (NRA). The AAA, created in May 1933, aimed to raise
the prices of agricultural commodities (and hence farmers’ income) by
offering cash incentives to voluntarily limit farm production (decreasing
supply, thereby raising prices).30 The National Industrial Recovery Act(NIRA), which created the NRA in June 1933, suspended antitrust laws
to allow businesses to establish “codes” that would coordinate prices,
regulate production levels, and establish conditions of employment tocurtail “cutthroat competition.” In exchange for these exemptions, businesses agreed to provide reasonable wages and hours, end child labor,
and allow workers the right to unionize. Participating businesses earned
the right to display a placard with the NRA’s Blue Eagle, showing theircooperation in the effort to combat the Great Depression.31
The programs of the First Hundred Days stabilized the American
economy and ushered in a robust though imperfect recovery. GDP
climbed once more, but even as output increased, unemployment remained stubbornly high. Though the unemployment rate dipped from its
high in 1933, when Roosevelt was inaugurated, vast numbers remainedout of work. If the economy could not put people back to work, the New
Deal would try. The Civil Works Administration (CWA) and, later, theWorks Progress Administration (WPA) put unemployed men and women
to work on projects designed and proposed by local governments. The
Public Works Administration (PWA) provided grants-in-aid to local
governments for large infrastructure projects, such as bridges, tunnels,
schoolhouses, libraries, and America’s first federal public housing projects. Together, they provided not only tangible projects of immense public
good but employment for millions. The New Deal was reshaping muchof the nation.32

VIII. The New Deal in the SouthThe impact of initial New Deal legislation was readily apparent in theSouth, a region of perpetual poverty especially plagued by the D­ epression.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

210

chapt er 23

The accusation of rape brought against the socalled Scottsboro Boys, pictured here with theirattorney in 1932, generated controversy acrossthe country. Wikipedia.

In 1929 the average per capita income in the American Southeast was$365, the lowest in the nation. Southern farmers averaged $183 per year
at a time when farmers on the West Coast made more than four times
that.33 Moreover, they were trapped into the production of cotton andcorn, crops that depleted the soil and returned ever-­diminishing profits. Despite the ceaseless efforts of civic boosters, what little industry
the South had remained low-wage, low-skilled, and primarily extractive. Southern workers made significantly less than their national counterparts: 75 percent of nonsouthern textile workers, 60 percent of ironand steel workers, and a paltry 45 percent of lumber workers. At thetime of the crash, southerners were already underpaid, underfed, andundereducated.34
Major New Deal programs were designed with the South in mind.
FDR hoped that by drastically decreasing the amount of land devoted tocotton, the AAA would arrest its long-plummeting price decline. Farmers
plowed up existing crops and left fields fallow, and the market price did© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 211

rise. But in an agricultural world of landowners and landless farmworkers (such as tenants and sharecroppers), the benefits of the AAA bypassed
the southerners who needed them most. The government relied on landowners and local organizations to distribute money fairly to those mostaffected by production limits, but many owners simply kicked tenants
and croppers off their land, kept the subsidy checks for keeping thoseacres fallow, and reinvested the profits in mechanical farming equipmentthat further suppressed the demand for labor. Instead of making farming profitable again, the AAA pushed landless southern farmworkers off
the land.35
But Roosevelt’s assault on southern poverty took many forms. Southern industrial practices attracted much attention. The NRA encouraged
higher wages and better conditions. It began to suppress the rampant useof child labor in southern mills and, for the first time, provided federal
protection for unionized workers all across the country. Those gains were
eventually solidified in the 1938 Fair Labor Standards Act, which set anational minimum wage of $0.25/hour (eventually rising to $0.40/hour).
The minimum wage disproportionately affected low-paid southern workers and brought southern wages within the reach of northern wages.36
The president’s support for unionization further impacted the South.
Southern industrialists had proven themselves ardent foes of unionization, particularly in the infamous southern textile mills. In 1934, when
workers at textile mills across the southern Piedmont struck over low
wages and long hours, owners turned to local and state authorities toquash workers’ groups, even as they recruited thousands of strikebreakers from the many displaced farmers swelling industrial centers looking
for work. But in 1935 the National Labor Relations Act, also known as
the Wagner Act, guaranteed the rights of most workers to unionize andbargain collectively. And so unionized workers, backed by the supportof the federal government and determined to enforce the reforms of the
New Deal, pushed for higher wages, shorter hours, and better conditions. With growing success, union members came to see Roosevelt asa protector of workers’ rights. Or, as one union leader put it, an “agentof God.”37
Perhaps the most successful New Deal program in the South was the
TVA, an ambitious program to use hydroelectric power, agricultural andindustrial reform, flood control, economic development, education, andhealthcare to radically remake the impoverished watershed region of theTennessee River. Though the area of focus was limited, Roosevelt’s TVA© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

212

chapt er 23

sought to “make a different type of citizen” out of the area’s penniless residents.38 The TVA built a series of hydroelectric dams to control
flooding and distribute electricity to the otherwise nonelectrified areasat government-subsidized rates. Agents of the TVA met with residents
and offered training and general education classes to improve agricultural practices and exploit new job opportunities. The TVA encapsulates
Roosevelt’s vision for uplifting the South and integrating it into the larger
national economy.39
Roosevelt initially courted conservative southern Democrats to ensure the legislative success of the New Deal, all but guaranteeing that the
racial and economic inequalities of the region remained intact, but by theend of his second term, he had won the support of enough non-southern
voters that he felt confident confronting some of the region’s most glaring inequalities. Nowhere was this more apparent than in his endorsement of a report, formulated by a group of progressive southern New
Dealers, titled “A Report on Economic Conditions in the South.” The
pamphlet denounced the hardships wrought by the southern economy—in his introductory letter to the report, Roosevelt called the region “theNation’s No. 1 economic problem”—and blasted reactionary southernanti–New Dealers. He suggested that the New Deal could save the Southand thereby spur a nationwide recovery. The report was among the firstbroadsides in Roosevelt’s coming reelection campaign that addressed theinequalities that continued to mark southern and national life.40

IX. The New Deal in Appalachia
The New Deal also addressed another poverty-stricken region, Appalachia, the mountain-and-valley communities that roughly follow the Appalachian Mountain Range from southern New York to the foothills ofnorthern Georgia, Alabama, and Mississippi. Appalachia’s abundant natural resources, including timber and coal, were in high demand during thecountry’s post–Civil War industrial expansion, but Appalachian industry
simply extracted these resources for profit in far-off industries, depressing the coal-producing areas even earlier than the rest of the country.
By the mid-1930s, with the Depression suppressing demand, many residents were stranded in small, isolated communities whose few employers
stood on the verge of collapse. Relief workers from FERA reported serious shortages of medical care, adequate shelter, clothing, and food. Rampant illnesses, including typhus, tuberculosis, pneumonia, and venereal
disease, as well as childhood malnutrition, further crippled Appalachia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 213

Several New Deal programs targeted the region. Under the auspices of
the NIRA, Roosevelt established the Division of Subsistence Homesteads(DSH) within the Department of the Interior to give impoverished families an opportunity to relocate “back to the land”; the DSH establishedthirty-four homestead communities nationwide, including the Appalachian regions of Alabama, Pennsylvania, Tennessee, and West Virginia.
The CCC contributed to projects throughout Appalachia, including theBlue Ridge Parkway in North Carolina and Virginia, reforestation of the
Chattahoochee National Forest in Georgia, and state parks such as Pine
Mountain Resort State Park in Kentucky. The TVA’s efforts aided communities in Tennessee and North Carolina, and the Rural Electric Administration (REA) brought electricity to 288,000 rural households.

X. Voices of Protest
Despite the unprecedented actions taken in his first year in office, Roosevelt’s initial relief programs could often be quite conservative. He had
usually been careful to work within the bounds of presidential authority and congressional cooperation. And, unlike Europe, where several
nations had turned toward state-run economies, and even fascismand socialism, Roosevelt’s New Deal demonstrated a clear reluctanceto radically tinker with the nation’s foundational economic and social

Huey Long was an indomitable force who
campaigned tirelessly for the common
man during the Great Depression. He
demanded that all Americans “Share theWealth.” Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

214

chapt er 23

structures. Many high-profile critics attacked Roosevelt for not going far
enough, and, beginning in 1934, Roosevelt and his advisors were forced
to respond.
Senator Huey Long, a flamboyant Democrat from Louisiana, wasperhaps the most important “voice of protest.” Long’s populist rhetoricappealed to those who saw deeply rooted but easily addressed injusticein the nation’s economic system. Long proposed a Share Our Wealthprogram in which the federal government would confiscate the assets ofthe extremely wealthy and redistribute them to the less well-off throughguaranteed minimum incomes. “How many men ever went to a barbecue
and would let one man take off the table what’s intended for nine-tenthsof the people to eat?” he asked. Over twenty-seven thousand Share theWealth clubs sprang up across the nation as Long traveled the country explaining his program to crowds of impoverished and unemployed
Americans. Long envisioned the movement as a stepping-stone to thepresidency, but his crusade ended in late 1935 when he was assassinatedon the floor of the Louisiana state capitol. Even in death, however, Long
convinced Roosevelt to more stridently attack the Depression and American inequality.
But Huey Long was not alone in his critique of Roosevelt. Francis
Townsend, a former doctor and public health official from California,
promoted a plan for old-age pensions which, he argued, would provide
economic security for the elderly (who disproportionately suffered poverty) and encourage recovery by allowing older workers to retire fromthe workforce. Reverend Charles Coughlin, meanwhile, a priest andradio personality from the suburbs of Detroit, Michigan, gained a following by making vitriolic, anti-Semitic attacks on Roosevelt for cooperating with banks and financiers and proposing a new system of “social
justice” through a more state-driven economy instead. Like Long, both
Townsend and Coughlin built substantial public followings.
If many Americans urged Roosevelt to go further in addressing the
economic crisis, the president faced even greater opposition from conservative politicians and business leaders. By late 1934, complaints
increased from business-friendly Republicans about Roosevelt’s willingness to regulate industry and use federal spending for public works andemployment programs. In the South, Democrats who had originally supported the president grew more hostile toward programs that challenged
the region’s political, economic, and social status quo. Yet the greatest
opposition came from the Supreme Court, filled with conservative appointments made during the long years of Republican presidents.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 215

By early 1935 the Court was reviewing programs of the New Deal.
On May 27, a day Roosevelt’s supporters called Black Monday, the justices struck down one of the president’s signature reforms: in a case revolving around poultry processing, the Court unanimously declared the
NRA unconstitutional. In early 1936, the AAA fell.41

XI. The Second New Deal (1935–1936)
Facing reelection and rising opposition from both the left and the right,
Roosevelt decided to act. The New Deal adopted a more radical, aggressive approach to poverty, the Second New Deal. In 1935, hoping toreconstitute some of the protections afforded workers in the now-defunct
NRA, Roosevelt worked with Congress to pass the National Labor Relations Act (known as the Wagner Act for its chief sponsor, New York
senator Robert Wagner), offering federal legal protection, for the firsttime, for workers to organize unions. Three years later, Congress passed
the Fair Labor Standards Act, creating the modern minimum wage. The
Second New Deal also oversaw the restoration of a highly progressive
federal income tax, mandated new reporting requirements for publicly
traded companies, refinanced long-term home mortgages for struggling
homeowners, and attempted rural reconstruction projects to bring farmincomes in line with urban ones.42
The labor protections extended by Roosevelt’s New Deal were revolutionary. In northern industrial cities, workers responded to worsening conditions by banding together and demanding support for workers’
rights. In 1935, the head of the United Mine Workers, John L. Lewis,
took the lead in forming a new national workers’ organization, the Congress of Industrial Organizations (CIO), breaking with the more conservative, craft-oriented AFL. The CIO won a major victory in 1937 whenaffiliated members in the United Automobile Workers (UAW) struck forrecognition and better pay and hours at a General Motors (GM) plantin Flint, Michigan. In the first instance of a “sit-down” strike, the workers remained in the building until management agreed to negotiate. GM
recognized the UAW and the “sit-down” strike became a new weapon
in the fight for workers’ rights. Across the country, unions and workers
took advantage of the New Deal’s protections to organize and win major
concessions from employers.
The signature piece of Roosevelt’s Second New Deal came the same
year, in 1935. The Social Security Act provided for old-age pensions, unemployment insurance, and economic aid, based on means, to assist both

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

216

chapt er 23

Unionization was met with fierce opposition by owners and managers, particularly in the manufacturing
belt of the Midwest. In this 1937 image, strikers guard the entrance to a Flint, Michigan, manufacturing
plant. Library of Congress.

the elderly and dependent children. The president was careful to mitigate
some of the criticism from what was, at the time, in the American context, a revolutionary concept. He specifically insisted that social security
be financed from payroll, not the federal government; “No dole,” Roosevelt said repeatedly, “mustn’t have a dole.”43 He thereby helped separatesocial security from the stigma of being an undeserved “welfare” entitlement. While such a strategy saved the program from suspicions, social
security became the centerpiece of the modern American social welfare
state. It was the culmination of a long progressive push for governmentsponsored social welfare, an answer to the calls of Roosevelt’s opponents on the Left for reform, a response to the intractable poverty among
America’s neediest groups, and a recognition that the government would
now assume some responsibility for the economic well-being of its citizens. But for all of its groundbreaking provisions, the act, and the larger
New Deal as well, excluded large swaths of the American population.44© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 217

XII. Equal Rights and the New Deal
The Great Depression was particularly tough for nonwhite Americans.
As an African American pensioner told interviewer Studs Terkel, “The
Negro was born in depression. It didn’t mean too much to him. The
Great American Depression . . . only became official when it hit thewhite man.” Black workers were generally the last hired when businesses
expanded production and the first fired when businesses experienced
downturns. In 1932, with the national unemployment average hovering around 25 percent, black unemployment reached as high as 50 percent, while even black workers who kept their jobs saw their already low
wages cut dramatically.45
Blacks faced discrimination everywhere but suffered especially severe
legal inequality in the Jim Crow South. In 1931, for instance, a groupof nine young men riding the rails between Chattanooga and Memphis,
Tennessee, were pulled from the train near Scottsboro, Alabama, andcharged with assaulting two white women. Despite clear evidence thatthe assault had not occurred, and despite one of the women later recanting, the young men endured a series of sham trials in which all but
one were sentenced to death. Only the communist-oriented International
Legal Defense (ILD) came to the aid of the “Scottsboro Boys,” who soon
became a national symbol of continuing racial prejudice in America anda rallying point for civil rights–minded Americans. In appeals, the ILD
successfully challenged the boys’ sentencing, and the death sentenceswere either commuted or reversed, although the last of the accused did
not receive parole until 1946.46
Despite a concerted effort to appoint black advisors to some New
Deal programs, Franklin Roosevelt did little to directly address the difficulties black communities faced. To do so openly would provoke southern Democrats and put his New Deal coalition—–the uneasy alliance ofnational liberals, urban laborers, farm workers, and southern whites—atrisk. Roosevelt not only rejected such proposals as abolishing the poll tax
and declaring lynching a federal crime, he refused to specifically target
African American needs in any of his larger relief and reform packages.
As he explained to the national secretary of the NAACP, “I just can’t takethat risk.”47
In fact, many of the programs of the New Deal had made hard times
more difficult. When the codes of the NRA set new pay scales, they usually took into account regional differentiation and historical data. In theSouth, where African Americans had long suffered unequal pay, the new© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

218

chapt er 23

codes simply perpetuated that inequality. The codes also exempted those
involved in farm work and domestic labor, the occupations of a majorityof southern black men and women. The AAA was equally problematic asowners displaced black tenants and sharecroppers, many of whom wereforced to return to their farms as low-paid day labor or to migrate tocities looking for wage work.48
Perhaps the most notorious failure of the New Deal to aid African
Americans came with the passage of the Social Security Act. Southern
politicians chafed at the prospect of African Americans benefiting fromfederally sponsored social welfare, afraid that economic security would
allow black southerners to escape the cycle of poverty that kept themtied to the land as cheap, exploitable farm laborers. The Jackson (Mississippi) Daily News callously warned that “The average Mississippian
can’t imagine himself chipping in to pay pensions for able-bodied Negroes to sit around in idleness . . . while cotton and corn crops are crying
for workers.” Roosevelt agreed to remove domestic workers and farmlaborers from the provisions of the bill, excluding many African Americans, already laboring under the strictures of legal racial discrimination,from the benefits of an expanding economic safety net.49
Women, too, failed to receive the full benefits of New Deal programs.
On one hand, Roosevelt included women in key positions within his
administration, including the first female cabinet secretary, Frances Perkins, and a prominently placed African American advisor in the National
Youth Administration, Mary McLeod Bethune. First Lady Eleanor Roosevelt was a key advisor to the president and became a major voice for
economic and racial justice. But many New Deal programs were built
on the assumption that men would serve as breadwinners and women
as mothers, homemakers, and consumers. New Deal programs aimed
to help both but usually by forcing such gendered assumptions, making
it difficult for women to attain economic autonomy. New Deal social
welfare programs tended to funnel women into means-tested, state-­
administered relief programs while reserving entitlement benefits formale workers, creating a kind of two-tiered social welfare state. And so,
despite great advances, the New Deal failed to challenge core inequalities
that continued to mark life in the United States.50

XIII. The End of the New Deal (1937–1939)
By 1936 Roosevelt and his New Deal had won record popularity. In November Roosevelt annihilated his Republican challenger, Governor Alf© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 219

Landon of Kansas, who lost in every state save Maine and Vermont. The
Great Depression had certainly not ended, but it appeared to many to bebeating a slow yet steady retreat, and Roosevelt, now safely reelected, appeared ready to take advantage of both his popularity and the improving
economic climate to press for even more dramatic changes. But conservative barriers continued to limit the power of his popular support. The
Supreme Court, for instance, continued to gut many of his programs.
In 1937, concerned that the Court might overthrow social security in an
upcoming case, Roosevelt called for legislation allowing him to expand the
Court by appointing a new, younger justice for every sitting member overage seventy. Roosevelt argued that the measure would speed up the Court’sability to handle a growing backlog of cases; however, his “court-packing
scheme,” as opponents termed it, was clearly designed to allow the president
to appoint up to six friendly, pro–New Deal justices to drown the influenceof old-time conservatives on the Court. Roosevelt’s “scheme” riled opposition and did not become law, but the chastened Court upheld social security
and other pieces of New Deal legislation thereafter. Moreover, Roosevelt
was slowly able to appoint more amenable justices as conservatives died or
retired. Still, the court-packing scheme damaged the Roosevelt administration, and opposition to the New Deal began to emerge and coalesce.51
Compounding his problems, Roosevelt and his advisors made a costly
economic misstep. Believing the United States had turned a corner, Roosevelt cut spending in 1937. The American economy plunged nearly tothe depths of 1932–1933. Roosevelt reversed course and, adopting theapproach popularized by the English economist John Maynard Keynes,
hoped that countercyclical, compensatory spending would pull the country out of the recession, even at the expense of a growing budget deficit. It was perhaps too late. The Roosevelt Recession of 1937 became
fodder for critics. Combined with the court-packing scheme, the recession allowed for significant gains by a conservative coalition of southern
Democrats and Midwestern Republicans. By 1939, Roosevelt struggled
to build congressional support for new reforms, let alone maintain existing agencies. Moreover, the growing threat of war in Europe stole thepublic’s attention and increasingly dominated Roosevelt’s interests. The
New Deal slowly receded into the background, outshined by war.52

XIV. The Legacy of the New Deal
By the end of the 1930s, Roosevelt and his Democratic Congresses
had presided over a transformation of the American government and a© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

220

chapt er 23r­ ealignment in American party politics. Before World War I, the American national state, though powerful, had been a “government out ofsight.” After the New Deal, Americans came to see the federal government as a potential ally in their daily struggles, whether finding work,
securing a decent wage, getting a fair price for agricultural products,
or organizing a union. Voter turnout in presidential elections jumped
in 1932 and again in 1936, with most of these newly mobilized votersforming a durable piece of the Democratic Party that would remain
loyal well into the 1960s. Even as affluence returned with the Americanintervention in World War II, memories of the Depression continued
to shape the outlook of two generations of Americans.53 Survivors of
the Great Depression, one man would recall in the late 1960s, “arestill riding with the ghost—the ghost of those days when things came
hard.”54
Historians debate when the New Deal ended. Some identify the Fair
Labor Standards Act of 1938 as the last major New Deal measure. Others see wartime measures such as price and rent control and the G.I. Bill
(which afforded New Deal–style social benefits to veterans) as speciesof New Deal legislation. Still others conceive of a “New Deal order,” aconstellation of “ideas, public policies, and political alliances,” which,though changing, guided American politics from Roosevelt’s Hundred
Days forward to Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society—and perhaps evenbeyond. Indeed, the New Deal’s legacy still remains, and its battle lines
still shape American politics.

XV. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Matthew Downs, with content contributed by Dana
Cochran, Matthew Downs, Benjamin Helwege, Elisa Minoff, Caitlin Verboon,
and Mason Williams.
Recommended citation: Dana Cochran et al., “The Great Depression,” Matthew Downs, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright(Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
Notes to Ch a p ter 23
1. George Donelson Moss, The Rise of Modern America: A History of theAmerican People, 1890–1945 (New York: Prentice-Hall, 1995), 185–186.
2. Ibid., 186.
3. Robert S. McElvaine, The Great Depression: America, 1921–1940 (NewYork: Random House, 1984), 36.
4. John Steele Gordon, An Empire of Wealth: The Epic History of American
Economic Power (New York: HarperCollins, 2004), 320.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 221

5. Moss, Rise of Modern America, 186–187.
6. David M. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929–1945 (New York: Oxford University Press, 1999), 65, 68.
7. Allan J. Lichtman, Prejudice and the Old Politics: The Presidential Election of 1928 (Chapel Hill, NC: University of North Carolina Press, 1979).
8. Richard Norton Smith, An Uncommon Man: The Triumph of Herbert
Hoover (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1987).
9. Ibid.
10. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear, 70–103.
11. Ibid.
12. Ibid., 76.
13. Ibid., 92.
14. Mrs. M. H. A. to Eleanor Roosevelt, June 14, 1934, in Robert S. McElvaine, ed., Down and Out in the Great Depression: Letters from the Forgotten
Man (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1983), 54–55.
15. See especially Lizabeth Cohen, Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers
in Chicago, 1919–1939 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1990), chap. 5.
16. Robert S. McElvaine, ed., Encyclopedia of the Great Depression (NewYork: Macmillan, 2004), 320.
17. Donald Worster, Dust Bowl: The Southern Plains in the 1930s (NewYork: Oxford University Press, 1979), 48.
18. James N. Gregory, American Exodus: The Dust Bowl Migration andOkie Culture in California (New York: Oxford University Press, 1989), 22.
19. Cybelle Fox, Three Worlds of Relief (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University
Press, 2012), 126.
20. Ibid., 127.
21. Aristide Zolberg, A Nation by Design: Immigration Policy in the Fashioning of America (New York: Sage, 2006), 269.
22. Biographies of Roosevelt include Kenneth C. Davis, FDR: The Beckoning of Destiny: 1882–1928 (New York: Rand, 1972); and Jean Edward Smith,
FDR (New York: Random House, 2007).
23. Outstanding general treatments of the New Deal include Arthur M.
Schlesinger Jr., The Age of Roosevelt, 3 vols. (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1956–
1960); William E. Leuchtenburg, Franklin D. Roosevelt and the New Deal (NewYork: Harper and Row, 1963); Anthony J. Badger, The New Deal: The Depression Years, 1933–1940 (New York: Hill and Wang), 1989; and Kennedy, Freedom from Fear. On Roosevelt, see especially James MacGregor Burns, Roosevelt:
The Lion and the Fox (New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1956); Frank B. Friedel,Franklin D. Roosevelt, 4 vols. (Boston: Little, Brown, 1952–1973); Patrick J.
Maney, The Roosevelt Presence: A Biography of Franklin D. Roosevelt (NewYork: Twayne, 1992); and Alan Brinkley, Franklin Delano Roosevelt (New York:
Oxford University Press, 2010).
24. Franklin D. Roosevelt: “Inaugural Address,” March 4, 1933. http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​14473.
25. Michael E. Parrish, Securities Regulation and the New Deal (New Haven,
CT: Yale University Press, 1970).

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

222

chapt er 23

26. See especially Anthony J. Badger, FDR: The First Hundred Days (NewYork: Hill and Wang, 2008).
27. Leuchtenburg, Franklin D. Roosevelt and the New Deal.
28. Neil Maher, Nature’s New Deal: The Civilian Conservation Corps andthe Roots of the American Environmental Movement (New York: Oxford University Press, 2008).
29. Thomas K. McCraw, TVA and the Power Fight, 1933–1939 (Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1971).
30. Ellis W. Hawley, The New Deal and the Problem of Monopoly: A Studyin Economic Ambivalence (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1969);
Gavin Wright, Old South, New South: Revolutions in the Southern Economy
Since the Civil War (Baton Rouge: LSU Press, 1986), 217.
31. Theodore Saloutos, The American Farmer and the New Deal (Ames:
Iowa State University Press, 1982).
32. Bonnie Fox Schwartz, The Civil Works Administration, 1933–1934: The
Business of Emergency Employment in the New Deal (Princeton, NJ: Princeton
University Press, 1984); Edwin Amenta, Bold Relief: Institutional Politics and theOrigins of Modern American Social Policy (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University
Press, 1998); Jason Scott Smith, Building New Deal Liberalism: The Political
Economy of Public Works, 1933–1956 (New York: Cambridge University Press,
2006); Mason B. Williams, City of Ambition: FDR, La Guardia, and the Makingof Modern New York (New York: Norton, 2013).
33. Howard Odum, Southern Regions of the United States (Chapel Hill:
University of North Carolina Press, 1936), quoted in David L. Carlton and Peter
Coclanis, eds., Confronting Southern Poverty in the Great Depression: The Report on Economic Conditions of the South with Related Documents (Boston:Bedford St. Martin’s, 1996), 118–119.
34. Wright, Old South, New South, 217.
35. Ibid., 227–228.
36. Ibid., 216–220.
37. William Leuchtenberg, The White House Looks South: Franklin D. Roosevelt, Harry S. Truman, Lyndon B. Johnson (Baton Rouge: LSU Press, 2005),
74.
38. “Press Conference #160,” November 23, 1934, 214, in Roosevelt,
Complete Presidential Press Conferences of Franklin D. Roosevelt, Volumes 3–4,
1934 (New York: Da Capo Press, 1972).
39. McCraw, TVA and the Power Fight.
40. Carlton and Coclanis, Confronting Southern Poverty, 42.
41. William E. Leuchtenburg, The Supreme Court Reborn: The Constitutional Revolution in the Age of Roosevelt (New York: Oxford University Press,
1995); Theda Skocpol and Kenneth Finegold, State and Party in America’s New
Deal (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1995); Colin Gordon, New Deals:
Business, Labor, and Politics in America, 1920–1935 (New York: Cambridge
University Press, 1994).
42. Mark H. Leff, The Limits of Symbolic Reform: The New Deal and Taxation, 1933–1939 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1984); Kenneth T.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he G rea t D e p r e s s i o n 223

Jackson, Crabgrass Frontier: The Suburbanization of the United States (NewYork: Oxford University Press, 1985); Sarah T. Phillips, This Land, This Nation: Conservation, Rural America, and the New Deal (New York: Cambridge
University Press, 2007).
43. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear, 267.
44. W. Andrew Achenbaum, Old Age in the New Land (Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1978); Edwin E. Witte, The Development of the Social
Security Act (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1963).
45. Studs Terkel, Hard Times: An Oral History of the Great Depression(New York: Pantheon Books, 1970), 82.
46. Dan T. Carter, Scottsboro: A Tragedy of the American South (Baton
Rouge: LSU Press, 1969).
47. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear, 201.
48. Ira Katznelson, When Affirmative Action Was White: An Untold Historyof Racial Inequality in Twentieth-Century America (New York: Norton, 2005).
49. George Brown Tindall, The Emergence of the New South, 1913–1945(Baton Rouge: LSU Press, 1967), 491.
50. Alice Kessler-Harris, In Pursuit of Equity: Women, Men, and the Quest
for Economic Citizenship in 20th Century America (New York: Oxford University Press, 2001); Linda Gordon, Pitied but Not Entitled: Single Mothers and theHistory of Welfare, 1890–1935 (New York: Free Press, 1994).
51. Alan Brinkley, The End of Reform: New Deal Liberalism in Recession
and War (New York: Knopf, 1995).
52. Ibid.
53. Cohen, Making a New Deal; Kristi Andersen, The Creation of a Democratic Majority, 1928–1936 (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979); Caroline Bird, The Invisible Scar (New York: McKay, 1966).
54. Quoted in Terkel, Hard Times, 34.
R e c omm e n d e d R e a di n g
Balderrama, Francisco E., and Raymond Rodríguez. Decade of Betrayal: Mexican Repatriation in the 1930s, rev. ed. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 2006.
Brinkley, Alan. The End of Reform: New Deal Liberalism in Recession and War.
New York: Knopf, 1995.
———. Voices of Protest: Huey Long, Father Coughlin, and the Great Depression. New York: Knopf, 1982.
Cohen, Lizabeth. Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919–
1939. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1990.
Cowie, Jefferson, and Nick Salvatore. “The Long Exception: Rethinking thePlace of the New Deal in American History.” International Labor and­Working-Class History 74 (Fall 2008): 1–32.
Dickstein, Morris. Dancing in the Dark: A Cultural History of the Great Depression. New York: Norton, 2009.
Fraser, Steve, and Gary Gerstle, eds. The Rise and Fall of the New Deal Order,
1930–1980. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1989.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

224

chapt er 23

Gilmore, Glenda E. Defying Dixie: The Radical Roots of Civil Rights, 1919–
1950. New York: Norton, 2009.
Gordon, Colin. New Deals: Business, Labor, and Politics in America 1920–1935.
New York: Cambridge University Press, 1994.
Gordon, Linda. Dorothea Lange: A Life Beyond Limits. New York: Norton,
2009.
Gordon, Linda. Pitied but Not Entitled: Single Mothers and the History of Welfare 1890–1935. New York: Free Press, 1994.
Greene, Alison Collis. No Depression in Heaven: The Great Depression, the New
Deal, and the Transformation of Religion in the Delta. New York: Oxford
University Press, 2015.
Katznelson, Ira. Fear Itself: The New Deal and the Origins of Our Time. New
York: Norton, 2013.
Kelly, Robin D. G. Hammer and Hoe: Alabama Communists During the Great
Depression. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1990.
Kennedy, David. Freedom from Fear: America in Depression and War, 1929–
1945. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999.
Kessler-Harris, Alice. In Pursuit of Equity: Women, Men, and the Quest for Economic Citizenship in 20th-Century America. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2003.
Leach, William. Land of Desire: Merchants, Power, and the Rise of a New American Culture. New York: Pantheon Books, 1993.
Leuchtenburg, William. Franklin Roosevelt and the New Deal, 1932–1940. New
York: Harper and Row, 1963.
Pells, Richard. Radical Visions and American Dreams: Culture and Social
Thought in the Depression Years. New York: Harper and Row, 1973.
Phillips, Kimberly L. Alabama North: African-American Migrants, Community
and Working-Class Activism in Cleveland, 1915-1945. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1999.
Phillips–Fein, Kim. Invisible Hands: The Businessmen’s Crusade Against the New
Deal. New York: Norton, 2010
Sitkoff, Harvard. A New Deal for Blacks: The Emergence of Civil Rights as a National Issue. New York: Oxford University Press, 1978.
Sullivan, Patricia. Days of Hope: Race and Democracy in the New Deal Era.
Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1996.
Tani, Karen. States of Dependency: Welfare, Rights, and American Governance,
1935–1972. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2016.
Wright, Gavin. Old South, New South: Revolutions in the Southern Economy
Since the Civil War. Baton Rouge: LSU Press, 1986.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

24World War II
I. Introduction
The 1930s and 1940s were trying times. A global economic crisis gave
way to a global war that became the deadliest and most destructive inhuman history. Perhaps eighty million individuals lost their lives during
World War II. The war saw industrialized genocide and nearly threatened the eradication of an entire people. It also unleashed the most fearsome technology ever used in war. And when it ended, the United Statesfound itself alone as the world’s greatest superpower. Armed with theworld’s greatest economy, it looked forward to the fruits of a prosperous
consumers’ economy. But the war raised as many questions as it would
settle and unleashed new social forces at home and abroad that confronted generations of Americans to come.

American soldiers
recover the deadon Omaha Beachin 1944. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

226

chapter 24

II. The Origins of the Pacific War
Although the United States joined the war in 1941, two years after Europe exploded into conflict in 1939, the path to the Japanese bombing of
Pearl Harbor, the surprise attack that threw the United States headlong
into war, began much earlier. For the Empire of Japan, the war had beguna decade before Pearl Harbor.
On September 18, 1931, a small explosion tore up railroad tracks
controlled by the Japanese-owned South Manchuria Railway near thecity of Shenyang (Mukden) in the Chinese province of Manchuria. The
railway company condemned the bombing as the work of anti-JapaneseChinese dissidents. Evidence, though, suggests that the initial explosion
was neither an act of Chinese anti-Japanese sentiment nor an accident
but an elaborate ruse planned by the Japanese to provide a basis for invasion. In response, the privately operated Japanese Guandong (Kwangtung) army began shelling the Shenyang garrison the next day, and thegarrison fell before nightfall. Hungry for Chinese territory and witnessing the weakness and disorganization of Chinese forces, but under thepretense of protecting Japanese citizens and investments, the JapaneseImperial Army ordered a full-scale invasion of Manchuria. The invasion
was swift. Without a centralized Chinese army, the Japanese quickly defeated isolated Chinese warlords and by the end of February 1932, allof Manchuria was firmly under Japanese control. Japan established thenation of Manchukuo out of the former province of Manchuria.1
This seemingly small skirmish—known by the Chinese as the September 18 Incident and the Japanese as the Manchurian Incident—sparked
a war that would last thirteen years and claim the lives of over thirtyfive million people. Comprehending Japanese motivations for attacking
China and the grueling stalemate of the ensuing war are crucial for understanding Japan’s seemingly unprovoked attack on Pearl Harbor, Hawaii,
on December 7, 1941, and, therefore, for understanding the involvementof the United States in World War II as well.
Despite their rapid advance into Manchuria, the Japanese put off theinvasion of China for nearly three years. Japan occupied a precarious
domestic and international position after the September 18 Incident.
At home, Japan was riven by political factionalism due to its stagnating
economy. Leaders were torn as to whether to address modernization andlack of natural resources through unilateral expansion (the conquest ofresource-rich areas such as Manchuria to export raw materials to domestic Japanese industrial bases such as Hiroshima and Nagasaki) or inter-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  227

national cooperation (a philosophy of pan-Asianism in an anti-Westerncoalition that would push the colonial powers out of Asia). Ultimately,
after a series of political crises and assassinations enflamed tensions, prowar elements within the Japanese military triumphed over the more moderate civilian government. Japan committed itself to aggressive military
expansion.
Chinese leaders Chiang Kai-shek and Zhang Xueliang appealed to the
League of Nations for assistance against Japan. The United States supported the Chinese protest, proclaiming the Stimson Doctrine in January 1932, which refused to recognize any state established as a result ofJapanese aggression. Meanwhile, the League of Nations sent Englishman
Victor Bulwer-Lytton to investigate the September 18 Incident. Aftera six-month investigation, Bulwer-Lytton found the Japanese guilty ofinciting the September 18 incident and demanded the return of Manchuria to China. The Japanese withdrew from the League of Nations inMarch 1933.
Japan isolated itself from the world. Its diplomatic isolation empowered radical military leaders who could point to Japanese military successin Manchuria and compare it to the diplomatic failures of the civilian
government. The military took over Japanese policy. And in the military’seyes, the conquest of China would not only provide for Japan’s industrial
needs, it would secure Japanese supremacy in East Asia.
The Japanese launched a full-scale invasion of China. It assaulted the
Marco Polo Bridge on July 7, 1937, and routed the forces of the Chinese
National Revolutionary Army led by Chiang Kai-shek. The broken Chinese army gave up Beiping (Beijing) to the Japanese on August 8, Shanghai on November 26, and the capital, Nanjing (Nanking), on December
13. Between 250,000 and 300,000 people were killed, and tens of thousands of women were raped, when the Japanese besieged and then sacked
Nanjing. The Western press labeled it the Rape of Nanjing. To halt theinvading enemy, Chiang Kai-shek adopted a scorched-earth strategy of“trading space for time.” His Nationalist government retreated inland,burning villages and destroying dams, and established a new capital at
the Yangtze River port of Chongqing (Chungking). Although the Nationalists’ scorched-earth policy hurt the Japanese military effort, it alienatedscores of dislocated Chinese civilians and became a potent propaganda
tool of the emerging Chinese Communist Party (CCP).2
Americans read about the brutal fighting in China, but the UnitedStates lacked both the will and the military power to oppose the Japanese invasion. After the gut-wrenching carnage of World War I, many

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

228

chapter 24

Americans retreated toward isolationism by opposing any involvementin the conflagrations burning in Europe and Asia. And even if Americans wished to intervene, their military was lacking. The Japanese army
was a technologically advanced force consisting of 4,100,000 men and
900,000 Chinese collaborators—and that was in China alone. The Japanese military was armed with modern rifles, artillery, armor, and aircraft.
By 1940, the Japanese navy was the third-largest and among the mosttechnologically advanced in the world.
Still, Chinese Nationalists lobbied Washington for aid. Chiang Kaishek’s wife, Soong May-ling—known to the American public as Madame
Chiang—led the effort. Born into a wealthy Chinese merchant family in
1898, Madame Chiang spent much of her childhood in the United Statesand graduated from Wellesley College in 1917 with a major in English
literature. In contrast to her gruff husband, Madame Chiang was charming and able to use her knowledge of American culture and values togarner support for her husband and his government. But while the UnitedStates denounced Japanese aggression, it took no action.
As Chinese Nationalists fought for survival, the Communist Party
was busy collecting people and supplies in the northwestern Shaanxi
Province. China had been at war with itself when the Japanese came.
Nationalists battled a stubborn communist insurgency. In 1935 the Nationalists threw the communists out of the fertile Chinese coast, but anambitious young commander named Mao Zedong recognized the powerof the Chinese peasant population. In Shaanxi, Mao recruited from thelocal peasantry, building his force from a meager seven thousand survivors at the end of the Long March in 1935 to a robust 1.2 million
members by the end of the war.
Although Japan had conquered much of the country, the Nationalists regrouped and the communists rearmed. An uneasy truce paused thecountry’s civil war and refocused efforts on the invaders. The Chinese
could not dislodge the Japanese, but they could stall their advance. The
war mired in stalemate.

III. The Origins of the European War
Across the globe in Europe, the continent’s major powers were still struggling with the aftereffects of World War I when the global economic crisis
spiraled much of the continent into chaos. Germany’s Weimar Republic
collapsed with the economy, and out of the ashes emerged Adolf Hitler’s© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  229

National Socialists—the Nazis. Championing German racial supremacy, fascist government, and military expansionism, Hitler rose to powerand, after aborted attempts to take power in Germany, became chancellor in 1933 and the Nazis conquered German institutions. Democratic
traditions were smashed. Leftist groups were purged. Hitler repudiatedthe punitive damages and strict military limitations of the Treaty of Versailles. He rebuilt the German military and navy. He reoccupied regions
lost during the war and remilitarized the Rhineland, along the borderwith France. When the Spanish Civil War broke out in 1936, Hitler andBenito Mussolini—the fascist Italian leader who had risen to power inthe 1920s—intervened for the Spanish fascists, toppling the communist
Spanish Republican Party. Britain and France stood by warily and began
to rebuild their militaries, anxious in the face of a renewed Germany but
still unwilling to draw Europe into another bloody war.3
In his autobiographical manifesto, Mein Kampf, Hitler advocated forthe unification of Europe’s German peoples under one nation and that

The massive Nuremberg rallies, such as thisone in 1935, instilled a fierce loyalty to (orfearful silence about) Hitler and the National
Socialist Party in Germany. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

230

chapter 24­ ation’s need for Lebensraum, or living space, particularly in Eastern Eunrope, to supply Germans with the land and resources needed for future
prosperity. The Untermenschen (lesser humans) would have to go. Once inpower, Hitler worked toward the twin goals of unification and expansion.
In 1938, Germany annexed Austria and set its sights on the Sudetenland, a large, ethnically German area of Czechoslovakia. Britain andFrance, alarmed but still anxious to avoid war, agreed—without Czechoslovakia’s input—that Germany could annex the region in return for a
promise to stop all future German aggression. They thought that Hitler
could be appeased, but it became clear that his ambitions would continue pushing German expansion. In March 1939, Hitler took the restof Czechoslovakia and began to make demands on Poland. Britain andFrance promised war. And war came.
Hitler signed a secret agreement—the Molotov-Ribbentrop Pact—with the Soviet Union that coordinated the splitting of Poland between
the two powers and promised nonaggression thereafter. The European
war began when the German Wehrmacht invaded Poland on September 1,
1939. Britain and France declared war two days later and mobilized theirarmies. Britain and France hoped that the Poles could hold out for three
to four months, enough time for the Allies to intervene. Poland fell inthree weeks. The German army, anxious to avoid the rigid, grinding war
of attrition that took so many millions in the stalemate of World War I,
built their new modern army for speed and maneuverability. German
doctrine emphasized the use of tanks, planes, and motorized infantry(infantry that used trucks for transportation instead of marching) to concentrate forces, smash front lines, and wreak havoc behind the enemy’s
defenses. It was called Blitzkrieg, or lightning war.
After the fall of Poland, France and its British allies braced for an inevitable German attack. Throughout the winter of 1939–1940, however,fighting was mostly confined to smaller fronts in Norway. Belligerents
called it the Sitzkrieg (sitting war). But in May 1940, Hitler launched his
attack into Western Europe. Mirroring the German’s Schlieffen Plan of1914 in the previous war, Germany attacked through the Netherlands andBelgium to avoid the prepared French defenses along the French-Germanborder. Poland had fallen in three weeks; France lasted only a few weeks
more. By June, Hitler was posing for photographs in front of the Eiffel
Tower. Germany split France in half. Germany occupied and governed thenorth, and the south would be ruled under a puppet government in Vichy.
With France under heel, Hitler turned to Britain. Operation Sea
Lion—the planned German invasion of the British Isles—required air© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  231

superiority over the English Channel. From June until October the German Luftwaffe fought the Royal Air Force (RAF) for control of the skies.
Despite having fewer planes, British pilots won the so-called Battle ofBritain, saving the islands from immediate invasion and prompting thenew prime minister, Winston Churchill, to declare, “Never before in thefield of human conflict has so much been owed by so many to so few.”
If Britain was safe from invasion, it was not immune from additional
air attacks. Stymied in the Battle of Britain, Hitler began the Blitz—abombing campaign against cities and civilians. Hoping to crush the­British will to fight, the Luftwaffe bombed the cities of London, Liverpool, and Manchester every night from September to the following May.

The German
bombing of London left thousands
homeless, hurt,or dead. This
child, holding a
stuffed toy, sits
in the rubble asadults ponder
their fate in the
background.
1945. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

232

chapter 24

Children were sent far into the countryside to live with strangers to shieldthem from the bombings. Remaining residents took refuge in shelters andsubway tunnels, emerging each morning to put out fires and bury thedead. The Blitz ended in June 1941, when Hitler, confident that Britain
was temporarily out of the fight, launched Operation Barbarossa—theinvasion of the Soviet Union.
Hoping to capture agricultural lands, seize oil fields, and break themilitary threat of Stalin’s Soviet Union, Hitler broke the two powers’
1939 nonaggression pact and, on June 22, invaded the Soviet Union. It
was the largest land invasion in history. France and Poland had fallen
in weeks, and German officials hoped to break Russia before the winter. And initially, the Blitzkrieg worked. The German military quickly
conquered enormous swaths of land and netted hundreds of thousandsof prisoners. But Russia was too big and the Soviets were willing tosacrifice millions to stop the fascist advance. After recovering from theinitial shock of the German invasion, Stalin moved his factories eastof the Urals, out of range of the Luftwaffe. He ordered his retreatingarmy to adopt a “scorched earth” policy, to move east and destroy food,rails, and shelters to stymie the advancing German army. The Germanarmy slogged forward. It split into three pieces and stood at the gatesof Moscow, Stalingrad, and Leningrad, but supply lines now stretchedthousands of miles, Soviet infrastructure had been destroyed, partisans
harried German lines, and the brutal Russian winter arrived. Germany
had won massive gains but the winter found Germany exhausted andoverextended. In the north, the German army starved Leningrad to death
during an interminable siege; in the south, at Stalingrad, the two armies
bled themselves to death in the destroyed city; and, in the center, on
the outskirts of Moscow, in sight of the capital city, the German army
faltered and fell back. It was the Soviet Union that broke Hitler’s army.
Twenty-five million Soviet soldiers and civilians died during the Great
Patriotic War, and roughly 80 percent of all German casualties during
the war came on the Eastern Front. The German army and its various
conscripts suffered 850,000 casualties at the Battle of Stalingrad alone.
In December 1941, Germany began its long retreat.4

IV. The United States and the European War
While Hitler marched across Europe, the Japanese continued their war
in the Pacific. In 1939 the United States dissolved its trade treaties with© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  233

Japan and the following year cut off supplies of war materials by embargoing oil, steel, rubber, and other vital goods. It was hoped that economic
pressure would shut down the Japanese war machine. Instead, Japan’s
resource-starved military launched invasions across the Pacific to sustain
its war effort. The Japanese called their new empire the Greater East Asia
Co-Prosperity Sphere and, with the cry of “Asia for the Asians,” madewar against European powers and independent nations throughout theregion. Diplomatic relations between Japan and the United States collapsed. The United States demanded that Japan withdraw from China;
Japan considered the oil embargo a de facto declaration of war.5
Japanese military planners, believing that American intervention
was inevitable, planned a coordinated Pacific offensive to neutralize theUnited States and other European powers and provide time for Japan tocomplete its conquests and fortify its positions. On the morning of December 7, 1941, the Japanese launched a surprise attack on the American
naval base at Pearl Harbor, Hawaii. Japanese military planners hoped
to destroy enough battleships and aircraft carriers to cripple American
naval power for years. Twenty-four hundred Americans were killed in
the attack.
American isolationism fell at Pearl Harbor. Japan also assaulted Hong
Kong, the Philippines, and American holdings throughout the Pacific,
but it was the attack on Hawaii that threw the United States into a global
conflict. Franklin Roosevelt called December 7 “a date which will live ininfamy” and called for a declaration of war, which Congress answered
within hours. Within a week of Pearl Harbor the United States had declared war on the entire Axis, turning two previously separate conflicts
into a true world war.
The American war began slowly. Britain had stood alone militarily inEurope, but American supplies had bolstered their resistance. Hitler unleashed his U-boat “wolf packs” into the Atlantic Ocean with orders tosink anything carrying aid to Britain, but Britain’s and the United States’
superior tactics and technology won them the Battle of the Atlantic. British code breakers cracked Germany’s radio codes and the surge of intelligence, dubbed Ultra, coupled with massive naval convoys escorted bydestroyers armed with sonar and depth charges, gave the advantage to
the Allies and by 1942, Hitler’s Kriegsmarine was losing ships faster thanthey could be built.6
In North Africa in 1942, British victory at El Alamein began pushing the Germans back. In November, the first American combat troops© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

234

chapter 24

This pair of U.S. military recruiting posters demonstrates the way that two branches of the military—the
Marines and the Women’s Army Corps—borrowed techniques from professional advertisers to “sell” aromantic vision of war to Americans. One shows Marines at war in a lush jungle, reminding viewers thatthe war was taking place in exotic lands; the other depicted women taking on new jobs as a patriotic duty.
Bradshaw Crandall, Are You a Girl with a Star-Spangled Heart? Recruiting Publicity Bureau, U.S. Women’s
Army Corps Recruiting Poster (1943); Unknown, Let’s Go Get ’Em. Beck Engraving Co. (1942). Library ofCongress.

entered the European war, landing in French Morocco and pushing theGermans east while the British pushed west.7 By 1943, the Allies had
pushed Axis forces out of Africa. In January President Roosevelt andPrime Minister Churchill met at Casablanca to discuss the next step of
the European war. Churchill convinced Roosevelt to chase the Axis up
Italy, into the “soft underbelly” of Europe. Afterward, Roosevelt announced to the press that the Allies would accept nothing less than unconditional surrender.
Meanwhile, the Army Air Force (AAF) sent hundreds (and eventually
thousands) of bombers to England in preparation for a massive strategic
bombing campaign against Germany. The plan was to bomb Germany
around the clock. American bombers hit German ball-bearing factories,
rail yards, oil fields, and manufacturing centers during the day, while
the British RAF carpet-bombed German cities at night. Flying in forma-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  235

tion, they initially flew unescorted, since many believed that bombers
equipped with defensive firepower flew too high and too fast to be attacked. However, advanced German technology allowed fighters to easily shoot down the lumbering bombers. On some disastrous missions,
the Germans shot down almost 50 percent of American aircraft. However, the advent and implementation of a long-range escort fighter let
the bombers hit their targets more accurately while fighters confronted
opposing German aircraft.
In the wake of the Soviets’ victory at Stalingrad, the Big Three (Roosevelt, Churchill, and Stalin) met in Tehran in November 1943. Dismissing Africa and Italy as a sideshow, Stalin demanded that Britain and theUnited States invade France to relieve pressure on the Eastern Front.
Churchill was hesitant, but Roosevelt was eager. The invasion was tentatively scheduled for 1944.
Back in Italy, the “soft underbelly” turned out to be much tougher
than Churchill had imagined. Italy’s narrow, mountainous terrain gave
the defending Axis the advantage. Movement up the peninsula wasslow, and in some places conditions returned to the trenchlike warfareof World War I. Americans attempted to land troops behind them at
Anzio on the western coast of Italy, but, surrounded, they suffered heavy

In 1943, Allied
forces beganbombing railroad
and oil targets
in Bucharest,
part of the wider
policy of bombing
expeditions meant
to incapacitate
German transportation. Bucharest
was considered
the number one
oil target in Europe. Photograph,
August 1, 1943.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

236

chapter 24

Bombings devastated Europe, leveling ancient cities such as Cologne, Germany. Cologne experienced
an astonishing 262 separate air raids by Allied forces, leaving the city in ruins. Amazingly, the Cologne
Cathedral stood nearly undamaged even after being hit numerous times, while the area around it crumbled.
Photograph, April 24, 1945. Wikimedia.

c­ asualties. Still, the Allies pushed up the peninsula, Mussolini’s government revolted, and a new Italian government quickly made peace.
On the day the American army entered Rome, American, British andCanadian forces launched Operation Overlord, the long-awaited invasion of France. D-Day, as it became popularly known, was the largest
amphibious assault in history. American general Dwight Eisenhower was
uncertain enough of the attack’s chances that the night before the invasion he wrote two speeches: one for success and one for failure. The Allied landings at Normandy were successful, and although progress acrossFrance was much slower than hoped for, Paris was liberated roughly twomonths later. Allied bombing expeditions meanwhile continued to level
German cities and industrial capacity. Perhaps four hundred thousand
German civilians were killed by allied bombing.8
The Nazis were crumbling on both fronts. Hitler tried but failed toturn the war in his favor in the west. The Battle of the Bulge failed to© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  237

drive the Allies back to the English Channel, but the delay cost the Allies
the winter. The invasion of Germany would have to wait, while the Soviet
Union continued its relentless push westward, ravaging German populations in retribution for German war crimes.9
German counterattacks in the east failed to dislodge the Soviet advance, destroying any last chance Germany might have had to regain
the initiative. 1945 dawned with the end of European war in sight. The
Big Three met again at Yalta in the Soviet Union, where they reaffirmed
the demand for Hitler’s unconditional surrender and began to plan for
postwar Europe.
The Soviet Union reached Germany in January, and the Americans
crossed the Rhine in March. In late April American and Soviet troops
met at the Elbe while the Soviets pushed relentlessly by Stalin to reach
Berlin first and took the capital city in May, days after Hitler and hishigh command had committed suicide in a city bunker. Germany was
conquered. The European war was over. Allied leaders met again, thistime at Potsdam, Germany, where it was decided that Germany would
be divided into pieces according to current Allied occupation, with Berlin
likewise divided, pending future elections. Stalin also agreed to join thefight against Japan in approximately three months.10

V. The United States and the Japanese War
As Americans celebrated V-E (Victory in Europe) Day, they redirected
their full attention to the still-raging Pacific War. As in Europe, the war
in the Pacific started slowly. After Pearl Harbor, the American-controlled
Philippine archipelago fell to Japan. After running out of ammunitionand supplies, the garrison of American and Filipino soldiers surrendered.
The prisoners were marched eighty miles to their prisoner-of-war campwithout food, water, or rest. Ten thousand died on the Bataan Death
March.11
But as Americans mobilized their armed forces, the tide turned. In
the summer of 1942, American naval victories at the Battle of the Coral
Sea and the aircraft carrier duel at the Battle of Midway crippled Japan’s
Pacific naval operations. To dislodge Japan’s hold over the Pacific, theU.S. military began island hopping: attacking island after island, bypassing the strongest but seizing those capable of holding airfields to continue
pushing Japan out of the region. Combat was vicious. At Guadalcanal
American soldiers saw Japanese soldiers launch suicidal charges rather© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

238

chapter 24than surrender. Many Japanese soldiers refused to be taken prisoner or
to take prisoners themselves. Such tactics, coupled with American racial
prejudice, turned the Pacific Theater into a more brutal and barbarous
conflict than the European Theater.12
Japanese defenders fought tenaciously. Few battles were as one-sided
as the Battle of the Philippine Sea, or what the Americans called the Japanese counterattack, the Great Marianas Turkey Shoot. Japanese soldiers
bled the Americans in their advance across the Pacific. At Iwo Jima,an eight-square-mile island of volcanic rock, seventeen thousand Japanese soldiers held the island against seventy thousand Marines for over amonth. At the cost of nearly their entire force, they inflicted almost thirty
thousand casualties before the island was lost.
By February 1945, American bombers were in range of the mainland.
Bombers hit Japan’s industrial facilities but suffered high casualties.
To spare bomber crews from dangerous daylight raids, and to achieve
maximum effect against Japan’s wooden cities, many American bombers dropped incendiary weapons that created massive firestorms andwreaked havoc on Japanese cities. Over sixty Japanese cities were firebombed. American fire bombs killed one hundred thousand civilians inTokyo in March 1945.
In June 1945, after eighty days of fighting and tens of thousands ofcasualties, the Americans captured the island of Okinawa. The mainland of Japan was open before them. It was a viable base from which tolaunch a full invasion of the Japanese homeland and end the war.
Estimates varied, but given the tenacity of Japanese soldiers fighting
on islands far from their home, some officials estimated that an invasionof the Japanese mainland could cost half a million American casualties
and perhaps millions of Japanese civilians. Historians debate the many
motivations that ultimately drove the Americans to use atomic weapons
against Japan, and many American officials criticized the decision, butthese would be the numbers later cited by government leaders and military officials to justify their use.13
Early in the war, fearing that the Germans might develop an atomic
bomb, the U.S. government launched the Manhattan Project, a hugely
expensive, ambitious program to harness atomic energy and create asingle weapon capable of leveling entire cities. The Americans successfully exploded the world’s first nuclear device, Trinity, in New Mexicoin July 1945. (Physicist J. Robert Oppenheimer, the director of the Los
Alamos Laboratory, where the bomb was designed, later recalled that© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  239

the event reminded him of Hindu scripture: “Now I am become death,the destroyer of worlds.”) Two more bombs—Fat Man and Little Boy—
were built and detonated over two Japanese cities in August. Hiroshima
was hit on August 6. Over one hundred thousand civilians were killed.
Nagasaki followed on August 9. Perhaps eighty thousand civilians were
killed.
Emperor Hirohito announced the surrender of Japan on August 15.
On September 2, aboard the battleship USS Missouri, delegates from theJapanese government formally signed their surrender. World War II was
finally over.

VI. Soldiers’ Experiences
Almost eighteen million men served in World War II. Volunteers rushed tojoin the military after Pearl Harbor, but the majority—over ten ­million—
were drafted into service. Volunteers could express their preference forassignment, and many preempted the draft by volunteering. Regardless,recruits judged I-A, “fit for service,” were moved into basic training,where soldiers were developed physically and trained in the basic use of
weapons and military equipment. Soldiers were indoctrinated into thechain of command and introduced to military life. After basic, soldiers
moved on to more specialized training. For example, combat infantrymen
received additional weapons and tactical training, and radio operators
learned transmission codes and the operation of field radios. Afterward,
an individual’s experience varied depending on what service he enteredand to what theater he was assigned.14
Soldiers and Marines bore the brunt of on-the-ground combat. Aftertransportation to the front by trains, ships, and trucks, they could expect to march carrying packs weighing anywhere from twenty to fifty
pounds containing rations, ammunition, bandages, tools, clothing, andmiscellaneous personal items in addition to their weapons. Sailors, once
deployed, spent months at sea operating their assigned vessels. Larger
ships, particularly aircraft carriers, were veritable floating cities. In most,
sailors lived and worked in cramped conditions, often sleeping in bunks
stacked in rooms housing dozens of sailors. Senior officers received smallrooms of their own. Sixty thousand American sailors lost their lives in
the war.
During World War II, the Air Force was still a branch of the U.S.
Army and soldiers served in ground and air crews. World War II saw© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

240

chapter 24

the institutionalization of massive bombing campaigns against cities
and industrial production. Large bombers like the B-17 Flying Fortressrequired pilots, navigators, bombardiers, radio operators, and four dedicated machine gunners. Airmen on bombing raids left from bases in England or Italy or from Pacific islands and endured hours of flight before
approaching enemy territory. At high altitude, and without pressurizedcabins, crews used oxygen tanks to breathe and on-board temperatures
plummeted. Once in enemy airspace, crews confronted enemy fighters
and anti-aircraft flak from the ground. While fighter pilots flew as escorts, the Air Corps suffered heavy casualties. Tens of thousands of airmen lost their lives.
On the ground, conditions varied. Soldiers in Europe endured freezing winters, impenetrable French hedgerows, Italian mountain ranges,
and dense forests. Germans fought with a Western mentality familiar
to Americans. Soldiers in the Pacific endured heat and humidity, monsoons, jungles, and tropical diseases. And they confronted an unfamiliar
foe. Americans, for instance, could understand surrender as prudent;
many Japanese soldiers saw it as cowardice. What Americans saw as a
fanatical waste of life, the Japanese saw as brave and honorable. Atrocities flourished in the Pacific at a level unmatched in Europe.

VII. The Wartime Economy
Economies win wars no less than militaries. The war converted American factories to wartime production, reawakened Americans’ economic
might, armed Allied belligerents and the American armed forces, effectively pulled America out of the Great Depression, and ushered in an eraof unparalleled economic prosperity.15
Roosevelt’s New Deal had ameliorated the worst of the Depression,
but the economy still limped its way forward into the 1930s. But thenEurope fell into war, and, despite its isolationism, Americans were glad
to sell the Allies arms and supplies. And then Pearl Harbor changed everything. The United States drafted the economy into war service. The“sleeping giant” mobilized its unrivaled economic capacity to wage
worldwide war. Governmental entities such as the War Production Boardand the Office of War Mobilization and Reconversion managed economic production for the war effort and economic output exploded. An
economy that was unable to provide work for a quarter of the workforce
less than a decade earlier now struggled to fill vacant positions.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  241

Government spending during the four years of war doubled all federal spending in all of American history up to that point. The budget
deficit soared, but, just as Depression-era economists had counseled, thegovernment’s massive intervention annihilated unemployment and propelled growth. The economy that came out of the war looked nothing
like the one that had begun it.
Military production came at the expense of the civilian consumer
economy. Appliance and automobile manufacturers converted theirplants to produce weapons and vehicles. Consumer choice was foreclosed. Every American received rationing cards and, legally, goods suchas gasoline, coffee, meat, cheese, butter, processed food, firewood, andsugar could not be purchased without them. The housing industry wasshut down, and the cities became overcrowded.
But the wartime economy boomed. The Roosevelt administration
urged citizens to save their earnings or buy war bonds to prevent inflation. Bond drives were held nationally and headlined by Hollywood

As in World WarI, citizens were
urged to buy war
bonds to support
the war effort
overseas. Rallies
such as this 1943
event appealed toAmericans’ senseof patriotism.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

242

chapter 24c­elebrities. Such drives were hugely successful. They not only fundedmuch of the war effort, they helped tame inflation as well. So too did tax
rates. The federal government raised income taxes and boosted the top
marginal tax rate to 94 percent.
With the economy booming and twenty million American workers
placed into military service, unemployment virtually disappeared. And
yet limits remained. Many defense contractors still refused to hire black
workers. A. Philip Randolph in 1941 threatened to lead a march on
Washington in protest, compelling Roosevelt to issue Executive Order
Number 8802, the Fair Employment Practice in Defense Industries Act,
which established the Fair Employment Practices Committee (FEPC)
to end racial discrimination in the federal government and the defense
industry.16
During the war, more and more African Americans continued to leave
the agrarian South for the industrial North. And as more and more men
joined the military, and more and more positions went unfilled, women
joined the workforce en masse. Other American producers looked outside
the United States, southward, to Mexico, to fill its labor force. Between
1942 and 1964, the United States contracted thousands of Mexican nationals to work in American agriculture and railroads in the Bracero Program. Jointly administered by the State Department, the Department ofLabor, and the Department of Justice, the binational agreement secured
five million contracts across twenty-four states.17
With factory work proliferating across the country and agriculturallabor experiencing severe labor shortages, the presidents of Mexico andthe United States signed an agreement in July 1942 to bring the firstgroup of legally contracted workers to California. Discriminatory policies toward people of Mexican descent prevented bracero contracts in
Texas until 1947. The Bracero Program survived the war, enshrined inlaw until the 1960s, when the United States liberalized its immigration
laws. Though braceros suffered exploitative labor conditions, for the men
who participated the program was a mixed blessing. Interviews with exbraceros captured the complexity. “They would call us pigs . . . they
didn’t have to treat us that way,” one said of his employers, while another said, “For me it was a blessing, the United States was a blessing . . .
it is a nation I fell in love with because of the excess work and goodpay.”18 After the exodus of Mexican migrants during the Depression, theprogram helped reestablish Mexican migration, institutionalized migrantfarm work across much of the country, and further planted a Mexicanpresence in the southern and western United States.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  243

VIII. Women and World War II
President Franklin D. Roosevelt and his administration had encouraged
all able-bodied American women to help the war effort. He considered
the role of women in the war critical for American victory, and the public
expected women to assume various functions to free men for active military service. While most women opted to remain at home or volunteer
with charitable organizations, many went to work or donned a militaryuniform.
World War II brought unprecedented labor opportunities for American women. Industrial labor, an occupational sphere dominated by men,shifted in part to women for the duration of wartime mobilization.
Women applied for jobs in converted munitions factories. The iconic illustrated image of Rosie the Riveter, a muscular woman dressed in coveralls with her hair in a kerchief and inscribed with the phrase We Can Do
It!, came to stand for female factory labor during the war. But women
also worked in various auxiliary positions for the government. Althoughsuch jobs were often traditionally gendered female, over a million administrative jobs at the local, state, and national levels were transferred frommen to women for the duration of the war.19

With so many American workers deployedoverseas and with so many new positions
created by war production, posters like theiconic 1932 We Can Do It! urged womento support the war effort by entering theworkforce. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

244

chapter 24

For women who elected not to work, many volunteer opportunities
presented themselves. The American Red Cross, the largest charitable organization in the nation, encouraged women to volunteer with local city
chapters. Millions of women organized community social events for families, packed and shipped almost half a million tons of medical supplies
overseas, and prepared twenty-seven million care packages of nonperishable items for American and other Allied prisoners of war. The American Red Cross further required all female volunteers to certify as nurse’s
aides, providing an extra benefit and work opportunity for hospital staffs
that suffered severe personnel losses. Other charity organizations, such as
church and synagogue affiliates, benevolent associations, and social club
auxiliaries, gave women further outlets for volunteer work.
Military service was another option for women who wanted to join
the war effort. Over 350,000 women served in several all-female units ofthe military branches. The Army and Navy Nurse Corps Reserves, theWomen’s Army Auxiliary Corps, the Navy’s Women Accepted for Volunteer Emergency Service, the Coast Guard’s SPARs (named for the Coast
Guard motto, Semper Paratus, “Always Ready”), and Marine Corps units
gave women the opportunity to serve as either commissioned officers orenlisted members at military bases at home and abroad. The Nurse Corps
Reserves alone commissioned 105,000 army and navy nurses recruitedby the American Red Cross. Military nurses worked at base hospitals,
mobile medical units, and onboard hospital “mercy” ships.20
Jim Crow segregation in both the civilian and military sectors remained a problem for black women who wanted to join the war effort.
Even after President Roosevelt signed Executive Order 8802 in 1941,
supervisors who hired black women still often relegated them to the mostmenial tasks on factory floors. Segregation was further upheld in factorylunchrooms, and many black women were forced to work at night tokeep them separate from whites. In the military, only the Women’s Army
Auxiliary Corps and the Nurse Corps Reserves accepted black womenfor active service, and the army set a limited quota of 10 percent of total
end strength for black female officers and enlisted women and segregated black units on active duty. The American Red Cross, meanwhile,
recruited only four hundred black nurses for the Army and Navy Nurse
Corps Reserves, and black army and navy nurses worked in segregatedmilitary hospitals on bases stateside and overseas.
And for all of the postwar celebration of Rosie the Riveter, after the
war ended the men returned and most women voluntarily left the work-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  245

force or lost their jobs. Meanwhile, former military women faced a litanyof obstacles in obtaining veteran’s benefits during their transition to civilian life. The nation that beckoned the call for assistance to millions of
women during the four-year crisis hardly stood ready to accommodate
their postwar needs and demands.

IX. Race and World War II
World War II affected nearly every aspect of life in the United States,
and America’s racial relationships were not immune. African Americans,
Mexicans and Mexican Americans, Jews, and Japanese Americans were
profoundly impacted.
In early 1941, months before the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor, A.
Philip Randolph, president of the Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters,
the largest black trade union in the nation, made headlines by threatening President Roosevelt with a march on Washington, D.C. In this “crisisof democracy,” Randolph said, defense industries refused to hire African Americans and the armed forces remained segregated. In exchange
for Randolph calling off the march, Roosevelt issued Executive Order
8802, banning racial and religious discrimination in defense industries
and establishing the FEPC to monitor defense industry hiring practices.
While the armed forces remained segregated throughout the war, and the
FEPC had limited influence, the order showed that the federal government could stand against discrimination. The black workforce in defense
industries rose from 3 percent in 1942 to 9 percent in 1945.21
More than one million African Americans fought in the war. Most
blacks served in segregated, noncombat units led by white officers. Somegains were made, however. The number of black officers increased fromfive in 1940 to over seven thousand in 1945. The all-black pilot squadrons, known as the Tuskegee Airmen, completed more than 1,500 missions, escorted heavy bombers into Germany, and earned several hundred
merits and medals. Many bomber crews specifically requested the Red
Tail Angels as escorts. And near the end of the war, the army and navy
began integrating some of their units and facilities, before the U.S. government finally ordered the full integration of its armed forces in 1948.22
While black Americans served in the armed forces (though they weresegregated), on the home front they became riveters and welders, rationed food and gasoline, and bought victory bonds. But many black
Americans saw the war as an opportunity not only to serve their country© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

246

chapter 24

The Tuskegee Airmen stand at attention in 1941 as Major James A. Ellison returns the salute of Mac Ross,
one of the first graduates of the Tuskegee cadets. The photographs captures the pride and poise of the
Tuskegee Airmen, who continued the tradition of African Americans’ military service despite widespread
racial discrimination and inequality at home. Wikimedia.

but to improve it. The Pittsburgh Courier, a leading black newspaper,
spearheaded the Double V campaign. It called on African Americans tofight two wars: the war against Nazism and fascism abroad and the war
against racial inequality at home. To achieve victory, to achieve “realdemocracy,” the Courier encouraged its readers to enlist in the armed
forces, volunteer on the home front, and fight against racial segregationand discrimination.23
During the war, membership in the NAACP jumped tenfold, from fifty
thousand to five hundred thousand. The Congress of Racial Equality(CORE) was formed in 1942 and spearheaded the method of nonviolent
direct action to achieve desegregation. Between 1940 and 1950, some
1.5 million southern blacks, the largest number of any decade since thebeginning of the Great Migration, also indirectly demonstrated their opposition to racism and violence by migrating out of the Jim Crow South© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  247

to the North. But transitions were not easy. Racial tensions erupted in1943 in a series of riots in cities such as Mobile, Beaumont, and Harlem. The bloodiest race riot occurred in Detroit and resulted in the deathof twenty-five blacks and nine whites. Still, the war ignited in African
Americans an urgency for equality that they would carry with them into
the subsequent years.24
Many Americans had to navigate American prejudice, and America’s
entry into the war left foreign nationals from the belligerent nations in aprecarious position. The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) targeted
many on suspicions of disloyalty for detainment, hearings, and possible
internment under the Alien Enemy Act. Those who received an order forinternment were sent to government camps secured by barbed wire andarmed guards. Such internments were supposed to be for cause. Then, on
February 19, 1942, President Roosevelt signed Executive Order 9066,
authorizing the removal of any persons from designated “exclusion
zones”—which ultimately covered nearly a third of the country—at thediscretion of military commanders. Thirty thousand Japanese Americans
fought for the United States in World War II, but wartime anti-Japanesesentiment built on historical prejudices, and under the order, people ofJapanese descent, both immigrants and American citizens, were detained
and placed under the custody of the War Relocation Authority, the civil
agency that supervised their relocation to internment camps. They losttheir homes and jobs. Over ten thousand German nationals and a smaller
number of Italian nationals were interned at various times in the UnitedStates during World War II, but American policies disproportionately
targeted Japanese-descended populations, and individuals did not receive personalized reviews prior to their internment. This policy of mass
exclusion and detention affected over 110,000 Japanese and Japanesedescended individuals. Seventy thousand were American citizens.25
In its 1982 report, Personal Justice Denied, the congressionally appointed Commission on Wartime Relocation and Internment of Civilians concluded that “the broad historical causes” shaping the relocation
program were “race prejudice, war hysteria, and a failure of politicalleadership.”26 Although the exclusion orders were found to have been
constitutionally permissible under the vagaries of national security, they
were later judged, even by the military and judicial leaders of the time, tohave been a grave injustice against people of Japanese descent. In 1988,
President Reagan signed a law that formally apologized for internment
and provided reparations to surviving internees.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

248

chapter 24

This photograph,originally from
Jürgen Stroop’s
May 1943 reportto Heinrich Himmler, circulated
throughout Europe and America
as an image of the
Nazi Party’s brutality. The originalGerman caption
read: Forcibly
pulled out of dugouts. Wikimedia
Commons.

But if actions taken during war would later prove repugnant, so too
could inaction. As the Allies pushed into Germany and Poland, they uncovered the full extent of Hitler’s genocidal atrocities. The Allies liberated massive camp systems set up for the imprisonment, forced labor, andextermination of all those deemed racially, ideologically, or biologically“unfit” by Nazi Germany. But the Holocaust—the systematic murder of
eleven million civilians, including six million Jews—had been under way
for years. How did America respond?
Initially, American officials expressed little official concern for Nazi
persecutions. At the first signs of trouble in the 1930s, the State Department and most U.S. embassies did relatively little to aid European Jews.
Roosevelt publicly spoke out against the persecution and even withdrew
the U.S. ambassador to Germany after Kristallnacht. He pushed for the1938 Evian Conference in France, in which international leaders discussed
the Jewish refugee problem and worked to expand Jewish immigration
quotas by tens of thousands of people per year. But the conference came
to nothing, and the United States turned away countless Jewish refugees
who requested asylum in the United States.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  249

In 1939, the German ship St. Louis carried over nine hundred Jewish
refugees. They could not find a country that would take them. The passengers could not receive visas under the U.S. quota system. A State Department wire to one passenger read that all must “await their turns on
the waiting list and qualify for and obtain immigration visas before they
may be admissible into the United States.” The ship cabled the president
for special privilege, but the president said nothing. The ship was forced
to return to Europe. Hundreds of the St. Louis’s passengers would perish
in the Holocaust.
Anti-Semitism still permeated the United States. Even if Roosevelt
wanted to do more—it’s difficult to trace his own thoughts and personal views—he judged the political price for increasing immigration
quotas as too high. In 1938 and 1939, the U.S. Congress debated the
Wagner-Rogers Bill, an act to allow twenty thousand German-Jewish
children into the United States. First lady Eleanor Roosevelt endorsed
the measure, but the president remained publicly silent. The bill was opposed by roughly two thirds of the American public and was defeated.
Historians speculate that Roosevelt, anxious to protect the New Dealand his rearmament programs, was unwilling to expend political capitalto protect foreign groups that the American public had little interest inprotecting.27
Knowledge of the full extent of the Holocaust was slow in coming.
When the war began, American officials, including Roosevelt, doubted
initial reports of industrial death camps. But even when they conceded
their existence, officials pointed to their genuinely limited options. The
most plausible response was for the U.S. military was to bomb either
the camps or the railroads leading to them, but those options were rejected by military and civilian officials who argued that it would do little
to stop the deportations, would distract from the war effort, and could
cause casualties among concentration camp prisoners. Whether bombing
would have saved lives remains a hotly debated question.28
Late in the war, secretary of the treasury Henry Morgenthau, himself born into a wealthy New York Jewish family, pushed through majorchanges in American policy. In 1944, he formed the War Refugees Board(WRB) and became a passionate advocate for Jewish refugees. The WRB
saved perhaps two hundred thousand Jews and twenty thousand others. Morgenthau also convinced Roosevelt to issue a public statement
condemning the Nazi’s persecution. But it was already 1944, and suchpolicies were far too little, far too late.29© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

250

chapter 24

X. Toward a Postwar World
Americans celebrated the end of the war. At home and abroad, the UnitedStates looked to create a postwar order that would guarantee global peaceand domestic prosperity. Although the alliance of convenience with Stalin’s Soviet Union would collapse, Americans nevertheless looked for themeans to ensure postwar stability and economic security for returning
veterans.
The inability of the League of Nations to stop German, Italian, andJapanese aggressions caused many to question whether any global organization or agreements could ever ensure world peace. This included
Franklin Roosevelt, who, as Woodrow Wilson’s undersecretary of thenavy, witnessed the rejection of this idea by both the American people
and the Senate. In 1941, Roosevelt believed that postwar security could
be maintained by an informal agreement between what he termed theFour Policemen—the United States, Britain, the Soviet Union, andChina—instead of a rejuvenated League of Nations. But others, including secretary of state Cordell Hull and British prime minister Winston
Churchill, disagreed and convinced Roosevelt to push for a new globalorganization. As the war ran its course, Roosevelt came around to theidea. And so did the American public. Pollster George Gallup noted a“profound change” in American attitudes. The United States had rejected
membership in the League of Nations after World War I, and in 1937
only a third of Americans polled supported such an idea. But as war
broke out in Europe, half of Americans did. America’s entry into thewar bolstered support, and, by 1945, with the war closing, 81 percent ofAmericans favored the idea.30
Whatever his support, Roosevelt had long shown enthusiasm forthe ideas later enshrined in the United Nations (UN) charter. In January 1941, he announced his Four Freedoms—freedom of speech, of worship, from want, and from fear—that all of the world’s citizens should
enjoy. That same year he signed the Atlantic Charter with Churchill,which reinforced those ideas and added the right of self-determinationand promised some sort of postwar economic and political cooperation.
Roosevelt first used the term united nations to describe the Allied powers,
not the subsequent postwar organization. But the name stuck. At Tehran
in 1943, Roosevelt and Churchill convinced Stalin to send a Soviet delegation to a conference at Dumbarton Oaks, outside Washington, D.C., in
August 1944, where they agreed on the basic structure of the new organization. It would have a Security Council—the original Four Policemen,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  251

plus France—which would consult on how best to keep the peace andwhen to deploy the military power of the assembled nations. According
to one historian, the organization demonstrated an understanding that
“only the Great Powers, working together, could provide real security.”
But the plan was a kind of hybrid between Roosevelt’s policemen idea
and a global organization of equal representation. There would also be a
General Assembly, made up of all nations; an International Court of Justice; and a council for economic and social matters. Dumbarton Oaks
was a mixed success—the Soviets especially expressed concern over how
the Security Council would work—but the powers agreed to meet again
in San Francisco between April and June 1945 for further negotiations.
There, on June 26, 1945, fifty nations signed the UN charter.31
Anticipating victory in World War II, leaders not only looked tothe postwar global order, they looked to the fate of returning American
servicemen. American politicians and interest groups sought to avoid
another economic depression—the economy had tanked after WorldWar I—by gradually easing returning veterans back into the civilian
economy. The brainchild of William Atherton, the head of the American
Legion, the G.I. Bill won support from progressives and conservatives
alike. Passed in 1944, the G.I. Bill was a multifaceted, multibillion-dollar
entitlement program that rewarded honorably discharged veterans withnumerous benefits.32
Faced with the prospect of over fifteen million members of the armed
services (including approximately 350,000 women) suddenly returning
to civilian life, the G.I. Bill offered a bevy of inducements to slow theirinflux into the civilian workforce as well as reward their service withpublic benefits. The legislation offered a year’s worth of unemployment
benefits for veterans unable to secure work. About half of American veterans (eight million) received $4 billion in unemployment benefits overthe life of the bill. The G.I. Bill also made postsecondary education a reality for many. The Veterans Administration (VA) paid the lion’s share of
educational expenses, including tuition, fees, supplies, and even stipends
for living expenses. The G.I. Bill sparked a boom in higher education.
Enrollments at accredited colleges, universities, and technical and professional schools spiked, rising from 1.5 million in 1940 to 3.6 million in
1960. The VA disbursed over $14 billon in educational aid in just overa decade. Furthermore, the bill encouraged home ownership. Roughly
40 percent of Americans owned homes in 1945, but that figure climbed
to 60 percent a decade after the close of the war. Because the bill did
away with down payment requirements, veterans could obtain home

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

252

chapter 24loans for as little as $1 down. Close to four million veterans purchased
homes through the G.I. Bill, sparking a construction bonanza that fueled
postwar growth. In addition, the VA also helped nearly two hundred
thousand veterans secure farms and offered thousands more guaranteedfinancing for small businesses.33
Not all Americans, however, benefited equally from the G.I. Bill. Indirectly, since the military limited the number of female personnel, men
qualified for the bill’s benefits in far higher numbers. Colleges also limited
the number of female applicants to guarantee space for male veterans.
African Americans, too, faced discrimination. Segregation forced blackveterans into overcrowded “historically black colleges” that had to turnaway close to twenty thousand applicants. Meanwhile, residential segregation limited black home ownership in various neighborhoods, denying black homeowners the equity and investment that would comewith home ownership. There were other limits and other disadvantaged
groups. Veterans accused of homosexuality, for instance, were similarly
unable to claim GI benefits.34
The effects of the G.I. Bill were significant and long-lasting. It helped
sustain the great postwar economic boom and, even if many could not
attain it, it nevertheless established the hallmarks of American middle
class life.

XI. Conclusion
The United States entered the war in a crippling economic depression
and exited at the beginning of an unparalleled economic boom. The war
had been won, the United States was stronger than ever, and Americans
looked forward to a prosperous future. And yet new problems loomed.
Stalin’s Soviet Union and the proliferation of nuclear weapons would
disrupt postwar dreams of global harmony. Meanwhile, Americans who
had fought a war for global democracy would find that very democracy eradicated around the world in reestablished colonial regimes andat home in segregation and injustice. The war had unleashed powerfulforces that would reshape the United States at home and abroad.

XII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Joseph Locke, with content contributions by Mary
Beth Chopas, Andrew David, Ashton Ellett, Paula Fortier, Joseph Locke, Jennifer
Mandel, Valerie Martinez, Ryan Menath, Chris Thomas.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  253

Recommended citation: Mary Beth Chopas et al., “World War II,” Joseph
Locke, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford,
CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
Notes to Ch a p ter 24
1. For the second Sino-Japanese War, see, for instance, Michael A. Barnhart,
Japan Prepares for Total War: The Search for Economic Security, 1919–1941(Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1987); Dick Wilson, When Tigers Fight:
The Story of the Sino-Japanese War, 1937–1945 (New York: Viking, 1982); andMark Peattie, Edward Drea, and Hans van de Ven, eds., The Battle for China: Essays on the Military History of the Sino-Japanese War of 1937–1945 (Palo Alto,
CA: Stanford University Press, 2011).
2. See Joshua A. Fogel, The Nanjing Massacre in History and Historiography (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000).
3. On the origins of World War II in Europe, see, for instance, P. M. H. Bell,The Origins of the Second World War in Europe (New York: Routledge, 1986).
4. Antony Beevor, Stalingrad: The Fateful Siege, 1942–1943 (New York:
Penguin, 1999); Omer Bartov, The Eastern Front, 1941–45: German Troops andthe Barbarization of Warfare (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 1986); Catherine
Merridale, Ivan’s War: Life and Death in the Red Army, 1939–1945 (New York:
Picador, 2006).
5. Herbert Feis, The Road to Pearl Harbor: The Coming of the War Between
the United States and Japan (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1950).
6. For the United States on the European front, see, for instance, John
Keegan, The Second World War (New York: Viking, 1990); and Gerhard L.
Weinberg, A World at Arms: A Global History of World War II (New York:
Cambridge University Press, 2005).
7. Rick Atkinson, An Army at Dawn: The War in North Africa, 1942–1943(New York: Holt, 2002).
8. Max Hastings, Overlord: D-Day and the Battle for Normandy (NewYork: Simon and Schuster, 1985).
9. Richard Overy, Why the Allies Won (New York: Norton, 1997).
10. Christopher Duffy, Red Storm on the Reich: The Soviet March on Germany, 1945 (New York: Da Capo Press, 1993).
11. For the Pacific War, see, for instance, Ronald Spector, Eagle Against theSun: The American War with Japan (New York: Vintage Books, 1985); Keegan,
Second World War; John Costello, The Pacific War: 1941–1945 (New York:
Harper, 2009); and John W. Dower, War Without Mercy: Race and Power in the
Pacific War (New York: Pantheon Books, 1986).
12. Dower, War Without Mercy.
13. Michael J. Hogan, Hiroshima in History and Memory (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996); Gar Alperovitz, The Decision to Use the Atomic
Bomb (New York: Vintage Books, 1996).
14. Works on the experiences of World War II soldiers are seemingly endlessand include popular histories such as Stephen E. Ambrose’s Citizen Soldiers (New© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

254

chapter 24

York: Simon and Schuster, 1997) and memoirs such as Eugene Sledge’s With the
Old Breed: At Peleliu and Okinawa (New York: Presidio Press, 1981).
15. See, for instance, Michael Adams, The Best War Ever: America andWorld War II (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1994); Mark Harrison, ed., The Economics of World War II: Six Great Powers in International
Comparison (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1998); and Kennedy,
Freedom from Fear.
16. William P. Jones, The March on Washington: Jobs, Freedom, and theForgotten History of Civil Rights (New York: Norton, 2013).
17. Deborah Cohen, Braceros: Migrant Citizens and Transnational Subjects
in the Postwar United States and Mexico (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2011).
18. Interview with Rogelio Valdez Robles by Valerie Martinez and Lydia
Valdez, transcribed by Nancy Valerio, September 21, 2008; interview with Alvaro Hernández by Myrna Parra-Mantilla, February 5, 2003, Interview No. 33,
Institute of Oral History, University of Texas at El Paso.
19. Alecea Standlee, “Shifting Spheres: Gender, Labor, and the Constructionof National Identity in U.S. Propaganda During the Second World War,” Minerva
Journal of Women and War 4 (Spring 2010): 43–62.
20. Major Jeanne Holm, USAF (Ret.), Women in the Military: An Unfinished
Revolution (Novato, CA: Presidio Press, 1982), 21–109; Portia Kernodle, The
Red Cross Nurse in Action, 1882–1948 (New York: Harper), 406–453.
21. Jones, March on Washington.
22. Stephen Tuck, Fog of War: The Second World War and the Civil Rights
Movement (New York: Oxford University Press, 2012); Daniel Kryder, Divided
Arsenal: Race and the American State During World War II (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2000).
23. Andrew Buni, Robert L. Vann of the Pittsburgh Courier: Politics andBlack Journalism (Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1974).
24. Dominic J. Capeci Jr. and Martha Wilkerson, Layered Violence: The
Detroit Rioters of 1943 (Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1991).
25. Greg Robinson, By Order of the President: FDR and the Internment ofJapanese Americans (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001).
26. Commission on Wartime Relocation and Internment of Civilians, Personal Justice Denied: Report of the Commission on Wartime Relocation andInternment of Civilians (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office,­1982), 18.
27. Richard Breitman and Allan J. Lichtman, FDR and the Jews (Cambridge,
MA: Belknap Press, 2013), 149.
28. Peter Novick, The Holocaust in American Life (New York: Houghton
Mifflin, 1999).
29. David Mayers, Dissenting Voices in America’s Rise to Power (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2007), 274.
30. Fraser J. Harbutt, Yalta 1945: Europe and America at the Crossroads ofPeace (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2010), 258; Mark Mazower,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

W orl d W a r I I  255

Governing the World: The History of a Modern Idea (New York: Penguin, 2012,
208.
31. Paul Kennedy, The Parliament of Man: The Past, Present, and Future of
the United Nations (New York: Random House, 2006).
32. Kathleen Frydl, The G.I. Bill (New York: Cambridge University Press,2009); Suzanne Mettler, Soldiers to Citizens: The G.I. Bill and the Making of theGreatest Generation (New York: Oxford University Press, 2005).
33. Kathleen Frydl, G.I. Bill; Mettler, Soldiers to Citizens.
34. Lizabeth Cohen, A Consumer’s Republic: The Politics of Mass Consumption in Postwar America (New York: Knopf, 2003).
R e c omm e n d e d R e a d in g
Adams, Michael. The Best War Ever: America and World War II. Baltimore:
Johns Hopkins University Press, 1994.
Anderson, Karen. Wartime Women: Sex Roles, Family Relations, and the Status
of Women During WWII. Westport, CT: Greenwood, 1981.
Black, Gregory D. Hollywood Goes to War: How Politics, Profit and Propaganda Shaped World War II Movies. New York: Free Press, 1987.
Blum, John Morton. V Was for Victory: Politics and American Culture During
World War II. New York: Marine Books, 1976.
Borgwardt, Elizabeth. A New Deal for the World: America’s Vision for Human
Rights. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2005.
Daniels, Roger. Prisoners Without Trial: Japanese Americans in World War II.
New York: Hill and Wang, 1993.
Dower, John. War without Mercy: Race and Power in the Pacific War. New York:
Pantheon, 1993.
Honey, Maureen. Creating Rosie the Riveter: Class, Gender, and Propaganda
During World War II. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1984.
Hooks, Gregory Michael. Forging the Military-Industrial Complex: WorldWar II’s Battle of the Potomac. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1991.
Kaminski, Theresa. Angels of the Underground: The American Women Who Resisted the Japanese in the Philippines in World War II. New York: Oxford
University Press, 2015.
Keegan, John. The Second World War. New York: Viking, 1990.
Kennedy, David. Freedom from Fear: America in Depression and War, 1929–
1945. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999.
Leonard, Kevin Allen. The Battle for Los Angeles: Racial Ideology and WorldWar II. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 2006.
Lichtenstein, Nelson. Labor’s War at Home: The CIO in World War II. New
York: Cambridge University Press, 1982.
Malloy, Sean L. Atomic Tragedy: Henry L. Stimson and the Decision to Use theBomb. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2008.
Meyer, Leisa D. Creating G.I. Jane: The Regulation of Sexuality and Sexual Behavior in the Women’s Army Corps During WWII. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1992.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

256

chapter 24

Murray, Alice Yang. Historical Memories of the Japanese American Internment
and the Struggle for Redress. Palo Alto, CA: Stanford University Press, 2007.
O’Neill, William L. A Democracy at War: America’s Fight at Home and Abroadin World War II. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1995.
Rhodes, Richard. The Making of the Atomic Bomb. New York: Simon andSchuster, 1988.
Russell, Jan Jarboe. The Train to Crystal City: FDR’s Secret Prisoner Exchange
Program and America’s Only Family Internment Camp During WorldWar II. New York: Scribner, 2015.
Schulman, Bruce J. From Cotton Belt to Sunbelt: Federal Policy, Economic Development, and the Transformation of the South, 1938–1980. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1991.
Sparrow, James T. Warfare State: World War II Americans and the Age of Big
Government. New York: Oxford University Press, 2011.
Spector, Ronald H. Eagle Against the Sun: The American War with Japan. New
York: Random House, 1985
Takaki, Ronald T. Double Victory: A Multicultural History of America in WorldWar II. New York: Little, Brown, 2000.
Wynn, Neil A. The African American Experience During World War II. New
York: Rowman and Littlefield, 2010.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

25
The Cold War
I. Introduction
Relations between the United States and the Soviet Union—erstwhile­allies—soured soon after World War II. On February 22, 1946, less thana year after the end of the war, the chargé d’affaires of the U.S. embassyin Moscow, George Kennan sent a famously lengthy telegram—literally
referred to as the Long Telegram—to the State Department denouncing
the Soviet Union. “World communism is like a malignant parasite whichfeeds only on diseased tissue,” he wrote, and “the steady advance ofuneasy Russian nationalism . . . in [the] new guise of international Marxism . . . is more dangerous and insidious than ever before.”1 There could be
no cooperation between the United States and the Soviet Union, Kennan
wrote. Instead, the Soviets had to be “contained.” Less than two weeks
later, on March 5, former British prime minister Winston Churchill visited President Harry Truman in his home state of Missouri and d­ eclared

Test of the tactical
nuclear weapon
Small Boy at
the Nevada Test
Site, July 14,
1962. National
Nuclear Security
Administration.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 5 8 chapt er 25that Europe had been cut in half, divided by an “iron curtain” that had“descended across the Continent.”2 Aggressive anti-Soviet sentiment
seized the American government and soon the American people.3
The Cold War was a global political and ideological struggle between
capitalist and communist countries, particularly between the two surviving superpowers of the postwar world: the United States and the Union ofSoviet Socialist Republics (USSR). “Cold” because it was never a “hot,”direct shooting war between the United States and the Soviet Union, thegenerations-long, multifaceted rivalry nevertheless bent the world to its
whims. Tensions ran highest, perhaps, during the first Cold War, whichlasted from the mid-1940s through the mid-1960s, after which followed
a period of relaxed tensions and increased communication and cooperation, known by the French term détente, until the second Cold War interceded from roughly 1979 until the collapse of the Berlin Wall in 1989
and the dissolution of the Soviet Union in 1991. The Cold War reshaped
the world and the generations of Americans that lived under its shadow.

II. Political, Economic, and Military Dimensions
The Cold War grew out of a failure to achieve a durable settlement
among leaders from the Big Three Allies—the United States, Britain, andthe Soviet Union—as they met at Yalta in Russian Crimea and at Potsdam in occupied Germany to shape the postwar order. The Germans had
pillaged their way across Eastern Europe, and the Soviets had pillaged
their way back. Millions of lives were lost. Stalin considered the newly
conquered territory part of a Soviet sphere of influence. With Germany’s
defeat imminent, the Allies set terms for unconditional surrender. At thesame time, deliberation began over reparations, tribunals, and the natureof an occupation regime that would initially be divided into American,
British, French, and Soviet zones. Suspicion and mistrust were already
mounting. The political landscape was altered drastically by Franklin
Roosevelt’s sudden death in April 1945, just days before the inaugural
meeting of the UN. Although Roosevelt was skeptical of Stalin, he always
held out hope that the Soviets could be brought into the “Free World.”
Truman, like Churchill, had no such illusions. He committed the UnitedStates to a hard-line, anti-Soviet approach.4
At the Potsdam Conference, held on the outskirts of Berlin from midJuly to early August, the Allies debated the fate of Soviet-occupied Poland. Toward the end of the meeting, the American delegation received© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 259

word that Manhattan Project scientists had successfully tested an atomic
bomb. On July 24, when Truman told Stalin about this “new weaponof unusual destructive force,” the Soviet leader simply nodded his acknowledgment and said that he hoped the Americans would make “gooduse” of it.5
The Cold War had long roots. The World War II alliance of convenience was not enough to erase decades of mutual suspicions. The
Bolshevik Revolution had overthrown the Russian tsarists during WorldWar I. Bolshevik leader Vladimir Lenin urged an immediate worldwide
peace that would pave the way for world socialism just as Woodrow
Wilson brought the United States into the war with promises of global
democracy and free trade. The United States had intervened militarily
against the Red Army during the Russian Civil War, and when the Soviet
Union was founded in 1922 the United States refused to recognize it. The
two powers were brought together only by their common enemy, andwithout that common enemy, there was little hope for cooperation.6
On the eve of American involvement in World War II, on August 14,
1941, Roosevelt and Churchill had issued a joint declaration of goals
for postwar peace, known as the Atlantic Charter. An adaptation of
Wilson’s Fourteen Points, the Atlantic Charter established the creationof the United Nations. The Soviet Union was among the fifty charter
UN member-states and was given one of five seats—alongside the UnitedStates, Britain, France, and China—on the select Security Council. The
Atlantic Charter also set in motion the planning for a reorganized global
economy. The July 1944 UN Financial and Monetary Conference, more
popularly known as the Bretton Woods Conference, created the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the forerunner of the World Bank,
the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD).
The Bretton Woods system was bolstered in 1947 with the addition of
the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), forerunner of theWorld Trade Organization (WTO). The Soviets rejected it all.
Many officials on both sides knew that the Soviet-American relationship would dissolve into renewed hostility at the end of the war, andevents proved them right. In 1946 alone, the Soviet Union refused tocede parts of occupied Iran, a Soviet defector betrayed a Soviet spy who
had worked on the Manhattan Project, and the United States refused
Soviet calls to dismantle its nuclear arsenal. In a 1947 article for Foreign ­Affairs—written under the pseudonym “Mr. X”—George Kennan
warned that Americans should “continue to regard the Soviet Union as a

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 6 0 chapt er 25

rival, not a partner,” since Stalin harbored “no real faith in the possibilityof a permanent happy coexistence of the Socialist and capitalist worlds.”
He urged U.S. leaders to pursue “a policy of firm containment, designed
to confront the Russians.”7
Truman, on March 12, 1947, announced $400 million in aid to Greece
and Turkey, where “terrorist activities . . . led by Communists” jeopardized “democratic” governance. With Britain “reducing or liquidating
its commitments in several parts of the world, including Greece,” it fellon the United States, Truman said, “to support free peoples . . . resisting
attempted subjugation by . . . outside pressures.”8 The so-called Truman
Doctrine became a cornerstone of the American policy of containment.9
In the harsh winter of 1946–1947, famine loomed in much of continental Europe. Blizzards and freezing cold halted coal production.
Factories closed. Unemployment spiked. Amid these conditions, thecommunist parties of France and Italy gained nearly a third of the seatsin their respective parliaments. American officials worried that Europe’s
impoverished masses were increasingly vulnerable to Soviet propaganda.
The situation remained dire through the spring, when secretary of state
General George Marshall gave an address at Harvard University on
June 5, 1947, suggesting that “the United States should do whatever it isable to do to assist in the return of normal economic health to the world,
without which there can be no political stability and no assured peace.”10
Although Marshall had stipulated to potential critics that his proposal
was “not directed against any country, but against hunger, poverty . . .
and chaos,” Stalin clearly understood this as an assault against communism in Europe. He saw it as a “Trojan Horse” designed to lure Germany
and other countries into the capitalist web.11
The European Recovery Program (ERP), popularly known as the
Marshall Plan, pumped enormous sums of capital into Western Europe.
From 1948 to 1952 the United States invested $13 billion toward reconstruction while simultaneously loosening trade barriers. To avoid thepostwar chaos of World War I, the Marshall Plan was designed to rebuild
Western Europe, open markets, and win European support for capitalist democracies. The Soviets countered with their rival Molotov Plan, asymbolic pledge of aid to Eastern Europe. Polish leader Józef Cyrankiewicz was rewarded with a five-year, $450 million trade agreement from
Russia for boycotting the Marshall Plan. Stalin was jealous of Eastern
Europe. When Czechoslovakia received $200 million in American assistance, Stalin summoned Czech foreign minister Jan Masaryk to Mos-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 261

cow. Masaryk later recounted that he “went to Moscow as the foreign
minister of an independent sovereign state” but “returned as a lackey of
the Soviet Government.” Stalin exercised ever tighter control over Soviet“satellite” countries in central and Eastern Europe.12
The situation in Germany meanwhile deteriorated. Berlin had been
divided into communist and capitalist zones. In June 1948, when U.S.,
British, and French officials introduced a new currency, the Soviet Union
initiated a ground blockade, cutting off rail and road access to West Berlin (landlocked within the Soviet occupation zone) to gain control overthe entire city. The United States organized and coordinated a massive
airlift that flew essential supplies into the beleaguered city for elevenmonths, until the Soviets lifted the blockade on May 12, 1949. Germany was officially broken in half. On May 23, the western half of thecountry was formally renamed the Federal Republic of Germany (FRG)
and the eastern Soviet zone became the German Democratic Republic(GDR) later that fall. Berlin, which lay squarely within the GDR, was

The Berlin
Blockade andthe Allied airliftthat followed
represented oneof the first major
crises of the Cold
War. Here, a U.S.
Navy Douglas
R4D and a U.S.
Air Force C-47
aircraft unload at
Tempelhof Airport
in 1948 or 1949.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 6 2 chapt er 25

divided into two sections (and, from August 1961 until November 1989,
famously separated by physical walls).13
In the summer of 1949, American officials launched the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), a mutual defense pact in which theUnited States and Canada were joined by England, France, Belgium,
Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Italy, Portugal, Norway, Denmark, andIceland. The Soviet Union would formalize its own collective defensive
agreement in 1955, the Warsaw Pact, which included Albania, Romania,
Bulgaria, Hungary, Czechoslovakia, Poland, and East Germany.
Liberal journalist Walter Lippmann was largely responsible for popularizing the term Cold War in his book The Cold War: A Study in U.S.
Foreign Policy, published in 1947. Lippmann envisioned a prolonged
stalemate between the United States and the USSR, a war of words andideas in which direct shots would not necessarily be fired between the
two. Lippmann agreed that the Soviet Union would only be “prevented
from expanding” if it were “confronted with . . . American power,” buthe felt “that the strategical conception and plan” recommended by Mr.
X (George Kennan) was “fundamentally unsound,” as it would require
having “the money and the military power always available in sufficientamounts to apply ‘counter-force’ at constantly shifting points all over theworld.” Lippmann cautioned against making far-flung, open-ended commitments, favoring instead a more limited engagement that focused onhalting the influence of communism in the “heart” of Europe; he believedthat if the Soviet system were successfully restrained on the continent,
it could otherwise be left alone to collapse under the weight of its own
imperfections.14
A new chapter in the Cold War began on October 1, 1949, when
the CCP, led by Mao Zedong, declared victory against Kuomintang nationalists led by the Western-backed Chiang Kai-shek. The Kuomintang
retreated to the island of Taiwan and the CCP took over the mainland
under the red flag of the People’s Republic of China (PRC). Coming sosoon after the Soviet Union’s successful test of an atomic bomb, on August 29, the “loss of China,” the world’s most populous country, contributed to a sense of panic among American foreign policy makers,
whose attention began to shift from Europe to Asia. After Dean Acheson
became secretary of state in 1949, Kennan was replaced in the State Department by former investment banker Paul Nitze, whose first task was
to help compose, as Acheson later described in his memoir, a document
designed to “bludgeon the mass mind of ‘top government’” into approving a “substantial increase” in military expenditures.15© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 263

“National Security Memorandum 68: United States Objectives andPrograms for National Security,” a national defense memo known as
NSC-68, achieved its goal. Issued in April 1950, the nearly sixty-pageclassified memo warned of “increasingly terrifying weapons of mass
destruction,” which served to remind “every individual” of “the everpresent possibility of annihilation.” It said that leaders of the USSR and
its “international communist movement” sought only “to retain andsolidify their absolute power.” As the central “bulwark of opposition
to Soviet expansion,” America had become “the principal enemy” that“must be subverted or destroyed by one means or another.” NSC-68
urged a “rapid build-up of political, economic, and military strength” inorder to “roll back the Kremlin’s drive for world domination.” Such a
massive commitment of resources, amounting to more than a threefold
increase in the annual defense budget, was necessary because the USSR,“unlike previous aspirants to hegemony,” was “animated by a new fanatic faith,” seeking “to impose its absolute authority over the rest of
the world.”16 Both Kennan and Lippmann were among a minority in theforeign policy establishment who argued to no avail that such a “militarization of containment” was tragically wrongheaded.17
On June 25, 1950, as U.S. officials were considering the merits of
NSC-68’s proposals, including “the intensification of . . . operations bycovert means in the fields of economic . . . political and psychological
warfare” designed to foment “unrest and revolt in . . . [Soviet] satellite

Global communism was shapedby the relationshipbetween the twolargest communist
nations—theSoviet Union and
the People’s Republic of China.
Despite persistenttensions between
the two, this 1950
Chinese stamp
depicts Joseph
Stalin shaking
hands with
Mao ­Zedong.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 6 4 chapt er 25

countries,” fighting erupted in Korea between communists in the northand American-backed anti-communists in the south.18
After Japan surrendered in September 1945, a U.S.-Soviet joint occupation had paved the way for the division of Korea. In November 1947,
the UN passed a resolution that a united government in Korea should becreated, but the Soviet Union refused to cooperate. Only the south heldelections. The Republic of Korea (ROK), South Korea, was created threemonths after the election. A month later, communists in the north established the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK). Both claimed
to stand for a unified Korean peninsula. The UN recognized the ROK,
but incessant armed conflict broke out between North and South.19
In the spring of 1950, Stalin hesitantly endorsed North Korean leader
Kim Il Sung’s plan to liberate the South by force, a plan heavily influenced by Mao’s recent victory in China. While he did not desire a militaryconfrontation with the United States, Stalin thought correctly that hecould encourage his Chinese comrades to support North Korea if the war
turned against the DPRK. The North Koreans launched a successful surprise attack and Seoul, the capital of South Korea, fell to the communists
on June 28. The UN passed resolutions demanding that North Korea
cease hostilities and withdraw its armed forces to the thirty-eighth parallel and calling on member states to provide the ROK military assistanceto repulse the northern attack.
That July, UN forces mobilized under American general Douglas
Mac­Arthur. Troops landed at Inchon, a port city about thirty miles fromSeoul, and took the city on September 28. They moved on North Korea.
On October 1, ROK/UN forces crossed the thirty-eighth parallel, andon October 26 they reached the Yalu River, the traditional Korea-China
border. They were met by three hundred thousand Chinese troops who
broke the advance and rolled up the offensive. On November 30, ROK/
UN forces began a fevered retreat. They returned across the thirty-eighthparallel and abandoned Seoul on January 4, 1951. The United Nations
forces regrouped, but the war entered into a stalemate. General Mac­
Arthur, growing impatient and wanting to eliminate the communist
threats, requested authorization to use nuclear weapons against North
Korea and China. Denied, MacArthur publicly denounced Truman. Truman, unwilling to threaten World War III and refusing to tolerate MacArthur’s public insubordination, dismissed the general in April. On June
23, 1951, the Soviet ambassador to the UN suggested a cease-fire, which
the U.S. immediately accepted. Peace talks continued for two years.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 265

With the stated policy of “containing” communism at home and abroad, the United States pressured
the United Nations to support the South Koreans and deployed its own troops to the Korean Peninsula.
Though overshadowed in the annals of American history, the Korean War witnessed over thirty thousand
American combat deaths and left an indelible mark on those who served. Wikimedia.

General Dwight Eisenhower defeated Illinois Governor Adlai Stevenson in the 1952 presidential election, and Stalin died in March 1953. The
DPRK warmed to peace, and an armistice agreement was signed on July27, 1953. More than 1.5 million people had died during the conflict.20
Coming so soon after World War II and ending without clear victory,
Korea became for many Americans a “forgotten war.” Decades later,
though, the nation’s other major intervention in Asia would be anything
but forgotten. The Vietnam War had deep roots in the Cold War world.
Vietnam had been colonized by France and seized by Japan during WorldWar II. The nationalist leader Ho Chi Minh had been backed by theUnited States during his anti-Japanese insurgency and, following Japan’ssurrender in 1945, Viet Minh nationalists, quoting the American Declaration of Independence, created the independent Democratic Republic of© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 6 6 chapt er 25

Vietnam (DRV). Yet France moved to reassert authority over its former
colony in Indochina, and the United States sacrificed Vietnamese selfdetermination for France’s colonial imperatives. Ho Chi Minh turned to
the Soviet Union for assistance in waging war against the French colonizers in a protracted war.
After French troops were defeated at the Battle of Dien Bien Phu
in May 1954, U.S. officials helped broker a temporary settlement thatpartitioned Vietnam in two, with a Soviet/Chinese-backed state in thenorth and an American-backed state in the south. To stifle communist
expansion southward, the United States would send arms, offer militaryadvisors, prop up corrupt politicians, stop elections, and, eventually,
send over five hundred thousand troops, of whom nearly sixty thousand
would be lost before the communists finally reunified the country.

III. The Arms Buildup, the Space Race,and Technological Advancement
The world was never the same after the United States leveled Hiroshima
and Nagasaki in August 1945 with atomic bombs. Not only had perhaps 180,000 civilians been killed, the nature of warfare was foreverchanged. The Soviets accelerated their nuclear research, expedited in nosmall part by “atom spies” such as Klaus Fuchs, who had stolen nuclear
secrets from the Americans’ secret Manhattan Project. Soviet scientists
successfully tested an atomic bomb on August 29, 1949, years before
American officials had estimated they would. This unexpectedly quick
Russian success not only caught the United States off guard but alarmed
the Western world and propelled a nuclear arms race between the UnitedStates and the USSR.
The United States detonated the first thermonuclear weapon, or hydrogen bomb (using fusion explosives of theoretically limitless power) on
November 1, 1952. The blast measured over ten megatons and generated
an inferno five miles wide with a mushroom cloud twenty-five miles highand a hundred miles across. The irradiated debris—fallout—from theblast circled the earth, occasioning international alarm about the effectsof nuclear testing on human health and the environment. It only hastened
the arms race, with each side developing increasingly advanced warheads
and delivery systems. The USSR successfully tested a hydrogen bomb in
1953, and soon thereafter Eisenhower announced a policy of “massive
retaliation.” The United States would henceforth respond to threats or© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 267

In response to the Soviet Union’s test of a pseudo–hydrogen bomb in 1953, the United States began Castle
Bravo—the first U.S. test of a dry-fuel hydrogen bomb. Detonated on March 1, 1954, it was the most powerful nuclear device ever tested. But the effects were more gruesome than expected, causing nuclear fallout
and radiation poisoning in nearby Pacific islands. Wikimedia.

acts of aggression with perhaps its entire nuclear might. Both sides, then,would theoretically be deterred from starting a war, through the logic of
mutually assured destruction (MAD). J. Robert Oppenheimer, director of
Los Alamos nucelear laboratory that developed the first nuclear bomb,
likened the state of “nuclear deterrence” between the United States andthe USSR to “two scorpions in a bottle, each capable of killing the other,”but only by risking their own lives.21
Fears of nuclear war produced a veritable atomic culture. Films such
as Godzilla, On the Beach, Fail-Safe, and Dr. Strangelove or: How I
Learned to Stop Worrying and Love the Bomb plumbed the depths ofAmerican anxieties with plots featuring radioactive monsters, nuclear
accidents, and doomsday scenarios. Antinuclear protests in the UnitedStates and abroad warned against the perils of nuclear testing and highlighted the likelihood that a thermonuclear war would unleash a global© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 6 8 chapt er 25

environmental catastrophe. Yet at the same time, peaceful nuclear technologies, such as fission- and fusion-based energy, seemed to herald autopia of power that would be clean, safe, and “too cheap to meter.” In
1953, Eisenhower proclaimed at the UN that the United States would
share the knowledge and means for other countries to use atomic power.
Henceforth, “the miraculous inventiveness of man shall not be dedicatedto his death, but consecrated to his life.” The “Atoms for Peace” speechbrought about the establishment of the International Atomic Energy
Agency (IAEA), along with worldwide investment in this new economic
sector.22
As Germany fell at the close of World War II, the United States andthe Soviet Union each sought to acquire elements of the Nazi’s V-2 superweapon program. A devastating rocket that had terrorized England, theV-2 was capable of delivering its explosive payload up to a distance ofnearly six hundred miles, and both nations sought to capture the scientists, designs, and manufacturing equipment to make it work. A former
top German rocket scientist, Wernher von Braun, became the leader ofthe American space program; the Soviet Union’s program was secretly
managed by former prisoner Sergei Korolev. After the end of the war,
American and Soviet rocket engineering teams worked to adapt German
technology in order to create an intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM).
The Soviets achieved success first. They even used the same launch vehicle on October 4, 1957, to send Sputnik 1, the world’s first human-madesatellite, into orbit. It was a decisive Soviet propaganda victory.23
In response, the U.S. government rushed to perfect its own ICBM
technology and launch its own satellites and astronauts into space. In
1958, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) was
created as a successor to the National Advisory Committee for Aeronautics (NACA). Initial American attempts to launch a satellite into orbit
using the Vanguard rocket suffered spectacular failures, heightening fears
of Soviet domination in space. While the American space program floundered, on September 13, 1959, the Soviet Union’s Luna 2 capsule became
the first human-made object to touch the moon. The “race for survival,”
as it was called by the New York Times, reached a new level.24 The Soviet Union successfully launched a pair of dogs (Belka and Strelka) into
orbit and returned them to Earth while the American Mercury program
languished behind schedule. Despite countless failures and one massive
accident that killed nearly one hundred Soviet military and rocket engineers, Russian cosmonaut Yuri Gagarin was launched into orbit on April© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 269

12, 1961. American astronaut Alan Shepard accomplished a suborbital
flight in the Freedom 7 capsule on May 5. The United States had lagged
behind, and John Kennedy would use America’s losses in the “spacerace” to bolster funding for a moon landing.
While outer space captivated the world’s imagination, the Cold War
still captured its anxieties. The ever-escalating arms race continued tofoster panic. In the early 1950s, the Federal Civil Defense Administration(FCDA) began preparing citizens for the worst. Schoolchildren were instructed, via a film featuring Bert the Turtle, to “duck and cover” beneath
their desks in the event of a thermonuclear war.25
Although it took a backseat to space travel and nuclear weapons,
the advent of modern computing was yet another major Cold War scientific innovation, the effects of which were only just beginning to beunderstood. In 1958, following the humiliation of the Sputnik launches,
Eisenhower authorized the creation of an Advanced Research Projects
Agency (ARPA) housed within the Department of Defense (later changed
to DARPA). As a secretive military research and development operation,
ARPA was tasked with funding and otherwise overseeing the production of sensitive new technologies. Soon, in cooperation with universitybased computer engineers, ARPA would develop the world’s first systemof “network packing switches,” and computer networks would begin
connecting to one another.

IV. The Cold War Red Scare, McCarthyism,
and Liberal Anticommunism
Joseph McCarthy burst onto the national scene during a speech in Wheeling, West Virginia, on February 9, 1950. Waving a sheet of paper in theair, he proclaimed: “I have here in my hand a list of 205 . . . namesthat were made known to the Secretary of State as being members of
the Communist party and who nevertheless are still working and shaping [U.S.] policy.” Since the Wisconsin Republican had no actual list,
when pressed, the number changed to fifty-seven, then, later, eighty-one.
Finally, he promised to disclose the name of just one communist, the nation’s “top Soviet agent.” The shifting numbers brought ridicule, but it
didn’t matter: McCarthy’s claims won him fame and fueled the ongoing“red scare.”26
McCarthyism was only a symptom of a massive and widespread anticommunist hysteria that engulfed Cold War America. Popular fears,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 7 0 chapt er 25

Joseph McCarthy, a Republican senator from Wisconsin, pictured here in 1950, fueled fears during theearly 1950s that communism was rampant and growing. Such fears intensified Cold War tensions at nearly
every level of society, from government officials to ordinary American citizens. National Archives andRecords Administration.

for instance, had long since shot through the federal government. Only
two years after World War II, President Truman, facing growing anticommunist excitement and with a tough election on the horizon, gavein to pressure in March 1947 and issued his “loyalty order,” Executive
Order 9835, establishing loyalty reviews for federal employees. The FBI
conducted closer examinations of all potential “security risks” among
Foreign Service officers. In Congress, the House Un-American Activities
Committee (HUAC) and the Senate Permanent Subcommittee on Investigations (SPSI) held hearings on communist influence in American society. Between 1949 and 1954, congressional committees conducted over
one hundred investigations into subversive activities. Antisubversion
committees emerged in over a dozen state legislatures, and review procedures proliferated in public schools and universities across the country.
At the University of California, for example, thirty-one professors were

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 271

The environment of anticommunist fear andpanic led to the arrest of many innocent
people, although some Americans accusedof supplying top-secret information to theSoviets were, in fact, spies. Julius and Ethel
Rosenberg were convicted of espionage andexecuted in 1953 for delivering information about the atomic bomb to the Soviets.
Library of Congress.

dismissed in 1950 for refusing to sign a loyalty oath. The Internal Security Act, or McCarran Act, passed by Congress in September 1950, mandated all “communist organizations” to register with the government,
gave the government greater powers to investigate sedition, and made it
possible to prevent suspected individuals from gaining or keeping theircitizenship.27
Anticommunist policies reflected national fears of a surging global
communism. Within a ten-month span beginning in 1949, for instance,
the USSR developed a nuclear bomb, China fell to communism, and overthree hundred thousand American soldiers were deployed to fight a land
war in Korea. Newspapers, meanwhile, were filled with headlines alleging Soviet espionage.
During the war, Julius Rosenberg worked briefly at the U.S. Army
Signal Corps Laboratory in New Jersey, where he had access to classified information. He and his wife, Ethel, who had both been members of
the Communist Party of the USA (CPUSA) in the 1930s, were accusedof passing secret bomb-related documents to Soviet officials and wereindicted in August 1950 on charges of giving nuclear secrets to the Russians. After a trial in March 1951, they were found guilty and executedon June 19, 1953.28© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 7 2 chapt er 25

Alger Hiss, the highest-ranking government official linked to Soviet
espionage, was another prize for conservatives. Hiss was a prominent
official in the U.S. State Department and served as secretary-general of
the UN Charter Conference in San Francisco from April to June 1945
before leaving the State Department in 1946. A young congressman
and member of HUAC, Richard Nixon, made waves by accusing Hissof espionage. On August 3, 1948, Whittaker Chambers testified before
HUAC that he and Hiss had worked together as part of the secret “communist underground” in Washington, D.C., during the 1930s. Hiss, whoalways maintained his innocence, stood trial twice. After a hung jury
in July 1949, he was convicted on two counts of perjury (the statuteof limitations for espionage having expired). Later evidence suggested
their guilt. At the time, their convictions fueled an anticommunist frenzy.
Some began seeing communists everywhere.29
Alger Hiss and the Rosenbergs offered anticommunists such as Joseph
McCarthy the evidence they needed to allege a vast Soviet conspiracy
to infiltrate and subvert the U.S. government and justify the smearingof all left-liberals, even those who were resolutely anticommunist. Notlong after his February 1950 speech in Wheeling, McCarthy’s sensational charges became a source of growing controversy. Forced to respond, President Truman arranged a partisan congressional investigation
designed to discredit McCarthy. The Tydings Committee held hearings
from early March through July 1950 and issued a final report admonishing McCarthy for perpetrating a “fraud and a hoax” on the American
public. American progressives saw McCarthy’s crusade as nothing lessthan a political witch hunt. In June 1950, The Nation magazine editor
Freda Kirchwey characterized “McCarthyism” as “the means by which a
handful of men, disguised as hunters of subversion, cynically subvert the
instruments of justice . . . in order to help their own political fortunes.”30
Truman’s liberal supporters, and leftists like Kirchwey, hoped in vainthat McCarthy and the new “ism” that bore his name would blow overquickly.
There had, of course, been a communist presence in the United States.
The CPUSA was formed in the aftermath of the 1917 Russian Revolution
when the Bolsheviks created a Communist International (the Comintern)
and invited socialists from around the world to join. During its first two
years of existence, the CPUSA functioned in secret, hidden from a surgeof antiradical and anti-immigrant hysteria, investigations, deportations,and raids at the end of World War I. The CPUSA began its public life in© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 273

1921, after the panic subsided, but communism remained on the margins
of American life until the 1930s, when leftists and liberals began to see theSoviet Union as a symbol of hope amid the Great Depression. Then many
communists joined the Popular Front, an effort to make communism mainstream by adapting it to American history and American culture. During
the Popular Front era, communists were integrated into mainstream political institutions through alliances with progressives in the Democratic
Party. The CPUSA enjoyed most of its influence and popularity among
workers in unions linked to the newly formed CIO. Communists also became strong opponents of Jim Crow segregation and developed a presence
in both the NAACPand the ACLU. The CPUSA, moreover, established“front” groups, such as the League of American Writers, in which intellectuals participated without even knowing of its ties to the Comintern.
But even at the height of the global economic crisis, communism never attracted many Americans. Even at the peak of its membership, the CPUSA
had just eighty thousand national “card-carrying” members. From themid-1930s through the mid-1940s, the party exercised most of its power
indirectly, through coalitions with liberals and reformers. When news
broke of Hitler’s and Stalin’s 1939 nonaggression, many fled the party,
feeling betrayed. A bloc of left-liberal anticommunists, meanwhile, purged
remaining communists in their ranks, and the Popular Front collapsed.31
Lacking the legal grounds to abolish the CPUSA, officials insteadsought to expose and contain CPUSA influence. Following a series of predecessor committees, HUAC was established in 1938, then reorganized
after the war and given the explicit task of investigating communism.
By the time the Communist Control Act was passed in August 1954,
effectively criminalizing party membership, the CPUSA had long ceased
to have meaningful influence. Anticommunists were driven to eliminate
remaining CPUSA influence from progressive institutions, including the
NAACP and the CIO. The Taft-Hartley Act (1947) gave union officials
the initiative to purge communists from the labor movement. A kind of
Cold War liberalism took hold. In January 1947, anticommunist liberals
formed Americans for Democratic Action (ADA), whose founding members included labor leader Walter Reuther and NAACP chairman Walter
White, as well as historian Arthur Schlesinger Jr., theologian Reinhold
Niebuhr, and former first lady Eleanor Roosevelt. Working to help Truman defeat former vice president Henry Wallace’s Popular Front–backed
campaign in 1948, the ADA combined social and economic reforms
with staunch anticommunism.32© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 7 4 chapt er 25

The domestic Cold War was bipartisan, fueled by a consensus drawn
from a left-liberal and conservative anticommunist alliance that included
politicians and policy makers, journalists and scientists, business andcivic/religious leaders, and educators and entertainers. Led by its imperious director, J. Edgar Hoover, the FBI took an active role in the domestic
battle against communism. Hoover’s FBI helped incite panic by assisting the creation of blatantly propagandistic films and television shows,including The Red Menace (1949), My Son John (1951), and I Led Three
Lives (1953–1956). Such alarmist depictions of espionage and treason in
a “free world” imperiled by communism heightened the 1950s cultureof fear. In the fall of 1947, HUAC entered the fray with highly publicized hearings of Hollywood. Film mogul Walt Disney and actor Ronald
Reagan, among others, testified to aid investigators’ attempts to expose
communist influence in the entertainment industry. A group of writers,
directors, and producers who refused to answer questions were held incontempt of Congress. This Hollywood Ten created the precedent fora blacklist in which hundreds of film artists were barred from industry
work for the next decade.
HUAC made repeated visits to Hollywood during the 1950s, andtheir interrogation of celebrities often began with the same intimidatingrefrain: “Are you now, or have you ever been, a member of the Communist Party?” Many witnesses cooperated, and “named names,” naming
anyone they knew who had ever been associated with communist-­relatedgroups or organizations. In 1956, black entertainer and activist Paul
Robeson chided his HUAC inquisitors, claiming that they had put him on
trial not for his politics but because he had spent his life “fighting for therights” of his people. “You are the un-Americans,” he told them, “andyou ought to be ashamed of yourselves.”33 As Robeson and other victimsof McCarthyism learned firsthand, this “second red scare,” in the glow of
nuclear annihilation and global totalitarianism, fueled an intolerant andskeptical political world, what Cold War liberal Arthur Schlesinger, in his
The Vital Center (1949), called an “age of anxiety.”34
Anticommunist ideology valorized overt patriotism, religious conviction, and faith in capitalism. Those who shunned such “American values” were open to attack. If communism was a plague spreading acrossEurope and Asia, anticommunist hyperbole infected cities, towns, andsuburbs throughout the country. The playwright Arthur Miller’s popular
1953 play The Crucible compared the red scare to the Salem Witch Trials.
Miller wrote, “In America any man who is not reactionary in his views© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 275

Many Americans accused of communist
sentiments refused to denounce friends
and acquaintances. One of the most wellknown Americans of the time, African
American actor and singer Paul Robeson,
was unwilling to sign an affidavit confirming he was communist and, as a result,
his U.S. passport was revoked. During
the Cold War, he was condemned by
the press and neither his music nor films
could be purchased in the United States.
Wikimedia.

is open to the charge of alliance with the Red hell. Political opposition,
thereby, is given an inhumane overlay which then justifies the abrogation of all normally applied customs of civilized intercourse. A politicalpolicy is equated with moral right, and opposition to it with diabolicalmalevolence. Once such an equation is effectively made, society becomesa congerie of plots and counterplots, and the main role of governmentchanges from that of the arbiter to that of the scourge of God.”35
Rallying against communism, American society urged conformity.
“Deviant” behavior became dangerous. Having entered the workforce en
masse as part of a collective effort in World War II, middle-class women
were told to return to housekeeping responsibilities. Having fought anddied abroad for American democracy, black soldiers were told to returnhome and acquiesce to the American racial order. Homosexuality, already stigmatized, became dangerous. Personal secrets were seen as aliability that exposed one to blackmail. The same paranoid mind-set that
fueled the second red scare also ignited the Cold War “lavender scare”
against gay Americans.36
American religion, meanwhile, was fixated on what McCarthy, in his
1950 Wheeling speech, called an “all-out battle between communistic© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 7 6 chapt er 25

atheism and Christianity.” Cold warriors in the United States routinely
referred to a fundamental incompatibility between “godless communism”
and God-fearing Americanism. Religious conservatives championed theidea of the traditional nuclear, God-fearing family as a bulwark against
the spread of atheistic totalitarianism. As Baptist minister Billy Graham
sermonized in 1950, communism aimed to “destroy the American homeand cause . . . moral deterioration,” leaving the country exposed to communist infiltration.37
In an atmosphere in which ideas of national belonging and citizenship were so closely linked to religious commitment, Americans during
the early Cold War years attended church, professed a belief in a supreme
being, and stressed the importance of religion in their lives at higher rates
than in any time in American history. Americans sought to differentiatethemselves from godless communists through public displays of religiosity. Politicians infused government with religious symbols. The Pledgeof Allegiance was altered to include the words one nation, under God
in 1954. In God We Trust was adopted as the official national motto in
1956. In popular culture, one of the most popular films of the decade,
The Ten Commandments (1956), retold the biblical Exodus story as aCold War parable, echoing (incidentally) NSC-68’s characterization of
the Soviet Union as a “slave state.” Monuments of the Ten Commandments went up at courthouses and city halls across the country.
While the link between American nationalism and religion grew muchcloser during the Cold War, many Americans began to believe that justbelieving in almost any religion was better than being an atheist. Gone
was the overt anti-Catholic and anti-Semitic language of Protestants inthe past. Now, leaders spoke of a common Judeo-Christian heritage. In
December 1952, a month before his inauguration, Dwight Eisenhower
said that “our form of government makes no sense unless it is founded ina deeply-felt religious faith, and I don’t care what it is.”38
Joseph McCarthy, an Irish Catholic, made common cause withprominent religious anticommunists, including southern evangelist Billy
James Hargis of Christian Crusade, a popular radio and television ministry that peaked in the 1950s and 1960s. Cold War religion in America
also crossed the political divide. During the 1952 campaign, Eisenhower
spoke of U.S. foreign policy as “a war of light against darkness, freedom
against slavery, Godliness against atheism.”39 His Democratic opponent,
former Illinois governor Adlai Stevenson, said that America was engaged
in a battle with the “Anti-Christ.” While Billy Graham became a spiri-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 277

tual advisor to Eisenhower as well as other Republican and Democraticpresidents, the same was true of the liberal Protestant Reinhold Niebuhr,
perhaps the nation’s most important theologian when he appeared on the
cover of Life in March 1948.
Though publicly rebuked by the Tydings Committee, McCarthy soldiered on. In June 1951, on the floor of Congress, McCarthy charged
that then secretary of defense (and former secretary of state) General
George Marshall had fallen prey to “a conspiracy on a scale so immense
as to dwarf any previous such venture in the history of man.” He claimed
that Marshall, a war hero, had helped to “diminish the United States inworld affairs,” enabling the United States to “finally fall victim to Soviet
intrigue . . . and Russian military might.” The speech caused an uproar.
During the 1952 campaign, Eisenhower, who was in all things moderate
and politically cautious, refused to publicly denounce McCarthy. “I will
not . . . get into the gutter with that guy,” he wrote privately. McCarthy
campaigned for Eisenhower, who won a stunning victory.40
So did the Republicans, who regained Congress. McCarthy becamechairman of the Senate Permanent Subcommittee on Investigations(SPSI). He turned his newfound power against the government’s overseas
broadcast division, the Voice of America (VOA). McCarthy’s investigation in February–March 1953 resulted in several resignations or transfers.
McCarthy’s mudslinging had become increasingly unrestrained. Soon
he went after the U.S. Army. After forcing the army to again disprove
theories of a Soviet spy ring at Fort Monmouth in New Jersey, McCarthy publicly berated officers suspected of promoting leftists. McCarthy’s
badgering of witnesses created cover for critics to publicly denounce hisabrasive fearmongering.
On March 9, CBS anchor Edward R. Murrow, a respected journalist,
told his television audience that McCarthy’s actions had “caused alarmand dismay amongst . . . allies abroad, and given considerable comfort toour enemies.” Yet, Murrow explained, “he didn’t create this situation offear; he merely exploited it—and rather successfully. Cassius was right.
‘The fault, dear Brutus, is not in our stars, but in ourselves.’”41
Twenty million people saw the Army-McCarthy hearings unfold overthirty-six days in 1954. The army’s head counsel, Joseph Welch, captured
much of the mood of the country when he defended a fellow lawyer
from McCarthy’s public smears, saying, “Let us not assassinate this lad
further, Senator. You’ve done enough. Have you no sense of decency, sir?
At long last, have you left no sense of decency?” In September, a senate© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 7 8 chapt er 25

subcommittee recommended that McCarthy be censured. On December
2, 1954, his colleagues voted 67–22 to “condemn” his actions. Humiliated, McCarthy faded into irrelevance and alcoholism and died in May
1957 at age 48.42
By the late 1950s, the worst of the second red scare was over. Stalin’s
death, followed by the Korean War armistice, opened new space—and
hope—for the easing of Cold War tensions. Détente and the upheavalsof the late 1960s were on the horizon. But McCarthyism outlasted McCarthy and the 1950s. The tactics he perfected continued to be practiced
long after his death. “Red-baiting,” the act of smearing a political opponent by linking them to communism or some other demonized ideology,
persevered. But McCarthy had hardly been alone.
Congressman Richard Nixon, for instance, used his place on HUAC
and his public role in the campaign against Alger Hiss to catapult himself into the White House alongside Eisenhower and later into the presidency. Ronald Reagan bolstered the fame he had won in Hollywood withhis testimony before Congress and his anticommunist work for major
American corporations such as General Electric. He too would use anticommunism to enter public life and chart a course to the presidency. In
1958, radical anticommunists founded the John Birch Society, attacking liberals and civil rights activists such as Martin Luther King Jr. as
communists. Although joined by Cold War liberals, the weight of anti­
communism was used as part of an assault against the New Deal and its
defenders. Even those liberals, such as historian Arthur Schlesinger, who
had fought against communism found themselves smeared by the redscare. The leftist American tradition was in tatters, destroyed by anti­
communist hysteria. Movements for social justice, from civil rights togay rights to feminism, were all suppressed under Cold War conformity.

V. Decolonization and the Global Reach of theAmerican Century
In an influential 1941 Life magazine editorial titled “The American Century,” publishing magnate Henry Luce outlined his “vision of America
as the principal guarantor of freedom of the seas” and “the dynamic
leader of world trade.” In his embrace of an American-led international
system, the conservative Luce was joined by liberals including historian
Arthur Schlesinger, who in his 1949 Cold War tome The Vital Centerproclaimed that a “world destiny” had been “thrust” upon the United© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 279

States, with perhaps no other nation becoming “a more reluctant great
power.” Emerging from the war as the world’s preeminent military andeconomic force, the United States was perhaps destined to compete with
the Soviet Union for influence in the Third World, where a power vacuum
had been created by the demise of European imperialism. As France andBritain in particular struggled in vain to control colonies in Asia, theMiddle East, and North Africa, the United States assumed responsibility
for maintaining order and producing a kind of “pax-Americana.” Littleof the postwar world, however, would be so peaceful.43
Based on the logic of militarized containment established by NSC-68
and American Cold War strategy, interventions in Korea and Vietnam
were seen as appropriate American responses to the ascent of communism in China. Unless Soviet power in Asia was halted, Chinese influence
would ripple across the continent, and one country after another would
fall to communism. Easily transposed onto any region of the world, the

The Cuban revolution seemed to confirm the fears of many Americans that the spread of communism could
not be stopped. In this photograph, Castro and fellow revolutionary Che Guevara march in a memorial for
those killed in the explosion of a ship unloading munitions in Havana in March 1960. The U.S. government had been active in undermining Castro’s regime, and although there was no evidence in this instance,
Castro publicly blamed the United States for the explosion. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 8 0 chapt er 25

Domino Theory became a standard basis for the justification of U.S. interventions abroad. Cuba was seen as a communist beachhead that imperiled Latin America, the Caribbean, and perhaps eventually the UnitedStates. Like Ho Chi Minh, Cuban leader Fidel Castro was a revolutionary nationalist whose career as a communist began in earnest after he
was rebuffed by the United States, and American interventions targetednations that never espoused official communist positions. Many interventions in Asia, Latin America, and elsewhere were driven by factorsthat were shaped by but also transcended anticommunist ideology.
Instead of the United States dismantling its military after World War II,
as it had after every major conflict, the Cold War facilitated a new permanent defense establishment. Federal investments in national defense
affected the entire country. Different regions housed various sectors ofwhat sociologist C. Wright Mills, in 1956, called the “permanent war
economy.” The aerospace industry was concentrated in areas like Southern California and Long Island, New York; Massachusetts was home toseveral universities that received major defense contracts; the Midwest
became home base for intercontinental ballistic missiles pointed at theSoviet Union; many of the largest defense companies and military installations were concentrated in the South, so much so that in 1956 author
William Faulkner, who was born in Mississippi, remarked, “Our economy is the Federal Government.”44
A radical critic of U.S. policy, Mills was one of the first thinkers toquestion the effects of massive defense spending, which, he said, corrupted the ruling class, or “power elite,” who now had the potential totake the country into war for the sake of corporate profits. Yet perhaps
the most famous critique of the entrenched war economy came from an
unlikely source. During his farewell address to the nation in January
1961, President Eisenhower cautioned Americans against the “unwarranted influence” of a “permanent armaments industry of vast proportions” that could threaten “liberties” and “democratic processes.” While
the “conjunction of an immense military establishment and a large arms
industry” was a fairly recent development, this “military-industrial complex” had cultivated a “total influence,” which was “economic, political,
even spiritual . . . felt in every city . . . Statehouse . . . [and] office of
the Federal government.” There was, he said, great danger in failing to“comprehend its grave implications.”45
In Eisenhower’s formulation, the “military-industrial complex” referred specifically to domestic connections between arms manufacturers,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 281

members of Congress, and the Department of Defense. Yet the new alliance between corporations, politicians, and the military was dependent on having an actual conflict to wage, without which there could
be no ultimate financial gain. To critics, military-industrial partnerships
at home were now linked to U.S. interests abroad. Suddenly American
foreign policy had to secure foreign markets and protect favorable terms
for American trade all across the globe. Seen in such a way, the Cold War
was just a by-product of America’s new role as the remaining Westernsuperpower. Regardless, the postwar rise of U.S. power correlated withwhat many historians describe as a “national security consensus” that has
dominated American policy since World War II. And so the United States
was now more intimately involved in world affairs than ever before.
Ideological conflicts and independence movements erupted acrossthe postwar world. More than eighty countries achieved independence,
primarily from European control. As it took center stage in the realm of
global affairs, the United States played a complicated and often contradictory role in this process of “decolonization.” The sweeping scope of
post-1945 U.S. military expansion was unique in the country’s history.
Critics believed that the advent of a “standing army,” so feared by manyof the founding fathers, set a disturbing precedent. But in the postwar
world, American leaders eagerly set about maintaining a new permanent
military juggernaut and creating viable international institutions.
But what of independence movements around the world? Roosevelt
had spoken for many in his remark to British prime minister Winston
Churchill, in 1941, that it was hard to imagine “fight[ing] a war against
fascist slavery, and at the same time not work to free people all over theworld from a backward colonial policy.”46 American postwar foreign
policy leaders therefore struggled to balance support for decolonization
against the reality that national independence movements often posed athreat to America’s global interests.
American strategy became consumed with thwarting Russian power
and the concomitant global spread of communism. Foreign policy officials increasingly opposed all insurgencies or independence movementsthat could in any way be linked to international communism. The Soviet
Union, too, was attempting to sway the world. Stalin and his successors
pushed an agenda that included not only the creation of Soviet client
states in Eastern and Central Europe, but also a tendency to support
leftwing liberation movements everywhere, particularly when they espoused anti-American sentiment. As a result, the United States and the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 8 2 chapt er 25

Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (USSR) engaged in numerous proxywars in the Third World.
American planners felt that successful decolonization could demonstrate the superiority of democracy and capitalism against competing
Soviet models. Their goal was in essence to develop an informal systemof world power based as much as possible on consent (hegemony) rather
than coercion (empire). But European powers still defended colonization
and American officials feared that anticolonial resistance would breed
revolution and push nationalists into the Soviet sphere. And when facedwith such movements, American policy dictated alliances with colonial
regimes, alienating nationalist leaders in Asia and Africa.
The architects of American power needed to sway the citizens ofdecolonizing nations toward the United States. In 1948, Congress passed
the Smith-Mundt Act to “promote a better understanding of the UnitedStates in other countries.” The legislation established cultural exchanges
with various nations, including even the USSR, in order to showcase
American values through American artists and entertainers. The Soviets

The Soviet Union took advantage of racial tensions in the United States to createanti-American propaganda. This 1930 Soviet poster shows a black American being
lynched from the Statue of Liberty, while
the text below asserts the links between
racism and Christianity. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 283

did the same, through what they called an international peace offensive,
which by most accounts was more successful than the American campaign. Although U.S. officials made strides through the initiation of various overt and covert programs, they still perceived that they were lagging
behind the Soviet Union in the “war for hearts and minds.” But as unrest
festered in much of the Third World, American officials faced difficult
choices.47
As black Americans fought for justice at home, prominent American black radicals, including Malcolm X, Paul Robeson, and the aging
W. E. B. Du Bois, joined in solidarity with the global anticolonial movement, arguing that the United States had inherited the racist European
imperial tradition. Supporters of the Soviet Union made their own effort
to win over countries, claiming that Marxist-Leninist doctrine offered aroad map for their liberation from colonial bondage. Moreover, Kremlin
propaganda pointed to injustices of the American South as an example ofAmerican hypocrisy: how could the United States claim to fight for global
freedom when it refused to guarantee freedoms for its own citizenry? Insuch ways the Cold War connected the black freedom struggle, the Third
World, and the global Cold War.

VI. Conclusion
In June 1987, American president Ronald Reagan stood at the Berlin
Wall and demanded that Soviet premier Mikhail Gorbachev “Tear down
this wall!” Less than three years later, amid civil unrest in November
1989, East German authorities announced that their citizens were free
to travel to and from West Berlin. The concrete curtain would be lifted
and East Berlin would be opened to the world. Within months, the Berlin
Wall was reduced to rubble by jubilant crowds anticipating the reunification of their city and their nation, which took place on October 3, 1990.
By July 1991 the Warsaw Pact had crumbled, and on December 25 ofthat year, the Soviet Union was officially dissolved. Hungary, Poland,
Czechoslovakia, and the Baltic States (Latvia, Estonia, and Lithuania)
were freed from Russian domination.
Partisans fought to claim responsibility for the breakup of the Soviet
Union and the ending of the Cold War. Whether it was the triumphalist
rhetoric and militaristic pressure of conservatives or the internal fracturing of ossified bureaucracies and work of Russian reformers that shaped
the ending of the Cold War is a question of later decades. Questions
about the Cold War’s end must pause before appreciations of the Cold

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 8 4 chapt er 25

War’s impact at home and abroad. Whether measured by the tens of millions killed in Cold War–related conflicts, in the reshaping of American
politics and culture, or in the transformation of America’s role in theworld, the Cold War pushed American history upon a new path, one thatit has yet to yield.

VII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Ari Cushner, with content contributions by Michael
Brenes, Ari Cushner, Michael Franczak, Joseph Haker, Jonathan Hunt, Jun SukHyun, Zack Jacobson, Micki Kaufman, Lucie Kyrova, Celeste Day Moore, Joseph Parrott, Colin Reynolds, and Tanya Roth.
Recommended citation: Michael Brenes et al., “The Cold War,” Ari Cushner,ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford, CA:
Stanford University Press, 2019).
Notes to Ch a p ter 25
1. Kennan to Secretary of State, February 22, 1946, in Foreign Relations of
the United States 1946, Vol. 6 (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1969), 696–709, 708, 700.
2. Martin McCauley, Origins of the Cold War 1941–1949 (New York:
Routledge, 2013), 141.
3. For Kennan, see especially John Lewis Gaddis, George F. Kennan: An
American Life (New York: Penguin, 2011); John Lukacs, ed., George F. Kennan
and the Origins of Containment, 1944–1946: The Kennan-Lukacs Correspondence (Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1997).
4. Harbutt, Yalta 1945.
5. Herbert Feis, Between War and Peace: The Potsdam Conference (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1960).
6. For overviews of the Cold War, see especially John Lewis Gaddis, Strategies of Containment: A Critical Appraisal of Postwar American National Security Policy (New York: Oxford University Press, 1982); John Lewis Gaddis, The
Cold War: A New History (New York: Penguin, 2005); Melvyn P. Leffler, For theSoul of Mankind: The United States, the Soviet Union, and the Cold War (NewYork: Hill and Wang, 2007); and Frederick Logevall, America’s Cold War: The
Politics of Insecurity (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2009).
7. George Kennan, “The Sources of Soviet Conduct,” Foreign Affairs (July
1947), 566–582.
8. Joyce P. Kaufman, A Concise History of U.S. Foreign Policy (Lanham,
MD: Rowman and Littlefield, 2010), 86.
9. Denise M. Bostdorff, Proclaiming the Truman Doctrine: The Cold War
Call to Arms (College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 1998).
10. Michael Beschloss, Our Documents: 100 Milestone Documents from the
National Archives (New York: Oxford University Press, 2006), 199.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 285

11. Charles L. Mee, The Marshall Plan: The Launching of the Pax Americana (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1984).
12. Melvyn P. Leffler and Odd Arne Westad, eds., The Cambridge History of
the Cold War: Volume 1, Origins (Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press,
2010), 189.
13. Daniel F. Harrington, Berlin on the Brink: The Blockade, the Airlift, andthe Early Cold War (Lexington: University of Kentucky Press, 2012).
14. Walter Lippman, The Cold War: A Study in U.S. Foreign Policy (NewYork: Harper, 1947), 10, 15.
15. James Chace, Acheson: The Secretary of State Who Created the American World (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2008), 441.
16. Quotes from Curt Cardwell, NSC 68 and the Political Economy of the
Early Cold War (Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press, 2011), 10–12.
17. Gaddis, Strategies of Containment.
18. Gregory Mitrovich, Undermining the Kremlin: America’s Strategy to
Subvert the Soviet Bloc, 1947–1956 (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2000),
182.
19. For the Korean War, see especially Bruce Cumings, The Origins of the
Korean War, 2 vols. (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1981, 1990);
William W. Stueck, The Korean War: An International History (Princeton, NJ:
Princeton University Press, 1995).
20. Elizabeth Stanley, Paths to Peace: Domestic Coalition Shifts, War Termination and the Korean War (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2009), 208.
21. J. Robert Oppenheimer, “Atomic Weapons and American Policy,” Foreign Affairs (July 1953), 529.
22. Andrew J. Dunar, America in the Fifties (Ithaca, NY: Syracuse University
Press, 2006), 134.
23. Deborah Cadbury, Space Race: The Epic Battle Between America andthe Soviet Union for Dominance of Space (New York: HarperCollins, 2006).
24. Tom Wolfe, The Right Stuff (New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux), 115.
25. Kenneth D. Rose, One Nation Underground: The Fallout Shelter in
American Culture (New York: New York University Press, 2004), 128.
26. David M. Oshinsky, A Conspiracy So Immense: The World of Joe McCarthy (New York: Oxford University Press, 2005), 109.
27. Ibid., 171–174.
28. Ibid., 102–103, 172, 335.
29. Ibid., 98–100, 123–125.
30. Sara Alpern, Freda Kirchwey: A Woman of the Nation (Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, 1987), 203.
31. Ellen Schrecker, Many Are the Crimes: McCarthyism in America (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1999).
32. For anticommunist liberals and the decline of American communism, seeespecially ibid.
33. Paul Robeson, Paul Robeson Speaks: Writings, Speeches, and Interviews,
a Centennial Celebration, ed. Philip Foner (New York: Citadel Press, 1978), 421,
433.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

2 8 6 chapt er 25

34. Arthur Schlesinger Jr., The Vital Center: The Politics of Freedom (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1949), 1.
35. Arthur Miller, The Crucible (New York: Penguin, 2003), 30.
36. Robert D. Dean, Imperial Brotherhood: Gender and the Making of Cold
War Foreign Policy (Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 2003).
37. William G. McLoughlin, Revivals, Awakenings, and Reform (Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 2013), 189.
38. Quoted in Gastón Espinosa, Religion and the American Presidency:
George Washington to George W. Bush with Commentary and Primary Sources(New York: Columbia University Press, 2009), 298.
39. Peter Gries, The Politics of American Foreign Policy: How Ideology Divides Liberals and Conservatives over Foreign Affairs (Stanford, CA: Stanford
University Press, 2014), 215.
40. Oshinsky, Conspiracy So Immense, 272.
41. Ibid., 399.
42. Ibid., 475.
43. Henry R. Luce, “The American Century,” Life (February 17, 1941),
61–65.
44. Bruce J. Schulman, From Cotton Belt to Sunbelt: Federal Policy, Economic Development, and the Transformation of the South, 1938–1980 (Durham,
NC: Duke University Press, 1994), 135.
45. Dwight D. Eisenhower, Public Papers of the Presidents, Dwight D.
Eisenhower, 1960, 1035–1040.
46. Fredrick Logevall, Embers of War: The Fall of an Empire and the Making of America’s Vietnam (New York: Random House, 2012), 48.
47. Frank Ninkovich, The Diplomacy of Ideas: U.S. Foreign Policy and Cultural Relations, 1938–1950 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981).
R e c o mm e nde d R e a ding
Borstelmann, Thomas. The Cold War and the Color Line: American Race Relations in the Global Arena. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001.
Boyer, Paul. By the Bomb’s Early Light: American Thought and Culture at the
Dawn of the Atomic Age. New York: Pantheon Books, 1985.
Brown, Kate. Plutopia: Nuclear Families, Atomic Cities, and the Great Soviet andAmerican Plutonium Disasters. New York: Oxford University Press, 2013.
Carlton, Don E. Red Scare! Right-Wing Hysteria, Fifties Fanaticism, and Their
Legacy in Texas. Austin: Texas Monthly Press, 1985.
Dean, Robert. Imperial Brotherhood: Gender and the Making of Cold War Foreign Policy. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 2003.
Dudziak, Mary. Cold War Civil Rights: Race and the Image of American Demo­cracy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2000.
Gaddis, John L. The Cold War: A New History. New York: Penguin, 2005.
———. Strategies of Containment: A Critical Appraisal of Postwar American
National Security Policy. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he C ol d W a r 287———. The United States and the Origins of the Cold War. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.
Kolko, Gabriel. Confronting the Third World: United States Foreign Policy
1945–1980. New York: Pantheon Books, 1988.
Krenn, Michael L. Fall-Out Shelters for the Human Spirit: American Art and theCold War. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2005.
Lafeber, Walter. America, Russia, and the Cold War, 1945–1966. New York:
Wiley, 1967.
Leffler, Melvyn. For the Soul of Mankind: The United States, the Soviet Union,
and the Cold War. New York: Hill and Wang, 2008.
Linn, Brian McAllister. Elvis’s Army: Cold War GIs and the Atomic Battlefield.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2016.
May, Elaine Tyler. Homeward Bound: American Families in the Cold War Era.
New York: Basic Books, 1988.
Oshinsky, David M. A Conspiracy So Immense: The World of Joe McCarthy.
New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Patterson, James T. Grand Expectations: The United States, 1945–1974. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Powers, Richard Gid. Not Without Honor: The History of American Anticommunism. New York: Free Press, 1995.
Rhodes, Richard. Arsenals of Folly: The Making of the Nuclear Arms Race. New
York: Knopf, 2007.
Saunders, Frances Stonor. The Cultural Cold War: The CIA and the World ofArts and Letters. New York: New Press, 1999.
Schrecker, Ellen. Many Are the Crimes: McCarthyism in America. New York:
Little, Brown, 1998.
Schulman, Bruce J. From Cotton Belt to Sunbelt: Federal Policy, Economic Development, and the Transformation of the South, 1938–1980. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1991.
Von Eschen, Penny. Satchmo Blows Up the World: Jazz Ambassadors Play theCold War. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2004.
Westad, Odd Arne. The Global Cold War: Third World Interventions and theMaking of Our Times. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2005.
Whitfield, Stephen. The Culture of the Cold War. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1991.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

26
The Affluent Society
I. Introduction
In 1958, Harvard economist and public intellectual John Kenneth Galbraith published The Affluent Society. Galbraith’s celebrated book examined America’s new post–World War II consumer economy and politicalculture. While noting the unparalleled riches of American economic
growth, it criticized the underlying structures of an economy dedicatedonly to increasing production and the consumption of goods. Galbraithargued that the U.S. economy, based on an almost hedonistic consumption of luxury products, would inevitably lead to economic inequality as
private-sector interests enriched themselves at the expense of the American public. Galbraith warned that an economy where “wants are increasingly created by the process by which they are satisfied” was unsound,unsustainable, and, ultimately, immoral. “The Affluent Society,” hesaid, was anything but.1

Little Rockschools closed
rather than allow
integration. This
1958 photograph shows an
African Americanhigh school girlwatching school
lessons on television. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 289

While economists and scholars debate the merits of Galbraith’s warnings and predictions, his analysis was so insightful that the title of his
book has come to serve as a ready label for postwar American society.
In the two decades after the end of World War II, the American economy
witnessed massive and sustained growth that reshaped American culture
through the abundance of consumer goods. Standards of living—acrossall income ­levels—climbed to unparalleled heights and economic inequality plummeted.2
And yet, as Galbraith noted, the Affluent Society had fundamental
flaws. The new consumer economy that lifted millions of Americans into
its burgeoning middle class also reproduced existing inequalities. Women
struggled to claim equal rights as full participants in American society.
The poor struggled to win access to good schools, good healthcare, andgood jobs. The same suburbs that gave middle-class Americans new
space left cities withering in spirals of poverty and crime. The Jim Crow
South tenaciously defended segregation, and black Americans and otherminorities suffered discrimination all across the country.
The contradictions of the Affluent Society defined the decade: unrivaled prosperity alongside persistent poverty, expanded opportunity
alongside entrenched discrimination, and new liberating lifestyles alongside a stifling conformity.

II. The Rise of the Suburbs
The seeds of a suburban nation were planted in New Deal government
programs. At the height of the Great Depression, in 1932, some 250,000

Levittown in
the early 1950s.
Flickr / Creative
Commons.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

290

ch apt er 26

households lost their property to foreclosure. A year later, half of all U.S.
mortgages were in default. The foreclosure rate stood at more than one
thousand per day. In response, FDR’s New Deal created the Home Owners’ Loan Corporation (HOLC), which began purchasing and refinancing
existing mortgages at risk of default. The HOLC introduced the amortized mortgage, allowing borrowers to pay back interest and principal
regularly over fifteen years instead of the then standard five-year mortgage that carried large balloon payments at the end of the contract. The
HOLC eventually owned nearly one of every five mortgages in America.
Though homeowners paid more for their homes under this new system,
home ownership was opened to the multitudes who could now gain residential stability, lower monthly mortgage payments, and accrue wealthas property values rose over time.3
Additionally, the Federal Housing Administration (FHA), another
New Deal organization, increased access to home ownership by insuring
mortgages and protecting lenders from financial loss in the event of a
default. Lenders, however, had to agree to offer low rates and terms of
up to twenty or thirty years. Even more consumers could afford homes.
Though only slightly more than a third of homes had an FHA-backed
mortgage by 1964, FHA loans had a ripple effect, with private lenders
granting more and more home loans even to non-FHA-backed borrowers. Government programs and subsidies like the HOLC and the FHA
fueled the growth of home ownership and the rise of the suburbs.
Government spending during World War II pushed the United Statesout of the Depression and into an economic boom that would be sustained after the war by continued government spending. Government
expenditures provided loans to veterans, subsidized corporate researchand development, and built the interstate highway system. In the decades
after World War II, business boomed, unionization peaked, wages rose,and sustained growth buoyed a new consumer economy. The Servicemen’s Readjustment Act (popularly known as the G.I. Bill), passed in
1944, offered low-interest home loans, a stipend to attend college, loans
to start a business, and unemployment benefits.
The rapid growth of home ownership and the rise of suburban communities helped drive the postwar economic boom. Builders createdsprawling neighborhoods of single-family homes on the outskirts ofAmerican cities. William Levitt built the first Levittown, the prototypical suburban community, in 1946 in Long Island, New York. Purchasinglarge acreage, subdividing lots, and contracting crews to build countless© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 291

homes at economies of scale, Levitt offered affordable suburban housing
to veterans and their families. Levitt became the prophet of the new suburbs, and his model of large-scale suburban development was duplicatedby developers across the country. The country’s suburban share of the
population rose from 19.5 percent in 1940 to 30.7 percent by 1960.
Home ownership rates rose from 44 percent in 1940 to almost 62 percent
in 1960. Between 1940 and 1950, suburban communities with more thanten thousand people grew 22.1 percent, and planned communities grewat an astonishing rate of 126.1 percent.4 As historian Lizabeth Cohen
notes, these new suburbs “mushroomed in territorial size and the populations they harbored.”5 Between 1950 and 1970, America’s suburban
population nearly doubled to seventy-four million. Eighty-three percent
of all population growth occurred in suburban places.6
The postwar construction boom fed into countless industries. As
manufacturers converted from war materials back to consumer goods,
and as the suburbs developed, appliance and automobile sales rose dramatically. Flush with rising wages and wartime savings, homeowners also
used newly created installment plans to buy new consumer goods at once
instead of saving for years to make major purchases. Credit cards, first issued in 1950, further increased access to credit. No longer stymied by theDepression or wartime restrictions, consumers bought countless washers,
dryers, refrigerators, freezers, and, suddenly, televisions. The percentage of Americans that owned at least one television increased from 12
percent in 1950 to more than 87 percent in 1960. This new suburban
economy also led to increased demand for automobiles. The percentageof American families owning cars increased from 54 percent in 1948 to
74 percent in 1959. Motor fuel consumption rose from some twenty-two
million gallons in 1945 to around fifty-nine million gallons in 1958.7
On the surface, the postwar economic boom turned America into aland of abundance. For advantaged buyers, loans had never been easier toobtain, consumer goods had never been more accessible, and well-­paying
jobs had never been more abundant. “If you had a college diploma, adark suit, and anything between the ears,” a businessman later recalled,“it was like an escalator; you just stood there and you moved up.”8 But
the escalator did not serve everyone. Beneath aggregate numbers, racialdisparity, sexual discrimination, and economic inequality persevered, undermining many of the assumptions of an Affluent Society.
In 1939 real estate appraisers arrived in sunny Pasadena, California. Armed with elaborate questionnaires to evaluate the city’s building© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

292

ch apt er 26c­ onditions, the appraisers were well versed in the policies of the HOLC.
In one neighborhood, most structures were rated in “fair” repair, andappraisers noted a lack of “construction hazards or flood threats.” However, they concluded that the area “is detrimentally affected by 10 owneroccupant Negro families.” While “the Negroes are said to be of the betterclass,” the appraisers concluded, “it seems inevitable that ownership andproperty values will drift to lower levels.”9
Wealth created by the booming economy filtered through social structures with built-in privileges and prejudices. Just when many m­ iddle- andworking-class white American families began their journey of upward
mobility by moving to the suburbs with the help of government programs
such as the FHA and the G.I. Bill, many African Americans and otherracial minorities found themselves systematically shut out.
A look at the relationship between federal organizations such as the
HOLC, the FHA, and private banks, lenders, and real estate agents tells
the story of standardized policies that produced a segregated housing
market. At the core of HOLC appraisal techniques, which reflected theexisting practices of private real estate agents, was the pernicious insistence that mixed-race and minority-dominated neighborhoods wereBlack communities in cities such as
Detroit, Chicago, Brooklyn, and Atlanta(mapped here) experienced redlining,
the process by which banks and otherorganizations demarcated minority
neighborhoods on a map with a red line.
Doing so made visible the areas they
believed were unfit for their services,
directly denying black residents loans, butalso, indirectly, housing, groceries, andother necessities of modern life. National
Archives.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 293

credit risks. In partnership with local lenders and real estate agents, theHOLC created Residential Security Maps to identify high- and low-risk
lending areas. People familiar with the local real estate market filled out
uniform surveys on each neighborhood. Relying on this information, theHOLC assigned every neighborhood a letter grade from A to D and acorresponding color code. The least secure, highest-risk neighborhoods
for loans received a D grade and the color red. Banks limited loans insuch “redlined” areas.10
Phrases like subversive racial elements and racial hazards pervade
the redlined-area description files of surveyors and HOLC officials. Los
Angeles’s Echo Park neighborhood, for instance, had concentrationsof Japanese and African Americans and a “sprinkling of Russians and
Mexicans.” The HOLC security map and survey noted that the neighborhood’s “adverse racial influences which are noticeably increasing inevitably presage lower values, rentals and a rapid decrease in residential
desirability.”11
While the HOLC was a fairly short-lived New Deal agency, the influence of its security maps lived on in the FHA and Veterans Administration (VA), the latter of which dispensed G.I. Bill–backed mortgages. Both

1938 Brooklyn redlining map. National
Archives.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

294

ch apt er 26of these government organizations, which reinforced the standards followed by private lenders, refused to back bank mortgages in “redlined”
neighborhoods. On the one hand, FHA- and VA-backed loans were anenormous boon to those who qualified for them. Millions of Americans
received mortgages that they otherwise would not have qualified for. But
FHA-backed mortgages were not available to all. Racial minorities could
not get loans for property improvements in their own neighborhoods andwere denied mortgages to purchase property in other areas for fear that
their presence would extend the red line into a new community. Levittown, the poster child of the new suburban America, only allowed whites
to purchase homes. Thus, FHA policies and private developers increased
home ownership and stability for white Americans while simultaneously
creating and enforcing racial segregation.
The exclusionary structures of the postwar economy prompted protest from African Americans and other minorities who were excluded.
Fair housing, equal employment, consumer access, and educational opportunity, for instance, all emerged as priorities of a brewing civil rights
movement. In 1948, the U.S. Supreme Court sided with African American
plaintiffs and, in Shelley v. Kraemer, declared racially restrictive neighborhood housing covenants—property deed restrictions barring sales toracial minorities—legally unenforceable. Discrimination and segregation
continued, however, and activists would continue to push for fair housing practices.
During the 1950s and early 1960s many Americans retreated to thesuburbs to enjoy the new consumer economy and search for some normalcy and security after the instability of depression and war. But many
could not. It was both the limits and opportunities of housing, then, thatshaped the contours of postwar American society.

III. Education and Segregation
Older battles over racial exclusion also confronted postwar American society. One long-simmering struggle targeted segregated schooling. In 1896,
the Supreme Court declared the principle of “separate but equal” constitutional. Segregated schooling, however, was rarely “equal”: in prac­tice, black Americans, particularly in the South, received fewer funds,
attended inadequate facilities, and studied with substandard materials.
African Americans’ battle against educational inequality stretched acrosshalf a century before the Supreme Court again took up the merits of“separate but equal.”© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 295

School desegregation was a tense experience for all involved, but none more so than the African American
students who integrated white schools. The Little Rock Nine were the first to do so in Arkansas. Theirescorts, the 101st Airborne Division of the U.S. Army, protected students who took that first step in 1957.
Wikimedia.

On May 17, 1954, after two years of argument, re-argument, and de­liberation, Chief Justice Earl Warren announced the Supreme Court’s
decision on segregated schooling in Brown v. Board of Education (1954).
The court found by a unanimous 9–0 vote that racial segregation violated the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment. The
court’s decision declared, “Separate educational facilities are inherently
unequal.” “Separate but equal” was made unconstitutional.12
Decades of African American–led litigation, local agitation against racial inequality, and liberal Supreme Court justices made Brown possible.
In the early 1930s, the NAACP began a concerted effort to erode the legal
underpinnings of segregation in the American South. Legal, or de jure,segregation subjected racial minorities to discriminatory laws and policies. Law and custom in the South hardened antiblack restrictions. But
through a series of carefully chosen and contested court cases concerning
education, disfranchisement, and jury selection, NAACP lawyers such as
Charles Hamilton Houston, Robert L. Clark, and future Supreme Court
Justice Thurgood Marshall undermined Jim Crow’s constitutional underpinnings. These attorneys initially sought to demonstrate that states© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

296

ch apt er 26

The NAACP was a key organization in the fight to end legalized racial discrimination. In this 1956
photograph, NAACP leaders, including Thurgood Marshall, who would become the first African American
Supreme Court Justice, hold a poster decrying racial bias in Mississippi in 1956. Library of Congress.

systematically failed to provide African American students “equal” resources and facilities, and thus failed to live up to Plessy. By the late
1940s activists began to more forcefully challenge the assumptions that
“separate” was constitutional at all.
Though remembered as just one lawsuit, Brown v. Board of Education consolidated five separate cases that had originated in the southeastern United States: Briggs v. Elliott (South Carolina), Davis v. County
School Board of Prince Edward County (Virginia), Beulah v. Belton(Delaware), Boiling v. Sharpe (Washington, D.C.), and Brown v. Boardof Education (Kansas). Working with local activists already involved indesegregation fights, the NAACP purposely chose cases with a diverse
set of local backgrounds to show that segregation was not just an issue
in the Deep South, and that a sweeping judgment on the fundamental
constitutionality of Plessy was needed.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 297

Briggs v. Elliott, the first case accepted by the NAACP, illustrated theplight of segregated black schools. Briggs originated in rural Clarendon
County, South Carolina, where taxpayers in 1950 spent $179 to educate each white student and $43 for each black student. The district’s
twelve white schools were cumulatively worth $673,850; the value of
its sixty-one black schools (mostly dilapidated, overcrowded shacks)
was $194,575.13 While Briggs underscored the South’s failure to follow
Plessy, the Brown suit focused less on material disparities between black
and white schools (which were significantly less than in places like Clarendon County) and more on the social and spiritual degradation that
accompanied legal segregation. This case cut to the basic question ofwhether “separate” was itself inherently unequal. The NAACP said thetwo notions were incompatible. As one witness before the U.S. District
Court of Kansas said, “The entire colored race is craving light, and theonly way to reach the light is to start [black and white] children together
in their infancy and they come up together.”14
To make its case, the NAACP marshaled historical and social scientific evidence. The Court found the historical evidence inconclusive anddrew their ruling more heavily from the NAACP’s argument that segregation psychologically damaged black children. To make this argument, association lawyers relied on social scientific evidence, such as the famous
doll experiments of Kenneth and Mamie Clark. The Clarks demonstrated
that while young white girls would naturally choose to play with white
dolls, young black girls would, too. The Clarks argued that black children’s aesthetic and moral preference for white dolls demonstrated thepernicious effects and self-loathing produced by segregation.
Identifying and denouncing injustice, though, is different from rectifying it. Though Brown repudiated Plessy, the Court’s orders did notextend to segregation in places other than public schools and, even then,to preserve a unanimous decision for such an historically important case,the justices set aside the divisive yet essential question of enforcement.
Their infamously ambiguous order in 1955 (what came to be known as
Brown II) that school districts desegregate “with all deliberate speed”
was so vague and ineffectual that it left the actual business of desegregation in the hands of those who opposed it.
In most of the South, as well as the rest of the country, school integration did not occur on a wide scale until well after Brown. Only in the1964 Civil Rights Act did the federal government finally implement someenforcement of the Brown decision by threatening to withhold funding
from recalcitrant school districts, but even then southern districts found© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

298

ch apt er 26

In 1959, photographer John Bledsoe captured this image of the crowd on the steps of the Arkansas state
capitol building protesting the federally mandated integration of Little Rock’s Central High School. This
image shows how worries about desegregation were bound up with other concerns, such as the reach ofcommunism and government power. Library of Congress.

loopholes. Court decisions such as Green v. New Kent County (1968)
and Alexander v. Holmes (1969) finally closed some of those loopholes,
such as “freedom of choice” plans, to compel some measure of actual
integration.
When Brown finally was enforced in the South, the quantitative
impact was staggering. In 1968, fourteen years after Brown, some 80
percent of school-age black southerners remained in schools that were
90 to 100 percent nonwhite. By 1972, though, just 25 percent were insuch schools, and 55 percent remained in schools with a simple nonwhite
minority. By many measures, the public schools of the South became,ironically, the most integrated in the nation.15
As a landmark moment in American history, Brown’s significanceperhaps lies less in immediate tangible changes—which were slow, partial, and inseparable from a much longer chain of events—than in theidealism it expressed and the momentum it created. The nation’s highest
court had attacked one of the fundamental supports of Jim Crow segregation and offered constitutional cover for the creation of one of thegreatest social movements in American history.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 299

IV. Civil Rights in an Affluent Society
Education was but one aspect of the nation’s Jim Crow machinery. African Americans had been fighting against a variety of racist policies,
cultures, and beliefs in all aspects of American life. And while the struggle
for black inclusion had few victories before World War II, the war andthe Double V campaign for victory against fascism abroad and racismat home, as well as the postwar economic boom led, to rising expectations for many African Americans. When persistent racism and racial
segregation undercut the promise of economic and social mobility, African Americans began mobilizing on an unprecedented scale against thevarious discriminatory social and legal structures.
While many of the civil rights movement’s most memorable and important moments, such as the sit-ins, the Freedom Rides, and especially
the March on Washington, occurred in the 1960s, the 1950s were a significant decade in the sometimes tragic, sometimes triumphant march ofcivil rights in the United States. In 1953, years before Rosa Parks’s iconic
confrontation on a Montgomery city bus, an African American woman

This segregateddrinking fountain
was located on
the grounds of the
Halifax County
courthouse in
North Carolina.
Photograph, April
1938. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

300

ch apt er 26

named Sarah Keys publicly challenged segregated public transportation.
Keys, then serving in the Women’s Army Corps, traveled from her armybase in New Jersey back to North Carolina to visit her family. When thebus stopped in North Carolina, the driver asked her to give up her seat fora white customer. Her refusal to do so landed her in jail in 1953 and led
to a landmark 1955 decision, Sarah Keys v. Carolina Coach Company,in which the Interstate Commerce Commission ruled that “separate but
equal” violated the Interstate Commerce Clause of the U.S. Constitution.
Poorly enforced, it nevertheless gave legal coverage for the Freedom Riders years later and motivated further assaults against Jim Crow.
But if some events encouraged civil rights workers with the promise of progress, others were so savage they convinced activists that they
could do nothing but resist. In the summer of 1955, two white men in
Mississippi kidnapped and brutally murdered fourteen-year-old Emmett
Till. Till, visiting from Chicago and perhaps unfamiliar with the “etiquette” of Jim Crow, allegedly whistled at a white woman named Carolyn Bryant. Her husband, Roy Bryant, and another man, J. W. Milam,abducted Till from his relatives’ home, beat him, mutilated him, shot
him, and threw his body in the Tallahatchie River. Emmett’s mother heldan open-casket funeral so that Till’s disfigured body could make national
news. The men were brought to trial. The evidence was damning, but an
all-white jury found the two not guilty. Mere months after the decision,
the two boasted of their crime, in all of its brutal detail, in Look magazine. “They ain’t gonna go to school with my kids,” Milam said. They
wanted “to make an example of [Till]—just so everybody can know how
me and my folks stand.”16 The Till case became an indelible memory forthe young black men and women soon to propel the civil rights movement forward.
On December 1, 1955, four months after Till’s death and six days
after the Keys v. Carolina Coach Company decision, Rosa Parks refused
to surrender her seat on a Montgomery city bus and was arrested. Montgomery’s public transportation system had longstanding rules requiring
African American passengers to sit in the back of the bus and to give up
their seats to white passengers if the buses filled. Parks was not the firstto protest the policy by staying seated, but she was the first around whomMontgomery activists rallied.
Montgomery’s black population, under the leadership of local ministers and civil rights workers, formed the Montgomery Improvement
Association (MIA) and coordinated an organized boycott of the city’s© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 301

buses. The Montgomery Bus Boycott lasted from December 1955 until
December 20, 1956, when the Supreme Court ordered their integration.
The boycott not only crushed segregation in Montgomery’s public transportation, it energized the entire civil rights movement and establishedthe leadership of the MIA’s president, a recently arrived, twenty-six-yearold Baptist minister named Martin Luther King Jr.
Motivated by the success of the Montgomery boycott, King and other
African American leaders looked to continue the fight. In 1957, King
helped create the Southern Christian Leadership Conference (SCLC) tocoordinate civil rights groups across the South and buoy their efforts
organizing and sustaining boycotts, protests, and other assaults against
southern Jim Crow laws.
As pressure built, Congress passed the Civil Rights Act of 1957, thefirst such measure passed since Reconstruction. The act was compromised away nearly to nothing, although it did achieve some gains, suchas creating the Department of Justice’s Civil Rights Commission, which
was charged with investigating claims of racial discrimination. And yet,despite its weakness, the act signaled that pressure was finally mounting
on Americans to confront the legacy of discrimination.
Despite successes at both the local and national level, the civil rights
movement faced bitter opposition. Those opposed to the movement
often used violent tactics to scare and intimidate African Americans
and subvert legal rulings and court orders. For example, a year into theMontgomery bus boycott, angry white southerners bombed four African
American churches as well as the homes of King and fellow civil rights
leader E. D. Nixon. Though King, Nixon, and the MIA persevered in theface of such violence, it was only a taste of things to come. Such unremitting hostility and violence left the outcome of the burgeoning civil rights
movement in doubt. Despite its successes, civil rights activists lookedback on the 1950s as a decade of mixed results and incomplete accomplishments. While the bus boycott, Supreme Court rulings, and othercivil rights activities signaled progress, church bombings, death threats,and stubborn legislators demonstrated the distance that still needed to
be traveled.

V. Gender and Culture in the Affluent Society
America’s consumer economy reshaped how Americans experienced culture and shaped their identities. The Affluent Society gave Americans© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

302

ch apt er 26

As shown in this1958 advertisement for a“Westinghousewith Cold Injector,” a midcentury
marketing frenzy
targeted female
consumers by
touting technological innovations
designed to makehousework easier.
Westinghouse.

new experiences, new outlets, and new ways to understand and interact
with one another.
“The American household is on the threshold of a revolution,”
the New York Times declared in August 1948. “The reason is television.”17 Television was presented to the American public at the New
York World’s Fair in 1939, but commercialization of the new medium
in the United States lagged during the war years. In 1947, though, regular full-scale broadcasting became available to the public. Television was
instantly popular, so much so that by early 1948 Newsweek reported
that it was “catching on like a case of high-toned scarlet fever.”18 Indeed,
between 1948 and 1955 close to two thirds of the nation’s households
purchased a television set. By the end of the 1950s, 90 percent of American families had one and the average viewer was tuning in for almost five
hours a day.19
The technological ability to transmit images via radio waves gavebirth to television. Television borrowed radio’s organizational structure,
too. The big radio broadcasting companies—NBC, CBS, and the American Broadcasting Corporation (ABC)—used their technical expertise andcapital reserves to conquer the airwaves. They acquired licenses to local
stations and eliminated their few independent competitors. The refusal of
the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) to issue any new licenses
between 1948 and 1955 was a de facto endorsement of the big three’s
stranglehold on the market.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 303

In addition to replicating radio’s organizational structure, televisionalso looked to radio for content. Many of the early programs were adaptations of popular radio variety and comedy shows, including The Ed
Sullivan Show and Milton Berle’s Texaco Star Theater. These were accompanied by live plays, dramas, sports, and situation comedies. Becauseof the cost and difficulty of recording, most programs were broadcast live,
forcing stations across the country to air shows at the same time. And sinceaudiences had a limited number of channels to choose from, viewing experiences were broadly shared. More than two thirds of television-­owninghouseholds, for instance, watched popular shows such as I Love Lucy.
The limited number of channels and programs meant that networks
selected programs that appealed to the widest possible audience to draw
viewers and advertisers, television’s greatest financers. By the mid-1950s,
an hour of primetime programming cost about $150,000 (about $1.5
million in today’s dollars) to produce. This proved too expensive for mostcommercial sponsors, who began turning to a joint financing model ofthirty-second spot ads. The need to appeal to as many people as possible
promoted the production of noncontroversial shows aimed at the entire family. Programs such as Father Knows Best and Leave it to Beaver
featured light topics, humor, and a guaranteed happy ending the wholefamily could enjoy.20
Television’s broad appeal, however, was about more than money andentertainment. Shows of the 1950s, such as Father Knows Best and I
Love Lucy, idealized the nuclear family, “traditional” gender roles, andwhite, middle-class domesticity. Leave It to Beaver, which became theprototypical example of the 1950s television family, depicted its breadwinner father and homemaker mother guiding their children through life
lessons. Such shows, and Cold War America more broadly, reinforced apopular consensus that such lifestyles were not only beneficial but themost effective way to safeguard American prosperity against communist
threats and social “deviancy.”
Postwar prosperity facilitated, and in turn was supported by, the ongoing postwar baby boom. From 1946 to 1964, American fertility experienced an unprecedented spike. A century of declining birth rates abruptly
reversed. Although popular memory credits the cause of the baby boom
to the return of virile soldiers from battle, the real story is more nuanced.
After years of economic depression, families were now wealthy enoughto support larger families and had homes large enough to accommodate
them, while women married younger and American culture celebrated
the ideal of a large, insular family.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

304

ch apt er 26

Advertising was
everywhere in the
1950s, including
on TV shows suchas Twenty One, aquiz show sponsored by Geritol,a dietary supplement. Library ofCongress.

Underlying this “reproductive consensus” was the new cult of professionalism that pervaded postwar American culture, including the professionalization of homemaking. Mothers and fathers alike flocked to theexperts for their opinions on marriage, sexuality, and, most especially,child-rearing. Psychiatrists held an almost mythic status as people took
their opinions and prescriptions, as well as their vocabulary, into theireveryday life. Books like Dr. Spock’s Baby and Child Care (1946) werediligently studied by women who took their career as housewife as just
that: a career, complete with all the demands and professional trappingsof job development and training. And since most women had multiple
children roughly the same age as their neighbors’ children, a culturalobsession with kids flourished throughout the era. Women bore the bruntof this pressure, chided if they did not give enough of their time to thechildren—especially if it was because of a career—yet cautioned thatspending too much time would lead to “Momism,” producing “sissy”
boys who would be incapable of contributing to society and extremely
susceptible to the communist threat.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 305

A new youth culture exploded in American popular culture. On the
one hand, the anxieties of the atomic age hit America’s youth particularly
hard. Keenly aware of the discontent bubbling beneath the surface of the
Affluent Society, many youth embraced rebellion. The 1955 film Rebel
Without a Cause demonstrated the restlessness and emotional incertitude of the postwar generation raised in increasing affluence yet increasingly unsatisfied with their comfortable lives. At the same time, perhaps
yearning for something beyond the “massification” of American culture
yet having few other options to turn to beyond popular culture, American youth embraced rock ’n’ roll. They listened to Little Richard, Buddy
Holly, and especially Elvis Presley (whose sexually suggestive hip movements were judged subversive).
The popularity of rock ’n’ roll had not yet blossomed into the countercultural musical revolution of the coming decade, but it provided amagnet for teenage restlessness and rebellion. “Television and Elvis,” themusician Bruce Springsteen recollected, “gave us full access to a new
language, a new form of communication, a new way of being, a new wayof looking, a new way of thinking; about sex, about race, about identity,
about life; a new way of being an American, a human being; and a new
way of hearing music.” American youth had seen so little of Elvis’s energy and sensuality elsewhere in their culture. “Once Elvis came acrossthe airwaves,” Springsteen said, “once he was heard and seen in action,
you could not put the genie back in the bottle. After that moment, there
was yesterday, and there was today, and there was a red hot, rockabilly
forging of a new tomorrow, before your very eyes.”21
Other Americans took larger steps to reject the expected conformityof the Affluent Society. The writers, poets, and musicians of the Beat
Generation, disillusioned with capitalism, consumerism, and traditional
gender roles, sought a deeper meaning in life. Beats traveled across thecountry, studied Eastern religions, and experimented with drugs, sex,
and art.
Behind the scenes, Americans were challenging sexual mores. The
gay rights movement, for instance, stretched back into the Affluent Society. While the country proclaimed homosexuality a mental disorder, gay
men established the Mattachine Society in Los Angeles and gay women
formed the Daughters of Bilitis in San Francisco as support groups. They
held meetings, distributed literature, provided legal and counseling services, and formed chapters across the country. Much of their work, however, remained secretive because homosexuals risked arrest and abuse if
discovered.22© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

306

ch apt er 26

While many black musicians such as
Chuck Berry helped pioneer rock ’n’ roll,white artists such as Elvis Presley brought
it into the mainstream American culture.
Elvis’s good looks, sensual dancing, andsonorous voice stole the hearts of millionsof American teenage girls, who were atthat moment becoming a central segmentof the consumer population. Wikimedia.

Society’s “consensus,” on everything from the consumer economy togender roles, did not go unchallenged. Much discontent was channeledthrough the machine itself: advertisers sold rebellion no less than theysold baking soda. And yet others were rejecting the old ways, choosing
new lifestyles, challenging old hierarchies, and embarking on new paths.

VI. Politics and Ideology in the Affluent Society
Postwar economic prosperity and the creation of new suburban spaces
inevitably shaped American politics. In stark contrast to the Great Depression, the new prosperity renewed belief in the superiority of capitalism, cultural conservatism, and religion.
In the 1930s, the economic ravages of the international economic catastrophe knocked the legs out from under the intellectual justificationsfor keeping government out of the economy. And yet pockets of true believers kept alive the gospel of the free market. The single most important
was the National Association of Manufacturers (NAM). In the midst of
the depression, NAM reinvented itself and went on the offensive, initiating advertising campaigns supporting “free enterprise” and “The Ameri-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 307

can Way of Life.”23 More importantly, NAM became a node for businessleaders, such as J. Howard Pew of Sun Oil and Jasper Crane of DuPont
Chemical Co., to network with like-minded individuals and take the message of free enterprise to the American people. The network of businessleaders that NAM brought together in the midst of the Great Depression
formed the financial, organizational, and ideological underpinnings ofthe free market advocacy groups that emerged and found ready adherents in America’s new suburban spaces in the postwar decades.
One of the most important advocacy groups that sprang up after the
war was Leonard Read’s Foundation for Economic Education (FEE).
Read founded FEE in 1946 on the premise that “The American Way ofLife” was essentially individualistic and that the best way to protect andpromote that individualism was through libertarian economics. Libertarianism took as its core principle the promotion of individual liberty,
property rights, and an economy with a minimum of government regulation. FEE, whose advisory board and supporters came mostly from the
NAM network of Pew and Crane, became a key ideological factory, supplying businesses, service clubs, churches, schools, and universities witha steady stream of libertarian literature, much of it authored by Austrian
economist Ludwig von Mises.24
Shortly after FEE’s formation, Austrian economist and libertarian intellectual Friedrich Hayek founded the Mont Pelerin Society (MPS) in
1947. The MPS brought together libertarian intellectuals from both sidesof the Atlantic to challenge Keynesian economics—the dominant notionthat government fiscal and monetary policy were necessary economic
tools—in academia. University of Chicago economist Milton Friedman
became its president. Friedman (and his Chicago School of Economics)
and the MPS became some of the most influential free market advocatesin the world and helped legitimize for many the libertarian ideology so
successfully evangelized by FEE, its descendant organizations, and libertarian popularizers such as the novelist Ayn Rand.25
Libertarian politics and evangelical religion were shaping the origins
of a new conservative, suburban constituency. Suburban communities’
distance from government and other top-down community-building
mechanisms—despite relying on government subsidies and government
programs—left a social void that evangelical churches eagerly filled.
More often than not the theology and ideology of these churches reinforced socially conservative views while simultaneously reinforcing
congregants’ belief in economic individualism. Novelist Ayn Rand,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

308

ch apt er 26

Undated portraitof President Harry
S. Truman. National Archives.

meanwhile, whose novels The Fountainhead (1943) and Atlas Shrugged(1957) were two of the decades’ best sellers, helped move the ideas of individualism, “rational self-interest,” and “the virtue of selfishness” outside the halls of business and academia and into suburbia. The ethos ofindividualism became the building blocks for a new political movement.
And yet, while the growing suburbs and their brewing conservative ideology eventually proved immensely important in American political life,
their impact was not immediately felt. They did not yet have a champion.
In the post–World War II years the Republican Party faced a fork in
the road. Its complete lack of electoral success since the Depression led toa battle within the party about how to revive its electoral prospects. The
more conservative faction, represented by Ohio senator Robert Taft (sonof former president William Howard Taft) and backed by many party
activists and financiers such as J. Howard Pew, sought to take the party
further to the right, particularly in economic matters, by rolling backNew Deal programs and policies. On the other hand, the more moderate wing of the party, led by men such as New York governor Thomas
Dewey and Nelson Rockefeller, sought to embrace and reform New Deal
programs and policies. There were further disagreements among party
members about how involved the United States should be in the world.
Issues such as foreign aid, collective security, and how best to fight communism divided the party.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 309

Initially, the moderates, or “liberals,” won control of the party with
the nomination of Thomas Dewey in 1948. Dewey’s shocking loss to
Truman, however, emboldened conservatives, who rallied around Taft as
the 1952 presidential primaries approached. With the conservative banner riding high in the party, General Dwight Eisenhower (“Ike”), mostrecently North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) supreme commander, felt obliged to join the race in order to beat back the conservatives and “prevent one of our great two Parties from adopting a course
which could lead to national suicide.” In addition to his fear that Taftand the conservatives would undermine collective security arrangements
such as NATO, he also berated the “neanderthals” in his party for theiranti–New Deal stance. Eisenhower felt that the best way to stop communism was to undercut its appeal by alleviating the conditions underwhich it was most attractive. That meant supporting New Deal programs. There was also a political calculus to Eisenhower’s position. He
observed, “Should any political party attempt to abolish social security,
unemployment insurance, and eliminate labor laws and farm programs,
you would not hear of that party again in our political history.”26
The primary contest between Taft and Eisenhower was close andcontroversial. Taft supporters claimed that Eisenhower stole the nomination from Taft at the convention. Eisenhower, attempting to placate theconservatives in his party, picked California congressman and virulent
anticommunist Richard Nixon as his running mate. With the Republican
nomination sewn up, the immensely popular Eisenhower swept to victory in the 1952 general election, easily besting Truman’s hand-picked
successor, Adlai Stevenson. Eisenhower’s popularity boosted Republicans
across the country, leading them to majorities in both houses of Congress.
The Republican sweep in the 1952 election, owing in part to Eisenhower’s popularity, translated into few tangible legislative accomplishments. Within two years of his election, the moderate Eisenhower saw
his legislative proposals routinely defeated by an unlikely alliance ofconservative Republicans, who thought Eisenhower was going too far,and liberal Democrats, who thought he was not going far enough. For
example, in 1954 Eisenhower proposed a national healthcare plan thatwould have provided federal support for increasing healthcare coverage
across the nation without getting the government directly involved in regulating the healthcare industry. The proposal was defeated in the houseby a 238–134 vote with a swing bloc of seventy-five conservative Republicans joining liberal Democrats voting against the plan.27 Eisenhower’s© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

310

ch apt er 26

proposals in education and agriculture often suffered similar defeats. By
the end of his presidency, Ike’s domestic legislative achievements werelargely limited to expanding social security; making Health, Educationand Welfare (HEW) a cabinet position; passing the National Defense
Education Act; and bolstering federal support to education, particularly
in math and science.
As with any president, however, Eisenhower’s impact was bigger thanjust legislation. Ike’s “middle of the road” philosophy guided his foreign
policy as much as his domestic agenda. He sought to keep the UnitedStates from direct interventions abroad by bolstering anticommunist andprocapitalist allies. Ike funneled money to the French in Vietnam fighting
the Ho Chi Minh–led communists, walked a tight line between helping Chiang Kai-Shek’s Taiwan without overtly provoking Mao Zedong’s
China, and materially backed groups that destabilized “unfriendly” governments in Iran and Guatemala. The centerpiece of Ike’s Soviet policy,
meanwhile, was the threat of “massive retaliation,” or the threat ofnuclear force in the face of communist expansion, thereby checking Soviet expansion without direct American involvement. While Ike’s “mainstream” “middle way” won broad popular support, his own party was
slowly moving away from his positions. By 1964 the party had moved
far enough to the right to nominate Arizona senator Barry Goldwater, themost conservative candidate in a generation. The political moderation of
the Affluent Society proved little more than a way station on the road toliberal reforms and a more distant conservative ascendancy.

VII. Conclusion
The postwar American “consensus” held great promise. Despite the looming threat of nuclear war, millions experienced an unprecedented prosperity and an increasingly proud American identity. Prosperity seemed
to promise ever higher standards of living. But things fell apart, and thecenter could not hold: wracked by contradiction, dissent, discrimination,and inequality, the Affluent Society stood on the precipice of revolution.

VIII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by James McKay, with content contributions by Edwin
C. Breeden, Aaron Cowan, Maggie Flamingo, Destin Jenkins, Kyle Livie, Jennifer
Mandel, James McKay, Laura Redford, Ronny Regev, and Tanya Roth.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 311

Recommended citation: Edwin C. Breeden et al., “The Cold War,” James
McKay, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
Notes to Ch a p ter 26
1. John Kenneth Galbraith, The Affluent Society (New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1958), 129.
2. See, for example, Claudia Goldin and Robert A. Margo, “The Great Compression: The Wage Structure in the United States at Mid-Century,” Quarterly
Journal of Economics 107 (February 1992), 1–34.
3. Price Fishback, Jonathan Rose, and Kenneth Snowden, Well Worth Saving: How the New Deal Safeguarded Home Ownership (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 2013).
4. Leo Schnore, “The Growth of Metropolitan Suburbs,” American Sociological Review 22 (April 1957), 169.
5. Lizabeth Cohen, A Consumers’ Republic: The Politics of Mass Consumption in Postwar America (New York: Random House, 2002), 202.
6. Elaine Tyler May, Homeward Bound: American Families in the Cold War
Era (New York, Basic Books, 1999), 152.
7. Leo Fishman, The American Economy (Princeton, NJ: Van Nostrand,1962), 560.
8. John P. Diggins, The Proud Decades: America in War and in Peace, 1941–
1960 (New York: Norton, 1989), 219.
9. David Kushner, Levittown: Two Families, One Tycoon, and the Fight
for Civil Rights in America’s Legendary Suburb (New York: Bloomsbury Press,2009), 17.
10. Thomas Sugrue, The Origins of the Urban Crisis: Race and Inequality in
Postwar Detroit (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005).
11. Becky M. Nicolaides, My Blue Heaven: Life and Politics in the Working–Class Suburbs of Los Angeles, 1920-1965 (Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 2002), 193.
12. Oliver Brown, et al. v. Board of Education of Topeka, et al., 347 U.S.
483 (1954).
13. James T. Patterson and William W. Freehling, Brown v. Board of Education: A Civil Rights Milestone and Its Troubled Legacy (New York: Oxford
University Press, 2001), 25; Pete Daniel, Standing at the Crossroads: SouthernLife in the Twentieth Century (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996),
161–164.
14. Patterson and Freehling, Brown v. Board, xxv.
15. Charles T. Clotfelter, After Brown: The Rise and Retreat of School Desegregation (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2011), 6.
16. William Bradford Huie, “The Shocking Story of Approved Killing in
Mississippi,” Look (January 24, 1956), 46–50.
17. Lewis L. Gould, Watching Television Come of Age: The New York Times
Reviews by Jack Gould (Austin: University of Texas Press, 2002), 186.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

312

ch apt er 26

18. Gary Edgerton, Columbia History of American Television (New York:
Columbia University Press, 2009), 90.
19. Ibid., 178.
20. Christopher H. Sterling and John Michael Kittross, Stay Tuned: A History of American Broadcasting (New York: Routledge, 2001), 364.
21. Bruce Springsteen, “SXSW Keynote Address,” Rolling Stone (March 28,2012), http://​www​.rollingstone​.com​/music​/news​/exclusive​-the​-complete​-text​-of​-bruce​-springsteens​-sxsw​-keynote​-address​-20120328.
22. John D’Emilio, Sexual Politics, Sexual Communities, 2nd ed. (Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 2012), 102–103.
23. See Richard Tedlow, “The National Association of Manufacturers andPublic Relations During the New Deal,” Business History Review 50 (Spring1976), 25–45; and Wendy Wall, Inventing the “American Way”: The Politics ofConsensus from the New Deal to the Civil Rights Movement (New York: Oxford
University Press, 2008).
24. Gregory Eow, “Fighting a New Deal: Intellectual Origins of the Reagan
Revolution, 1932–1952,” PhD diss., Rice University, 2007; Brian Doherty, Radicals for Capitalism: A Freewheeling History of the Modern American Libertarian
Movement (New York: Public Affairs, 2007); and Kim Phillips Fein, Invisible
Hands: The Businessmen’s Crusade Against the New Deal (New York: Norton,
2009), 43–55.
25. Angus Burgin, The Great Persuasion: Reinventing Free Markets Since theDepression (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2012); Jennifer Burns,
Goddess of the Market: Ayn Rand and the American Right (New York: Oxford
University Press, 2009).
26. Allan J. Lichtman, White Protestant Nation: The Rise of the American
Conservative Movement (New York: Atlantic Monthly Press, 2008), 180, 201,
185.
27. Steven Wagner, Eisenhower Republicanism Pursuing the Middle Way(DeKalb: Northern Illinois University Press, 2006), 15.
R e c o mm e n d e d R e a di n g
Boyle, Kevin. The UAW and the Heyday of American Liberalism, 1945–1968.
Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1995.
Branch, Taylor. Parting the Waters: America in the King Years, 1954–1963. New
York: Simon and Schuster, 1988.
Brown, Kate. Plutopia: Nuclear Families, Atomic Cities, and the Great Soviet andAmerican Plutonium Disasters. New York: Oxford University Press, 2013.
Brown-Nagin, Tomiko. Courage to Dissent: Atlanta and the Long History of the
Civil Rights Movement. New York: Oxford University Press, 2011.
Cohen, Lizabeth. A Consumer’s Republic: The Politics of Mass Consumption in
Postwar America. New York: Knopf, 2003.
Coontz, Stephanie. The Way We Never Were: American Families and the Nostalgia Trap. New York: Basic Books, 1993.
Dudziak, Mary. Cold War Civil Rights: Race and the Image of American Demo­cracy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2002.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he A f f l u e n t S o c i e ty 313

Fried, Richard M. Nightmare in Red: The McCarthy Era in Perspective. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1990.
Grisinger, Joanna. The Unwieldy American State: Administrative Politics Since
the New Deal. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2012.
Hernández, Kelly Lytle. Migra! A History of the U.S. Border Patrol. Berkeley:
University of California Press, 2010.
Horowitz, Daniel. Betty Friedan and the Making of the Feminine Mystique: The
American Left, the Cold War, and Modern Feminism. Amherst: University of
Massachusetts Press, 1998.
Jackson, Kenneth T. Crabgrass Frontier: The Suburbanization of the UnitedStates. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985.
Jumonville, Neil. Critical Crossings: The New York Intellectuals in Postwar
America. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991.
Levenstein, Lisa. A Movement Without Marches: African American Women and
the Politics of Poverty in Postwar Philadelphia. Chapel Hill: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 2009.
May, Elaine Tyler. Homeward Bound: American Families in the Cold War Era.
New York: Basic Books, 1988.
McGirr, Lisa. Suburban Warriors: The Origins of the New American Right.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2001.
Ngai, Mae. Impossible Subjects: Illegal Aliens and the Making of Modern America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2003.
Patterson, James T. Grand Expectations: The United States, 1945–1974. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Roberts, Gene, and Hank Klibanoff. The Race Beat: The Press, the Civil Rights
Struggle, and the Awakening of a Nation. New York: Knopf, 2006.
Self, Robert. American Babylon: Race and the Struggle for Postwar Oakland.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005.
Sugrue, Thomas. The Origins of the Urban Crisis: Race and Inequality in Postwar Detroit. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005.
Von Eschen, Penny. Satchmo Blows Up the World: Jazz Ambassadors Play theCold War. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2004.
Wagnleitner, Reinhold. Coca-Colonization and the Cold War: The Cultural Mission of the United States in Austria After the Second World War. Chapel Hill:
University of North Carolina Press, 1994.
Wall, Wendy. Inventing the “American Way”: The Politics of Consensus fromthe New Deal to the Civil Rights Movement. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2008.
Whitfield, Stephen. The Culture of the Cold War. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1991.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

27
The Sixties
I. Introduction
Perhaps no decade is so immortalized in American memory as the
1960s. Couched in the colorful rhetoric of peace and love, complemented by stirring images of the civil rights movement, and fondly
remembered for its music, art, and activism, the decade brought many
people hope for a more inclusive, forward-thinking nation. But the decade was also plagued by strife, tragedy, and chaos. It was the decadeof the Vietnam War, inner-city riots, and assassinations that seemed
to symbolize the crushing of a new generation’s idealism. A decade ofstruggle and disillusionment rocked by social, cultural, and political
upheaval, the 1960s are remembered because so much changed, andbecause so much did not.

Demonstrators
march from Selma
to Montgomery,
Alabama, in 1965
to champion
African American
civil rights. Library of Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  315

II. Kennedy and Cuba
The decade’s political landscape began with a watershed presidential election. Americans were captivated by the 1960 race between Republican
vice president Richard Nixon and Democratic senator John F. Kennedy,
two candidates who pledged to move the nation forward and invigorate
an economy experiencing the worst recession since the Great Depression. Kennedy promised to use federal programs to strengthen the economy and address pockets of longstanding poverty, while Nixon called fora reliance on private enterprise and reduction of government spending.
Both candidates faced criticism as well; Nixon had to defend Dwight
Eisenhower’s domestic policies, while Kennedy, who was attempting tobecome the first Catholic president, had to counteract questions about
his faith and convince voters that he was experienced enough to lead.
One of the most notable events of the Nixon-Kennedy presidential
campaign was their televised debate in September, the first of its kind
between major presidential candidates. The debate focused on domestic policy and provided Kennedy with an important moment to present
himself as a composed, knowledgeable statesman. In contrast, Nixon,
an experienced debater who faced higher expectations, looked sweaty
and defensive. Radio listeners famously thought the two men performed
equally well, but the TV audience was much more impressed by Kennedy,
giving him an advantage in subsequent debates. Ultimately, the election
was extraordinarily close; in the largest voter turnout in American history up to that point, Kennedy bested Nixon by less than one percentage point (34,227,096 to 34,107,646 votes). Although Kennedy’s leadin electoral votes was more comfortable at 303 to 219, the Democratic
Party’s victory did not translate in Congress, where Democrats lost a few
seats in both houses. As a result, Kennedy entered office in 1961 without
the mandate necessary to achieve the ambitious agenda he would refer toas the New Frontier.
Kennedy also faced foreign policy challenges. The United States entered the 1960s unaccustomed to stark foreign policy failures, having
emerged from World War II as a global superpower before waging a Cold
War against the Soviet Union in the 1950s. In the new decade, unsuccessful conflicts in Cuba and Vietnam would yield embarrassment, fear, andtragedy, stunning a nation that expected triumph and altering the way
many thought of America’s role in international affairs.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 1 6 chapt er 27

On January 8, 1959, Fidel Castro and his revolutionary army initiated a new era of Cuban history. Having ousted the corrupt Cuban president Fulgencio Batista, who had fled Havana on New Year’s Eve, Castro
and his rebel forces made their way triumphantly through the capitalcity’s streets. The United States, which had long propped up Batista’s
corrupt regime, had withdrawn support and, initially, expressed sympathy for Castro’s new government, which was immediately granted diplomatic recognition. But President Dwight Eisenhower and members of his
administration were wary. The new Cuban government soon instituted
leftist economic policies centered on agrarian reform, land redistribution, and the nationalization of private enterprises. Cuba’s wealthy andmiddle-class citizens fled the island in droves. Many settled in Miami,
Florida, and other American cities.
The relationship between Cuba and the United States deteriorated
rapidly. On October 19, 1960, the United States instituted a near-total
trade embargo to economically isolate the Cuban regime, and in January 1961, the two nations broke off formal diplomatic relations. The
Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), acting under the mistaken belief that
the Castro government lacked popular support and that Cuban citizens
would revolt if given the opportunity, began to recruit members of theexile community to participate in an invasion of the island. On April 16,
1961, an invasion force consisting primarily of Cuban émigrés landed
on Girón Beach at the Bay of Pigs. Cuban soldiers and civilians quickly
overwhelmed the exiles, many of whom were taken prisoner. The Cuban
government’s success at thwarting the Bay of Pigs invasion did much tolegitimize the new regime and was a tremendous embarrassment for the
Kennedy administration.
As the political relationship between Cuba and the United States disintegrated, the Castro government became more closely aligned with theSoviet Union. This strengthening of ties set the stage for the Cuban Missile Crisis, perhaps the most dramatic foreign policy crisis in the historyof the United States. In 1962, in response to the United States’ longtime
maintenance of a nuclear arsenal in Turkey and at the invitation of the
Cuban government, the Soviet Union deployed nuclear missiles in Cuba.
On October 14, 1962, American spy planes detected the construction of
missile launch sites, and on October 22, President Kennedy addressed theAmerican people to alert them to this threat. Over the course of the next
several days, the world watched in horror as the United States and the Soviet Union hovered on the brink of nuclear war. Finally, on October 28,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  317

The Cuban Missile Crisis was a time of great
anxiety in America. Eight hundred women demonstrated outside the United Nations Building in
1962 to promote peace. Library of Congress.

the Soviet Union agreed to remove its missiles from Cuba in exchange fora U.S. agreement to remove its missiles from Turkey and a formal pledge
that the United States would not invade Cuba, and the crisis was resolved
peacefully.
Though the Cuban Missile Crisis temporarily halted the flow of
Cuban refugees into the United States, emigration began again in earnest
in the mid-1960s. In 1965, the Johnson administration and the Castro
government brokered a deal that facilitated the reunion of families that
had been separated by earlier waves of migration, opening the door for
thousands to leave the island. In 1966 President Lyndon B. Johnson
signed the Cuban Adjustment Act, a law allowing Cuban refugees tobecome permanent residents. Over the course of the 1960s, hundreds ofthousands of Cubans left their homeland and built new lives in America.

III. The Civil Rights Movement Continues
So much of the energy and character of the sixties emerged from the civilrights movement, which won its greatest victories in the early years ofthe decade. The movement itself was changing. Many of the civil rights
activists pushing for school desegregation in the 1950s were middle-class© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 1 8 chapt er 27

and middle-aged. In the 1960s, a new student movement arose whose
members wanted swifter changes in the segregated South. Confrontational protests, marches, boycotts, and sit-ins accelerated.1
The tone of the modern U.S. civil rights movement changed at a
North Carolina department store in 1960, when four African American
students participated in a sit-in at a whites-only lunch counter. The 1960
Greensboro sit-ins were typical. Activists sat at segregated lunch countersin an act of defiance, refusing to leave until being served and willing to beridiculed, attacked, and arrested if they were not. This tactic drew resistance but forced the desegregation of Woolworth’s department stores. It
prompted copycat demonstrations across the South. The protests offeredevidence that student-led direct action could enact social change and established the civil rights movement’s direction in the forthcoming years.2
The following year, civil rights advocates attempted a bolder variation of a sit-in when they participated in the Freedom Rides. Activists
organized interstate bus rides following a Supreme Court decision outlawing segregation on public buses and trains. The rides intended to test
the court’s ruling, which many southern states had ignored. An interracial group of Freedom Riders boarded buses in Washington, D.C., with
the intention of sitting in integrated patterns on the buses as they traveledthrough the Deep South. On the initial rides in May 1961, the riders encountered fierce resistance in Alabama. Angry mobs composed of KKK
members attacked riders in Birmingham, burning one of the buses andbeating the activists who escaped. Additional Freedom Rides launchedthrough the summer and generated national attention amid additional
violent resistance. Ultimately, the Interstate Commerce Commission enforced integrated interstate buses and trains in November 1961.3
In the fall of 1961, civil rights activists descended on Albany, a smallcity in southwest Georgia. Known for entrenched segregation and racialviolence, Albany seemed an unlikely place for black Americans to rally
and demand change. The activists there, however, formed the Albany
Movement, a coalition of civil rights organizers that included membersof the Student Nonviolent Coordinating Committee (SNCC, or, “snick”),
the SCLC, and the NAACP. But the movement was stymied by Albany
police chief Laurie Pritchett, who launched mass arrests but refused toengage in police brutality and bailed out leading officials to avoid negative media attention. It was a peculiar scene, and a lesson for southern
activists.4
The Albany Movement included elements of a Christian commitment
to social justice in its platform, with activists stating that all people were

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  319“of equal worth” in God’s family and that “no man may discriminate
against or exploit another.” In many instances in the 1960s, black Christianity propelled civil rights advocates to action and demonstrated thesignificance of religion to the broader civil rights movement. King’s riseto prominence underscored the role that African American religious figures played in the 1960s civil rights movement. Protesters sang hymns
and spirituals as they marched. Preachers rallied the people with messages of justice and hope. Churches hosted meetings, prayer vigils, andconferences on nonviolent resistance. The moral thrust of the movement
strengthened African American activists and confronted white society byframing segregation as a moral evil.5
As the civil rights movement garnered more followers and more
attention, white resistance stiffened. In October 1962, James Meredith
became the first African American student to enroll at the University ofMississippi. Meredith’s enrollment sparked riots on the Oxford campus,
prompting President John F. Kennedy to send in U.S. Marshals and National Guardsmen to maintain order. On an evening known infamously
as the Battle of Ole Miss, segregationists clashed with troops in the middle of campus, resulting in two deaths and hundreds of injuries. Violence
served as a reminder of the strength of white resistance to the civil rights
movement, particularly in the realm of education.6

James Meredith,accompanied by
U.S. Marshals,
walks to class at
the Universityof Mississippi
in 1962. Meredith was the first
African American
student admitted
to the segregateduniversity. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 2 0 chapt er 27

The following year, 1963, was perhaps the decade’s most eventful
year for civil rights. In April and May, the SCLC organized the Birmingham Campaign, a broad campaign of direct action aiming to topple
segregation in Alabama’s largest city. Activists used business boycotts,
sit-ins, and peaceful marches as part of the campaign. SCLC leader Martin Luther King Jr. was jailed, prompting his famous handwritten letter urging not only his nonviolent approach but active confrontation to
directly challenge injustice. The campaign further added to King’s national reputation and featured powerful photographs and video footageof white police officers using fire hoses and attack dogs on young African
American protesters. It also yielded an agreement to desegregate public
accommodations in the city: activists in Birmingham scored a victory forcivil rights and drew international praise for the nonviolent approach in
the face of police-sanctioned violence and bombings.7
White resistance intensified. While much of the rhetoric surrounding
the 1960s focused on a younger, more liberal generation’s progressive
ideas, conservatism maintained a strong presence on the American political scene. Few political figures in the decade embodied the working-class,conservative views held by millions of white Americans quite like George
Wallace. Wallace’s vocal stance on segregation was immortalized in his
1963 inaugural address as Alabama governor with the phrase: “Segregation now, segregation tomorrow, segregation forever!” Just as the civilrights movement began to gain unprecedented strength, Wallace became
the champion of the many white southerners opposed to the movement.
Consequently, Wallace was one of the best examples of the very real opposition civil rights activists faced in the late twentieth century.8
As governor, Wallace loudly supported segregation. His efforts weresymbolic, but they earned him national recognition as a political figure
willing to fight for what many southerners saw as their traditional way oflife. In June 1963, just five months after becoming governor, in his “Standin the Schoolhouse Door,” Wallace famously stood in the door of Foster
Auditorium to protest integration at the University of Alabama. President
Kennedy addressed the nation that evening, criticizing Wallace and calling for a comprehensive civil rights bill. A day later, civil rights leader
Medgar Evers was assassinated at his home in Jackson, Mississippi.
That summer, civil rights leaders organized the August 1963 Marchon Washington. The march called for, among other things, civil rights
legislation, school integration, an end to discrimination by public andprivate employers, job training for the unemployed, and a raise in the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  321

Alabama governor George Wallace stands defiantly at the door of the University of Alabama, blocking
the attempted integration of the school. Wallace became the most notorious pro-segregation politician of
the 1960s, proudly proclaiming, in his 1963 inaugural address, “Segregation now, segregation tomorrow,segregation forever.” Library of Congress.

minimum wage. On the steps of the Lincoln Memorial, King delivered
his famous “I Have a Dream” speech, an internationally renowned callfor civil rights that raised the movement’s profile to new heights and put
unprecedented pressure on politicians to pass meaningful civil rights
legislation.9
Kennedy offered support for a civil rights bill, but southern resistance was intense and Kennedy was unwilling to expend much political
capital on it. And so the bill stalled in Congress. Then, on November 22,
1963, President Kennedy was assassinated in Dallas. The nation’s youthful, popular president was gone. Vice President Lyndon Johnson lacked
Kennedy’s youth, his charisma, his popularity, and his aristocratic upbringing, but no one knew Washington better and no one before or sincefought harder and more successfully to pass meaningful civil rights legislation. Raised in poverty in the Texas Hill Country, Johnson scratchedand clawed his way up the political ladder. He was both ruthlessly ambitious and keenly conscious of poverty and injustice. He i­dolized Franklin© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Women and men demonstrate during the March on Washington on August 28, 1963. Library of Congress.

This photograph shows Martin Luther King Jr. and other black civil rights leaders arm-in-arm with leadersof the Jewish community during the March on Washington on August 28, 1963. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  323

Roosevelt whose New Deal had brought improvements for the impoverished central Texans Johnson grew up with.
President Lyndon Johnson, then, an old white southerner with a thick
Texas drawl, embraced the civil rights movement. He took Kennedy’s
stalled civil rights bill, ensured that it would have teeth, and navigatedit through Congress. The following summer he signed the Civil Rights
Act of 1964, widely considered to be among the most important piecesof civil rights legislation in American history. The comprehensive act
barred segregation in public accommodations and outlawed discrimination based on race, ethnicity, gender, and national or religious origin.
The civil rights movement created space for political leaders to passlegislation, and the movement continued pushing forward. Direct action
continued through the summer of 1964, as student-run organizations like
SNCC and the Congress of Racial Equality (CORE) helped with theFreedom Summer in Mississippi, a drive to register African American
voters in a state with an ugly history of discrimination. Freedom Summer
campaigners set up schools for African American children. Even with
progress, intimidation and violent resistance against civil rights continued, particularly in regions with longstanding traditions of segregation.10
In March 1965, activists attempted to march from Selma to Montgomery, Alabama, on behalf of local African American voting rights. In

Lyndon B. Johnson sits with civilrights leaders in
the White House.
One of Johnson’s
greatest legacies
would be his
staunch support ofcivil rights legislation. Photograph,
January 18, 1964.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 2 4 chapt er 27

Johnson gives
Senator Richard
Russell the famous
Johnson Treatment. Yoichi R.
Okamoto, Photograph of Lyndon
B. Johnson pressuring Senator
Richard Russell,
December 17,
1963. Wikimedia.

a narrative that had become familiar, “Bloody Sunday” featured peacefulprotesters attacked by white law enforcement with batons and tear gas.
After they were turned away violently a second time, marchers finallymade the fifty-mile trek to the state capitol later in the month. Coverage of the first march prompted President Johnson to present the billthat became the Voting Rights Act of 1965, an act that abolished voting
discrimination in federal, state, and local elections. In two consecutive
years, landmark pieces of legislation had assaulted de jure (by law) segregation and disenfranchisement.11

IV. Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society
On a May morning in 1964, President Johnson laid out a sweeping vision
for a package of domestic reforms known as the Great Society. Speaking
before that year’s graduates of the University of Michigan, Johnson called
for “an end to poverty and racial injustice” and challenged both thegraduates and American people to “enrich and elevate our national life,
and to advance the quality of our American civilization.” At its heart,
he promised, the Great Society would uplift racially and economically© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  325

disfranchised Americans, too long denied access to federal guarantees of
equal democratic and economic opportunity, while simultaneously raising all Americans’ standards and quality of life.12
The Great Society’s legislation was breathtaking in scope, and manyof its programs and agencies are still with us today. Most importantly,
the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and the Voting Rights Act of 1965 codified
federal support for many of the civil rights movement’s goals by prohibiting job discrimination, abolishing the segregation of public accommodations, and providing vigorous federal oversight of southern states’
election laws in order to guarantee minority access to the ballot. Ninety
years after Reconstruction, these measures effectively ended Jim Crow.
In addition to civil rights, the Great Society took on a range of­quality-of-life concerns that seemed suddenly solvable in a society of such
affluence. It established the first federal food stamp program. Medicare
and Medicaid would ensure access to quality medical care for the aged
and poor. In 1965, the Elementary and Secondary Education Act was
the first sustained and significant federal investment in public education,
totaling more than $1 billion. Significant funds were poured into colleges and universities. The Great Society also established the National

Five leaders of thecivil rights movement in 1965.
From left: Bayard
Rustin, Andrew
Young, William
Ryan, James
Farmer, and John
Lewis. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 2 6 chapt er 27

Endowment for the Arts and the National Endowment for the Humanities, federal investments in arts and letters that fund American culturalexpression to this day.
While these programs persisted and even thrived, in the years immediately following this flurry of legislative activity, the national conversation surrounding Johnson’s domestic agenda largely focused on the $3
billion spent on War on Poverty programming within the Great Society’s
Economic Opportunity Act (EOA) of 1964. No EOA program was more
controversial than Community Action, considered the cornerstone antipoverty program. Johnson’s antipoverty planners felt that the key to
uplifting disfranchised and impoverished Americans was involving poorand marginalized citizens in the actual administration of poverty programs, what they called “maximum feasible participation.” Community
Action Programs would give disfranchised Americans a seat at the tablein planning and executing federally funded programs that were meant tobenefit them—a significant sea change in the nation’s efforts to confront
poverty, which had historically relied on local political and business elites
or charitable organizations for administration.13
In fact, Johnson himself had never conceived of poor Americans running their own poverty programs. While the president’s rhetoric offered astirring vision of the future, he had singularly old-school notions for how
his poverty policies would work. In contrast to “maximum feasible participation,” the president imagined a second New Deal: local elite-run
public works camps that would instill masculine virtues in unemployedyoung men. Community Action almost entirely bypassed local administrations and sought to build grassroots civil rights and community advocacy organizations, many of which had originated in the broader civilrights movement. Despite widespread support for most Great Society
programs, the War on Poverty increasingly became the focal point ofdomestic criticisms from the left and right. On the left, frustrated Americans recognized the president’s resistance to further empowering poor
minority communities and also assailed the growing war in Vietnam, thecost of which undercut domestic poverty spending. As racial unrest andviolence swept across urban centers, critics from the right lambasted federal spending for “unworthy” citizens.
Johnson had secured a series of meaningful civil rights laws, but thenthings began to stall. Days after the ratification of the Voting Rights Act,race riots broke out in the Watts neighborhood of Los Angeles. Rioting in
Watts stemmed from local African American frustrations with residential© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  327

segregation, police brutality, and racial profiling. Waves of riots rocked
American cities every summer thereafter. Particularly destructive riots occurred in 1967—two summers later—in Newark and Detroit. Each resulted
in deaths, injuries, arrests, and millions of dollars in property damage. In
spite of black achievements, problems persisted for many African Americans. The phenomenon of “white flight”—when whites in metropolitan
areas fled city centers for the suburbs—often resulted in resegregated residential patterns. Limited access to economic and social opportunities inurban areas bred discord. In addition to reminding the nation that the civilrights movement was a complex, ongoing event without a concrete endpoint, the unrest in northern cities reinforced the notion that the struggle
did not occur solely in the South. Many Americans also viewed the riots as
an indictment of the Great Society, President Johnson’s sweeping agendaof domestic programs that sought to remedy inner-city ills by offering
better access to education, jobs, medical care, housing, and other forms ofsocial welfare. The civil rights movement was never the same.14
The Civil Rights Acts, the Voting Rights Acts, and the War on Poverty provoked conservative resistance and were catalysts for the rise of
Republicans in the South and West. However, subsequent presidents
and Congresses have left intact the bulk of the Great Society, including Medicare and Medicaid, food stamps, federal spending for arts andliterature, and Head Start. Even Community Action Programs, so fraught
during their few short years of activity, inspired and empowered a newgeneration of minority and poverty community activists who had neverbefore felt, as one put it, that “this government is with us.”15

V. The Origins of the Vietnam War
American involvement in the Vietnam War began during the postwar period of decolonization. The Soviet Union backed many nationalist movements across the globe, but the United States feared the expansion ofcommunist influence and pledged to confront any revolutions aligned
against Western capitalism. The Domino Theory—the idea that if a country fell to communism, then neighboring states would soon follow—­governed American foreign policy. After the communist takeover of China
in 1949, the United States financially supported the French military’s effort to retain control over its colonies in Vietnam, Cambodia, and Laos.
Between 1946 and 1954, France fought a counterinsurgency campaign against the nationalist Viet Minh forces led by Ho Chi Minh. The© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 2 8 chapt er 27

United States assisted the French war effort with funds, arms, and advisors, but it was not enough. On the eve of the Geneva Peace Conferencein 1954, Viet Minh forces defeated the French army at Dien Bien Phu.
The conference temporarily divided Vietnam into two separate states
until UN-monitored elections occurred. But the United States feared acommunist electoral victory and blocked the elections. The temporary
partition became permanent. The United States established the Republicof Vietnam, or South Vietnam, with the U.S.-backed Ngo Dinh Diem as
prime minister. Diem, who had lived in the United States, was a committed anticommunist.
Diem’s government, however, and its Army of the Republic of Vietnam (ARVN) could not contain the communist insurgency seeking thereunification of Vietnam. The Americans provided weapons and support, but despite a clear numerical and technological advantage, South
Vietnam stumbled before insurgent Vietcong (VC) units. Diem, a corrupt
leader propped up by the American government with little domestic support, was assassinated in 1963. A merry-go-round of military dictators
followed as the situation in South Vietnam continued to deteriorate. The
American public, though, remained largely unaware of Vietnam in theearly 1960s, even as President John F. Kennedy deployed some sixteen
thousand military advisors to help South Vietnam suppress a domestic
communist insurgency.16
This all changed in 1964. On August 2, the USS Maddox reported
incoming fire from North Vietnamese ships in the Gulf of Tonkin. Although the details of the incident are controversial, the Johnson administration exploited the event to provide a pretext for escalating American
involvement in Vietnam. Congress passed the Gulf of Tonkin Resolution,
granting President Johnson the authority to deploy the American military to defend South Vietnam. U.S. Marines landed in Vietnam in March
1965, and the American ground war began.
American forces under General William Westmoreland were tasked
with defending South Vietnam against the insurgent VC and the regular
North Vietnamese Army (NVA). But no matter how many troops theAmericans sent or how many bombs they dropped, they could not win.
This was a different kind of war. Progress was not measured by cities won or territory taken but by body counts and kill ratios. Although
American officials like Westmoreland and secretary of defense Robert
McNamara claimed a communist defeat was on the horizon, by 1968
half a million American troops were stationed in Vietnam, nearly twenty© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  329

thousand had been killed, and the war was still no closer to being won.
Protests, which would provide the backdrop for the American counterculture, erupted across the country.

VI. Culture and Activism
The 1960s wrought enormous cultural change. The United States thatentered the decade looked and sounded little like the one that left it.
Rebellion rocked the supposedly hidebound conservatism of the 1950s
as the youth counterculture became mainstream. Native Americans,
Chicanos, women, and environmentalists participated in movements
demonstrating that rights activism could be applied to ethnicity, gender,and nature. Even established religious institutions such as the Catholic
Church underwent transformations, emphasizing freedom and tolerance.
In each instance, the decade brought substantial progress and evidence
that activism remained fluid and unfinished.
Much of the counterculture was filtered through popular culture
and consumption. The fifties consumer culture still saturated the country, and advertisers continued to appeal to teenagers and the expanding

Epitomizing thefolk music andprotest cultureof 1960s youth,
Joan Baez and
Bob Dylan are
pictured here
singing together
at the March on
Washington in
1963. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 3 0 chapt er 27

youth market. During the 1960s, though, advertisers looked to a growing counterculture to sell their products. Popular culture and popular
advertising in the 1950s had promoted an ethos of “fitting in” and buying products to conform. The new countercultural ethos touted individuality and rebellion. Some advertisers were subtle; ads for Volkswagens(VWs) acknowledged the flaws and strange look of their cars. One adread, “Presenting America’s slowest fastback,” which “won’t go over 72
mph even though the speedometer shows a wildly optimistic top speedof 90.” Another stated, “And if you run out of gas, it’s easy to push.”
By marketing the car’s flaws and reframing them as positive qualities, theadvertisers commercialized young people’s resistance to commercialism,
while simultaneously positioning the VW as a car for those wanting tostand out in a crowd. A more obviously countercultural ad for the VW
Bug showed two cars: one black and one painted multicolor in the hippie style; the contrasting captions read, “We do our thing,” and “You doyours.”
Companies marketed their products as countercultural in and ofthemselves. One of the more obvious examples was a 1968 ad from Columbia Records, a hugely successful record label since the 1920s. The ad
pictured a group of stock rebellious characters—a shaggy-haired whitehippie, a buttoned-up Beat, two biker types, and a black jazz man sporting an Afro—in a jail cell. The counterculture had been busted, the adstates, but “the man can’t bust our music.” Merely buying records from
Columbia was an act of rebellion, one that brought the buyer closer tothe counterculture figures portrayed in the ad.17
But it wasn’t just advertising: the culture was changing and changing
rapidly. Conservative cultural norms were falling everywhere. The dominant style of women’s fashion in the 1950s, for instance, was the poodle
skirt and the sweater, tight-waisted and buttoned up. The 1960s usheredin an era of much less restrictive clothing. Capri pants became popular
casual wear. Skirts became shorter. When Mary Quant invented the miniskirt in 1964, she said it was a garment “in which you could move, inwhich you could run and jump.”18 By the late 1960s, the hippies’ moreandrogynous look became trendy. Such trends bespoke the new popularethos of the 1960s: freedom, rebellion, and individuality.
In a decade plagued by social and political instability, the Americancounterculture also sought psychedelic drugs as its remedy for alienation.
For middle-class white teenagers, society had become stagnant and bureaucratic. The New Left, for instance, arose on college campuses frus-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  331

trated with the lifeless bureaucracies that they believed strangled true
freedom. Lysergic acid diethylamide (LSD) began its life as a drug usedprimarily in psychological research before trickling down into college
campuses and out into society at large. The counterculture’s notion that
American stagnation could be remedied by a spiritual-psychedelic experience drew heavily from psychologists and sociologists. The popularity ofthese drugs also spurred a political backlash. By 1966, enough incidents
had been connected to LSD to spur a Senate hearing on the drug, andnewspapers were reporting that hundreds of LSD users had been admitted to psychiatric wards.
The counterculture conquered popular culture. Rock ’n’ roll, liberalized sexuality, an embrace of diversity, recreational drug use, unalloyedidealism, and pure earnestness marked a new generation. Criticized byconservatives as culturally dangerous and by leftists as empty narcissism,
the youth culture nevertheless dominated headlines and steered American
culture. Perhaps one hundred thousand youth descended on San Francisco for the utopic promise of 1967’s Summer of Love. 1969’s Woodstock concert in New York became shorthand for the new youth culture
and its mixture of politics, protest, and personal fulfillment. While theascendance of the hippies would be both exaggerated and short-lived,
and while Vietnam and Richard Nixon shattered much of its idealism,
the counterculture’s liberated social norms and its embrace of personalfulfillment still define much of American culture.

VII. Beyond Civil Rights
Despite substantial legislative achievements, frustrations with the slow
pace of change grew. Tensions continued to mount in cities, and thetone of the civil rights movement changed yet again. Activists becameless conciliatory in their calls for progress. Many embraced the moremilitant message of the burgeoning Black Power Movement and the late
Malcolm X, a Nation of Islam (NOI) minister who had encouraged African Americans to pursue freedom, equality, and justice by “any means
necessary.” Prior to his death, Malcolm X and the NOI emerged as theradical alternative to the racially integrated, largely Protestant approachof Martin Luther King Jr. Malcolm advocated armed resistance in defense of the safety and well-being of black Americans, stating, “I don’t
call it violence when it’s self-defense, I call it intelligence.” For his part,
King and leaders from more mainstream organizations like the NAACP© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 3 2 chapt er 27

Like Booker T.
Washington andW. E. B. Du Bois
before them, Martin Luther King
Jr., and Malcolm
X, pictured here in
1964, representeddifferent civilrights strategies that both
aimed for racial
justice. Library ofCongress.

and the Urban League criticized both Malcolm X and the NOI for what
they perceived to be racial demagoguery. King believed Malcolm X’s
speeches were a “great disservice” to black Americans, claiming that they
lamented the problems of African Americans without offering solutions.
The differences between King and Malcolm X represented a core ideological tension that would inhabit black political thought throughout the
1960s and 1970s.19
By the late 1960s, SNCC, led by figures such as Stokely Carmichael,
had expelled its white members and shunned the interracial effort in therural South, focusing instead on injustices in northern urban areas. After
President Johnson refused to take up the cause of the black delegates in
the Mississippi Freedom Democratic Party at the 1964 Democratic National Convention, SNCC activists became frustrated with institutional
tactics and turned away from the organization’s founding principle ofnonviolence. This evolving, more aggressive movement called for African Americans to play a dominant role in cultivating black institutions
and articulating black interests rather than relying on interracial, moderate approaches. At a June 1966 civil rights march, Carmichael told
the crowd, “What we gonna start saying now is black power!”20 The
slogan not only resonated with audiences, it also stood in direct con-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  333

The Black Panther Party used radical andincendiary tactics to bring attention to thecontinued oppression of blacks in America.
This 1970 poster captures their outlook.
Wikimedia.

trast to King’s “Freedom Now!” campaign. The political slogan of black
power could encompass many meanings, but at its core it stood for the
self-determination of black people in political, economic, and socialorganizations.
Carmichael asserted that “black power means black people coming
together to form a political force.”21 To others it also meant violence. In
1966, Huey Newton and Bobby Seale formed the Black Panther Party inOakland, California. The Black Panthers became the standard-bearers
for direct action and self-defense, using the concept of decolonization in
their drive to liberate black communities from white power structures.
The revolutionary organization also sought reparations and exemptions
for black men from the military draft. Citing police brutality and racist
governmental policies, the Black Panthers aligned themselves with the“other people of color in the world” against whom America was fighting
abroad. Although it was perhaps most well known for its open displayof weapons, military-style dress, and black nationalist beliefs, the party’s
10-Point Plan also included employment, housing, and education. The
Black Panthers worked in local communities to run “survival programs”© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 3 4 chapt er 27that provided food, clothing, medical treatment, and drug rehabilitation.
They focused on modes of resistance that empowered black activists on
their own terms.22
But African Americans weren’t the only Americans struggling to assert
themselves in the 1960s. The successes of the civil rights movement andgrowing grassroots activism inspired countless new movements. In thesummer of 1961, for instance, frustrated Native American university students founded the National Indian Youth Council (NIYC) to draw attention to the plight of indigenous Americans. In the Pacific Northwest, thecouncil advocated for tribal fisherman to retain immunity from conservation laws on reservations and in 1964 held a series of “fish-ins”: activists
and celebrities cast nets and waited for the police to arrest them.23 The
NIYC’s militant rhetoric and use of direct action marked the beginningof what was called the Red Power movement, an intertribal movement
designed to draw attention to Native issues and to protest discrimination. The American Indian Movement (AIM) and other activists staged
dramatic demonstrations. In November 1969, dozens began a year-and-ahalf-long occupation of the abandoned Alcatraz Island in San Francisco
Bay. In 1973, hundreds occupied the town of Wounded Knee, South Dakota, site of the infamous 1890 Indian massacre, for several months.24
Meanwhile, the Chicano movement in the 1960s emerged out of thebroader Mexican American civil rights movement of the post–WorldWar II era. The word Chicano was initially considered a derogatory termfor Mexican immigrants, until activists in the 1960s reclaimed the termand used it as a catalyst to campaign for political and social change
among Mexican Americans. The Chicano movement confronted discrimination in schools, politics, agriculture, and other formal and informal
institutions. Organizations like the Mexican American Political Association (MAPA) and the Mexican American Legal Defense Fund (MALDF)
buoyed the Chicano movement and patterned themselves after similar
influential groups in the African American civil rights movement.25
Cesar Chavez became the most well-known figure of the Chicano
movement, using nonviolent tactics to campaign for workers’ rights in thegrape fields of California. Chavez and activist Dolores Huerta founded
the National Farm Workers Association, which eventually merged andbecame the United Farm Workers of America (UFWA). The UFWA fused
the causes of Chicano and Filipino activists protesting the subpar working conditions of California farmers on American soil. In addition toembarking on a hunger strike and a boycott of table grapes, Chavez© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  335

led a three-hundred-mile march in March and April 1966 from Delano,
California, to the state capital of Sacramento. The pro-labor campaign
garnered the national spotlight and the support of prominent politicalfigures such as Robert Kennedy. Today, Chavez’s birthday (March 31) isobserved as a federal holiday in California, Colorado, and Texas.
Rodolfo “Corky” Gonzales was another activist whose calls for Chicano self-determination resonated long past the 1960s. A former boxer
and Denver native, Gonzales founded the Crusade for Justice in 1966,
an organization that would establish the first annual Chicano Liberation Day at the National Chicano Youth Conference. The conference
also yielded the Plan Espiritual de Aztlán, a Chicano nationalist manifesto that reflected Gonzales’s vision of Chicanos as a unified, historicallygrounded, all-encompassing group fighting against discrimination in the
United States. By 1970, the Texas-based La Raza Unida political party
had a strong foundation for promoting Chicano nationalism and continuing the campaign for Mexican American civil rights.26
The feminist movement also grew in the 1960s. Women were active
in both the civil rights movement and the labor movement, but their increasing awareness of gender inequality did not find a receptive audienceamong male leaders in those movements. In the 1960s, then, many ofthese women began to form a movement of their own. Soon the country
experienced a groundswell of feminist consciousness.
An older generation of women who preferred to work within state
institutions figured prominently in the early part of the decade. WhenJohn F. Kennedy established the Presidential Commission on the Status
of Women in 1961, former first lady Eleanor Roosevelt headed the effort. The commission’s official report, a self-declared “invitation to action,” was released in 1963. Finding discriminatory provisions in the law
and practices of industrial, labor, and governmental organizations, thecommission advocated for “changes, many of them long overdue, in theconditions of women’s opportunity in the United States.”27 Change wasrecommended in areas of employment practices, federal tax and benefit
policies affecting women’s income, labor laws, and services for women as
wives, mothers, and workers. This call for action, if heeded, would ameliorate the types of discrimination primarily experienced by middle-classand elite white working women, all of whom were used to advocating
through institutional structures like government agencies and unions.28
The specific concerns of poor and nonwhite women lay largely beyond
the scope of the report.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 3 6 chapt er 27

Betty Friedan’s The Feminine Mystique hit bookshelves the same year
the commission released its report. Friedan had been active in the union
movement and was by this time a mother in the new suburban landscapeof postwar America. In her book, Friedan labeled the “problem that has
no name,” and in doing so helped many white middle-class American
women come to see their dissatisfaction as housewives not as something“wrong with [their] marriage, or [themselves],” but instead as a social
problem experienced by millions of American women. Friedan observedthat there was a “discrepancy between the reality of our lives as womenand the image to which we were trying to conform, the image I call thefeminine mystique.” No longer would women allow society to blame the“problem that has no name” on a loss of femininity, too much education,or too much female independence and equality with men.29
The 1960s also saw a different group of women pushing for change
in government policy. Mothers on welfare began to form local advocacy
groups in addition to the National Welfare Rights Organization, founded
in 1966. Mostly African American, these activists fought for greater benefits and more control over welfare policy and implementation. Women
like Johnnie Tillmon successfully advocated for larger grants for school
clothes and household equipment in addition to gaining due process andfair administrative hearings prior to termination of welfare entitlements.
Yet another mode of feminist activism was the formation of
consciousness-raising groups. These groups met in women’s homes­
and at women’s centers, providing a safe environment for women to
discuss everything from experiences of gender discrimination to pregnancy, from relationships with men and women to self-image. The goalof ­consciousness-raising was to increase self-awareness and validate theexperiences of women. Groups framed such individual experiences as
examples of society-wide sexism, and claimed that “the personal is political.”30 Consciousness-raising groups created a wealth of personal stories
that feminists could use in other forms of activism and crafted networks
of women from which activists could mobilize support for protests.
The end of the decade was marked by the Women’s Strike for Equality,celebrating the fiftieth anniversary of women’s right to vote. Sponsored by
the National Organization for Women (NOW), the 1970 protest focusedon employment discrimination, political equality, abortion, free childcare, and equality in marriage. All of these issues foreshadowed the backlash against feminist goals in the 1970s. Not only would feminism face
opposition from other women who valued the traditional homemaker© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  337

The women’s movement stalled during the 1930s and 1940s, but by the 1960s it was back in full force.
Inspired by the civil rights movement and fed up with gender discrimination, women took to the streets todemand their rights as American citizens. Photograph, August 26, 1970. Library of Congress.

role to which feminists objected, the feminist movement would also fracture internally as minority women challenged white feminists’ racism
and lesbians vied for more prominence within feminist organizations.
American environmentalism’s significant gains during the 1960s
emerged in part from Americans’ recreational use of nature. Postwar
Americans backpacked, went to the beach, fished, and joined birdingorganizations in greater numbers than ever before. These experiences,along with increased formal education, made Americans more aware of
threats to the environment and, consequently, to themselves. Many ofthese threats increased in the postwar years as developers bulldozed open
space for suburbs and new hazards emerged from industrial and nuclear
pollutants.
By the time that biologist Rachel Carson published her landmark
book, Silent Spring, in 1962, a nascent environmentalism had emerged in
America. Silent Spring stood out as an unparalleled argument for the interconnectedness of ecological and human health. Pesticides, Carson argued, also posed a threat to human health, and their overuse t­hreatened© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 3 8 chapt er 27

the ecosystems that supported food production. Carson’s argument wascompelling to many Americans, including President Kennedy, but wasvirulently opposed by chemical industries that suggested the book was
the product of an emotional woman, not a scientist.31
After Silent Spring, the social and intellectual currents of environmentalism continued to expand rapidly, culminating in the largest demonstration in history, Earth Day, on April 22, 1970, and in a decade oflawmaking that significantly restructured American government. Even
before the massive gathering for Earth Day, lawmakers from the local
to the federal level had pushed for and achieved regulations to clean up
the air and water. President Richard Nixon signed the National Environmental Policy Act into law in 1970, requiring environmental impact
statements for any project directed or funded by the federal government. He also created the Environmental Protection Agency, the firstagency charged with studying, regulating, and disseminating knowledge
about the environment. A raft of laws followed that were designed tooffer increased protection for air, water, endangered species, and natural areas.
The decade’s activism manifested across the world. It even affected
the Catholic Church. The Second Vatican Council, called by Pope JohnXXIII to modernize the church and bring it in closer dialogue with the
non-Catholic world, operated from 1962 to 1965, when it proclaimed
multiple reforms, including the vernacular mass (mass in local languages,
rather than in Latin) and a greater role for laypeople, and especiallywomen, in the Church. Many Catholic churches adopted more informal,
contemporary styles. Many conservative Catholics recoiled at what they
perceived as rapid and dangerous changes, but Vatican II’s reforms inmany ways created the modern Catholic Church.

VIII. Conclusion
In 1969, Americans hailed the moon landing as a profound victory in thespace race against the Soviet Union. This landmark achievement fulfilled
the promise of the late John F. Kennedy, who had declared in 1961 that
the United States would put a man on the moon by the end of the decade.
But while Neil Armstrong said his steps marked “one giant leap for mankind,” and Americans marveled at the achievement, the brief moment ofwonder only punctuated years of turmoil. The Vietnam War disillusioned
a generation, riots rocked cities, protests hit campuses, and assassina-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  339

tions robbed the nation of many of its leaders. The forward-thinking
spirit of a complex decade had waned. Uncertainty loomed.

IX. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Samuel Abramson, with content contributions bySamuel Abramson, Marsha Barrett, Brent Cebul, Michell Chresfield, William
Cossen, Jenifer Dodd, Michael Falcone, Leif Fredrickson, Jean-Paul de Guzman,
Jordan Hill, William Kelly, Lucie Kyrova, Maria Montalvo, Emily Prifogle, Ansley Quiros, Tanya Roth, and Robert Thompson.
Recommended citation: Samuel Abramson et al., “The Sixties,” Samuel
Abramson, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
N ot e s to C h a p t e r 27
1. For the major events of the civil rights movement, see Taylor Branch,Parting the Waters: America in the King Years, 1954–63 (New York: Simon andSchuster, 1988); Taylor Branch, Pillar of Fire: America in the King Years, 1963–65(New York: Simon and Schuster, 1998); and Taylor Branch, At Canaan’s Edge:
America in the King Years, 1965–68 (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2007).
2. Branch, Parting the Waters.
3. Raymond Arsenault, Freedom Riders: 1961 and the Struggle for Racial
Justice (New York: Oxford University Press, 2006).
4. Clayborne Carson, In Struggle: SNCC and the Black Awakening of the
1960s (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1980); Adam Fairclough, To
Redeem the Soul of America: The Southern Christian Leadership Conference &Martin Luther King (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1987).
5. David L. Chappell, A Stone of Hope: Prophetic Religion and the Death of
Jim Crow (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2005).
6. Branch, Parting the Waters.
7. Ibid.
8. Dan T. Carter, The Politics of Rage: George Wallace, the Origins of the
New Conservatism, and the Transformation of American Politics (Baton Rouge:
LSU Press, 2000).
9. Branch, Parting the Waters.
10. Branch, Pillar of Fire.
11. Branch, At Canaan’s Edge.
12. Lyndon Baines Johnson, “Remarks at the University of Michigan,” May
22, 1964, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United States: Lyndon B. Johnson, 1964 (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1965), 704.
13. See, for instance, Wesley G. Phelps, A People’s War on Poverty: Urban
Politics and Grassroots Activists in Houston (Athens: University of Georgia
Press, 2014).
14. Ibid.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 4 0 chapt er 27

15. Guian A. McKee, “‘This Government is with Us’: Lyndon Johnson and
the Grassroots War on Poverty,” in Annelise Orleck and Lisa Gayle Hazirjian,eds., The War on Poverty: A New Grassroots History, 1964–1980 (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 2011).
16. Michael P. Sullivan, The Vietnam War: A Study in the Making of American Foreign Policy (Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1985), 58.
17. Thomas Frank, The Conquest of Cool: Business Culture, Counterculture, and the Rise of Hip Consumerism (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1998), 7.
18. Brenda Polan and Roger Tredre, The Great Fashion Designers (NewYork: Berg, 2009), 103–104.
19. Manning Marable, Malcolm X: A Life of Reinvention (New York: Penguin, 2011).
20. Peniel E. Joseph, ed., The Black Power Movement: Rethinking the Civil
Rights–Black Power Era (New York: Routledge, 2013), 2.
21. Gordon Parks, “Whip of Black Power,” Life (May 19, 1967), 82.
22. Joshua Bloom and Waldo E. Martin Jr., Black Against Empire: The History and Politics of the Black Panther Party (Berkeley: University of California
Press, 2012).
23. In 1974, fishing rights activists and tribal leaders reached a legal victoryin United States v. Washington, otherwise known as the Boldt Decision, which
declared that Native Americans were entitled to up to 50 percent of the fishcaught in the “usual and accustomed places,” as stated in 1850s treaties.
24. Paul Chaat Smith and Robert Allen Warrior, Like a Hurricane: The Indian Movement from Alcatraz to Wounded Knee (New York: New Press, 1997).
25. See, for instance, Juan Gómez-Quiñones and Irene Vásquez, Making Aztlán: Ideology and Culture of the Chicana and Chicano Movement, 1966–1977(Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 2014).
26. Armando Navarro, Mexican American Youth Organization: AvantGarde of the Movement in Texas (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1995); Ignacio M. Garcia, United We Win: The Rise and Fall of La Raza Unida Party (Tucson: University of Arizona Mexican American Studies Research Center, 1989).
27. American Women: Report of the President’s Commission the Status of
Women (U.S. Department of Labor: 1963), 2, https://​www​.dol​.gov​/wb​/American​%20Women​%20Report​.pdf, accessed June 7, 2018.
28. Flora Davis, Moving the Mountain: The Women’s Movement in America
Since 1960 (Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1999); Cynthia Ellen Harrison, On Account of Sex: The Politics of Women’s Issues, 1945–1968 (Berkeley:
University of California Press, 1988).
29. Betty Friedan, The Feminine Mystique (New York: Norton, 1963), 50.
30. Carol Hanisch, “The Personal Is Political,” in Shulamith Firestone andAnne Koedt, eds., Notes from the Second Year: Women’s Liberation (New York:
Radical Feminism, 1970).
31. Rachel Carson, Silent Spring (New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1962; Linda
Lear, Rachel Carson: Witness for Nature (New York: Holt, 1997).

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he S i x ti e s  341

R e comm e n d e d R e a d ing
Branch, Taylor. Parting the Waters: America in the King Years, 1954–1963. New
York: Simon and Schuster, 1988.
———. Pillar of Fire: America in the King Years, 1963–65. New York: Simonand Schuster, 1998.
Breines, Winifred. The Trouble Between Us: An Uneasy History of White andBlack Women in the Feminist Movement. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2006.
Brick, Howard. The Age of Contradictions: American Thought and Culture in
the 1960s. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2000.
Brown-Nagin, Tomiko. Courage to Dissent: Atlanta and the Long History of the
Civil Rights Movement. New York: Oxford University Press, 2011.
Carson, Clayborne. In Struggle: SNCC and the Black Awakening of the 1960s.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1981.
Chafe, William. Civilities and Civil Rights: Greensboro, North Carolina, and theBlack Struggle for Freedom. New York: Oxford University Press, 1980.
Dallek, Robert. Flawed Giant: Lyndon Johnson and His Times, 1961–1973. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1993.
D’Emilio, John. Sexual Politics, Sexual Communities: The Making of a Homosexual Minority in the United States, 1940–1970. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1983.
Echols, Alice. Daring to Be Bad: Radical Feminism in America, 1967–1975. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989.
Gitlin, Todd. The Sixties: Years of Hope, Days of Rage. New York: Bantam
Books, 1987.
Hall, Jacquelyn Dowd. “The Long Civil Rights Movement and the Political Usesof the Past.” Journal of American History 91 (March 2005): 1233–1263.
Isserman, Maurice. If I Had a Hammer: The Death of the Old Left and the Birthof the New Left. Champaign: University of Illinois Press, 1987.
Johnson, Troy R. The American Indian Occupation of Alcatraz Island: Red
Power and Self-Determination. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 2008.
Joseph, Peniel. Waiting ‘til the Midnight Hour: A Narrative History of BlackPower in America. New York: Holt, 2006.
Kazin, Michael, and Maurice Isserman. America Divided: The Civil War of the
1960s. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007.
McGirr, Lisa. Suburban Warriors: The Origins of the New American Right.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2001.
Orleck, Annelise. Storming Caesar’s Palace: How Black Mothers Fought Their
Own War on Poverty. New York: Beacon Books, 2005.
Patterson, James T. America’s Struggle Against Poverty in the Twentieth Century.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1981.
Patterson, James T. Grand Expectations: The United States, 1945–1974. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Perlstein, Rick. Before the Storm: Barry Goldwater and the Unmaking of theAmerican Consensus. New York: Hill and Wang, 2001.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

3 4 2 chapt er 27

Ransby, Barbara. Ella Baker and the Black Freedom Movement: A Radical
Demo­cratic Vision. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2000.
Robnett, Belinda. How Long? How Long?: African American Women in the
Struggle for Civil Rights. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.
Sugrue, Thomas. The Origins of the Urban Crisis: Race and Inequality in Postwar Detroit. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

28
The Unraveling
I. Introduction
On December 6, 1969, an estimated three hundred thousand people converged on the Altamont Motor Speedway in Northern California for a
massive free concert headlined by the Rolling Stones and featuring someof the era’s other great rock acts.1 Only four months earlier, Woodstock
had shown the world the power of peace and love and American youth.
Altamont was supposed to be “Woodstock West.”2
But Altamont was a disorganized disaster. Inadequate sanitation, ahorrid sound system, and tainted drugs strained concertgoers. To savemoney, the Hells Angels biker gang was paid $500 in beer to be theshow’s “security team.” The crowd grew progressively angrier throughout the day. Fights broke out. Tensions rose. The Angels, drunk andhigh, armed themselves with sawed-off pool cues and indiscriminately

Abandoned
Packard automotive plant in
Detroit, Michigan.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

344

chapt er 28

beat concertgoers who tried to come on the stage. The Grateful Dead
refused to play. Finally, the Stones came on stage.3
The crowd’s anger was palpable. Fights continued near the stage.
Mick Jagger stopped in the middle of playing “Sympathy for the Devil”
to try to calm the crowd: “Everybody be cool now, c’mon,” he pleaded.
Then, a few songs later, in the middle of “Under My Thumb,” eighteenyear-old Meredith Hunter approached the stage and was beaten back.
Pissed off and high on methamphetamines, Hunter brandished a pistol,charged again, and was stabbed and killed by an Angel. His lifeless bodywas stomped into the ground. The Stones just kept playing.4
If the more famous Woodstock music festival captured the idyll of
the sixties youth culture, Altamont revealed its dark side. There, drugs,
music, and youth were associated not with peace and love but with anger,
violence, and death. While many Americans in the 1970s continued tocelebrate the political and cultural achievements of the previous decade,a more anxious, conservative mood grew across the nation. For some, theUnited States had not gone nearly far enough to promote greater social
equality; for others, the nation had gone too far, unfairly trampling therights of one group to promote the selfish needs of another. Onto thesebrewing dissatisfactions, the 1970s dumped the divisive remnants of afailed war, the country’s greatest political scandal, and an intractable economic crisis. It seemed as if the nation was ready to unravel.

II. The Strain of Vietnam
Perhaps no single issue contributed more to public disillusionment thanthe Vietnam War. As the war deteriorated, the Johnson administration
escalated American involvement by deploying hundreds of thousands oftroops to prevent the communist takeover of the south. Stalemates, bodycounts, hazy war aims, and the draft catalyzed an antiwar movement
and triggered protests throughout the United States and Europe. Withno end in sight, protesters burned draft cards, refused to pay income
taxes, occupied government buildings, and delayed trains loaded withwar materials. By 1967, antiwar demonstrations were drawing hundredsof thousands. In one protest, hundreds were arrested after surrounding
the Pentagon.5
Vietnam was the first “living room war.”6 Television, print media,
and open access to the battlefield provided unprecedented coverage ofthe conflict’s brutality. Americans confronted grisly images of casualties
and atrocities. In 1965, CBS Evening News aired a segment in which© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 345

Vietnam War protesters at the 1967 March on
the Pentagon. Lyndon B. Johnson Library via
Wikimedia.

U.S. Marines burned the South Vietnamese village of Cam Ne with little
apparent regard for the lives of its occupants, who had been accused ofaiding Vietcong guerrillas. President Johnson berated the head of CBS,yelling over the phone, “Your boys just shat on the American flag.”7
While the U.S. government imposed no formal censorship on thepress during Vietnam, the White House and military nevertheless usedpress briefings and interviews to paint a deceptive image of the war. The
United States was winning the war, officials claimed. They cited numbers of enemies killed, villages secured, and South Vietnamese troops
trained. However, American journalists in Vietnam quickly realized thehollowness of such claims (the press referred to afternoon press briefings
in Saigon as “the Five o’Clock Follies”).8 Editors frequently toned down
their reporters’ pessimism, often citing conflicting information received
from their own sources, who were typically government officials. But theevidence of a stalemate mounted.
Stories like CBS’s Cam Ne piece exposed a credibility gap, the yawning chasm between the claims of official sources and the increasingly evident reality on the ground in Vietnam.9 Nothing did more to expose this© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

346

chapt er 28

gap than the 1968 Tet Offensive. In January, communist forces attacked
more than one hundred American and South Vietnamese sites throughout
South Vietnam, including the American embassy in Saigon. While U.S.
forces repulsed the attack and inflicted heavy casualties on the Vietcong,
Tet demonstrated that despite the repeated claims of administration officials, the enemy could still strike at will anywhere in the country, evenafter years of war. Subsequent stories and images eroded public trust evenfurther. In 1969, investigative reporter Seymour Hersh revealed that U.S.
troops had raped and/or massacred hundreds of civilians in the village
of My Lai.10 Three years later, Americans cringed at Nick Ut’s wrenching
photograph of a naked Vietnamese child fleeing an American napalm attack. More and more American voices came out against the war.
Reeling from the war’s growing unpopularity, on March 31, 1968,
President Johnson announced on national television that he would notseek reelection.11 Eugene McCarthy and Robert F. Kennedy unsuccessfully battled against Johnson’s vice president, Hubert Humphrey, for the
Democratic Party nomination (Kennedy was assassinated in June). At the
Democratic Party’s national convention in Chicago, local police brutallyassaulted protesters on national television.
For many Americans, the violent clashes outside the convention hall
reinforced their belief that civil society was unraveling. Republican
challenger Richard Nixon played on these fears, running on a platformof “law and order” and a vague plan to end the war. Well aware of domestic pressure to wind down the war, Nixon sought, on the one hand,to appease antiwar sentiment by promising to phase out the draft, train
South Vietnamese forces to assume more responsibility for the war effort, and gradually withdraw American troops. Nixon and his advisors
called it “Vietnamization.”12 At the same time, Nixon appealed to theso-called silent majority of Americans who still supported the war (andopposed the antiwar movement) by calling for an “honorable” end to
U.S. involvement—what he later called “peace with honor.”13 He narrowly edged out Humphrey in the fall’s election.
Public assurances of American withdrawal, however, masked a dramatic escalation of conflict. Looking to incentivize peace talks, Nixon
pursued a “madman strategy” of attacking communist supply lines
across Laos and Cambodia, hoping to convince the North Vietnamesethat he would do anything to stop the war.14 Conducted without publicknowledge or congressional approval, the bombings failed to spur thepeace process, and talks stalled before the American-imposed November© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 347

1969 deadline. News of the attacks renewed antiwar demonstrations. Police and National Guard troops killed six students in separate protests at
Jackson State University in Mississippi, and, more famously, Kent State
University in Ohio in 1970.
Another three years passed—and another twenty thousand American
troops died—before an agreement was reached.15 After Nixon threatened
to withdraw all aid and guaranteed to enforce a treaty militarily, theNorth and South Vietnamese governments signed the Paris Peace Accords
in January 1973, marking the official end of U.S. force commitment to
the Vietnam War. Peace was tenuous, and when war resumed North Vietnamese troops quickly overwhelmed southern forces. By 1975, despite
nearly a decade of direct American military engagement, Vietnam wasunited under a communist government.
The Vietnam War profoundly influenced domestic politics. Moreover,it poisoned many Americans’ perceptions of their government and its rolein the world. And yet, while the antiwar demonstrations attracted considerable media attention and stand today as a hallmark of the sixties counterculture, many Americans nevertheless continued to regard the war as
just. Wary of the rapid social changes that reshaped American society inthe 1960s and worried that antiwar protests threatened an already tenuous civil order, a growing number of Americans turned to conservatism.

III. Racial, Social, and Cultural Anxieties
The civil rights movement looked dramatically different at the end of the
1960s than it had at the beginning. The movement had never been monolithic, but prominent, competing ideologies had fractured the movementin the 1970s. The rise of the Black Power movement challenged the integrationist dreams of many older activists as the assassinations of Martin
Luther King Jr. and Malcolm X fueled disillusionment and many alienated activists recoiled from liberal reformers.
The political evolution of the civil rights movement was reflected in
American culture. The lines of race, class, and gender ruptured American“mass” culture. The monolith of popular American culture, pilloried in
the fifties and sixties as exclusively white, male-dominated, conservative,
and stifling, finally shattered and Americans retreated into ever smaller,segmented subcultures. Marketers now targeted particular products toever smaller pieces of the population, including previously neglectedgroups such as African Americans.16 Subcultures often revolved around© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

348

chapt er 28

Los Angeles police violently arrest a man
during the Watts riot on August 12, 1965.
Wikimedia.

certain musical styles, whether pop, disco, hard rock, punk rock, country, or hip-hop. Styles of dress and physical appearance likewise alignedwith cultures of choice.
If the popular rock acts of the sixties appealed to a new counterculture, the seventies witnessed the resurgence of cultural forms thatappealed to a white working class confronting the social and political upheavals of the 1960s. Country hits such as Merle Haggard’s “Okie from
Muskogee” evoked simpler times and places where people “still wave
Old Glory down at the courthouse” and they “don’t let our hair growlong and shaggy like the hippies out in San Francisco.” A popular television sitcom, All in the Family, became an unexpected hit among “middle
America.” The show’s main character, Archie Bunker, was designed tomock reactionary middle-aged white men, but audiences embraced him.
“Isn’t anyone interested in upholding standards?” he lamented in an episode dealing with housing integration. “Our world is coming crumbling
down. The coons are coming!”17
As Bunker knew, African Americans were becoming much more visible in American culture. While black cultural forms had been prominent
throughout American history, they assumed new popular forms in the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 349

The cast of CBS’s All in the Family in 1973.
Wikimedia.

1970s. Disco offered a new, optimistic, racially integrated pop music.
Musicians such as Aretha Franklin, Andraé Crouch, and “fifth Beatle”
Billy Preston brought their background in church performance to theirown recordings as well as to the work of white artists like the Rolling
Stones, with whom they collaborated. By the end of the decade, African American musical artists had introduced American society to one of
the most significant musical innovations in decades: the Sugarhill Gang’s
1979 record, Rapper’s Delight. A lengthy paean to black machismo, it
became the first rap single to reach the Top 40.18
Just as rap represented a hypermasculine black cultural form, Hollywood popularized its white equivalent. Films such as 1971’s Dirty Harry
captured a darker side of the national mood. Clint Eastwood’s titularcharacter exacted violent justice on clear villains, working within thesort of brutally simplistic ethical standard that appealed to Americans
anxious about a perceived breakdown in “law and order.” (“The film’s
moral position is fascist,” said critic Roger Ebert, who nevertheless gaveit three out of four stars.19)
Perhaps the strongest element fueling American anxiety over “lawand order” was the increasingly visible violence associated with thecivil rights movement. No longer confined to the antiblack terrorism© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

350

chapt er 28

that struck the southern civil rights movement in the 1950s and 1960s,
publicly visible violence now broke out among black Americans in urban
riots and among whites protesting new civil rights programs. In the mid1970s, for instance, protests over the use of busing to overcome residential segregation and truly integrate public schools in Boston washed thecity in racial violence. Stanley Forman’s Pulitzer Prize–winning photo,
The Soiling of Old Glory, famously captured one black teenager, Ted
Landsmark, being attacked by a mob of anti-busing protesters, one ofwhom wielded an American flag.20
Urban riots, though, rather than anti-integration violence, tainted
many white Americans’ perception of the civil rights movement andurban life in general. Civil unrest broke out across the country, but theriots in Watts/Los Angeles (1965), Newark (1967), and Detroit (1967)
were the most shocking. In each, a physical altercation between white
police officers and African Americans spiraled into days of chaos anddestruction. Tens of thousands participated in urban riots. Many looted
and destroyed white-owned business. There were dozens of deaths, tensof millions of dollars in property damage, and an exodus of white capitalthat only further isolated urban poverty.21
In 1967, President Johnson appointed the Kerner Commission toinvestigate the causes of America’s riots. Their report became an unexpected best seller.22 The commission cited black frustration with thehopelessness of poverty as the underlying cause of urban unrest. As
the head of the black National Business League testified, “It is to be
more than naïve—indeed, it is a little short of sheer madness—for anyone to expect the very poorest of the American poor to remain docile
and content in their poverty when television constantly and eternallydangles the opulence of our affluent society before their hungry eyes.”23
A Newark rioter who looted several boxes of shirts and shoes put it
more simply: “They tell us about that pie in the sky but that pie in thesky is too damn high.”24 But white conservatives blasted the conclusion that white racism and economic hopelessness were to blame forthe violence. African Americans wantonly destroying private property,
they said, was not a symptom of America’s intractable racial inequalities but the logical outcome of a liberal culture of permissiveness thattolerated—even encouraged—nihilistic civil disobedience. Many whitemoderates and liberals, meanwhile, saw the explosive violence as a signthat African Americans had rejected the nonviolence of the earlier civilrights movement.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 351

The unrest of the late sixties did, in fact, reflect a real and growing
disillusionment among African Americans with the fate of the civil rights
crusade. In the still-moldering ashes of Jim Crow, African Americans in
Watts and other communities across the country bore the burdens of lifetimes of legally sanctioned discrimination in housing, employment, andcredit. Segregation survived the legal dismantling of Jim Crow. The perseverance into the present day of stark racial and economic segregationin nearly all American cities destroyed any simple distinction between
southern de jure segregation and nonsouthern de facto segregation. Blackneighborhoods became traps that too few could escape.
Political achievements such as the 1964 Civil Rights Act and the 1965
Voting Rights Act were indispensable legal preconditions for social andpolitical equality, but for most, the movement’s long (and now often forgotten) goal of economic justice proved as elusive as ever. “I worked to
get these people the right to eat cheeseburgers,” Martin Luther King Jr.
supposedly said to Bayard Rustin as they toured the devastation in Watts
some years earlier, “and now I’ve got to do something . . . to help themget the money to buy it.”25 What good was the right to enter a store
without money for purchases?

IV. The Crisis of 1968
To Americans in 1968, the country seemed to be unraveling. Martin Luther King Jr. was killed on April 4, 1968. He had been in Memphis tosupport striking sanitation workers. (Prophetically, he had reflected on
his own mortality in a rally the night before. Confident that the civilrights movement would succeed without him, he brushed away fears
of death. “I’ve been to the mountaintop,” he said, “and I’ve seen thepromised land.”). The greatest leader in the American civil rights movement was lost. Riots broke out in over a hundred American cities. Twomonths later, on June 6, Robert F. Kennedy Jr. was killed campaigning
in California. He had represented the last hope of liberal idealists. Angerand disillusionment washed over the country.
As the Vietnam War descended ever deeper into a brutal stalemate
and the Tet Offensive exposed the lies of the Johnson administration,
students shut down college campuses and government facilities. Protests
enveloped the nation.
Protesters converged on the Democratic National Convention in Chicago at the end of August 1968, when a bitterly fractured Democratic© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

352

chapt er 28

Party gathered to assemble a passable platform and nominate a broadly
acceptable presidential candidate. Demonstrators planned massive protests in Chicago’s public spaces. Initial protests were peaceful, but thesituation quickly soured as police issued stern threats and young people
began to taunt and goad officials. Many of the assembled students had
protest and sit-in experiences only in the relative safe havens of college
campuses and were unprepared for Mayor Richard Daley’s aggressive
and heavily armed police force and National Guard troops in full riot
gear. Attendees recounted vicious beatings at the hands of police andGuardsmen, but many young people—convinced that much public sympathy could be won via images of brutality against unarmed protesters—
continued stoking the violence. Clashes spilled from the parks into city
streets, and eventually the smell of tear gas penetrated the upper floorsof the opulent hotels hosting Democratic delegates. Chicago’s brutality
overshadowed the convention and culminated in an internationally televised, violent standoff in front of the Hilton Hotel. “The whole world iswatching,” the protesters chanted. The Chicago riots encapsulated thegrowing sense that chaos now governed American life.
For many sixties idealists, the violence of 1968 represented the deathof a dream. Disorder and chaos overshadowed hope and progress. And
for conservatives, it was confirmation of all of their fears and hesitations.
Americans of 1968 turned their back on hope. They wanted peace. They
wanted stability. They wanted “law and order.”V. The Rise and Fall of Richard Nixon
Beleaguered by an unpopular war, inflation, and domestic unrest, President Johnson opted against reelection in March 1968—an unprecedented
move in modern American politics. The forthcoming presidential election
was shaped by Vietnam and the aforementioned unrest as much as by
the campaigns of Democratic nominee Vice President Hubert Humphrey,
Republican Richard Nixon, and third-party challenger George Wallace,the infamous segregationist governor of Alabama. The Democratic Party
was in disarray in the spring of 1968, when senators Eugene McCarthy
and Robert Kennedy challenged Johnson’s nomination and the president
responded with his shocking announcement. Nixon’s candidacy was
aided further by riots that broke out across the country after the assassination of Martin Luther King Jr. and the shock and dismay experienced
after the slaying of Robert Kennedy in June. The Republican nominee’s© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 353

campaign was defined by shrewd maintenance of his public appearances
and a pledge to restore peace and prosperity to what he called “the silent
center; the millions of people in the middle of the political spectrum.”
This campaign for the “silent majority” was carefully calibrated to attract
suburban Americans by linking liberals with violence and protest andrioting. Many embraced Nixon’s message; a September 1968 poll foundthat 80 percent of Americans believed public order had “broken down.”
Meanwhile, Humphrey struggled to distance himself from Johnson
and maintain working-class support in northern cities, where voterswere drawn to Wallace’s appeals for law and order and a rejection ofcivil rights. The vice president had a final surge in northern cities withthe aid of union support, but it was not enough to best Nixon’s campaign.
The final tally was close: Nixon won 43.3 percent of the popular vote(31,783,783), narrowly besting Humphrey’s 42.7 percent (31,266,006).
Wallace, meanwhile, carried five states in the Deep South, and his 13.5
percent (9,906,473) of the popular vote constituted an impressive showing for a third-party candidate. The Electoral College vote was more decisive for Nixon; he earned 302 electoral votes, while Humphrey andWallace received only 191 and 45 votes, respectively. Although Republicans won a few seats, Democrats retained control of both the House and
Senate and made Nixon the first president in 120 years to enter officewith the opposition party controlling both houses.
Once installed in the White House, Richard Nixon focused his energies on American foreign policy, publicly announcing the Nixon Doctrine

Richard Nixon
campaigns in
Philadelphia
during the 1968
presidential election. National
Archives.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

354

chapt er 28

in 1969. On the one hand, Nixon asserted the supremacy of American
democratic capitalism and conceded that the United States would continue supporting its allies financially. However, he denounced previous
administrations’ willingness to commit American forces to Third World
conflicts and warned other states to assume responsibility for their own
defense. He was turning America away from the policy of active, anticommunist containment, and toward a new strategy of détente.26
Promoted by national security advisor and eventual secretary of state
Henry Kissinger, détente sought to stabilize the international system bythawing relations with Cold War rivals and bilaterally freezing arms levels.
Taking advantage of tensions between communist China and the Soviet
Union, Nixon pursued closer relations with both in order to de-­escalate
tensions and strengthen the United States’ position relative to each. The
strategy seemed to work. Nixon became the first American president tovisit communist China (1971) and the first since Franklin Roosevelt tovisit the Soviet Union (1972). Direct diplomacy and cultural exchange
programs with both countries grew and culminated with the formal normalization of U.S.-Chinese relations and the signing of two U.S.-Soviet
arms agreements: the antiballistic missile (ABM) treaty and the Strategic
Arms Limitations Treaty (SALT I). By 1973, after almost thirty years ofCold War tension, peaceful coexistence suddenly seemed possible.
Soon, though, a fragile calm gave way again to Cold War instability. In November 1973, Nixon appeared on television to inform Americans that energy had become “a serious national problem” and that theUnited States was “heading toward the most acute shortages of energy
since World War II.”27 The previous month Arab members of the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC), a cartel of theworld’s leading oil producers, embargoed oil exports to the United States
in retaliation for American intervention in the Middle East. The embargo
launched the first U.S. energy crisis. By the end of 1973, the global priceof oil had quadrupled.28 Drivers waited in line for hours to fill up theircars. Individual gas stations ran out of gas. American motorists worried
that oil could run out at any moment. A Pennsylvania man died when his
emergency stash of gasoline ignited in his trunk and backseat.29 OPEC
rescinded its embargo in 1974, but the economic damage had been done.
The crisis extended into the late 1970s.
Like the Vietnam War, the oil crisis showed that small countries could
still hurt the United States. At a time of anxiety about the nation’s future,
Vietnam and the energy crisis accelerated Americans’ disenchantment© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 355

with the United States’ role in the world and the efficacy and quality of its
leaders. Furthermore, government scandals in the 1970s and early 1980s
sapped trust in America’s public institutions. In 1971, the Nixon administration tried unsuccessfully to sue the New York Times and the Washington Post to prevent the publication of the Pentagon Papers, a confidential
and damning history of U.S. involvement in Vietnam commissioned by
the Defense Department and later leaked. The papers showed how presidents from Truman to Johnson repeatedly deceived the public on the
war’s scope and direction.30 Nixon faced a rising tide of congressional
opposition to the war, and Congress asserted unprecedented oversight ofAmerican war spending. In 1973, it passed the War Powers Resolution,
which dramatically reduced the president’s ability to wage war without
congressional consent.
However, no scandal did more to unravel public trust than Watergate. On June 17, 1972, five men were arrested inside the offices of the
Democratic National Committee (DNC) in the Watergate Complex in
downtown Washington, D.C. After being tipped off by a security guard,
police found the men attempting to install sophisticated bugging equipment. One of those arrested was a former CIA employee then working asa security aide for the Nixon administration’s Committee to Re-elect the
President (lampooned as “CREEP”).
While there is no direct evidence that Nixon ordered the Watergate
break-in, he had been recorded in conversation with his chief of staff
requesting that the DNC chairman be illegally wiretapped to obtain thenames of the committee’s financial supporters. The names could then be
given to the Justice Department and the Internal Revenue Service (IRS)
to conduct spurious investigations into their personal affairs. Nixon was
also recorded ordering his chief of staff to break into the offices of the
Brookings Institution and take files relating to the war in Vietnam, saying, “Goddammit, get in and get those files. Blow the safe and get it.”31
Whether or not the president ordered the Watergate break-in, theWhite House launched a massive cover-up. Administration officials ordered the CIA to halt the FBI investigation and paid hush money to theburglars and White House aides. Nixon distanced himself from the incident publicly and went on to win a landslide election victory in November
1972. But, thanks largely to two persistent journalists at the Washington
Post, Bob Woodward and Carl Bernstein, information continued to surface that tied the burglaries ever closer to the CIA, the FBI, and the WhiteHouse. The Senate held televised hearings. Citing ­executive privilege,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

356

chapt er 28

Nixon refused to comply with orders to produce tapes from the WhiteHouse’s secret recording system. In July 1974, the House Judiciary Committee approved a bill to impeach the president. Nixon resigned before
the full House could vote on impeachment. He became the first and only
American president to resign from office.32
Vice President Gerald Ford was sworn in as his successor and a month
later granted Nixon a full presidential pardon. Nixon disappeared frompublic life without ever publicly apologizing, accepting responsibility, or
facing charges.

VI. Deindustrialization and the Rise of the Sun Belt

Abandoned
Youngstown
factory. Stuart
Spivack, via Flickr.

American workers had made substantial material gains throughout the
1940s and 1950s. During the so-called Great Compression, Americans of
all classes benefited from postwar prosperity. Segregation and discrimination perpetuated racial and gender inequalities, but unemployment
continually fell and a highly progressive tax system and powerful unions
lowered general income inequality as working-class standards of living
nearly doubled between 1947 and 1973.
But general prosperity masked deeper vulnerabilities. Perhaps no casebetter illustrates the decline of American industry and the creation of an
intractable urban crisis than Detroit. Detroit boomed during World War
II. When auto manufacturers like Ford and General Motors converted
their assembly lines to build machines for the American war effort, observers dubbed the city the “arsenal of democracy.”© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 357

After the war, however, automobile firms began closing urban factories and moving to outlying suburbs. Several factors fueled the process.
Some cities partly deindustrialized themselves. Municipal governments
in San Francisco, St. Louis, and Philadelphia banished light industry to
make room for high-rise apartments and office buildings. Mechanization also contributed to the decline of American labor. A manager at a
newly automated Ford engine plant in postwar Cleveland captured theinterconnections between these concerns when he glibly noted to United
Automobile Workers (UAW) president Walter Reuther, “You are goingto have trouble collecting union dues from all of these machines.”33
More importantly, however, manufacturing firms sought to reduce laborcosts by automating, downsizing, and relocating to areas with “businessfriendly” policies like low tax rates, anti-union right-to-work laws, andlow wages.
Detroit began to bleed industrial jobs. Between 1950 and 1958,
Chrysler, which actually kept more jobs in Detroit than either Ford or
General Motors, cut its Detroit production workforce in half. In theyears between 1953 and 1960, East Detroit lost ten plants and overseventy-one thousand jobs.34 Because Detroit was a single-industry city,
decisions made by the Big Three automakers reverberated across thecity’s industrial landscape. When auto companies mechanized or moved
their operations, ancillary suppliers like machine tool companies were
cut out of the supply chain and likewise forced to cut their own workforce. Between 1947 and 1977, the number of manufacturing firms in thecity dropped from over three thousand to fewer than two thousand. The
labor force was gutted. Manufacturing jobs fell from 338,400 to 153,000
over the same three decades.35
Industrial restructuring decimated all workers, but deindustrialization
fell heaviest on the city’s African Americans. Although many m­ iddle-classblack Detroiters managed to move out of the city’s ghettos, by 1960,
19.7 percent of black autoworkers in Detroit were unemployed, compared to just 5.8 percent of whites.36 Overt discrimination in housing andemployment had for decades confined African Americans to segregatedneighborhoods where they were forced to pay exorbitant rents for slum
housing. Subject to residential intimidation and cut off from traditionalsources of credit, few could afford to follow industry as it left the city forthe suburbs and other parts of the country, especially the South. Segregation and discrimination kept them stuck where there were fewer andfewer jobs. Over time, Detroit devolved into a mass of unemployment,
crime, and crippled municipal resources. When riots rocked ­Detroit in© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

358

chapt er 28

1967, 25 to 30 percent of black residents between ages eighteen andtwenty-four were unemployed.37
Deindustrialization in Detroit and elsewhere also went hand in handwith the long assault on unionization that began in the aftermath ofWorld War II. Lacking the political support they had enjoyed during
the New Deal years, labor organizations such as the CIO and the UAW
shifted tactics and accepted labor-management accords in which cooperation, not agitation, was the strategic objective.
This accord held mixed results for workers. On the one hand, management encouraged employee loyalty through privatized welfare systems
that offered workers health benefits and pensions. Grievance arbitrationand collective bargaining also provided workers official channels throughwhich to criticize policies and push for better conditions. At the sametime, bureaucracy and corruption increasingly weighed down unions andalienated them from workers and the general public. Union management
came to hold primary influence in what was ostensibly a “pluralistic”
power relationship. Workers—though still willing to protest—by necessity pursued a more moderate agenda compared to the union workersof the 1930s and 1940s. Conservative politicians meanwhile seized on
popular suspicions of Big Labor, stepping up their criticism of union
leadership and positioning themselves as workers’ true ally.
While conservative critiques of union centralization did much toundermine the labor movement, labor’s decline also coincided with
ideological changes within American liberalism. Labor and its politicalconcerns undergirded Roosevelt’s New Deal coalition, but by the 1960s,
many liberals had forsaken working-class politics. More and more saw
poverty as stemming not from structural flaws in the national economy,
but from the failure of individuals to take full advantage of the Americansystem. Roosevelt’s New Deal might have attempted to rectify unemployment with government jobs, but Johnson’s Great Society and its imitators funded government-sponsored job training, even in places without
available jobs. Union leaders in the 1950s and 1960s typically supported
such programs and philosophies.
Internal racism also weakened the labor movement. While national
CIO leaders encouraged black unionization in the 1930s, white workers
on the ground often opposed the integrated shop. In Detroit and elsewhere after World War II, white workers participated in “hate strikes”
where they walked off the job rather than work with African Americans.
White workers similarly opposed residential integration, fearing, among
other things, that black newcomers would lower property values.38© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 359

By the mid-1970s, widely shared postwar prosperity leveled off andbegan to retreat. Growing international competition, technological inefficiency, and declining productivity gains stunted working- and middleclass wages. As the country entered recession, wages decreased and thepay gap between workers and management expanded, reversing three
decades of postwar contraction. At the same time, dramatic increases inmass incarceration coincided with the deregulation of prison labor toallow more private companies access to cheaper inmate labor, a process
that, whatever its aggregate impact, impacted local communities where
free jobs were moved into prisons. The tax code became less progressive
and labor lost its foothold in the marketplace. Unions represented a thirdof the workforce in the 1950s, but only one in ten workers belonged to
one as of 2015.39
Geography dictated much of labor’s fall, as American firms fled prolabor states in the 1970s and 1980s. Some went overseas in the wake of
new trade treaties to exploit low-wage foreign workers, but others turned
to anti-union states in the South and West stretching from Virginia to
Texas to Southern California. Factories shuttered in the North and Midwest, leading commentators by the 1980s to dub America’s former industrial heartland the Rust Belt. With this, they contrasted the prosperous
and dynamic Sun Belt.

Urban decay confronted Americans of the 1960s and 1970s. As the economy sagged and deindustrialization
hit much of the country, Americans increasingly associated major cities with poverty and crime. In this1973 photo, two subway riders sit amid a graffitied subway car in New York City. National Archives.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

360

chapt er 28

Coined by journalist Kevin Phillips in 1969, the term Sun Belt refers
to the swath of southern and western states that saw unprecedented economic, industrial, and demographic growth after World War II.40 During
the New Deal, President Franklin D. Roosevelt declared the American
South “the nation’s No. 1 economic problem” and injected massive federal subsidies, investments, and military spending into the region. During
the Cold War, Sun Belt politicians lobbied hard for military installations
and government contracts for their states.41
Meanwhile, southern states’ hostility toward organized labor beckoned corporate leaders. The Taft-Hartley Act in 1947 facilitated southernstates’ frontal assault on unions. Thereafter, cheap, nonunionized labor,
low wages, and lax regulations pulled northern industries away from theRust Belt. Skilled northern workers followed the new jobs southward
and westward, lured by cheap housing and a warm climate slowly mademore tolerable by modern air conditioning.
The South attracted business but struggled to share their profits.
Middle-class whites grew prosperous, but often these were recent transplants, not native southerners. As the cotton economy shed farmers andlaborers, poor white and black southerners found themselves mostly excluded from the fruits of the Sun Belt. Public investments were scarce.
White southern politicians channeled federal funding away from primary and secondary public education and toward high-tech industry and­university-level research. The Sun Belt inverted Rust Belt realities: theSouth and West had growing numbers of high-skill, high-wage jobs butlacked the social and educational infrastructure needed to train nativepoor and middle-class workers for those jobs.
Regardless, more jobs meant more people, and by 1972, southern andwestern Sun Belt states had more electoral votes than the Northeast andMidwest. This gap continues to grow.42 Though the region’s economic
and political ascendance was a product of massive federal spending, New
Right politicians who constructed an identity centered on “small government” found their most loyal support in the Sun Belt. These businessfriendly politicians successfully synthesized conservative Protestantism
and free market ideology, creating a potent new political force. Housewives organized reading groups in their homes, and from those reading groups sprouted new organized political activities. Prosperous andmobile, old and new suburbanites gravitated toward an individualistic
vision of free enterprise espoused by the Republican Party. Some, especially those most vocally anticommunist, joined groups like the Young© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 361

Americans for Freedom and the John Birch Society. Less radical suburban voters, however, still gravitated toward the more moderate brand ofconservatism promoted by Richard Nixon.

VII. The Politics of Love, Sex, and Gender
The sexual revolution continued into the 1970s. Many Americans—­
feminists, gay men, lesbians, and straight couples—challenged strict gender roles and rejected the rigidity of the nuclear family. Cohabitation
without marriage spiked, straight couples married later (if at all), anddivorce levels climbed. Sexuality, decoupled from marriage and procreation, became for many not only a source of personal fulfillment but aworthy political cause.
At the turn of the decade, sexuality was considered a private matteryet rigidly regulated by federal, state, and local law. Statutes typicallydefined legitimate sexual expression within the confines of patriarchal,procreative marriage. Interracial marriage, for instance, was illegal inmany states until 1967 and remained largely taboo long after. Same-sex
intercourse and cross-dressing were criminalized in most states, and gay

Demonstrators
opposed to the
Equal Rights
Amendment
protest in front of
the White Housein 1977. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

362

chapt er 28

men, lesbians, and transgender people were vulnerable to violent police
enforcement as well as discrimination in housing and employment.
Two landmark legal rulings in 1973 established the battle lines for the“sex wars” of the 1970s. First, the Supreme Court’s 7–2 ruling in Roe
v. Wade (1973) struck down a Texas law that prohibited abortion in allcases when a mother’s life was not in danger. The Court’s decision built
on precedent from a 1965 ruling that, in striking down a Connecticut
law prohibiting married couples from using birth control, recognized aconstitutional “right to privacy.”43 In Roe, the Court reasoned that “thisright of privacy . . . is broad enough to encompass a woman’s decision
whether or not to terminate her pregnancy.”44 The Court held that states
could not interfere with a woman’s right to an abortion during the firsttrimester of pregnancy and could only fully prohibit abortions during thethird trimester.
Other Supreme Court rulings, however, found that sexual privacy
could be sacrificed for the sake of “public” good. Miller v. California(1973), a case over the unsolicited mailing of sexually explicit advertisements for illustrated “adult” books, held that the First Amendment did
not protect “obscene” material, defined by the Court as anything withsexual appeal that lacked, “serious literary, artistic, political, or scientific value.”45 The ruling expanded states’ abilities to pass laws prohibiting materials like hard-core pornography. However, uneven enforcement
allowed pornographic theaters and sex shops to proliferate despite whatever laws states had on the books. Americans debated whether these represented the pinnacle of sexual liberation or, as poet and lesbian feminist
Rita Mae Brown suggested, “the ultimate conclusion of sexist logic.”46
Of more tangible concern for most women, though, was the right toequal employment access. Thanks partly to the work of black feminists
like Pauli Murray, Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act banned employment discrimination based on sex, in addition to race, color, religion, andnational origin. “If sex is not included,” she argued in a memorandum
sent to members of Congress, “the civil rights bill would be including
only half of the Negroes.”47 Like most laws, Title VII’s full impact cameabout slowly, as women across the nation cited it to litigate and pressure employers to offer them equal opportunities compared to those they
offered to men. For one, employers in the late sixties and seventies stillviewed certain occupations as inherently feminine or masculine. NOW
organized airline workers against a major company’s sexist ad campaignthat showed female flight attendants wearing buttons that read, “I’m

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 363

Debbie, Fly Me” or “I’m Cheryl, Fly Me.” Actual female flight attendants
were required to wear similar buttons.48 Other women sued to gain accessto traditionally male jobs like factory work. Protests prompted the Equal
Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) to issue a more robust
set of protections between 1968 and 1971. Though advancement camehaltingly and partially, women used these protections to move eventually
into traditional male occupations, politics, and corporate management.
The battle for sexual freedom was not just about the right to get into
places, though. It was also about the right to get out of them—specifically,
unhappy households and marriages. Between 1959 and 1979, the American divorce rate more than doubled. By the early 1980s, nearly half of all
American marriages ended in divorce.49 The stigma attached to divorce
evaporated and a growing sense of sexual and personal freedom motivated individuals to leave abusive or unfulfilling marriages. Legal changes
also promoted higher divorce rates. Before 1969, most states required one
spouse to prove that the other was guilty of a specific offense, such asadultery. The difficulty of getting a divorce under this system encouraged
widespread lying in divorce courts. Even couples desiring an amicablesplit were sometimes forced to claim that one spouse had cheated on theother even if neither (or both) had. Other couples temporarily relocatedto states with more lenient divorce laws, such as Nevada.50 Widespreadrecognition of such practices prompted reforms. In 1969, California adopted the first no-fault divorce law. By the end of the 1970s, almost every
state had adopted some form of no-fault divorce. The new laws allowed
for divorce on the basis of “irreconcilable differences,” even if only one
party felt that he or she could not stay in the marriage.51
Gay men and women, meanwhile, negotiated a harsh world thatstigmatized homosexuality as a mental illness or an immoral depravity.
Building on postwar efforts by gay rights organizations to bring homosexuality into the mainstream of American culture, young gay activistsof the late sixties and seventies began to challenge what they saw as theconservative gradualism of the “homophile” movement. Inspired by theburgeoning radicalism of the Black Power movement, the New Left protests of the Vietnam War, and the counterculture movement for sexual
freedom, gay and lesbian activists agitated for a broader set of sexual
rights that emphasized an assertive notion of liberation rooted not inmainstream assimilation but in pride of sexual difference.
Perhaps no single incident did more to galvanize gay and lesbianactivism than the 1969 uprising at the Stonewall Inn in New York City’s© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

364

chapt er 28

The window under the Stonewall Inn sign
reads: We homosexuals plead with ourpeople to please help maintain peaceful andquiet conduct on the streets of the Village–
Mattachine. Photograph, 1969. Wikimedia.

Greenwich Village. Police regularly raided gay bars and hangouts. But
when police raided the Stonewall in June 1969, the bar patrons protested
and sparked a multiday street battle that catalyzed a national movement
for gay liberation. Seemingly overnight, calls for homophile respectability were replaced with chants of “Gay Power!”52
In the following years, gay Americans gained unparalleled access to
private and public spaces. Gay activists increasingly attacked cultural
norms that demanded they keep their sexuality hidden. Citing statistics
that sexual secrecy contributed to stigma and suicide, gay activists urged
people to come out and embrace their sexuality. A step towards thenormalization of homosexuality occurred in 1973, when the American
Psychiatric Association stopped classifying homosexuality as a mental
illness. Pressure mounted on politicians. In 1982, Wisconsin became thefirst state to ban discrimination based on sexual orientation. More thaneighty cities and nine states followed suit over the following decade.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 365

But progress proceeded unevenly, and gay Americans continued to suffer
hardships from a hostile culture.
Like all social movements, the sexual revolution was not free of division. Transgender people were often banned from participating in Gay
Pride rallies and lesbian feminist conferences. They, in turn, mobilized
to fight the high incidence of rape, abuse, and murder of transgenderpeople. A 1971 newsletter denounced the notion that transgender people
were mentally ill and highlighted the particular injustices they faced in andout of the gay community, declaring, “All power to Trans Liberation.”53
As events in the 1970s broadened sexual freedoms and promoted
greater gender equality, so too did they generate sustained and organized
opposition. Evangelical Christians and other moral conservatives, forinstance, mobilized to reverse gay victories. In 1977, activists in DadeCounty, Florida, used the slogan “Save Our Children” to overturn an
ordinance banning discrimination based on sexual orientation.54 A leaderof the ascendant religious right, Jerry Falwell, said in 1980, “It is now
time to take a stand on certain moral issues. . . . We must stand against
the Equal Rights Amendment, the feminist revolution, and the homosexual revolution. We must have a revival in this country.”55
Much to Falwell’s delight, conservative Americans did, in fact, standagainst and defeat the Equal Rights Amendment (ERA), their most stunning social victory of the 1970s. Versions of the amendment—which declared, “Equality of rights under the law shall not be denied or abridged
by the United States or any state on account of sex”—were introduced
to Congress each year since 1923. It finally passed amid the upheavals of the sixties and seventies and went to the states for ratification in
March 1972.56 With high approval ratings, the ERA seemed destined topass swiftly through state legislatures and become the Twenty-Seventh
Amendment. Hawaii ratified the amendment the same day it cleared
Congress. Within a year, thirty states had done so. But then the amendment stalled. It took years for more states to pass it. In 1977, Indiana
became the thirty-fifth and final state to ratify.57
By 1977, anti-ERA forces had successfully turned the political tide
against the amendment. At a time when many women shared Betty
Friedan’s frustration that society seemed to confine women to the roleof homemaker, Phyllis Schlafly’s STOP ERA organization (“Stop Taking
Our Privileges”) trumpeted the value and advantages of being a homemaker and mother.58 Marshaling the support of evangelical Christians
and other religious conservatives, Schlafly worked tirelessly to stifle the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

366

chapt er 28

ERA. She lobbied legislators and organized counter-rallies to ensure that
Americans heard “from the millions of happily married women who
believe in the laws which protect the family and require the husband
to support his wife and children.”59 The amendment needed only three
more states for ratification. It never got them. In 1982, the time limit for
ratification expired—and along with it, the amendment.60
The failed battle for the ERA uncovered the limits of the feminist
crusade. And it illustrated the women’s movement’s inherent incapacity
to represent fully the views of 50 percent of the country’s population, a
population riven by class differences, racial disparities, and cultural andreligious divisions.

VIII. The Misery Index
Although Nixon eluded prosecution, Watergate continued to weigh on
voters’ minds. It netted big congressional gains for Democrats in the 1974
midterm elections, and Ford’s pardon damaged his chances in 1976. Former one-term Georgia governor Jimmy Carter, a nuclear physicist andpeanut farmer who represented the rising generation of younger, raciallySupporters rally with pumpkins carved in
the likeness of President Jimmy Carter in
Polk County, Florida, in October 1980. State
Library and Archives of Florida via Flickr.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 367

liberal “New South” Democrats, captured the Democratic nomination.
Carter did not identify with either his party’s liberal or conservative wing;
his appeal was more personal and moral than political. He ran on no
great political issues, letting his background as a hardworking, honest,
southern Baptist navy man ingratiate him to voters around the country,
especially in his native South, where support for Democrats had waveredin the wake of the civil rights movement. Carter’s wholesome image waspainted in direct contrast to the memory of Nixon, and by association
with the man who pardoned him. Carter sealed his party’s nomination inJune and won a close victory in November.61
When Carter took the oath of office on January 20, 1977, however,
he became president of a nation in the midst of economic turmoil. Oilshocks, inflation, stagnant growth, unemployment, and sinking wages
weighed down the nation’s economy. Some of these problems were traceable to the end of World War II when American leaders erected a complex
system of trade policies to help rebuild the shattered economies of Western Europe and Asia. After the war, American diplomats and politiciansused trade relationships to win influence and allies around the globe.
They saw the economic health of their allies, particularly West Germany

The 1979 energy
crisis panicked
consumers andreminded manyof the 1973 oilshortage, prompting Americans tobuy oil in hugequantities. Libraryof Congress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

368

chapt er 28

and Japan, as a crucial bulwark against the expansion of communism.
Americans encouraged these nations to develop vibrant export-oriented
economies and tolerated restrictions on U.S. imports.
This came at great cost to the United States. As the American economy stalled, Japan and West Germany soared and became major forcesin the global production for autos, steel, machine tools, and electrical
products. By 1970, the United States began to run massive trade deficits.
The value of American exports dropped and the prices of its imports
skyrocketed. Coupled with the huge cost of the Vietnam War and the riseof oil-producing states in the Middle East, growing trade deficits sapped
the United States’ dominant position in the global economy.
American leaders didn’t know how to respond. After a series of negotiations with leaders from France, Great Britain, West Germany, andJapan in 1970 and 1971, the Nixon administration allowed these risingindustrial nations to continue flouting the principles of free trade. They
maintained trade barriers that sheltered their domestic markets from foreign competition while at the same time exporting growing amounts ofgoods to the United States. By 1974, in response to U.S. complaints andtheir own domestic economic problems, many of these industrial nations
overhauled their protectionist practices but developed even subtler methods (such as state subsidies for key industries) to nurture their economies.
The result was that Carter, like Ford before him, presided over a hitherto unimagined economic dilemma: the simultaneous onset of inflationand economic stagnation, a combination popularized as stagflation.62
Neither Ford nor Carter had the means or ambition to protect American
jobs and goods from foreign competition. As firms and financial institutions invested, sold goods, and manufactured in new rising economies
like Mexico, Taiwan, Japan, Brazil, and elsewhere, American politicians
allowed them to sell their often cheaper products in the United States.
As American officials institutionalized this new unfettered global
trade, many American manufacturers perceived only one viable path tosustained profitability: moving overseas, often by establishing foreignsubsidiaries or partnering with foreign firms. Investment capital, especially in manufacturing, fled the United States looking for overseas
investments and hastened the decline in the productivity of Americanindustry.
During the 1976 presidential campaign, Carter had touted the “misery index,” the simple addition of the unemployment rate to the inflation
rate, as an indictment of Gerald Ford and Republican rule. But Carter© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 369

failed to slow the unraveling of the American economy, and the stubborn
and confounding rise of both unemployment and inflation damaged his
presidency.
Just as Carter failed to offer or enact policies to stem the unravelingof the American economy, his idealistic vision of human rights–based
foreign policy crumbled. He had not made human rights a central theme
in his campaign, but in May 1977 he declared his wish to move awayfrom a foreign policy in which “inordinate fear of communism” caused
American leaders to “adopt the flawed and erroneous principles andtactics of our adversaries.” Carter proposed instead “a policy based on
constant decency in its values and on optimism in our historical vision.”63
Carter’s human rights policy achieved real victories: the United Stateseither reduced or eliminated aid to American-supported right-wing dictators guilty of extreme human rights abuses in places like South Korea,
Argentina, and the Philippines. In September 1977, Carter negotiatedthe return to Panama of the Panama Canal, which cost him enormous
political capital in the United States.64 A year later, in September 1978,
Carter negotiated a peace treaty between Israeli prime minister Menachem Begin and Egyptian president Anwar Sadat. The Camp David Accords—named for the president’s rural Maryland retreat, where thirteendays of secret negotiations were held—represented the first time an Arabstate had recognized Israel, and the first time Israel promised Palestineself-government. The accords had limits, for both Israel and the Palestinians, but they represented a major foreign policy coup for Carter.65
And yet Carter’s dreams of a human rights–based foreign policy
crumbled before the Cold War and the realities of American politics. The
United States continued to provide military and financial support for
dictatorial regimes vital to American interests, such as the oil-rich state of
Iran. When the President and First Lady Rosalynn Carter visited Tehran,Iran, in January 1978, the president praised the nation’s dictatorial ruler,
Shah Reza Pahlavi, and remarked on the “respect and the admiration andlove” Iranians had for their leader.66 When the shah was deposed in November 1979, revolutionaries stormed the American embassy in Tehran
and took fifty-two Americans hostage. Americans not only experienced
another oil crisis as Iran’s oil fields shut down, they watched America’s
news programs, for 444 days, remind them of the hostages and America’s
new global impotence. Carter couldn’t win their release. A failed rescue
mission only ended in the deaths of eight American servicemen. Alreadybeset with a punishing economy, Carter’s popularity plummeted.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

370

chapt er 28

Carter’s efforts to ease the Cold War by achieving a new nuclear arms
control agreement disintegrated under domestic opposition from conservative Cold War hawks such as Ronald Reagan, who accused Carter of
weakness. A month after the Soviets invaded Afghanistan in December
1979, a beleaguered Carter committed the United States to defending its“interests” in the Middle East against Soviet incursions, declaring that“an assault [would] be repelled by any means necessary, including military force.” The Carter Doctrine not only signaled Carter’s ambivalentcommitment to de-escalation and human rights, it testified to his increasingly desperate presidency.67
The collapse of American manufacturing, the stubborn rise of inflation, the sudden impotence of American foreign policy, and a culture evermore divided: the sense of unraveling pervaded the nation. “I want to talkto you right now about a fundamental threat to American democracy,”
Jimmy Carter said in a televised address on July 15, 1979. “The threat isnearly invisible in ordinary ways. It is a crisis of confidence. It is a crisis
that strikes at the very heart and soul and spirit of our national will.”

IX. Conclusion
Though American politics moved right after Lyndon Johnson’s administration, Nixon’s 1968 election was no conservative counterrevolution.
American politics and society remained in flux throughout the 1970s.
American politicians on the right and the left pursued relatively moderate courses compared to those in the preceding and succeeding decades.
But a groundswell of anxieties and angers brewed beneath the surface.
The world’s greatest military power had floundered in Vietnam and an
American president stood flustered by Middle Eastern revolutionaries.
The cultural clashes from the sixties persisted and accelerated. While cities burned, a more liberal sexuality permeated American culture. The
economy crashed, leaving America’s cities prone before poverty andcrime and its working class gutted by deindustrialization and globalization. American weakness was everywhere. And so, by 1980, many
Americans—especially white middle- and upper-class Americans—felt anostalgic desire for simpler times and simpler answers to the frustratingly complex geopolitical, social, and economic problems crippling thenation. The appeal of Carter’s soft drawl and Christian humility had signaled this yearning, but his utter failure to stop the unraveling of American power and confidence opened the way for a new movement, one withnew personalities and a new conservatism—one that promised to undo

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 371

the damage and restore the United States to its own nostalgic image of
itself.

X. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Edwin Breeden, with content contributions by Seth
Anziska, Jeremiah Bauer, Edwin Breeden, Kyle Burke, Alexandra Evans, SeanFear, Anne Gray Fischer, Destin Jenkins, Matthew Kahn, Suzanne Kahn, Brooke
Lamperd, Katherine McGarr, Matthew Pressman, Adam Parsons, Emily Prifogle,
John Rosenberg, Brandy Thomas Wells, and Naomi R. Williams.
Recommended citation: Seth Anziska et al., “The Unraveling,” Edwin
Breeden, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
Notes to Ch a p ter 28
1. Acts included Santana; Jefferson Airplane; Crosby, Stills, Nash & Young;and the Flying Burrito Brothers. The Grateful Dead were scheduled but refused
to play.
2. Bruce J. Schulman, The Seventies: The Great Shift in American Culture,
Society, and Politics (Cambridge, MA: Da Capo Press, 2002), 18.
3. Allen J. Matusow, The Unraveling of America: A History of Liberalism
in the 1960s, updated ed. (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 2009), 304–305.
4. Owen Gleibman, “Altamont at 45: The Most Dangerous Rock Concert,” BBC, December 5, 2014, http://​www​.bbc​.com​/culture​/story​/2014​1205​-did​-altamont​-end​-the​-60s.
5. Jeff Leen, “The Vietnam Protests: When Worlds Collided,” Washington
Post, September 27, 1999, http://​www​.washingtonpost​.com​/wp​-srv​/local​/2000​/vietnam092799​.htm.
6. Michael J. Arlen, Living-Room War (New York: Viking, 1969).
7. Tom Engelhardt, The End of Victory Culture: Cold War America and theDisillusioning of a Generation, revised ed. (Amherst: University of Massachusetts
Press, 2007), 190.
8. Mitchel P. Roth, Historical Dictionary of War Journalism (Westport, CT:
Greenwood, 1997), 105.
9. David L. Anderson, The Columbia Guide to the Vietnam War (New York:
Columbia University Press, 2002), 109.
10. Guenter Lewy, America in Vietnam (New York: Oxford University Press,
1978), 325–326.
11. Lyndon B. Johnson, “Address to the Nation Announcing Steps to Limit
the War in Vietnam and Reporting His Decision Not to Seek Reelection,” March
31, 1968, Lyndon Baines Johnson Library, http://​www​.lbjlib​.utexas​.edu​/johnson​/archives​.hom​/speeches​.hom​/680331​.asp.
12. Lewy, America in Vietnam, 164–169; Henry Kissinger, Ending the Vietnam War: A History of America’s Involvement in and Extrication from the Vietnam War (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2003), 81–82.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

372

chapt er 28

13. Richard Nixon, “Address to the Nation Announcing Conclusion of an
Agreement on Ending the War and Restoring Peace in Vietnam,” January 23,
1973, American Presidency Project, http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​3808.
14. Richard Nixon, quoted in Walter Isaacson, Kissinger: A Biography (NewYork: Simon and Schuster, 2005), 163–164.
15. Geneva Jussi Hanhimaki, The Flawed Architect: Henry Kissinger andAmerican Foreign Policy (New York: Oxford University Press, 2004), 257.
16. Cohen, Consumer’s Republic.
17. Quotes from “Lionel Moves into the Neighborhood,” All in the Family, season 1, episode 8 (1971), http://​www​.tvrage​.com​/all​-in​-the​-family​/episodes​/5587.
18. Jim Dawson and Steve Propes, 45 RPM: The History, Heroes and Villains of a Pop Music Revolution (San Francisco: Backbeat Books, 2003), 120.
19. Roger Ebert, “Review of Dirty Harry,” January 1, 1971, http://​www​.rogerebert​.com​/reviews​/dirty​-harry​-1971.
20. Ronald P. Formisano, Boston Against Busing: Race, Class, and Ethnicity
in the 1960s and 1970s (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1991).
21. Michael W. Flamm, Law and Order: Street Crime, Civil Unrest, and the
Crisis of Liberalism in the 1960s (New York: Columbia University Press, 2005),
58–59, 85–93.
22. Thomas J. Sugrue, Sweet Land of Liberty: The Forgotten Struggle for
Civil Rights in the North (New York: Random House, 2008), 348.
23. Cohen, Consumer’s Republic, 373.
24. Ibid., 376.
25. Martin Luther King, quoted in David J. Garrow, Bearing the Cross:Martin Luther King Jr. and the Southern Christian Leadership Conference (NewYork: Morrow, 1986), 439.
26. Richard M. Nixon, “Address to the Nation on the War in Vietnam,”
November 3, 1969, American Experience, http://​www​.pbs​.org​/wgbh​/ameri​can​ex​peri​ence​/features​/primary​-resources​/nixon​-vietnam/.
27. Richard Nixon, “Address to the Nation about Policies to Deal with Energy Shortages,” November 7, 1973, American Presidency Project, http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​4034.
28. Office of the Historian, “Oil Embargo, 1973–1974,” U.S. Department ofState, https://​history​.state​.gov​/milestones​/1969​-1976​/oil​-embargo.
29. “Gas Explodes in Man’s Car,” Uniontown (PA) Morning Herald, December 5, 1973, p. 12.
30. Larry H. Addington, America’s War in Vietnam: A Short Narrative History (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 2000), 140–141.
31. Schulman, Seventies, 44.
32. “Executive Privilege,” in John J. Patrick, Richard M. Pious, and Donald
A. Ritchie, The Oxford Guide to the United States Government (New York: Oxford University Press, 2001), 227; Schulman, The Seventies, 44–48.
33. Sugrue, Origins of the Urban Crisis, 132.
34. Ibid., 136, 149.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 373

35. Ibid., 144.
36. Ibid., 144.
37. Ibid., 261.
38. Jefferson Cowie and Nick Salvatore, “The Long Exception: Rethinking the Place of the New Deal in American History,” International Labor and­Working-Class History 74 (Fall 2008), 1–32, esp. 9.
39. Quoctrung Bui, “50 Years of Shrinking Union Membership in One
Map,” February 23, 2015, NPR, http://​www​.npr​.org​/sections​/money​​/2015​/02​/23​/385843576​/50–years-of-shrinking-union-membership-in-one-map.
40. Kevin P. Phillips, The Emerging Republic Majority (New Rochelle, NY:
Arlington House, 1969), 17.
41. Bruce J. Schulman, From Cotton Belt to Sunbelt: Federal Policy, Economic Development, and the Transformation of the South, 1938–1980 (Durham,
NC: Duke University Press, 2007), 3.
42. William H. Frey, “The Electoral College Moves to the Sun Belt,” research brief, Brookings Institution, May 2005.
43. Griswold v. Connecticut, 381 U.S. 479, June 7, 1965.
44. Roe v. Wade, 410 U.S. 113, January 22, 1973.
45. Miller v. California, 413 U.S. 15, June 21, 1973.
46. Rita Mae Brown, quoted in David Allyn, Make Love, Not War—The
Sexual Revolution: An Unfettered History (New York: Routledge, 2001), 239.
47. Nancy MacLean, Freedom Is Not Enough: The Opening of the American Workplace (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press), 121.
48. Ibid., 129.
49. Arland Thornton, William G. Axinn, and Yu Xie, Marriage and Cohabitation (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007), 57.
50. Glenda Riley, Divorce: An American Tradition (New York: Oxford University Press, 1991), 135–139.
51. Ibid., 161–165; Mary Ann Glendon, The Transformation of Family
Law: State, Law, and Family in the United States and Western Europe (Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1989), 188–189.
52. David Carter, Stonewall: The Riots That Sparked the Gay Revolution(New York: St. Martin’s Press, 2004), 147.
53. Trans Liberation Newsletter, in Susan Styker, Transgender History(Berkeley, CA: Seal Press, 2008), 96–97.
54. William N. Eskridge, Dishonorable Passions: Sodomy Laws in America,
1861–2003 (New York: Viking, 2008), 209–212.
55. Jerry Falwell, Listen, America! (Garden City, NY: Doubleday), 19.
56. Donald Critchlow, Phyllis Schlafly and Grassroots Conservatism: A
Woman’s Crusade (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005), 213–216.
57. Ibid., 218–219; Joel Krieger, ed., The Oxford Companion to the Politics
of the World, 2nd ed. (New York: Oxford University Press, 2001), 256.
58. Critchlow, Phyllis Schlafly and Grassroots Conservatism, 219.
59. Phyllis Schlafly, quoted in Christine Stansell, The Feminist Promise:
1792 to the Present (New York: Modern Library, 2010), 340.
60. Critchlow, Phyllis Schlafly and Grassroots Conservatism, 281.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

374

chapt er 28

61. Sean Wilentz, The Age of Reagan: A History, 1974–2008 (New York:
HarperCollins, 2008), 69–72.
62. Ibid., 75.
63. Jimmy Carter, “University of Notre Dame—Address at the Commencement Exercises at the University,” May 22, 1977, American Presidency Project,
http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​7552.
64. Wilentz, Age of Reagan, 100–102.
65. Harvey Sicherman, Palestinian Autonomy, Self-Government, and Peace(Boulder, CO: Westview Press, 1993), 35.
66. Jimmy Carter, “Tehran, Iran Toasts of the President and the Shah at a
State Dinner,” December 31, 1977, American Presidency Project, http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​7080.
67. Jimmy Carter, “The State of the Union Address,” January 23, 1980,
American Presidency Project, http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​33079.
R e c o mm e n d e d R e a di n g
Carter, Dan T. The Politics of Rage: George Wallace, the Origins of the New
Conservatism, and the Transformation of American Politics. Baton Rouge:
LSU Press, 1995.
Cowie, Jefferson R. Stayin’ Alive: The 1970s and the Last Days of the Working
Class. New York: New Press, 2010.
Evans, Sara. Personal Politics: The Roots of Women’s Liberation in the Civil
Rights Movement and the New Left. New York: Vintage Books, 1979.
Flamm, Michael W. Law and Order: Street Crime, Civil Unrest, and the Crisis of
Liberalism in the 1960s. New York: Columbia University Press, 2005.
Formisano, Ronald P. Boston Against Busing: Race, Class, and Ethnicity in the
1960s and 1970s. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1991.
Greenberg, David. Nixon’s Shadow: The History of an Image. New York: Norton, 2004.
Harvey, David. The Condition of Postmodernity: An Enquiry into the Origins ofCultural Change. Cambridge, UK: Blackwell, 1989.
Jenkins, Philip. Decade of Nightmares: The End of the Sixties and the Making ofEighties America. New York: Oxford University Press, 2008.
Kalman, Laura. Right Star Rising: A New Politics, 1974–1980. New York: Norton, 2010.
Lassiter, Matthew D. The Silent Majority: Suburban Politics in the Sunbelt South.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2006.
MacLean, Nancy. Freedom Is Not Enough: The Opening of the American Workplace. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2008.
Marable, Manning. Malcolm X: A Life of Reinvention. New York: Viking, 2011.
Matusow, Allen J. The Unraveling of America: A History of Liberalism in the
1960s. New York: Harper and Row, 1984.
Murch, Donna Jean. Living for the City: Migration, Education, and the Riseof the Black Panther Party in Oakland, California. Durham: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 2010.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he U n r a v e l i n g 375

Patterson, James T. Grand Expectations: The United States, 1945–1974. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Perlstein, Rick. Nixonland: The Rise of a President and the Fracturing of America. New York: Norton, 2003.
Phelps, Wesley. A People’s War on Poverty: Urban Politics, Grassroots Activists,
and the Struggle for Democracy in Houston, 1964–1976. Athens: Universityof Georgia Press, 2014.
Rodgers, Daniel T. Age of Fracture. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press, 2011.
Roth, Benita. Separate Roads to Feminism: Black, Chicana, and White Feminist Movements in America’s Second Wave. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2004.
Sargent, Daniel J. A Superpower Transformed: The Remaking of American Foreign Relations in the 1970s. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2015.
Schulman, Bruce J. The Seventies: The Great Shift in American Culture, Society,and Politics. New York: Free Press, 2001.
Springer, Kimberly. Living for the Revolution: Black Feminist Organizations,
1968–1980. Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 2005.
Stein, Judith. Pivotal Decade: How the United States Traded Factories for Finance in the 1970s. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2010.
Thompson, Heather Ann. Blood in the Water: The Attica Prison Uprising of1971 and Its Legacy. New York: Pantheon Books, 2016.
Zaretsky, Natasha. No Direction Home: The American Family and the Fear of
National Decline. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2007.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

29
The Triumph of the Right
I. Introduction
Speaking to Detroit autoworkers in October 1980, Republican presidential candidate Ronald Reagan described what he saw as the American
Dream under Democratic president Jimmy Carter. The family garage may
have still held two cars, cracked Reagan, but they were “both Japaneseand they’re out of gas.”1 The charismatic former governor of California
suggested that a once-proud nation was running on empty. But Reagan
held out hope for redemption. Stressing the theme of “national decline,”
he nevertheless promised to make the United States once again a glorious“city upon a hill.”2 In November, Reagan’s vision triumphed.
Reagan rode the wave of a powerful political movement referred toby historians as the New Right. More libertarian in its economics andmore politically forceful in its conservative religious principles than themoderate brand of conservatism popular after World War II, the New

Activist Phyllis Schlafly
campaigns against
the Equal Rights
Amendment in
1977. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 377

Right had by the 1980s evolved into the most influential wing of the
Republican Party. And it could claim increasing credit for Republican
electoral successes. Building on the gradual unraveling of the New Deal
political order in the 1960s and 1970s (see Chapter 28), the conservative movement not only enjoyed the guidance of skilled politicians like
Reagan but drew tremendous energy from a broad range of grassroots
activists. Countless ordinary citizens—newly mobilized Christian conservatives, in particular—helped the Republican Party steer the country
rightward. Enduring conflicts over race, economic policy, sexual politics,
and foreign affairs fatally fractured the liberal consensus that had dominated American politics since the presidency of Franklin Roosevelt, andthe New Right attracted support from Reagan Democrats, blue-collar
voters who had lost faith in the old liberal creed.
The rise of the right affected Americans’ everyday lives in numerous
ways. The Reagan administration’s embrace of free markets dispensed
with the principles of active income redistribution and social welfare
spending that had animated the New Deal and Great Society in the
1930s and 1960s. As American liberals increasingly embraced a “rights”
framework directed toward African Americans, Latinos, women, lesbians and gays, and other marginalized groups, conservative policy makers
targeted the regulatory and legal landscape of the United States. Critics
complained that Reagan’s policies served the interests of corporations
and wealthy individuals and pointed to the sudden widening of economic
inequality. But the New Right harnessed popular distrust of regulation,
taxes, and bureaucrats, and conservative activists celebrated the end of
hyperinflation and substantial growth in GDP.
In many ways, however, the rise of the right promised more than it
delivered. Battered but intact, the social welfare programs of the New
Deal and Great Society (for example, social security, Medicaid, and Aid
to Families with Dependent Children) survived the 1980s. Despite Republican vows of fiscal discipline, both the federal government and thenational debt ballooned. At the end of the decade, conservative Christians viewed popular culture as more vulgar and hostile to their values
than ever before. And in the near term, the New Right registered only
partial victories on a range of public policies and cultural issues. Yetfrom a long-term perspective, conservatives achieved a subtler and more
enduring transformation of American politics and society. In the words
of one historian, the conservative movement successfully “changed theterms of debate and placed its opponents on the defensive.”3 Liberals© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

378

chapt er 29

and their programs and policies did not disappear, but they increasingly
fought battles on terrain chosen by the New Right.

II. Conservative Ascendance
The Reagan Revolution marked the culmination of a long process ofpolitical mobilization on the American right. In the first two decades
after World War II the New Deal seemed firmly embedded in American
electoral politics and public policy. Even two-term Republican president
Dwight D. Eisenhower declined to roll back the welfare state. To be sure,
William F. Buckley tapped into a deep vein of elite conservatism in 1955
by announcing in the first issue of National Review that his magazine“stands athwart history yelling Stop.”4 Senator Joseph McCarthy andJohn Birch Society founder Robert Welch stirred anticommunist fervor.
But in general, the far right lacked organizational cohesion. Following
Lyndon Johnson’s resounding defeat of Republican Barry Goldwater—“Mr. Conservative”—in the 1964 presidential election, many observers
declared American conservatism finished. New York Times columnist
James Reston wrote that Goldwater had “wrecked his party for a longtime to come.”5
Despite these dire predictions, conservatism not only persisted, it
prospered. Its growing appeal had several causes. The expansive socialand economic agenda of Johnson’s Great Society reminded anticommunists of Soviet-style central planning and deficits alarmed fiscal conservatives. Race also drove the creation of the New Right. The civil rights
movement, along with the Civil Rights Act and the Voting Rights Act,
challenged the racial hierarchy of the Jim Crow South. All of these occurred under Democratic leadership, pushing white southerners toward
the Republican Party. In the late 1960s and early 1970s, Black Power,
affirmative action, and court-ordered busing of children between schools
to achieve racial balance brought “white backlash” in the North, often
in cities previously known for political liberalism. To many white Americans, the urban rebellions, antiwar protests, and student uprisings of thelate 1960s signaled social chaos. At the same time, slowing wage growth,rising prices, and growing tax burdens threatened many ­workingand middle-class citizens who long formed the core of the New Dealcoalition. Liberalism no longer seemed to offer the great mass of white
Americans a road map to prosperity, so they searched for new politicalsolutions.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 379

Former Alabama governor and conservative Democrat George Wallace masterfully exploited the racial, cultural, and economic resentmentsof working-class whites during his presidential runs in 1968 and 1972.
Wallace’s record as a staunch segregationist made him a hero in the Deep
South, where he won five states as a third-party candidate in the 1968
general election. Wallace’s populist message also resonated with bluecollar voters in the industrial North who felt left behind by the rights
revolution. On the campaign stump, the fiery candidate lambasted hippies, antiwar protesters, and government bureaucrats. He assailed female
welfare recipients for “breeding children as a cash crop” and ridiculed“over-educated, ivory-tower” intellectuals who “don’t know how topark a bicycle straight.”6 Wallace also advanced progressive proposals
for federal job training programs, a minimum wage hike, and legal protections for collective bargaining. Running as a Democrat in 1972, Wallace captured the Michigan primary and polled second in the industrial
heartland of Wisconsin, Pennsylvania, and Indiana. In May 1972, anassassin’s bullet left Wallace paralyzed and ended his campaign. Nevertheless, his amalgamation of older, New Deal–style proposals and conservative populism represented the rapid reordering of party loyalties in thelate 1960s and early 1970s. Richard Nixon similarly harnessed the New
Right’s sense of grievance through his rhetoric about “law and order”
and the “silent majority.”7 But Nixon and his Republican successor, Gerald Ford, continued to accommodate the politics of the New Deal order.
The New Right remained without a major public champion.
Christian conservatives also felt themselves under siege from liberalism. In the early 1960s, Supreme Court decisions prohibiting teacher-led
prayer (Engel v. Vitale) and Bible reading in public schools (Abington v.
Schempp) led some on the right to conclude that a liberal judicial systemthreatened Christian values. In the following years, the counterculture’scelebration of sex and drugs, along with relaxed obscenity and pornography laws, intensified the conviction that “permissive” liberalism encouraged immorality in private life. Evangelical Protestants—Christians who
professed a personal relationship with Jesus Christ, upheld the Bible as
an infallible source of truth, and felt a duty to convert, or evangelize,
nonbelievers—composed the core of the so-called religious right.
With increasing assertiveness in the 1960s and 1970s, Christian conservatives mobilized to protect the “traditional” family. Women composed a striking number of the religious right’s foot soldiers. In 1968 and1969 a group of newly politicized mothers in Anaheim, California, led a© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

380

chapt er 29

sustained protest against sex education in public schools.8 Catholic activist Phyllis Schlafly marshaled opposition to the ERA, while evangelicalpop singer Anita Bryant drew national headlines for her successful fightto repeal Miami’s gay rights ordinance in 1977. In 1979, Beverly LaHaye(whose husband, Tim—an evangelical pastor in San Diego—later coauthored the wildly popular Left Behind Christian book series) founded
Concerned Women for America, which linked small groups of local activists opposed to the ERA, abortion, homosexuality, and no-fault divorce.
Activists like Schlafly and LaHaye valorized motherhood as women’shighest calling. Abortion therefore struck at the core of their female
identity. More than perhaps any other issue, abortion drew different
segments of the religious right—Catholics and Protestants, women andmen—together. The Supreme Court’s 1973 Roe v. Wade ruling outraged
many devout Catholics and evangelicals (who had been less universally
opposed to the procedure than their Catholic counterparts). Christianauthor Francis Schaeffer cultivated evangelical opposition to abortion
through the 1979 documentary film Whatever Happened to the Human
Race?, arguing that the “fate of the unborn is the fate of the humanrace.”9 With abortion framed in stark, existential terms, many evangelicals felt compelled to combat the procedure through political action.
Grassroots passion drove anti-abortion activism, but a set of religious
and secular institutions turned the various strands of the New Right into
a sophisticated movement. In 1979 Jerry Falwell—a Baptist minister andreligious broadcaster from Lynchburg, Virginia—founded the Moral
Majority, an explicitly political organization dedicated to advancing
a “pro-life, pro-family, pro-morality, and pro-American” agenda. The
Moral Majority skillfully wove together social and economic appeals
to make itself a force in Republican politics. Secular, business-oriented
institutions also joined the attack on liberalism, fueled by stagflation andby the federal government’s creation of new regulatory agencies likethe Environmental Protection Agency and the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration. Conservative business leaders bankrolled new“think tanks” like the Heritage Foundation and the Cato Institute. These
organizations provided grassroots activists with ready-made policy prescriptions. Other business leaders took a more direct approach by hiring
Washington lobbyists and creating political action committees (PACs) topress their agendas in the halls of Congress and federal agencies. Between 1976 and 1980 the number of corporate PACs rose from under
three hundred to over twelve hundred.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 381

Grassroots activists and business leaders received unlikely support
from a circle of neoconservatives—disillusioned intellectuals who had
rejected liberalism and the Left and become Republicans. Irving Kristol,a former Marxist who went on to champion free-market capitalism as
a Wall Street Journal columnist, defined a neoconservative as a “liberal
who has been mugged by reality.”10 Neoconservative journals like Commentary and Public Interest argued that the Great Society had provencounterproductive, perpetuating the poverty and racial segregationthat it aimed to cure. By the middle of the 1970s, neoconservatives felt
mugged by foreign affairs as well. As ardent Cold Warriors, they argued
that Nixon’s policy of détente left the United States vulnerable to theSoviet Union.
In sum, several streams of conservative political mobilization converged in the late 1970s. Each wing of the burgeoning New Right—­
disaffected northern blue-collar workers, white southerners, evangelicals
and devout Catholics, business leaders, disillusioned intellectuals, andCold War hawks—turned to the Republican Party as the most effective
vehicle for their political counterassault on liberalism and the New Deal
political order. After years of mobilization, the domestic and foreign policy catastrophes of the Carter administration provided the headwindsthat brought the conservative movement to shore.

III. The Conservatism of the Carter Years
The election of Jimmy Carter in 1976 brought a Democrat to the WhiteHouse for the first time since 1969. Large Democratic majorities inCongress provided the new president with an opportunity to move aggressively on the legislative front. With the infighting of the early 1970s
behind them, many Democrats hoped the Carter administration would
update and expand the New Deal. But Carter won the presidency on awave of post-Watergate disillusionment with government that did nottranslate into support for liberal ideas.
In its early days, the Carter administration embraced several policies
backed by liberals. It pushed an economic stimulus package containing$4 billion for public works, extended food stamp benefits to 2.5 million
new recipients, enlarged the Earned Income Tax Credit for low-income
households, and expanded the Nixon-era Comprehensive Employment
and Training Act (CETA).11 But the White House quickly realized that
Democratic control of Congress did not guarantee support for its i­ nitially© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

382

chapt er 29

left-leaning economic proposals. Many of the Democrats elected toCongress in the aftermath of Watergate were more moderate than theirpredecessors, who had been trained in the New Deal gospel. These conservative Democrats sometimes partnered with congressional Republicans to oppose Carter, most notably in response to the administration’s
proposal for a federal office of consumer protection.
Events outside Carter’s control certainly helped discredit liberalism,
but the president’s own temperamental and philosophical conservatism
hamstrung the administration and pushed national politics further to theright. In his 1978 State of the Union address, Carter lectured Americans
that “government cannot solve our problems . . . it cannot eliminate
poverty, or provide a bountiful economy, or reduce inflation, or save ourcities, or cure illiteracy, or provide energy.”12 The statement neatly captured the ideological transformation of the county. Rather than leadinga resurgence of American liberalism, Carter became, as one historian put
it, “the first president to govern in a post–New Deal framework.”13 Organized labor felt abandoned by Carter, who remained cool to several of
their highest legislative priorities. The president offered tepid support fora national health insurance proposal and declined to lobby aggressively
for a package of modest labor law reforms. The business community rallied to defeat the latter measure, in what AFL-CIO chief George Meany
described as “an attack by every anti-union group in America to kill
the labor movement.”14 In 1977 and 1978, liberal Democrats rallied behind the Humphrey-Hawkins Full Employment and Training Act, which
promised to end unemployment through extensive government planning.
The bill aimed not only to guarantee a job to every American but also
to reunite the interracial, working-class Democratic coalition that had
been fractured by deindustrialization and affirmative action.15 But Carter’s lack of enthusiasm for the proposal allowed conservatives from bothparties to water the bill down to a purely symbolic gesture. Liberals, likelabor leaders, came to regard the president as an unreliable ally.
Carter also came under fire from Republicans, especially the religious
right. His administration incurred the wrath of evangelicals in 1978
when the IRS established new rules revoking the tax-exempt status of racially segregated, private Christian schools. The rules only strengtheneda policy instituted by the Nixon administration; however, the religious
right accused Carter of singling out Christian institutions. Republican
activist Richard Viguerie described the IRS controversy as the “spark that
ignited the religious right’s involvement in real politics.”16 Race sat just© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 383

below the surface of the IRS fight. After all, many of the schools had beenfounded to circumvent court-ordered desegregation. But the IRS rulingallowed the New Right to rain down fire on big government interference
while downplaying the practice of segregation at the heart of the case.
While the IRS controversy flared, economic crises multiplied. Unemployment reached 7.8 percent in May 1980, up from 6 percent at thestart of Carter’s first term.17 Inflation (the rate at which the cost of goods
and services increases) jumped from 6 percent in 1978 to a staggering
20 percent by the winter of 1980.18 In another bad omen, the iconic
Chrysler Corporation appeared close to bankruptcy. The administration
responded to these challenges in fundamentally conservative ways. First,
Carter proposed a tax cut for the upper middle class, which Congress
passed in 1978. Second, the White House embraced a longtime goal of
the conservative movement by deregulating the airline and trucking industries in 1978 and 1980, respectively. Third, Carter proposed balancing the federal budget—much to the dismay of liberals, who would havepreferred that he use deficit spending to finance a new New Deal. Finally,
to halt inflation, Carter’s appointed chair of the Federal Reserve, Paul
Volcker, raised interest rates and tightened the money supply—­policies
designed to reduce inflation in the long run but which increased unemployment in the short run. Liberalism was on the run.
The decade’s second “energy crisis,” which witnessed another spikein oil prices and oil shortages across the country, brought out the southern Baptist moralist in Carter. On July 15, 1979, the president delivereda nationally televised speech on energy policy in which he attributed thecountry’s economic woes to a “crisis of confidence.” Carter lamented
that “too many of us now tend to worship self-indulgence and consumption.”19 The country initially responded favorably to the push for energy
conservation, yet Carter’s emphasis on discipline and sacrifice and his
spiritual diagnosis for economic hardship sidestepped deeper questionsof large-scale economic change and downplayed the harsh toll inflation
had taken on regular Americans.

IV. The Election of 1980
These domestic challenges, combined with the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan and the hostage crisis in Iran, hobbled Carter heading into his 1980
reelection campaign. Many Democrats were dismayed by his policies.
The president of the International Association of Machinists dismissed© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

384

chapt er 29

Carter as “the best Republican President since Herbert Hoover.”20 Angered by the White House’s refusal to back national health insurance,
Massachusetts senator Ted Kennedy challenged Carter in the Democratic
primaries. Running as the party’s liberal standard-bearer and heir to thelegacy of his slain older brothers, Kennedy garnered support from key
labor unions and left-wing Democrats. Carter ultimately vanquished
Kennedy, but the close primary tally exposed the president’s vulnerability.
Carter’s opponent in the general election was Ronald Reagan, a former Hollywood actor who had served two terms as governor of California. Reagan ran as a staunch fiscal conservative and a Cold War hawk,
vowing to reduce government spending and shrink the federal bureaucracy. Reagan also accused his opponent of failing to confront the Soviet
Union and vowed steep increases in military spending. Carter responded
by calling Reagan a warmonger, but the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan
and the confinement of 52 American hostages in Iran discredited Carter’s
foreign policy in the eyes of many Americans.
The incumbent fared no better on domestic affairs. Unemployment
remained at nearly 8 percent.21 Meanwhile the Federal Reserve’s antiinflation measures pushed interest rates to an unheard-of 18.5 percent.22
Reagan seized on these bad economic trends. On the campaign trail hebrought down the house by proclaiming: “A recession is when yourneighbor loses his job, and a depression is when you lose your job.”
Reagan would then pause before concluding, “And a recovery is when
Jimmy Carter loses his job.”23
Social and cultural issues presented yet another challenge for thepresident. Although a self-proclaimed “born-again” Christian and Sunday school teacher, Carter struggled to court the religious right. Carterscandalized devout Christians by admitting to lustful thoughts during
an interview with Playboy magazine in 1976, telling the reporter he had“committed adultery in my heart many times.”24 Although Reagan was
only a nominal Christian and rarely attended church, the religious rightembraced him. Reverend Jerry Falwell directed the full weight of theMoral Majority behind Reagan. The organization registered an estimatedtwo million new voters in 1980. Reagan also cultivated the religious rightby denouncing abortion and endorsing prayer in school. The IRS tax
exemption issue resurfaced as well, with the 1980 Republican platformvowing to “halt the unconstitutional regulatory vendetta launched by
Mr. Carter’s IRS commissioner against independent schools.”25 Early inthe primary season, Reagan condemned the policy during a speech at© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 385

Jerry Falwell, a wildly popular TV evangelist, founded the Moral Majority in the late1970s. Decrying the demise of the nation’s
morality, the organization gained a massive
following and helped to cement the statusof the New Christian Right in American
politics. Wikimedia.

South Carolina’s Bob Jones University, which had recently sued the IRS
after the school’s ban on interracial dating led to the loss of its taxexempt status.
Reagan’s campaign appealed subtly but unmistakably to the racialhostilities of white voters. The candidate held his first post–­nominating
convention rally at the Neshoba County Fair near Philadelphia, Mississippi, the town where three civil rights workers had been murdered in
1964. In his speech, Reagan championed the doctrine of states’ rights,
which had been the rallying cry of segregationists in the 1950s and1960s. In criticizing the welfare state, Reagan had long employed thinlyveiled racial stereotypes about a “welfare queen” in Chicago who drovea Cadillac while defrauding the government or a “strapping young buck”
purchasing T-bone steaks with food stamps.26 Like George Wallace before
him, Reagan exploited the racial and cultural resentments of struggling
white working-class voters. And like Wallace, he attracted blue-collar
workers in droves.
With the wind at his back on almost every issue, Reagan only needed
to blunt Carter’s characterization of him as an angry extremist. Reagan© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

386

chapt er 29

Ronald Reagan
secured thepresidency byappealing to thegrowing conservatism of much of
the country. Here,
Ronald Reagan
and his wife,
Nancy Reagan,wave from a limousine during theinaugural paradein Washington,
D.C., in 1981.
Wikimedia.

did so during their only debate by appearing calm and amiable. “Are you
better off than you were four years ago?” he asked the American people
at the conclusion of the debate.27 The American people answered no.
Reagan won the election with 51 percent of the popular vote to Carter’s
41 percent. (Independent John Anderson captured 7 percent.)28 Despite
capturing only a slim majority, Reagan scored a decisive 489–49 ­victoryin the Electoral College.29 Republicans gained control of the Senate forthe first time since 1955 by winning twelve seats. Liberal Democrats
George McGovern, Frank Church, and Birch Bayh went down in defeat,as did liberal Republican Jacob Javits. The GOP picked up thirty-three
House seats, narrowing the Democratic advantage in the lower chamber.30 The New Right had arrived in Washington, D.C.

V. The New Right in PowerIn his first inaugural address Reagan proclaimed that “government is not
the solution to the problem, government is the problem.”31 In reality,
Reagan focused less on eliminating government than on redirecting gov-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 387

ernment to serve new ends. In line with that goal, his administration embraced supply-side economic theories that had recently gained popularity
among the New Right. While the postwar gospel of Keynesian economics had focused on stimulating consumer demand, supply-side economics held that lower personal and corporate tax rates would encourage
greater private investment and production. Supply-side advocates promised that the resulting wealth would reach—or “trickle down” to, in thewords of critics—lower-income groups through job creation and higher
wages. Conservative economist Arthur Laffer predicted that lower tax
rates would generate so much economic activity that federal tax revenues
would actually increase. The administration touted the so-called Laffer
Curve as justification for the tax cut plan that served as the cornerstoneof Reagan’s first year in office. Republican congressman Jack Kemp, anearly supply-side advocate and co-sponsor of Reagan’s tax bill, promisedthat it would unleash the “creative genius that has always invigorated
America.”32
The tax cut faced early skepticism from Democrats and even some
Republicans. Vice president George H. W. Bush had belittled supply-side

The Iranian hostage crisis ended literally during President Reagan’s inauguration speech. The Reagan
administration received credit for bringing the hostages home. This group photograph shows the former
hostages in the hospital in 1981 before being released back to the United States. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

388

chapt er 29

theory as “voodoo economics” during the 1980 Republican primaries.33
But a combination of skill and serendipity pushed the bill over the top.
Reagan aggressively and effectively lobbied individual members of Congress for support on the measure. Then on March 30, 1981, Reagan survived an assassination attempt by a mentally unstable young man named
John Hinckley. Public support swelled for the hospitalized president.
Congress ultimately approved a $675 billion tax cut in July 1981 withsignificant Democratic support. The bill reduced overall federal taxes bymore than one quarter and lowered the top marginal rate from 70 percent to 50 percent, with the bottom rate dropping from 14 percent to11 percent. It also slashed the rate on capital gains from 28 percent to20 percent.34 The next month, Reagan scored another political triumphin response to a strike called by the Professional Air Traffic Controllers
Organization (PATCO). During the 1980 campaign, Reagan had wooedorganized labor, describing himself as “an old union man” (he had led
the Screen Actors Guild from 1947 to 1952) who still held Franklin Roosevelt in high regard.35 PATCO had been one of the few labor unions toendorse Reagan. Nevertheless, the president ordered the union’s striking
air traffic controllers back to work and fired more than eleven thousand
who refused. Reagan’s actions crippled PATCO and left the American
labor movement reeling. For the rest of the 1980s the economic terrainof the United States—already unfavorable to union organizing—shifted
decisively in favor of employers. The unionized portion of the privatesector workforce fell from 20 percent in 1980 to 12 percent in 1990.36
Reagan’s tax bill and the defeat of PATCO not only enhanced the economic power of corporations and high-income households, they confirmed that a new conservative age had dawned in American life.
The new administration appeared to be flying high in the fall of 1981,
but developments challenged the rosy economic forecasts emanatingfrom the White House. As Reagan ratcheted up tension with the Soviet
Union, Congress approved his request for $1.2 trillion in new militaryspending.37 The combination of lower taxes and higher defense budgets caused the national debt to balloon. By the end of Reagan’s firstterm it equaled 53 percent of GDP, as opposed to 33 percent in 1981.38
The increase was staggering, especially for an administration that hadpromised to curb spending. Meanwhile, Federal Reserve chairman Paul
Volcker continued his policy from the Carter years of combating inflation by maintaining high interest rates, which surpassed 20 percent inJune 1981.39 The Fed’s action increased the cost of borrowing money andstifled economic activity.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 389

As a result, the United States experienced a severe economic recession
in 1981 and 1982. Unemployment rose to nearly 11 percent, the highest
figure since the Great Depression.40 Reductions in social welfare spending heightened the impact of the recession on ordinary people. Congress
had followed Reagan’s lead by reducing funding for food stamps andAid to Families with Dependent Children and removed a half million
people from the Supplemental Social Security program for the physicallydisabled.41 The cuts exacted an especially harsh toll on low-income communities of color. The head of the NAACP declared that the administration’s budget cuts had rekindled “war, pestilence, famine, and death.”42
Reagan also received bipartisan rebuke in 1981 after proposing cuts tosocial security benefits for early retirees. The Senate voted unanimously
to condemn the plan, and Democrats framed it as a heartless attack on
the elderly. Confronted with recession and harsh public criticism, a chastened White House worked with Democratic House Speaker Tip O’Neillin 1982 on a bill that restored $98 billion of the previous year’s tax
cuts.43 Despite compromising with the administration on taxes, Democrats railed against the so-called Reagan Recession, arguing that the president’s economic policies favored the most fortunate Americans. Thisappeal, which Democrats termed the “fairness issue,” helped them win
twenty-six House seats in the autumn congressional races.44 The New
Right appeared to be in trouble.

VI. Morning in America
Reagan nimbly adjusted to the political setbacks of 1982. Following
the rejection of his social security proposals, Reagan appointed a bipartisan panel to consider changes to the program. In early 1983, thecommission recommended a onetime delay in cost-of-living increases, a
new requirement that government employees pay into the system, and a
gradual increase in the retirement age from sixty-five to sixty-seven. The
commission also proposed raising state and federal payroll taxes, with
the new revenue poured into a trust fund that would transform social
security from a pay-as-you-go system to one with significant reserves.45
Congress quickly passed the recommendations into law, allowing Reagan
to take credit for strengthening a program cherished by most Americans.
The president also benefited from an economic rebound. Real disposable
income rose 2.5 percent in 1983 and 5.8 percent the following year.46
Unemployment dropped to 7.5 percent in 1984.47 Meanwhile, the “harshmedicine” of high interest rates helped reduce inflation to 3.5 percent.48© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

390

chapt er 29

President Ronald
Reagan, a masterof the photo op,
appears here witha row of American
flags at his backat a 1982 rally
for Senator David
Durenberger in
Minneapolis, Minnesota. National
Archives.

While campaigning for reelection in 1984, Reagan pointed to the improving economy as evidence that it was “morning again in America.”49 His
personal popularity soared. Most conservatives ignored the debt increase
and tax hikes of the previous two years and rallied around the president.
The Democratic Party, on other hand, stood at an ideological crossroads in 1984. The favorite to win the party’s nomination was Walter
Mondale, a staunch ally of organized labor and the civil rights movement as a senator during the 1960s and 1970s. He later served as Jimmy
Carter’s vice president. Mondale’s chief rivals were civil rights activist
Jesse Jackson and Colorado senator Gary Hart, one of the young Democrats elected to Congress in 1974 following Nixon’s downfall. Hart andother “Watergate babies” still identified themselves as liberals but rejected
their party’s faith in activist government and embraced market-based approaches to policy issues. In so doing, they conceded significant political ground to supply-siders and conservative opponents of the welfare
state. Many Democrats, however, were not prepared to abandon their
New Deal heritage, and so the ideological tension within the party playedout in the 1984 primary campaign. Jackson offered a largely progressive
program but won only two states. Hart’s platform—economically moderate but socially liberal—inverted the political formula of Mondale’s
New Deal–style liberalism. Throughout the primaries, Hart contrasted
his “new ideas” with Mondale’s “old-fashioned” politics. Mondale even-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 391

tually secured his party’s nomination but suffered a crushing defeat in
the general election. Reagan captured forty-nine of fifty states, winning58.8 percent of the popular vote.50
Mondale’s loss seemed to confirm that the new breed of moderate
Democrats better understood the mood of the American people. The
future of the party belonged to post–New Deal liberals like Hart andto the constituency that supported him in the primaries: upwardly mobile, white professionals and suburbanites. In February 1985, a group ofcentrists formed the Democratic Leadership Council (DLC) as a vehicle
for distancing the party from organized labor and Keynesian economics
while cultivating the business community. Jesse Jackson dismissed the
DLC as “Democrats for the Leisure Class,” but the organization included
many of the party’s future leaders, including Arkansas governor Bill Clinton.51 The formation of the DLC illustrated the degree to which to the
New Right had transformed American politics: New Democrats looked
a lot like old Republicans.
Reagan entered his second term with a much stronger mandate thanin 1981, but the Grand Old Party (GOP) makeover of Washington,
D.C., stalled. The Democrats regained control of the Senate in 1986, and
Democratic opposition prevented Reagan from eliminating means-tested
social welfare programs, although Congress failed to increase benefit
levels for welfare programs or raise the minimum wage, decreasing thereal value of those benefits. Democrats and Republicans occasionallyfashioned legislative compromises, as with the Tax Reform Act of 1986.
The bill lowered the top corporate tax rate from 46 percent to 34 percent
and reduced the highest marginal income tax rate from 50 percent to 28
percent, while also simplifying the tax code and eliminating numerous
loopholes.52 The steep cuts to the corporate and individual rates certainly
benefited wealthy individuals, but the legislation made virtually no net
change to federal revenues. In 1986, Reagan also signed into law the
Immigration Reform and Control Act. American policy makers hoped
to do two things: deal with the millions of undocumented immigrants
already in the United States while simultaneously choking off future unsanctioned migration. The former goal was achieved (nearly three million undocumented workers received legal status) but the latter proved
elusive.
One of Reagan’s most far-reaching victories occurred through judicial appointments. He named 368 district and federal appeals court
judges during his two terms.53 Observers noted that almost all of the© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

392

chapt er 29a­ ppointees were white men. (Seven were African American, fifteen wereLatino, and two were Asian American.) Reagan also appointed three Supreme Court justices: Sandra Day O’Connor, who to the dismay of thereligious right turned out to be a moderate; Anthony Kennedy, a solidly
conservative Catholic who occasionally sided with the court’s liberal
wing; and archconservative Antonin Scalia. The New Right’s transformation of the judiciary had limits. In 1987, Reagan nominated Robert
Bork to fill a vacancy on the Supreme Court. Bork, a federal judge andformer Yale University law professor, was a staunch conservative. He
had opposed the 1964 Civil Rights Act, affirmative action, and the Roev. Wade decision. After acrimonious confirmation hearings, the Senate
rejected Bork’s nomination by a vote of 58–42.54

VII. African American Life in Reagan’s America
African Americans read Bork’s nomination as another signal of the conservative movement’s hostility to their social, economic, and politicalaspirations. Indeed, Ronald Reagan’s America presented African Americans with a series of contradictions. Black Americans achieved significant

Jesse Jackson, pictured here in 1983, was only thesecond African American to mount a national campaign for the presidency. His work as a civil rights
activist garnered him a significant following in the
African American community but never enoughto secure the Democratic nomination. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 393

advances in politics, culture, and socioeconomic status. A trend fromthe late 1960s and 1970s continued and black politicians gained controlof major municipal governments across the country during the 1980s.
In 1983, voters in Philadelphia and Chicago elected Wilson Goode andHarold Washington, respectively, as their cities’ first black mayors. At
the national level, civil rights leader Jesse Jackson became the first African American man to run for president when he campaigned for the
Democratic Party’s nomination in 1984 and 1988. Propelled by chantsof “Run, Jesse, run,” Jackson achieved notable success in 1988, winning
nine state primaries and finishing second with 29 percent of the vote.55
The excitement created by Jackson’s campaign mirrored the acclaim
received by a few prominent African Americans in media and entertainment. Comedian Eddie Murphy rose to stardom on television’s SaturdayNight Live and achieved box office success with movies like 48 Hours
and Beverly Hills Cop. In 1982, pop singer Michael Jackson released
Thriller, the best-selling album of all time. Oprah Winfrey began her phenomenally successful nationally syndicated talk show in 1985. ComedianBill Cosby’s sitcom about an African American doctor and lawyer raising
their four children drew the highest ratings on television for most of thedecade. The popularity of The Cosby Show revealed how class informed
perceptions of race in the 1980s. Cosby’s fictional TV family represented
a growing number of black middle-class professionals in the UnitedStates. Indeed, income for the top fifth of African American households
increased faster than that of white households for most of the decade.
Middle-class African Americans found new doors open to them in the
1980s, but the poor and working-class faced continued challenges. During Reagan’s last year in office the African American poverty rate stoodat 31.6 percent, as opposed to 10.1 percent for whites.56 Black unemployment remained double that of whites throughout the decade.57 By 1990,
the median income for black families was $21,423, or 42 percent below
the median income for white households.58 The Reagan administration
failed to address such disparities and in many ways intensified them.
New Right values threatened the legal principles and federal policies of the Great Society and the “rights revolution.” Reagan’s appointment of conservatives to agencies such as the Justice Department
and the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission took aim at key
policy achievements of the civil rights movement. When the 1965 Voting
Rights Act came up for renewal during Reagan’s first term, the JusticeDepartment pushed the president to oppose any extension. Only the intervention of more moderate congressional Republicans saved the law.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

394

chapt er 29

The ­administration also initiated a plan to rescind federal affirmative action rules. In 1986, a broad coalition of groups—including the NAACP,
the Urban League, the AFL-CIO, and even the National Association of
Manufacturers—compelled the administration to abandon the effort.
Despite the conservative tenor of the country, diversity programs werefirmly entrenched in the corporate world by the end of the decade.
Americans increasingly embraced racial diversity as a positive value
but most often approached the issue through an individualistic—not asystemic—framework. Certain federal policies disproportionately affected racial minorities. Spending cuts enacted by Reagan and congressional Republicans shrank Aid to Families with Dependent Children,
Medicaid, food stamps, school lunch programs, and job training programs that provided crucial support to African American households.
In 1982, the National Urban League’s annual “State of Black America”
report concluded that “never [since the first report in 1976] . . . has
the state of Black America been more vulnerable. Never in that time
have black economic rights been under such powerful attack.”59 African
American communities, especially in urban areas, also bore the stigma
of violence and criminality. Homicide was the leading cause of deathfor black males between ages fifteen and twenty-four, occurring at a rate
six times that of other groups.60 Although African Americans were mostoften the victims of violent crime, sensationalist media reports incited
fears about black-on-white crime in big cities. Ironically, such fear could
by itself spark violence. In December 1984 a thirty-seven-year-old white
engineer, Bernard Goetz, shot and seriously wounded four black teenagers on a New York City subway car. The so-called Subway Vigilante suspected that the young men—armed with screwdrivers—planned to rob
him. Pollsters found that 90 percent of white New Yorkers sympathizedwith Goetz.61 Echoing the law-and-order rhetoric (and policies) of the
1960s and 1970s, politicians—both Democratic and Republican—andlaw enforcement agencies implemented more aggressive policing ofminority communities and mandated longer prison sentences for thosearrested. The explosive growth of mass incarceration exacted a heavy
toll on African American communities long into the twenty-first century.

VIII. Bad Times and Good Times
Working- and middle-class Americans, especially those of color, struggled to maintain economic equilibrium during the Reagan years. The© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 395

growing national debt generated fresh economic pain. The federal government borrowed money to finance the debt, raising interest rates toheighten the appeal of government bonds. Foreign money poured into
the United States, raising the value of the dollar and attracting an influx of goods from overseas. The imbalance between American imports
and exports grew from $36 billion in 1980 to $170 billion in 1987.62
Foreign competition battered the already anemic manufacturing sector.
The appeal of government bonds likewise drew investment away from
American industry.
Continuing an ongoing trend, many steel and automobile factories
in the industrial Northeast and Midwest closed or moved overseas during the 1980s. Bruce Springsteen, the self-appointed bard of blue-collar
America, offered eulogies to Rust Belt cities in songs like “Youngstown”
and “My Hometown,” in which the narrator laments that his “foremansays these jobs are going, boys / and they ain’t coming back.”63 Competition from Japanese carmakers spurred a “Buy American” campaign.
Meanwhile, a “farm crisis” gripped the rural United States. Expanded
world production meant new competition for American farmers, whilesoaring interest rates caused the already sizable debt held by family farms
to mushroom. Farm foreclosures skyrocketed during Reagan’s tenure. In
September 1985, prominent musicians including Neil Young and Willie
Nelson organized Farm Aid, a benefit concert at the University of Illinois’s football stadium designed to raise money for struggling farmers.
At the other end of the economic spectrum, wealthy Americans thrived
under the policies of the New Right. The financial industry found new
ways to earn staggering profits during the Reagan years. Wall Street brokers like junk bond king Michael Milken reaped fortunes selling highrisk, high-yield securities. Reckless speculation helped drive the stock
market steadily upward until the crash of October 19, 1987. On Black
Friday, the market plunged eight hundred points, erasing 13 percent of
its value. Investors lost more than $500 billion.64 An additional financial
crisis loomed in the savings and loan (S&L) industry, and Reagan’s deregulatory policies bore significant responsibility. In 1982 Reagan signed
a bill increasing the amount of federal insurance available to savings andloan depositors, making those financial institutions more popular with
consumers. The bill also allowed S&Ls to engage in high-risk loans andinvestments for the first time. Many such deals failed catastrophically,
while some S&L managers brazenly stole from their institutions. In thelate 1980s, S&Ls failed with regularity, and ordinary Americans lost© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

396

chapt er 29­ recious savings. The 1982 law left the government responsible for bailp
ing out S&Ls out at an eventual cost of $132 billion.65

IX. Culture Wars of the 1980s
Popular culture of the 1980s offered another venue in which conservatives and liberals waged a battle of ideas. The militarism and patriotism
of Reagan’s presidency pervaded movies like Top Gun and the Rambo
series, starring Sylvester Stallone as a Vietnam War veteran haunted byhis country’s failure to pursue victory in Southeast Asia. In contrast, director Oliver Stone offered searing condemnations of the war in Platoon
and Born on the Fourth of July. Television shows like Dynasty and Dallas celebrated wealth and glamour, reflecting the pride in conspicuous
consumption that emanated from the White House and corporate boardrooms during the decade. At the same time, films like Wall Street andnovels like Bret Easton Ellis’s Less Than Zero skewered the excesses of
the rich.
The most significant aspect of much popular culture in the 1980s,
however, was its lack of politics altogether. Steven Spielberg’s E.T.: The
Extra-Terrestrial and his Indiana Jones adventure trilogy topped the box
office. Cinematic escapism replaced the social films of the 1970s. Quintessential Hollywood leftist Jane Fonda appeared frequently on televisionbut only to peddle exercise videos. Television viewership—once dominated by the big three networks of NBC, ABC, and CBS—fragmented
with the rise of cable channels catering to particularized tastes. Few cablechannels so captured the popular imagination as MTV, which debuted in
1981. Telegenic artists like Madonna, Prince, and Michael Jackson skillfully used MTV to boost their reputations and album sales. Conservatives condemned music videos for corrupting young people with vulgar,
anti-authoritarian messages, but the medium only grew in stature. Critics
of MTV targeted Madonna in particular. Her 1989 video “Like a Prayer”
drew protests for what some people viewed as sexually suggestive andblasphemous scenes. The religious right increasingly perceived popular
culture as hostile to Christian values.
The Apple II computer, introduced in 1977, was the first successful
mass-produced microcomputer meant for home use. Cultural battles wereeven more heated in the realm of gender and sexual politics. American
women pushed further into male-dominated spheres during the 1980s.
By 1984, women in the workforce outnumbered those who worked at© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 397

home.66 That same year, New York representative Geraldine Ferraro became the first woman to run on a major party’s presidential ticket when
Democratic candidate Walter Mondale named her his running mate. Yet
the triumph of the right placed fundamental questions about women’s
rights near the center of American politics—particularly in regard toabortion. The issue increasingly divided Americans. Pro-life Democrats
and pro-choice Republicans grew rare, as the National Abortion Rights
Action League enforced pro-choice orthodoxy on the left and the National Right to Life Commission did the same with pro-life orthodoxy
on the right. Religious conservatives took advantage of the Republicantakeover of the White House and Senate in 1980 to push for new restrictions on abortion—with limited success. Senators Jesse Helms of North
Carolina and Orrin Hatch of Utah introduced versions of a Human Life
Amendment to the U.S. Constitution that defined life as beginning at conception. Both efforts failed.67 Reagan, more interested in economic issues
than social ones, provided only lukewarm support for the anti-abortion
movement. He further outraged anti-abortion activists by a­ppointing

The Apple II was
the smallest andsleekest personal
computer model
yet introduced.
Indeed, it revolutionized boththe substance anddesign of personal
computers.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

398

chapt er 29

Sandra Day O’Connor, a supporter of abortion rights, to the Supreme
Court. Despite these setbacks, anti-abortion forces succeeded in defunding some abortion providers. The 1976 Hyde Amendment prohibited theuse of federal funds to pay for abortions; by 1990 almost every state had
its own version of the Hyde Amendment. Yet some anti-abortion activists
demanded more. In 1988 evangelical activist Randall Terry founded Operation Rescue, an organization that targeted abortion clinics and prochoice politicians with confrontational—and sometimes violent—tactics.
Operation Rescue demonstrated that the fight over abortion would growonly more heated in the 1990s.
The emergence of a deadly new illness, acquired immunodeficiency
syndrome (AIDS), simultaneously devastated, stigmatized, and energized
the nation’s homosexual community. When AIDS appeared in the early
1980s, most of its victims were gay men. For a time the disease was
known as GRID—gay-related immune deficiency. The epidemic rekindled older pseudoscientific ideas about the inherently diseased natureof homosexual bodies. The Reagan administration met the issue withindifference, leading liberal congressman Henry Waxman to rage that
“if the same disease had appeared among Americans of Norwegian descent . . . rather than among gay males, the response of both the government and the medical community would be different.”68 Some religious
figures seemed to relish the opportunity to condemn homosexual activity;
Catholic columnist Patrick Buchanan remarked that “the sexual revolution has begun to devour its children.”69
Homosexuals were left to forge their own response to the crisis.
Some turned to confrontation—like New York playwright Larry Kramer.
Kramer founded the Gay Men’s Health Crisis, which demanded a moreproactive response to the epidemic. Others sought to humanize AIDS
victims; this was the goal of the AIDS Memorial Quilt, a commemorative project begun in 1985. By the middle of the decade the federal
government began to address the issue haltingly. Surgeon General C.
Everett Koop, an evangelical Christian, called for more federal funding
on AIDS-related research, much to the dismay of critics on the religious
right. By 1987 government spending on AIDS-related research reached$500 million—still only 25 percent of what experts advocated.70 In 1987
Reagan convened a presidential commission on AIDS; the commission’sreport called for antidiscrimination laws to protect people with AIDS andfor more federal spending on AIDS research. The shift encouraged activists. Nevertheless, on issues of abortion and gay rights—as with the push

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 399

The AIDS epidemic hit gay and African American communities particularly hard in the 1980s,
prompting widespread social stigmatization,
but also prompting awareness campaigns, suchas this poster featuring singer Patti LaBelle.
Wikimedia.

for racial equality—activists spent the 1980s preserving the status quo
rather than building on previous gains. This amounted to a significant
victory for the New Right.

X. The New Right Abroad
The conservative movement gained ground on gender and sexual politics, but it captured the entire battlefield on American foreign policy inthe 1980s, at least for a time. Ronald Reagan entered office a committed Cold Warrior. He held the Soviet Union in contempt, denouncing it
in a 1983 speech as an “evil empire.”71 And he never doubted that theSoviet Union would end up “on the ash heap of history,” as he said in a
1982 speech to the British Parliament.72 Indeed, Reagan believed it was
the duty of the United States to speed the Soviet Union to its inevitabledemise. His Reagan Doctrine declared that the United States would supply aid to anti­communist forces everywhere in the world.73 To give this© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

400

chapt er 29

MargaretThatcher andRonald Reagan,
pictured here atCamp David in
December 1984,
led two of theworld’s most powerful countries andformed an alliancethat benefited
both throughout
their tenures in
office. Wikimedia.

doctrine force, Reagan oversaw an enormous expansion in the defense
budget. Federal spending on defense rose from $171 billion in 1981 to$229 billion in 1985, the highest level since the Vietnam War.74 He described this as a policy of “peace through strength,” a phrase that appealed to Americans who, during the 1970s, feared that the United States
was losing its status as the world’s most powerful nation. Yet the irony isthat Reagan, for all his militarism, helped bring the Cold War to an end
through negotiation, a tactic he had once scorned.
Reagan’s election came at a time when many Americans feared theircountry was in an irreversible decline. American forces withdrew in disarray from South Vietnam in 1975. The United States returned controlof the Panama Canal to Panama in 1978, despite protests from conservatives. Pro-American dictators were toppled in Iran and Nicaragua in
1979. The Soviet Union invaded Afghanistan that same year, leading conservatives to warn about American weakness in the face of Soviet expansion. Reagan spoke to fears of decline and warned, in 1976, that “thisnation has become Number Two in a world where it is dangerous—if not
fatal—to be second best.”75
The Reagan administration made Latin America a showcase for its
newly assertive policies. Jimmy Carter had sought to promote human© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 401

rights in the region, but Reagan and his advisors scrapped this approachand instead focused on fighting communism—a term they applied to all
Latin American left-wing movements. And so when communists with ties
to Cuba overthrew the government of the Caribbean nation of Grenada in
October 1983, Reagan dispatched the U.S. Marines to the island. Dubbed
Operation Urgent Fury, the Grenada invasion overthrew the leftist government after less than a week of fighting. Despite the relatively minor nature of the mission, its success gave victory-hungry Americans something
to cheer about after the military debacles of the previous two decades.
Grenada was the only time Reagan deployed the American militaryin Latin America, but the United States also influenced the region by
supporting right-wing, anticommunist movements there. From 1981 to
1990, the United States gave more than $4 billion to the government of
El Salvador in a largely futile effort to defeat the guerrillas of the Farabundo Martí National Liberation Front (FMLN).76 Salvadoran security
forces equipped with American weapons committed numerous atrocities, including the slaughter of almost one thousand civilians at the village of El Mozote in December 1981.

Operation Urgent
Fury, the U.S.
invasion of Grenada, was broadly
supported by the
U.S. public. This
photograph shows
the deployment of
U.S. Army Rangers on October 25,
1983. Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

402

chapt er 29

The Reagan administration took a more cautious approach in the
Middle East, where its policy was determined by a mix of anticommunism and hostility toward the Islamic government of Iran. When Iraq
invaded Iran in 1980, the United States supplied Iraqi dictator Saddam
Hussein with military intelligence and business credits—even after it
became clear that Iraqi forces were using chemical weapons. Reagan’s
greatest setback in the Middle East came in 1982, when, shortly after
Israel invaded Lebanon, he dispatched Marines to the Lebanese city ofBeirut to serve as a peacekeeping force. On October 23, 1983, a suicide
bomber killed 241 Marines stationed in Beirut. Congressional pressure
and anger from the American public forced Reagan to recall the Marines
from Lebanon in March 1984. Reagan’s decision demonstrated that, forall his talk of restoring American power, he took a pragmatic approach toforeign policy. He was unwilling to risk another Vietnam by committing
American troops to Lebanon.
Though Reagan’s policies toward Central America and the Middle
East aroused protest, his policy on nuclear weapons generated the mostcontroversy. Initially Reagan followed the examples of presidents Nixon,
Ford, and Carter by pursuing arms limitation talks with the Soviet Union.
American officials participated in the Intermediate-range Nuclear Force(INF) Talks that began in 1981 and the Strategic Arms Reduction Talks(START) in 1982. But the breakdown of these talks in 1983 led Reagan toproceed with plans to place Pershing II nuclear missiles in Western Europe
to counter Soviet SS-20 missiles in Eastern Europe. Reagan went a stepfurther in March 1983, when he announced plans for a Strategic Defense
Initiative (SDI), a space-based system that could shoot down incoming
Soviet missiles. Critics derided the program as a “Star Wars” fantasy, andeven Reagan’s advisors harbored doubts. “We don’t have the technology
to do this,” secretary of state George Shultz told aides.77 These aggressive
policies fed a growing nuclear freeze movement throughout the world.
In the United States, organizations like the Committee for a Sane Nuclear
Policy organized protests that culminated in a June 1982 rally that drewalmost a million people to New York City’s Central Park.
Protests in the streets were echoed by resistance in Congress. Congressional Democrats opposed Reagan’s policies on the merits; congressional Republicans, though they supported Reagan’s anticommunism,
were wary of the administration’s fondness for circumventing Congress.
In 1982, the House voted 411–0 to approve the Boland Amendment,
which barred the United States from supplying funds to the contras, a© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 403

President Reagan proposed new space- and ground-based defense systems to protect the United States from
nuclear missiles in his 1984 Strategic Defense Initiative (SDI). Scientists argued that it was technologicallyunfeasible, and it was lambasted in the media as the “Star Wars” program. Wikimedia.

right-wing insurgency fighting the leftist Sandinista government in Nicaragua. Reagan, overlooking the contras’ brutal tactics, hailed them as the“moral equivalent of the Founding Fathers.”78 The Reagan administration’s determination to flout these amendments led to a scandal that almost destroyed Reagan’s presidency. Robert MacFarlane, the president’s
national security advisor, and Oliver North, a member of the National
Security Council, raised money to support the contras by selling American missiles to Iran and funneling the money to Nicaragua. When theirscheme was revealed in 1986, it was hugely embarrassing for Reagan.
The president’s underlings had not only violated the Boland Amendment
but had also, by selling arms to Iran, made a mockery of Reagan’s declaration that “America will never make concessions to the terrorists.”
But while the Iran-Contra affair generated comparisons to the Watergate
scandal, investigators were never able to prove Reagan knew about theoperation. Without such a “smoking gun,” talk of impeaching Reagan
remained simply talk.
Though the Iran-Contra scandal tarnished the Reagan administration’s image, it did not derail Reagan’s most significant achievement: easing tensions with the Soviet Union. This would have seemed impossible© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

404

chapt er 29

in Reagan’s first term, when the president exchanged harsh words witha rapid succession of Soviet leaders—Leonid Brezhnev, Yuri Andropov,and Konstantin Chernenko. In 1985, however, the aged Chernenko’s
death handed leadership of the Soviet Union to Mikhail Gorbachev,
who, while a true believer in socialism, nonetheless realized that the Soviet Union desperately needed to reform itself. He instituted a programof perestroika, which referred to the restructuring of the Soviet system,and of glasnost, which meant greater transparency in government. Gorbachev also reached out to Reagan in hopes of negotiating an end to
the arms race, which was bankrupting the Soviet Union. Reagan andGorbachev met in Geneva, Switzerland, in 1985 and Reykjavik, Iceland,in 1986. The summits failed to produce any concrete agreements, but
the two leaders developed a relationship unprecedented in the history of
U.S.-Soviet relations. This trust made possible the Intermediate Nuclear
Forces Treaty of 1987, which committed both sides to a sharp reductionin their nuclear arsenal.
By the late 1980s the Soviet empire was crumbling. Reagan successfully combined anticommunist rhetoric (such as his 1987 speech at the
Berlin Wall, where he declared, “General Secretary Gorbachev, if you
seek peace . . . tear down this wall!”) with a willingness to negotiatewith Soviet leadership.79 But the most significant causes of collapse lay
within the Soviet empire itself. Soviet-allied governments in Eastern Europe tottered under pressure from dissident organizations like Poland’s
Solidarity and East Germany’s Neues Forum. Some of these countries,
such as Poland, were also pressured from within by the Roman Catholic
Church, which had turned toward active anticommunism under PopeJohn Paul II. When Gorbachev made it clear that he would not send
the Soviet military to prop up these regimes, they collapsed one by one
in 1989—in Poland, Hungary, Czechoslovakia, Romania, Bulgaria, andEast Germany. Within the Soviet Union, Gorbachev’s proposed reforms
unraveled the decaying Soviet system rather than bringing stability. By
1991 the Soviet Union itself had vanished, dissolving into a Commonwealth of Independent States.

XI. Conclusion
Reagan left office in 1988 with the Cold War waning and the economy
booming. Unemployment had dipped to 5 percent by 1988.80 Between
1981 and 1986, gas prices fell from $1.38 per gallon to 95¢.81 The© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 405

stock market recovered from the crash, and the Dow Jones Industrial­Average—which stood at 950 in 1981—reached 2,239 by the end of Reagan’s second term.82 Yet the economic gains of the decade were unequallydistributed. The top fifth of households enjoyed rising incomes while therest stagnated or declined.83 In constant dollars, annual chief executive
officer (CEO) pay rose from $3 million in 1980 to roughly $12 million
during Reagan’s last year in the White House.84 Between 1985 and 1989
the number of Americans living in poverty remained steady at thirtythree million.85 Real per capita money income grew at only 2 percent per
year, a rate roughly equal to the Carter years.86 The American economy
saw more jobs created than lost during the 1980s, but half of the jobs
eliminated were in high-paying industries.87 Furthermore, half of the newjobs failed to pay wages above the poverty line. The economic divide
was most acute for African Americans and Latinos, one third of whom
qualified as poor.
The triumph of the right proved incomplete. The number of government employees actually increased under Reagan. With more than 80 percent of the federal budget committed to defense, entitlement programs,
and interest on the national debt, the right’s goal of deficit elimination
floundered for lack of substantial areas to cut.88 Between 1980 and 1989
the national debt rose from $914 billion to $2.7 trillion.89 Despite steep
tax cuts for corporations and the wealthy, the overall tax burden of theAmerican public basically remained unchanged. Moreover, so-called regressive taxes on payroll and certain goods actually increased the tax
burden on low- and middle-income Americans. Finally, Reagan slowed
but failed to vanquish the five-decade legacy of economic liberalism.
Most New Deal and Great Society proved durable. Government still offered its neediest citizens a safety net, if a now continually shrinking one.
Yet the discourse of American politics had irrevocably changed. The
preeminence of conservative political ideas grew ever more pronounced,
even when Democrats controlled Congress or the White House. In responseto the conservative mood of the country, the Democratic Party adapted its
own message to accommodate many of the Republicans’ ­Reagan-era ideas
and innovations. The United States was on a rightward path.

XII. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Richard Anderson and William J. Schultz, with content
contributions by Richard Anderson, Laila Ballout, Marsha Barrett, Seth Bartee,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

406

chapt er 29

Eladio Bobadilla, Kyle Burke, Andrew Chadwick, Aaron Cowan, Jennifer Donnally, Leif Fredrickson, Kori Graves, Karissa A. Haugeberg, Jonathan Hunt, Stephen Koeth, Colin Reynolds, William J. Schultz, and Daniel Spillman.
Recommended citation: Richard Anderson et al., “The Triumph of theRight,” Richard Anderson and William J. Schultz, eds., in The American Yawp,
eds. ­Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press,2019).
N o t e s t o C h a p t e r 29
1. Ronald Reagan, quoted in Steve Neal, “Reagan Assails Carter On Auto
Layoffs,” Chicago Tribune, October 20, 1980, 5.
2. Ronald Reagan, quoted in James T. Patterson, Restless Giant: The UnitedStates from Watergate to Bush v. Gore (New York: Oxford University Press,
2005), 152.
3. Robert Self, All in the Family: The Realignment of American Democracy
Since the 1960s (New York: Hill and Wang, 2012), 369.
4. William F. Buckley, Jr., “Our Mission Statement,” National Review, November 19, 1955. http://​www​.nationalreview​.com​/article​/223549​/our​-mission​-statement​-william​-f​-buckley​-jr.
5. James Reston, “What Goldwater Lost: Voters Rejected His Candidacy,
Conservative Cause and the G.O.P.,” New York Times, November 4, 1964, 23.
6. George Wallace, quoted in William Chafe, The Unfinished Journey: America Since World War II (New York: Oxford University Press, 1991), 377.
7. James Patterson, Grand Expectations: The United States, 1945–1974(New York: Oxford University Press, 1996), 735–736.
8. Lisa McGirr, Suburban Warriors: The Origins of the New American Right(Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2001), 227–231.
9. Francis Schaeffer, quoted in Whatever Happened to the Human Race?
(Episode I), Film, directed by Franky Schaeffer, (1979, USA, Franky Schaeffer V
Productions). https://​www​.youtube​.com​/watch​?v​=​UQAyIwi5l6E.
10. Walter Goodman, “Irving Kristol: Patron Saint of the New Right,” NewYork Times Magazine, December 6, 1981. http://​www​.nytimes​.com​/1981​/12​/06​/magazine​/irving​-kristol​-patron​-saint​-of​-the​-new​-right​.html.
11. Patterson, Restless Giant, 113.
12. Jimmy Carter, 1978 State of the Union Address, January 19, 1978,
Jimmy Carter Presidential Library and Museum, http://​www​.jimmycarterlibrary​.gov​/documents​/speeches​/su78jec​.phtml.
13. Jefferson Cowie, Stayin’ Alive: The 1970s and the Last Days of theWorking Class (New York: New Press, 2010), 12.
14. George Meany, quoted in ibid., 293.
15. Ibid., 268.
16. Richard Viguerie, quoted in Joseph Crespino, “Civil Rights and the Religious Right,” in Bruce J. Schulman and Julian Zelizer, eds., Rightward Bound:
Making America Conservative in the 1970s (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2008), 91.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 407

17. Patterson, Restless Giant, 148.
18. Judith Stein, Pivotal Decade: How the United States Traded Factories
for Finance in the Seventies (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2010), 231.
19. Jimmy Carter, quoted in Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 453.
20. William Winpisinger, quoted in Cowie, Stayin’ Alive, 261.
21. Patterson, Restless Giant, 148.
22. Ibid.
23. Ibid.
24. Jimmy Carter, quoted in “Carter Tells of ‘Adultery in His Heart,’” Los
Angeles Times, September 21, 1976, B6.
25. Crespino, “Civil Rights and the Religious Right,” 103.
26. Patterson, Restless Giant, 163; Jon Nordheimer, “Reagan Is Picking
His Florida Spots: His Campaign Aides Aim for New G.O.P. Voters in Strategic
Areas,” New York Times, February 5, 1976, 24.
27. Sean Wilentz, The Age of Reagan: A History, 1974–2008 (New York:
HarperCollins, 2008), 124.
28. Meg Jacobs and Julian Zelizer, Conservatives in Power: The Reagan
Years, 1981–1989: A Brief History with Documents (Boston: Bedford St. Martin’s, 2011), 2.
29. Patterson, Restless Giant, 150.
30. Ibid.
31. Ronald Reagan, quoted in Jacobs and Zelizer, Conservatives in Po­
wer, 20.
32. Jack Kemp, quoted in Jacobs and Zelizer, Conservatives in Power, 21.
33. Wilentz, Age of Reagan, 121.
34. Jacobs and Zelizer, Conservatives in Power, 25–26.
35. Ronald Reagan, quoted in Neal, “Reagan Assails Carter,” 5.
36. Stein, Pivotal Decade, 267.
37. Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 474.
38. Patterson, Restless Giant, 159.
39. Gil Troy, Morning in America: How Ronald Reagan Invented the 1980s(Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005), 67.
40. Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 476.
41. Ibid., 474.
42. Margaret Bush Wilson, quoted in Troy, Morning in America, 93.
43. Ibid., 210.
44. Ibid., 110.
45. Patterson, Restless Giant, 163–164.
46. Troy, Morning in America, 208.
47. Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 477.
48. Patterson, Restless Giant, 162. Many people used the term harsh medicine to describe Volcker’s action on interest rates; see Art Pine, “Letting Harsh
Medicine Work,” Washington Post, October 14, 1979, G1.
49. Patterson, Restless Giant, 189.
50. Ibid.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

408

chapt er 29

51. Ibid., 190–191.
52. Troy, Morning in America, 210; Patterson, Restless Giant, 165.
53. Patterson, Restless Giant, 173–174.
54. Ibid., 171.
55. 1988 Democratic Primaries, CQ Voting and Elections Collection, database accessed June 30, 2015.
56. The State of Black America, 1990 (New York: National Urban League,1990), 34.
57. Andrew Hacker, Two Nations: Black and White, Separate, Hostile, Unequal (New York: Scribner, 1992), 102.
58. Ibid., 94.
59. Troy, Morning in America, 91.
60. American Social History Project, Who Built America? Vol. Two: Since
1877 (New York: Bedford St. Martin’s, 2000), 723.
61. Patterson, Restless Giant, 172–173.
62. Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 487.
63. Bruce Springsteen, “My Hometown,” Born in the USA (Columbia Records: New York, 1984).
64. Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 489.
65. Patterson, Restless Giant, 175.
66. Ruth Rosen, The World Split Open: How the Modern Women’s Movement Changed America (New York: Penguin, 2000), 337.
67. Self, All in the Family, 376–377.
68. Ibid., 387–388.
69. Ibid., 384.
70. Ibid., 389.
71. Wilentz, Age of Reagan, 163.
72. Lou Cannon, “President Calls for ‘Crusade’: Reagan Proposes Plan toCounter Soviet Challenge,” Washington Post, June 9, 1982, A1.
73. Conservative newspaper columnist Charles Krauthammer coined thephrase. See Wilentz, Age of Reagan, 157.
74. Patterson, Restless Giant, 205.
75. Laura Kalman, Right Star Rising: A New Politics, 1974–1980 (NewYork: Norton, 2010), 166–167.
76. Ronald Reagan, “Address to the Nation on United States Policy in Central America,” May 9, 1984. http://​www​.reagan​.utexas​.edu​/archives​/speeches​/1984​/50984h​.htm.
77. Frances Fitzgerald, Way out There in the Blue: Reagan, Star Wars, andthe End of the Cold War (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2000), 205.
78. Ronald Reagan, “Remarks at the Annual Dinner of the Conservative
Political Action Conference,” March 1, 1985. http://​www​.presidency​.ucsb​.edu​/ws​/​?pid​=​38274.
79. Lou Cannon, “Reagan Challenges Soviets to Dismantle Berlin Wall:
Aides Disappointed at Crowd’s Lukewarm Reception,” Washington Post, June
13, 1987, A1.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he T ri u m p h o f t h e R i g h t 409

80. Patterson, Restless Giant, 163.
81. Ibid.
82. Patterson, Restless Giant.
83. Jacobs and Zelizer, Conservatives in Power, 32.
84. Patterson, Restless Giant, 186.
85. Ibid., 164.
86. Ibid., 166.
87. Chafe, Unfinished Journey, 488.
88. Jacobs and Zelizer, Conservatives in Power, 31.
89. Patterson, Restless Giant, 158.
R e c om m e n d e d R e a d in g
Brier, Jennifer. Infectious Ideas: U.S. Political Responses to the AIDS Crisis. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2009.
Carter, Dan T. The Politics of Rage: George Wallace, the Origins of the New
Conservatism, and the Transformation of American Politics. Baton Rouge:
LSU Press, 1995.
Chappell, Marisa. The War on Welfare: Family, Poverty, and Politics in Modern
America. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2009.
Crespino, Joseph. In Search of Another Country: Mississippi and the Conservative Counterrevolution. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2007.
Critchlow, Donald. The Conservative Ascendancy: How the GOP Right Made
Political History. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2007.
Dallek, Matthew. The Right Moment: Ronald Reagan’s First Victory and the Decisive Turning Point in American Politics. New York: Free Press, 2000.
Hinton, Elizabeth. From the War on Poverty to the War on Crime. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, 2016.
Hunter, James D. Culture Wars: The Struggle to Define America. New York:
Basic Books, 1992.
Kalman, Laura. Right Star Rising: A New Politics, 1974–1980. New York: Norton, 2010.
Kruse, Kevin M. White Flight: Atlanta and the Making of Modern Conservatism.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005.
Lassiter, Matthew D. The Silent Majority: Suburban Politics in the Sunbelt South.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2006.
MacLean, Nancy. Freedom Is Not Enough: The Opening of the American Workplace. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2008.
Moreton, Bethany. To Serve God and Walmart: The Making of Christian FreeEnterprise. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2009.
Nadasen, Premilla. Welfare Warriors: The Welfare Rights Movement in the
United States. New York: Routledge, 2005.
Nickerson, Michelle M. Mothers of Conservatism: Women and the Postwar
Right. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2012.
Patterson, James T. Restless Giant: The United States from Watergate to Bush v.
Gore. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

410

chapt er 29

Phillips-Fein, Kim. Invisible Hands: The Businessmen’s Crusade Against the New
Deal. New York: Norton, 2010.
Rodgers, Daniel T. Age of Fracture. Cambridge: Belknap Press, 2011.
Schoenwald, Jonathan. A Time for Choosing: The Rise of Modern American
Conservatism. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.
Self, Robert O. All in the Family: The Realignment of American Democracy Since
the 1960s. New York: Hill and Wang, 2012.
Troy, Gil. Morning in America: How Ronald Reagan Invented the 1980s. Prince­
ton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2005.
Westad, Odd Arne. The Global Cold War: Third World Interventions and theMaking of Our Times. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2005.
Wilentz, Sean. The Age of Reagan: A History, 1974–2008. New York: HarperCollins, 2008.
Williams, Daniel K. God’s Own Party: The Making of the Christian Right. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2007.
Zaretsky, Natasha. No Direction Home: The American Family and the Fear of
National Decline. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2007.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

30
The Recent Past
I. Introduction
Revolutionary technological change, unprecedented global flows ofgoods and people and capital, an amorphous and unending War on Terror, accelerating inequality, growing diversity, a changing climate, political stalemate: our world is remarkable, frustrating, and dynamic. But it is
not an island of circumstance—it is a product of history. Time marches
forever on. The present becomes the past and the past becomes history.
But, as William Faulkner wrote, “The past is never dead. It’s not evenpast.”1 The last several decades of American history have culminatedin the present, an era of innovation and advancement but also of stark
partisan division, racial and ethnic tension, gender divides, sluggish
economic growth, widening inequalities, widespread military interventions, and pervasive anxieties about the present and future of the UnitedStates. Through boom and bust, national tragedy, foreign wars, and the

The New York
City skyline before
September 11,
2001. Library ofCongress.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

412

chapt er 30­ aturation of a new generation, a new chapter of American history ismbusily being written.

II. American Politics Before September 11, 2001
The conservative Reagan Revolution lingered over the presidential election of 1988. At stake was the legacy of a newly empowered conservative
movement, a movement that would move forward with Reagan’s vicepresident, George H. W. Bush, who triumphed over Massachusetts governor Michael Dukakis with a promise to continue the conservative workthat had commenced in the 1980s.
The son of a U.S. senator from Connecticut, George H. W. Bush wasa World War II veteran, president of a successful oil company, chair of
the Republican National Committee, director of the CIA, and memberof the House of Representatives from Texas. After failing to best Reagan
in the 1980 Republican primaries, he was elected as his vice president in1980 and again in 1984. In 1988, Michael Dukakis, a proud liberal from
Massachusetts, challenged Bush for the White House.
Dukakis ran a weak campaign. Bush, a Connecticut aristocrat who
had never been fully embraced by movement conservatism, particularly
the newly animated religious right, nevertheless hammered Dukakis withmoral and cultural issues. Bush said Dukakis had blocked recitationof the Pledge of Allegiance in Massachusetts schools and that he was a“card-carrying member” of the ACLU. Bush meanwhile dispatched hiseldest son, George W. Bush, as his ambassador to the religious right.2
Bush also infamously released a political ad featuring the face of Willie Horton, a black Massachusetts man and convicted murderer who
raped a woman being released through a prison furlough program during Dukakis’s tenure as governor. “By the time we’re finished,” Bush’s
campaign manager, Lee Atwater, said, “they’re going to wonder whether
Willie Horton is Dukakis’ running mate.”3 Liberals attacked conservatives for perpetuating the ugly “code word” politics of the old Southern
Strategy—the underhanded appeal to white racial resentments perfectedby Richard Nixon in the aftermath of civil rights legislation.4 Buoyedby such attacks, Bush won a large victory and entered the White House.
Bush’s election signaled Americans’ continued embrace of Reagan’s
conservative program and further evidenced the utter disarray of the
Democratic Party. American liberalism, so stunningly triumphant in the
1960s, was now in full retreat. It was still, as one historian put it, the“Age of Reagan.”5© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  413

The Soviet Union collapsed during Bush’s tenure. Devastated by astagnant economy, mired in a costly and disastrous war in Afghanistan,confronted with dissident factions in Eastern Europe, and rocked by internal dissent, the Soviet Union crumbled. Soviet leader and reformer
Mikhail Gorbachev loosened the Soviet Union’s tight personal restraints
and censorship (glasnost) and liberalized the Soviet political machinery(perestroika). Eastern Bloc nations turned against their communist organizations and declared their independence from the Soviet Union. Gorbachev let them go. Soon, Soviet Union unraveled. On December 25,
1991, Gorbachev resigned his office, declaring that the Soviet Union nolonger existed. At the Kremlin—Russia’s center of government—the new
tricolor flag of the Russian Federation was raised.6
The dissolution of the Soviet Union left the United States as the world’s
only remaining superpower. Global capitalism seemed triumphant. Observers wondered if some final stage of history had been reached, if theold battles had ended and a new global consensus built around peace andopen markets would reign forever. “What we may be witnessing is notjust the end of the Cold War, or the passing of a particular period of postwar history, but the end of history as such,” wrote Francis Fukuyama
in his much-talked-about 1989 essay, “The End of History?”7 Assets
in Eastern Europe were privatized and auctioned off as newly independent nations introduced market economies. New markets were rising inSoutheast Asia and Eastern Europe. India, for instance, began liberalizing
its economic laws and opening itself up to international investment in1991. China’s economic reforms, advanced by Chairman Deng Xiaoping
and his handpicked successors, accelerated as privatization and foreign
investment proceeded.
The post–Cold War world was not without international conflicts,
however. When Iraq invaded the small but oil-rich nation of Kuwait in1990, Congress granted President Bush approval to intervene. The UnitedStates laid the groundwork for intervention (Operation Desert Shield) inAugust and commenced combat operations (Operation Desert Storm) in
January 1991. With the memories of Vietnam still fresh, many Americans were hesitant to support military action that could expand into a
protracted war or long-term commitment of troops. But the Gulf War
was a swift victory for the United States. New technologies—including
laser-guided precision bombing—amazed Americans, who could now
watch twenty-four-hour live coverage of the war on the Cable News Network (CNN). The Iraqi army disintegrated after only a hundred hoursof ground combat. President Bush and his advisors opted not to pursue© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

414

chapt er 30

During the Gulf
War, the Iraqi
military set fireto Kuwait’s oilfields, many ofwhich burned
for months.
March 21, 1991.
Wikimedia.

the war into Baghdad and risk an occupation and insurgency. And so
the war was won. Many wondered if the “ghosts of Vietnam” had been
exorcised.8 Bush won enormous popular support. Gallup polls showeda job approval rating as high as 89 percent in the weeks after the end of
the war.9
President Bush’s popularity seemed to suggest an easy reelection in
1992, but Bush had still not won over the New Right, the aggressively
conservative wing of the Republican Party, despite his attacks on Dukakis, his embrace of the flag and the pledge, and his promise, “Read mylips: no new taxes.” He faced a primary challenge from political commentator Patrick Buchanan, a former Reagan and Nixon White Houseadvisor, who cast Bush as a moderate, as an unworthy steward of theconservative movement who was unwilling to fight for conservative
Americans in the nation’s ongoing culture war. Buchanan did not defeat
Bush in the Republican primaries, but he inflicted enough damage to
weaken his candidacy.10
Still thinking that Bush would be unbeatable in 1992, many prominent Democrats passed on a chance to run, and the Democratic Party
nominated a relative unknown, Arkansas governor Bill Clinton. Dogged
by charges of marital infidelity and draft dodging during the Vietnam© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  415

War, Clinton was a consummate politician with enormous charisma anda skilled political team. He framed himself as a New Democrat, a centrist open to free trade, tax cuts, and welfare reform. Twenty-two years
younger than Bush, he was the first baby boomer to make a serious run at
the presidency. Clinton presented the campaign as a generational choice.
During the campaign he appeared on MTV, played the saxophone on
The Arsenio Hall Show, and told voters that he could offer the UnitedStates a new way forward.
Bush ran on his experience and against Clinton’s moral failings. The
GOP convention in Houston that summer featured speeches from Pat
Buchanan and religious leader Pat Robertson decrying the moral decay
plaguing American life. Clinton was denounced as a social liberal who
would weaken the American family through both his policies and his
individual moral character. But Clinton was able to convince voters that
his moderated southern brand of liberalism would be more effective
than the moderate conservatism of George Bush. Bush’s candidacy, ofcourse, was perhaps most damaged by a sudden economic recession.
As Clinton’s political team reminded the country, “It’s the economy,
stupid.”Clinton won the election, but the Reagan Revolution still reigned.
Clinton and his running mate, Tennessee senator Albert Gore Jr., bothmoderate southerners, promised a path away from the old liberalism of
the 1970s and 1980s (and the landslide electoral defeats of the 1980s).
They were Democrats, but conservative Democrats, so-called New
Democrats. In his first term, Clinton set out an ambitious agenda that
included an economic stimulus package, universal health insurance, acontinuation of the Middle East peace talks initiated by Bush’s secretary of state James A. Baker III, welfare reform, and a completion of
the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) to abolish tradebarriers between the United States, Mexico, and Canada. His moves toreform welfare, open trade, and deregulate financial markets were particular hallmarks of Clinton’s Third Way, a new Democratic embrace ofheretofore conservative policies.11
With NAFTA, Clinton reversed decades of Democratic opposition tofree trade and opened the nation’s northern and southern borders to thefree flow of capital and goods. Critics, particularly in the Midwest’s RustBelt, blasted the agreement for opening American workers to competition by low-paid foreign workers. Many American factories relocatedand set up shops—maquilas—in northern Mexico that took advantage© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

416

chapt er 30

of Mexico’s low wages. Thousands of Mexicans rushed to the maquilas.
Thousands more continued on past the border.
If NAFTA opened American borders to goods and services, people still
navigated strict legal barriers to immigration. Policy makers believed that
free trade would create jobs and wealth that would incentivize Mexican
workers to stay home, and yet multitudes continued to leave for opportunities in el norte. The 1990s proved that prohibiting illegal migration
was, if not impossible, exceedingly difficult. Poverty, political corruption, violence, and hopes for a better life in the United States—or simply
higher wages—continued to lure immigrants across the border. Between
1990 and 2010, the proportion of foreign-born individuals in the UnitedStates grew from 7.9 percent to 12.9 percent, and the number of undocumented immigrants tripled from 3.5 million to 11.2. While large numbers
continued to migrate to traditional immigrant destinations—California,
Texas, New York, Florida, New Jersey, and Illinois—the 1990s also
witnessed unprecedented migration to the American South. Among thefastest-growing immigrant destination states were Kentucky, Tennessee,
Arkansas, Georgia, and North Carolina, all of which had immigration
growth rates in excess of 100 percent during the decade.12
In response to the continued influx of immigrants and the vocal complaints of anti-immigration activists, policy makers responded with suchinitiatives as Operation Gatekeeper and Hold the Line, which attempted
to make crossing the border more prohibitive. The new strategy “funneled” immigrants to dangerous and remote crossing areas. Immigration
officials hoped the brutal natural landscape would serve as a natural
deterrent. It wouldn’t. By 2017, hundreds of immigrants died each yearof drowning, exposure, and dehydration.13
Clinton, meanwhile, sought to carve out a middle ground in his domestic agenda. In his first weeks in office, Clinton reviewed Departmentof Defense policies restricting homosexuals from serving in the armed
forces. He pushed through a compromise plan, Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell,that removed any questions about sexual orientation in induction interviews but also required that gay military personnel keep their sexual orientation private. The policy alienated many. Social conservatives wereoutraged and his credentials as a conservative southerner suffered, while
many liberals recoiled at continued antigay discrimination.
In his first term, Clinton also put forward universal healthcare as amajor policy goal, and first lady Hillary Rodham Clinton played a majorrole in the initiative. But the push for a national healthcare law collapsed
on itself. Conservatives revolted, the healthcare industry flooded the air-

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  417

waves with attack ads, Clinton struggled with congressional Democrats,and voters bristled. A national healthcare system was again repulsed.
The midterm elections of 1994 were a disaster for the Democrats,
who lost the House of Representatives for the first time since 1952. Congressional Republicans, led by Georgia congressman Newt Gingrich andTexas congressman Dick Armey, offered a policy agenda they called theContract with America. Republican candidates from around the nation
gathered on the steps of the Capitol to pledge their commitment to aconservative legislative blueprint to be enacted if the GOP won controlof the House. The strategy worked.
Social conservatives were mobilized by an energized group of religious activists, especially the Christian Coalition, led by Pat Robertson
and Ralph Reed. Robertson was a television minister and entrepreneur
whose 1988 long shot run for the Republican presidential nomination
brought him a massive mailing list and a network of religiously motivated voters around the country. From that mailing list, the Christian
Coalition organized around the country, seeking to influence politics on
the local and national level.
In 1996 the generational contest played out again when the Republicans nominated another aging war hero, Senator Bob Dole of Kansas,
but Clinton again won the election, becoming the first Democrat to serveback-to-back terms since Franklin Roosevelt. He was aided in part by
the amelioration of conservatives by his signing of welfare reform legislation, the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation
Act of 1996, which decreased welfare benefits, restricted eligibility, andturned over many responsibilities to states. Clinton said it would “breakthe cycle of dependency.”14
Clinton presided over a booming economy fueled by emergent computing technologies. Personal computers had skyrocketed in sales, andthe Internet became a mass phenomenon. Communication and commerce were never again the same. The tech boom was driven by business,and the 1990s saw robust innovation and entrepreneurship. Investors
scrambled to find the next Microsoft or Apple, suddenly massive computing companies. But it was the Internet that sparked a bonanza. The
dot-com boom fueled enormous economic growth and substantial financial speculation to find the next Google or Amazon.
Republicans, defeated at the polls in 1996 and 1998, looked for otherways to undermine Clinton’s presidency. Political polarization seemed
unprecedented and a sensation-starved, post-Watergate media demanded
scandal. The Republican Congress spent millions on investigations© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

418

chapt er 30­ oping to uncover some shred of damning evidence to sink Clinton’shpresidency, whether it be real estate deals, White House staffing, or adultery. Rumors of sexual misconduct had always swirled around Clinton.
The press, which had historically turned a blind eye to such private matters, saturated the media with Clinton’s sex scandals. Congressional investigations targeted the allegations and Clinton denied having “sexual
relations” with Monica Lewinsky before a grand jury and in a statement
to the American public. Republicans used the testimony to allege perjury. In December 1998, the House of Representatives voted to impeach
the president. It was a wildly unpopular step. Two thirds of Americans
disapproved, and a majority told Gallup pollsters that Republicans had
abused their constitutional authority. Clinton’s approval rating, meanwhile, jumped to 78 percent.15 In February 1999, Clinton was acquitted
by the Senate by a vote that mostly fell along party lines.
The 2000 election pitted Vice President Albert Gore Jr. against
George W. Bush, the twice-elected Texas governor and son of the former
president. Gore, wary of Clinton’s recent impeachment despite Clinton’senduring approval ratings, distanced himself from the president and eight
years of relative prosperity. Instead, he ran as a pragmatic, moderate
liberal. Bush, too, ran as a moderate, claiming to represent a compassionate conservatism and a new faith-based politics. Bush was an outspoken
evangelical. In a presidential debate, he declared Jesus Christ his favorite
political philosopher. He promised to bring church leaders into government, and his campaign appealed to churches and clergy to get out thevote. Moreover, he promised to bring honor, dignity, and integrity to
the Oval Office, a clear reference to Clinton. Utterly lacking the political charisma that had propelled Clinton, Gore withered under Bush’s attacks. Instead of trumpeting the Clinton presidency, Gore found himself
answering the media’s questions about whether he was sufficiently analpha male and whether he had invented the Internet.
Few elections have been as close and contentious as the 2000 election,
which ended in a deadlock. Gore had won the popular vote by 500,000
votes, but the Electoral College hinged on a contested Florida election.
On election night the media called Florida for Gore, but then Bush madelate gains and news organizations reversed themselves by declaring thestate for Bush—and Bush the probable president-elect. Gore conceded
privately to Bush, then backpedaled as the counts edged back toward
Gore yet again. When the nation awoke the next day, it was unclear who
had been elected president. The close Florida vote triggered an automatic
recount.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  419

Lawyers descended on Florida. The Gore campaign called for manual
recounts in several counties. Local election boards, Florida secretary ofstate Kathleen Harris, and the Florida supreme court all weighed in until
the U.S. Supreme Court stepped in and, in an unprecedented 5–4 decision
in Bush v. Gore, ruled that the recount had to end. Bush was awarded
Florida by a margin of 537 votes, enough to win him the state and givehim a majority in the Electoral College. He had won the presidency.
In his first months in office, Bush fought to push forward enormous
tax cuts skewed toward America’s highest earners. The bursting of the
dot-com bubble weighed down the economy. Old political and culturalfights continued to be fought. And then the towers fell.

III. September 11 and the War on Terror
On the morning of September 11, 2001, nineteen operatives of the alQaeda terrorist organization hijacked four passenger planes on the East
Coast. American Airlines Flight 11 crashed into the North Tower of the

Ground Zero six
days after the September 11 attacks.
Wikimedia.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

420

chapt er 30

President Bushaddresses
rescue workers
at Ground Zero.
2001. FEMA
Photo Library.

World Trade Center in New York City at 8:46 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT). United Airlines Flight 175 crashed into the South Tower at
9:03. American Airlines Flight 77 crashed into the western façade of thePentagon at 9:37. At 9:59, the South Tower of the World Trade Centercollapsed. At 10:03, United Airlines Flight 93 crashed in a field outside
Shanksville, Pennsylvania, brought down by passengers who had received
news of the earlier hijackings. At 10:28, the North Tower collapsed. In
less than two hours, nearly three thousand Americans had been killed.
The attacks stunned Americans. Late that night, Bush addressed thenation and assured the country that “the search is under way for those
who are behind these evil acts.” At Ground Zero three days later, Bushthanked first responders for their work. A worker said he couldn’t hearhim. “I can hear you,” Bush shouted back, “The rest of the world hears
you. And the people who knocked these buildings down will hear all of
us soon.”American intelligence agencies quickly identified the radical Islamic
militant group al-Qaeda, led by the wealthy Saudi Osama bin Laden, as
the perpetrators of the attack. Sheltered in Afghanistan by the Taliban,
the country’s Islamic government, al-Qaeda was responsible for a 1993
bombing of the World Trade Center and a string of attacks at U.S. embassies and military bases across the world. Bin Laden’s Islamic radicalism
and his anti-American aggression attracted supporters across the region
and, by 2001, al-Qaeda was active in over sixty countries.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  421

Although in his presidential campaign Bush had denounced foreign
nation-building, he populated his administration with neoconservatives,
firm believers in the expansion of American democracy and Americaninterests abroad. Bush advanced what was sometimes called the Bush
Doctrine, a policy in which the United States would have the right to unilaterally and preemptively make war on any regime or terrorist organization that posed a threat to the United States or to U.S. citizens. It would
lead the United States into protracted conflicts in Afghanistan and Iraq
and entangle the United States in nations across the world. Journalist
Dexter Filkins called it a Forever War, a perpetual conflict waged against
an amorphous and undefeatable enemy.16 The geopolitical realities of thetwenty-first-century world were forever transformed.
The United States, of course, had a history in Afghanistan. When
the Soviet Union invaded Afghanistan in December 1979 to quell an insurrection that threatened to topple Kabul’s communist government, theUnited States financed and armed anti-Soviet insurgents, the Mujahideen.
In 1981, the Reagan administration authorized the CIA to provide the
Mujahideen with weapons and training to strengthen the insurgency. An
independent wealthy young Saudi, Osama bin Laden, also fought withand funded the Mujahideen. And they began to win. Afghanistan bled theSoviet Union dry. The costs of the war, coupled with growing instability
at home, convinced the Soviets to withdraw from Afghanistan in 1989.17
Osama bin Laden relocated al-Qaeda to Afghanistan after the country
fell to the Taliban in 1996. Under Bill Clinton, the United States launchedcruise missiles at al-Qaeda camps in Afghanistan in retaliation for alQaeda bombings on American embassies in Africa.
After September 11, with a broad authorization of military force,Bush administration officials made plans for military action against alQaeda and the Taliban. What would become the longest war in American history began with the launching of Operation Enduring Freedom in
October 2001. Air and missile strikes hit targets across Afghanistan. U.S.
Special Forces joined with fighters in the anti-Taliban Northern Alliance.
Major Afghan cities fell in quick succession. The capital, Kabul, fell on
November 13. Bin Laden and al-Qaeda operatives retreated into the rugged mountains along the border of Pakistan in eastern Afghanistan. The
American occupation of Afghanistan continued.
As American troops struggled to contain the Taliban in Afghanistan, theBush administration set its sights on Iraq. After the conclusion of the Gulf
War in 1991, American officials established economic ­sanctions, ­weapons© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

422

chapt er 30

inspections, and no-fly zones. By mid-1991, American warplanes wereroutinely patrolling Iraqi skies and coming under periodic fire from Iraqi
missile batteries. The overall cost to the United States of maintaining thetwo no-fly zones over Iraq was roughly $1 billion a year. Related militaryactivities in the region added almost another $500 million to the annual
bill. On the ground in Iraq, meanwhile, Iraqi authorities clashed with UN
weapons inspectors. Iraq had suspended its program for weapons of mass
destruction, but Saddam Hussein fostered ambiguity about the weapons in
the minds of regional leaders to forestall any possible attacks against Iraq.
In 1998, a standoff between Hussein and the United Nations overweapons inspections led President Bill Clinton to launch punitive strikes
aimed at debilitating what was thought to be a developed chemical weapons program. Attacks began on December 16, 1998. More than two hundred cruise missiles fired from U.S. Navy warships and Air Force B-52
bombers flew into Iraq, targeting suspected chemical weapons storage facilities, missile batteries, and command centers. Airstrikes continued forthree more days, unleashing in total 415 cruise missiles and 600 bombs
against 97 targets. The number of bombs dropped was nearly double thenumber used in the 1991 conflict.
The United States and Iraq remained at odds throughout the 1990s
and early 2000, when Bush administration officials began championing“regime change.” The Bush administration publicly denounced Saddam
Hussein’s regime and its alleged weapons of mass destruction. It began
pushing for war in the fall of 2002. The administration alleged that Hussein was trying to acquire uranium and that it had aluminum tubes used
for nuclear centrifuges. Public opinion was divided. George W. Bush saidin October, “Facing clear evidence of peril, we cannot wait for the final
proof—the smoking gun—that could come in the form of a mushroom
cloud.”18 The administration’s push for war was in full swing. Protests
broke out across the country and all over the world, but majorities ofAmericans supported military action. On October 16, Congress passed
the Authorization for Use of Military Force Against Iraq resolution, giving Bush the power to make war in Iraq. Iraq began cooperating with UN
weapons inspectors in late 2002, but the Bush administration pressed on.
On February 6, 2003, Secretary of State Colin Powell, who had risen to
public prominence as chairman of the Joint Chiefs of State during the
Persian Gulf War in 1991, presented allegations of a robust Iraqi weapons program to the UN. Protests continued.
The first American bombs hit Baghdad on March 20, 2003. Several
hundred thousand troops moved into Iraq and Hussein’s regime quickly© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  423

collapsed. Baghdad fell on April 9. On May 1, 2003, aboard the USS
Abraham Lincoln, beneath a banner reading Mission Accomplished,
George W. Bush announced that “major combat operations in Iraq haveended.”19 No evidence of weapons of mass destruction were ever found.
And combat operations had not ended, not really. The Iraqi insurgency
had begun, and the United States would spend the next ten years struggling to contain it.
Efforts by various intelligence gathering agencies led to the captureof Saddam Hussein, hidden in an underground compartment near his
hometown, on December 13, 2003. The new Iraqi government foundhim guilty of crimes against humanity and he was hanged on December
30, 2006.

Despite George
W. Bush’s illconceived photoop under a Mission Accomplishedbanner in May
2003, combat
operations in Iraq
continued foryears. Wikimedia.

IV. The End of the Bush Years
The War on Terror was a centerpiece in the race for the White House in
2004. The Democratic ticket, headed by Massachusetts senator John F.
Kerry, a Vietnam War hero who entered the public consciousness for his
subsequent testimony against it, attacked Bush for the ongoing inability© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

424

chapt er 30

to contain the Iraqi insurgency or to find weapons of mass destruction,
the revelation and photographic evidence that American soldiers had
abused prisoners at the Abu Ghraib prison outside Baghdad, and theinability to find Osama bin Laden. Moreover, many enemy combatants
who had been captured in Iraq and Afghanistan were “detained” indefinitely at a military prison in Guantanamo Bay in Cuba. “Gitmo” became
infamous for its harsh treatment, indefinite detentions, and torture ofprisoners. Bush defended the War on Terror, and his allies attacked critics
for failing to “support the troops.” Moreover, Kerry had voted for the
war—he had to attack the very thing that he had authorized. Bush won
a close but clear victory.
The second Bush term saw the continued deterioration of the wars in
Iraq and Afghanistan, but Bush’s presidency would take a bigger hit fromhis perceived failure to respond to the domestic tragedy that followed
Hurricane Katrina’s devastating hit on the Gulf Coast. Katrina had beena category 5 hurricane. It was, the New Orleans Times-Picayune reported, “the storm we always feared.”20
New Orleans suffered a direct hit, the levees broke, and the bulk of thecity flooded. Thousands of refugees flocked to the Superdome, where supplies and medical treatment and evacuation were slow to come. Individuals
died in the heat. Bodies wasted away. Americans saw poor black Americans abandoned. Katrina became a symbol of a broken administrative system, a devastated coastline, and irreparable social structures that allowed
escape and recovery for some and not for others. Critics charged that Bush
had staffed his administration with incompetent supporters and had further ignored the displaced poor and black residents of New Orleans.21
Immigration, meanwhile, had become an increasingly potent politicalissue. The Clinton administration had overseen the implementation ofseveral anti-immigration policies on the U.S.-Mexico border, but hunger
and poverty were stronger incentives than border enforcement policies
were deterrents. Illegal immigration continued, often at great human cost,
but nevertheless fanned widespread anti-immigration sentiment among
many American conservatives. Many immigrants and their supporters,
however, fought back. 2006 saw waves of massive protests across thecountry. Hundreds of thousands marched in Chicago, New York, and
Los Angeles, and tens of thousands marched in smaller cities around thecountry. Legal change, however, went nowhere. Moderate conservatives
feared upsetting business interests’ demand for cheap, exploitable laborand alienating large voting blocs by stifling immigration, and moderate© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  425

Hurricane Katrina was one of the deadliest and most destructive hurricanes in U.S. history. It nearly
destroyed New Orleans, Louisiana, as well as cities, towns, and rural areas across the Gulf Coast. It sent
hundreds of thousands of refugees to nearby cities such as Houston, Texas, where they temporarily resided
in massive structures like the Astrodome. Photograph, September 1, 2005. Wikimedia.

liberals feared upsetting anti-immigrant groups by pushing too hard forliberalization of immigration laws.
Afghanistan and Iraq, meanwhile, continued to deteriorate. In 2006,
the Taliban reemerged, as the Afghan government proved both highly
corrupt and incapable of providing social services or security for its citizens. Iraq only descended further into chaos as insurgents battled against
American troops and groups such as Abu Musab al-Zarqawi’s al-Qaeda
in Iraq bombed civilians and released video recordings of beheadings.
In 2007, twenty-seven thousand additional U.S. forces deployed to
Iraq under the command of General David Petraeus. The effort, “thesurge,” employed more sophisticated anti-insurgency strategies and,combined with Sunni efforts, pacified many of Iraq’s cities and provided
cover for the withdrawal of American forces. On December 4, 2008, theIraqi government approved the U.S.-Iraq Status of Forces Agreement,
and U.S. combat forces withdrew from Iraqi cities before June 30, 2009.
The last U.S. combat forces left Iraq on December 18, 2011. Violence andinstability continued to rock the country.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

426

chapt er 30

Opened in 2005,
the Islamic Centerof America in
Dearborn, Michigan, is the largest
Islamic center in
the United States.
Photograph, 2008.
Wikimedia.

V. The Great Recession
The Great Recession began, as most American economic catastrophes
began, with the bursting of a speculative bubble. Throughout the 1990s
and into the new millennium, home prices continued to climb, and financial services firms looked to cash in on what seemed to be a safe but
lucrative investment. After the dot-com bubble burst, investors searched
for a secure investment rooted in clear value, rather than in trendy technological speculation. What could be more secure than real estate? But
mortgage companies began writing increasingly risky loans and thenbundling them together and selling them over and over again, sometimes
so quickly that it became difficult to determine exactly who owned what.
Decades of financial deregulation had rolled back Depression-era
restraints and again allowed risky business practices to dominate theworld of American finance. It was a bipartisan agenda. In the 1990s,
for instance, Bill Clinton signed the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, repealing
provisions of the 1933 Glass-Steagall Act separating commercial and investment banks, and the Commodity Futures Modernization Act, which
exempted credit-default swaps—perhaps the key financial mechanism
behind the crash—from regulation.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  427

Mortgages had been so heavily leveraged that when American homeowners began to default on their loans, the whole system collapsed.
Major financial services firms such as Bear Stearns and Lehman Brothers
disappeared almost overnight. In order to prevent the crisis from spreading, the federal government poured billions of dollars into the industry,
propping up hobbled banks. Massive giveaways to bankers created shockwaves of resentment throughout the rest of the country. On the right,
conservative members of the Tea Party decried the cronyism of an Obamaadministration filled with former Wall Street executives. The same energies also motivated the Occupy Wall Street movement, as mostly young
left-leaning New Yorkers protested an American economy that seemed
overwhelmingly tilted toward “the one percent.”22
The Great Recession only magnified already rising income andwealth inequalities. According to the chief investment officer at JP­
Morgan Chase, the largest bank in the United States, “profit margins
have reached levels not seen in decades,” and “reductions in wages andbenefits explain the majority of the net improvement.”23 A study fromthe Congressional Budget Office (CBO) found that since the late 1970s,
after-tax benefits of the wealthiest 1 percent grew by over 300 percent.
The “average” American’s after-tax benefits had grown 35 percent.
Economic trends have disproportionately and objectively benefited thewealthiest Americans. Still, despite political rhetoric, American frustration failed to generate anything like the social unrest of the early twentieth century. A weakened labor movement and a strong conservative
bloc continue to stymie serious attempts at reversing or even slowing
economic inequalities. Occupy Wall Street managed to generate a fairnumber of headlines and shift public discussion away from budget cutsand toward inequality, but its membership amounted to only a fractionof the far more influential and money-driven Tea Party. Its presence on
the public stage was fleeting.
The Great Recession, however, was not. While American banks
quickly recovered and recaptured their steady profits, and the Americanstock market climbed again to new heights, American workers continued to lag. Job growth was slow and unemployment rates would remain
stubbornly high for years. Wages froze, meanwhile, and well-paying fulltime jobs that were lost were too often replaced by low-paying, part-timework. A generation of workers coming of age within the crisis, moreover, had been savaged by the economic collapse. Unemployment among
young Americans hovered for years at rates nearly double the national
average.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

428

chapt er 30

VI. The Obama Years

In 2008, Barack
Obama became
the first African
American electedto the presidency.
Upon meeting thepresident in May
2009, five-year-old
Jacob Philadelphia
said, “I want toknow if my hairis just like yours.”
The White House,
via Flickr.

By the 2008 election, with Iraq still in chaos, Democrats were ready toembrace the antiwar position and sought a candidate who had consistently opposed military action in Iraq. Senator Barack Obama had only
been a member of the Illinois state senate when Congress debated the war
actions, but he had publicly denounced the war, predicting the sectarian
violence that would ensue, and remained critical of the invasion throughhis 2004 campaign for the U.S. Senate. He began running for president
almost immediately after arriving in Washington.
A former law professor and community activist, Obama became thefirst African American candidate to ever capture the nomination of amajor political party.24 During the election, Obama won the support ofan increasingly antiwar electorate. When an already fragile economy finally collapsed in 2007 and 2008, Bush’s policies were widely blamed.
Obama’s opponent, Republican senator John McCain, was tied to thosepolicies and struggled to fight off the nation’s desire for a new politicaldirection. Obama won a convincing victory in the fall and became thenation’s first African American president.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  429

President Obama’s first term was marked by domestic affairs, especially his efforts to combat the Great Recession and to pass a national
healthcare law. Obama came into office as the economy continued todeteriorate. He continued the bank bailout begun under his predecessor
and launched a limited economic stimulus plan to provide government
spending to reignite the economy.
Despite Obama’s dominant electoral victory, national politics fractured, and a conservative Republican firewall quickly arose against the
Obama administration. The Tea Party became a catch-all term for a diffuse movement of fiercely conservative and politically frustrated American voters. Typically whiter, older, and richer than the average American,
flush with support from wealthy backers, and clothed with the iconography of the Founding Fathers, Tea Party activists registered their deep
suspicions of the federal government.25 Tea Party protests dominated the
public eye in 2009 and activists steered the Republican Party far to theright, capturing primary elections all across the country.
Obama’s most substantive legislative achievement proved to be a national healthcare law, the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act(Obamacare). Presidents since Theodore Roosevelt had striven to passnational healthcare reform and failed. Obama’s plan forsook liberalmodels of a national healthcare system and instead adopted a heretofore conservative model of subsidized private care (similar plans had
been put forward by Republicans Richard Nixon, Newt Gingrich, andObama’s 2012 opponent, Mitt Romney). Beset by conservative protests,
Obama’s healthcare reform narrowly passed through Congress. It abolished pre-existing conditions as a cause for denying care, scrapped junkplans, provided for state-run healthcare exchanges (allowing individuals
without healthcare to pool their purchasing power), offered states funds
to subsidize an expansion of Medicaid, and required all Americans toprovide proof of a health insurance plan that measured up to government-established standards (those who did not purchase a plan would
pay a penalty tax, and those who could not afford insurance would be
eligible for federal subsidies). The number of uninsured Americans remained stubbornly high, however, and conservatives spent most of thenext decade attacking the bill.
Meanwhile, in 2009, President Barack Obama deployed seventeen
thousand additional troops to Afghanistan as part of a counterinsurgency
campaign that aimed to “disrupt, dismantle, and defeat” al-Qaeda andthe Taliban. Meanwhile, U.S. Special Forces and CIA drones t­argeted© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

430

chapt er 30

Former Taliban
fighters surrendertheir arms to thegovernment of theIslamic Republicof Afghanistan
during a reintegration ceremony
at the provincial governor’s
compound in May
2012. Wikimedia.

al-Qaeda and Taliban leaders. In May 2011, U.S. Navy Sea, Air and Land
Forces (SEALs) conducted a raid deep into Pakistan that led to the killingof Osama bin Laden. The United States and NATO began a phased withdrawal from Afghanistan in 2011, with an aim of removing all combat
troops by 2014. Although weak militarily, the Taliban remained politically influential in south and eastern Afghanistan. Al-Qaeda remained active in Pakistan but shifted its bases to Yemen and the Horn of Africa. As
of December 2013, the war in Afghanistan had claimed the lives of 3,397
U.S. service members.

VII. Stagnation
In 2012, Barack Obama won a second term by defeating Republican
Mitt Romney, the former governor of Massachusetts. However, Obama’s
inability to control Congress and the ascendancy of Tea Party Republicans stunted the passage of meaningful legislation. Obama was a lame
duck before he ever won reelection, and gridlocked government came torepresent an acute sense that much of American life—whether in politics,
economics, or race relations—had grown stagnant.
The economy continued its halfhearted recovery from the Great Recession. The Obama administration campaigned on little to specificallyaddress the crisis and, faced with congressional intransigence, accomplished even less. While corporate profits climbed and stock markets© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  431

soared, wages stagnated and employment sagged for years after the GreatRecession. By 2016, the statistically average American worker had notreceived a raise in almost forty years. The average worker in January1973 earned $4.03 an hour. Adjusted for inflation, that wage was about
two dollars per hour more than the average American earned in 2014.
Working Americans were losing ground. Moreover, most income gains
in the economy had been largely captured by a small number of wealthyearners. Between 2009 and 2013, 85 percent of all new income in the
United States went to the top 1 percent of the population.26
But if money no longer flowed to American workers, it saturated
American politics. In 2000, George W. Bush raised a record $172 million
for his campaign. In 2008, Barack Obama became the first presidential
candidate to decline public funds (removing any applicable caps to his
total fund-raising) and raised nearly three quarters of a billion dollars forhis campaign. The average House seat, meanwhile, cost about $1.6 million, and the average Senate Seat over $10 million.27 The Supreme Court,
meanwhile, removed barriers to outside political spending. In 2002,
Senators John McCain and Russ Feingold had crossed party lines to passthe Bipartisan Campaign Reform Act, bolstering campaign finance laws
passed in the aftermath of the Watergate scandal in the 1970s. But political organizations—particularly PACs—exploited loopholes to raise large
sums of money and, in 2010, the Supreme Court ruled in Citizens United
v. FEC that no limits could be placed on political spending by corporations, unions, and nonprofits. Money flowed even deeper into politics.
The influence of money in politics only heightened partisan gridlock, further blocking bipartisan progress on particular political issues.
Climate change, for instance, has failed to transcend partisan barriers.
In the 1970s and 1980s, experts substantiated the theory of anthropogenic (human-caused) global warming. Eventually, the most influentialof these panels, the UN’s Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change(IPCC) concluded in 1995 that there was a “discernible human influence on global climate.”28 This conclusion, though stated conservatively,
was by that point essentially a scientific consensus. By 2007, the IPCC
considered the evidence “unequivocal” and warned that “unmitigatedclimate change would, in the long term, be likely to exceed the capacityof natural, managed and human systems to adapt.”29
Climate change became a permanent and major topic of public discussion and policy in the twenty-first century. Fueled by popular coverage, most notably, perhaps, the documentary An Inconvenient Truth,© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

432

chapt er 30

based on Al Gore’s book and presentations of the same name, addressing
climate change became a plank of the American left and a point of denial for the American right. American public opinion and political action
still lagged far behind the scientific consensus on the dangers of global
warming. Conservative politicians, conservative think tanks, and energy
companies waged war to sow questions in the minds of Americans, who
remain divided on the question, and so many others.
Much of the resistance to addressing climate change is economic. As
Americans looked over their shoulder at China, many refused to sacrifice immediate economic growth for long-term environmental security. Twenty-first-century relations with China remained characterizedby contradictions and interdependence. After the collapse of the Soviet
Union, China reinvigorated its efforts to modernize its country. By liberating and subsidizing much of its economy and drawing enormous foreign investments, China has posted massive growth rates during the last
several decades. Enormous cities rise by the day. In 2000, China had
a GDP around an eighth the size of U.S. GDP. Based on growth rates
and trends, analysts suggest that China’s economy will bypass that of
the United States soon. American concerns about China’s political system have persisted, but money sometimes matters more to Americans.
China has become one of the country’s leading trade partners. Cultural
exchange has increased, and more and more Americans visit China eachyear, with many settling down to work and study.
By 2016, American voters were fed up. In that year’s presidential race,
Republicans spurned their political establishment and nominated a realestate developer and celebrity billionaire, Donald Trump, who, decrying the tyranny of political correctness and promising to Make America
Great Again, promised to build a wall to keep out Mexican immigrants
and bar Muslim immigrants. The Democrats, meanwhile, flirted withthe candidacy of Senator Bernie Sanders, a self-described socialist from
Vermont, before ultimately nominating Hillary Clinton, who, after eight
years as first lady in the 1990s, had served eight years in the Senate andfour more as secretary of state. Voters despaired: Trump and Clinton
were the most unpopular nominees in modern American history. Majorities of Americans viewed each candidate unfavorably and majorities inboth parties said, early in the election season, that they were motivatedmore by voting against their rival candidate than for their own.30 With
incomes frozen, politics gridlocked, race relations tense, and headlines
full of violence, such frustrations only channeled a larger sense of stag-© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  433

nation, which upset traditional political allegiances. In the end, despite
winning nearly three million more votes nationwide, Clinton failed tocarry key Midwestern states where frustrated white, working-class votersabandoned the Democratic Party—a Republican president hadn’t carried
Wisconsin, Michigan, or Pennsylvania, for instance, since the 1980s—
and swung their support to the Republicans. Donald Trump won thepresidency.
Political divisions only deepened after the election. A nation alreadydeeply split by income, culture, race, geography, and ideology continued
to come apart. Trump’s presidency consumed national attention. Traditional print media and the consumers and producers of social media
could not help but throw themselves at the ins and outs of Trump’s
norm-smashing first years while seemingly refracting every major event
through the prism of the Trump presidency. Robert Mueller’s investigation of Russian election-meddling and the alleged collusion of campaign
officials in that effort produced countless headlines. Meanwhile, newpolicies enflamed widening cultural divisions. Border apprehensions
and deportations reached record levels under the Obama administration,
but Trump pushed even farther. He pushed for a massive wall along theborder to supplement the fence built under the Bush administration. He
began ordering the deportation of so-called Dreamers—students who
were born elsewhere but grew up in the United States—and immigration officials separated refugee-status-seeking parents and children at theborder. Trump’s border policies heartened his base and aggravated his
opponents. But while Trump enflamed America’s enduring culture war,
his narrowly passed 2017 tax cut continued the redistribution of American wealth toward corporations and wealthy individuals. The tax cut
exploded the federal deficit and further exacerbated America’s widening
economic inequality.

VIII. New Horizons
Americans looked anxiously to the future, and yet also, often, to a newgeneration busy discovering, perhaps, that change was not impossible.
Much public commentary in the early twenty-first century concerned themillennials, the new generation that came of age during the new millennium. Commentators, demographers, and political prognosticators continued to ask what the new generation will bring. Time’s May 20, 2013,
cover, for instance, read Millennials Are Lazy, Entitled Narcissists Who© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

434

chapt er 30

Still Live with Their Parents: Why They’ll Save Us All. Pollsters focusedon features that distinguish millennials from older Americans: millennials, the pollsters said, were more diverse, more liberal, less religious, andwracked by economic insecurity. “They are,” as one Pew report read,“relatively unattached to organized politics and religion, linked by social
media, burdened by debt, distrustful of people, in no rush to marry—andoptimistic about the future.”31
Millennial attitudes toward homosexuality and gay marriage reflected
one of the most dramatic changes in the popular attitudes of recent years.
After decades of advocacy, American attitudes shifted rapidly. In 2006,
a majority of Americans still told Gallup pollsters that “gay or lesbian
relations” was “morally wrong.”32 But prejudice against homosexuality
plummeted and greater public acceptance of coming out opened the culture–in 2001, 73 percent of Americans said they knew someone who wasgay, lesbian, or bisexual; in 1983, only 24 percent did. Gay characters—
and in particular, gay characters with depth and complexity—could befound across the cultural landscape. Attitudes shifted such that, by the2010s, polls registered majority support for the legalization of gay marriage. A writer for the Wall Street Journal called it “one of the fastestmoving changes in social attitudes of this generation.”33
Such change was, in many respects, a generational one: on average, younger Americans supported gay marriage in higher numbers
than older Americans. The Obama administration, meanwhile, moved
tentatively. Refusing to push for national interventions on the gay
marriage front, Obama did, however, direct a review of Defense Department policies that repealed the Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell policy in2011. Without the support of national politicians, gay marriage wasleft to the courts. Beginning in Massachusetts in 2003, state courts had
begun slowly ruling against gay marriage bans. Then, in June 2015,
the Supreme Court ruled 5–4 in Obergefell v. Hodges that same-sex
marriage was a constitutional right. Nearly two thirds of Americans
supported the position.34
While liberal social attitudes marked the younger generation, perhaps
nothing defined young Americans more than the embrace of technology.
The Internet in particular, liberated from desktop modems, shaped moreof daily life than ever before. The release of the Apple iPhone in 2007
popularized the concept of smartphones for millions of consumers and,by 2011, about a third of Americans owned a mobile computing device.
Four years later, two thirds did.35.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  435

Together with the advent of social media, Americans used theirsmartphones and their desktops to stay in touch with old acquaintances,chat with friends, share photos, and interpret the world—as newspaper
and magazine subscriptions dwindled, Americans increasingly turned totheir social media networks for news and information.36 Ambitious new
online media companies, hungry for clicks and the ad revenue they represented, churned out provocatively titled, easy-to-digest stories that could
be linked and tweeted and shared widely among like-minded online communities,37, but even traditional media companies, forced to downsize
their newsrooms to accommodate shrinking revenues, fought to adapt totheir new online consumers.
The ability of individuals to share stories through social media apps
revolutionized the media landscape—smartphone technology and the democratization of media reshaped political debates and introduced newpolitical questions. The easy accessibility of video capturing and the ability for stories to go viral outside traditional media, for instance, brought
new attention to the tense and often violent relations between municipal
police officers and African Americans. The 2014 death of Michael Brown
in Ferguson, Missouri, focused the issue, and over the following years

Just weeks after seventeen students were murdered at Stoneman Douglas High School in Parkland, Florida,
more than two million Americans across the country participated in the March for Our Lives demonstration to advocate for more effective gun control laws. Several Stoneman Douglas students emerged asprominent national activists in the wake of the shooting. This photo of the demonstration, taken from theNewseum in Washington D.C., captures a graphic on the exterior of the museum listing five protections of
the First Amendment. Phil Roeder, via Flickr.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

436

chapt er 30

videos documenting the deaths of black men at the hands of police officers circulated among social media networks. It became a testament
to the power of social media platforms such as Twitter that a hashtag,#blacklivesmatter, became a rallying cry for protesters and counterhashtags, #alllivesmatter and #policelivesmatter, for critics.38
Another social media phenomenon, the #MeToo movement, began
as the magnification of and outrage toward the past sexual crimes of notable male celebrities before injecting a greater intolerance toward thoseaccused of sexual harassment and violence into much of the rest of American society. The sudden zero tolerance reflected the new political energies of many American women, sparked in large part by the candidacy
and presidency of Donald Trump. The day after Trump’s inauguration,
between five hundred thousand and one million people descended on
Washington, D.C., for the Women’s March, and millions more demonstrated in cities and towns around the country to show a broadly definedcommitment toward the rights of women and others in the face of the
Trump presidency.
As issues of race and gender captured much public discussion, immigration continued on as a potent political issue. Even as anti-immigrant
initiatives like California’s Proposition 187 (1994) and Arizona’s SB1070(2010) reflected the anxieties of many white Americans, younger Americans proved far more comfortable with immigration and diversity (whichmakes sense, given that they are the most diverse American generationin living memory). Since Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society liberalized immigration laws in the 1960s, the demographics of the United States havebeen transformed. In 2012, nearly one quarter of all Americans were immigrants or the sons and daughters of immigrants. Half came from Latin
America. The ongoing Hispanicization of the United States and the evershrinking proportion of non-Hispanic whites have been the most talked
about trends among demographic observers. By 2013, 17 percent of thenation was Hispanic. In 2014, Latinos surpassed non-Latino whites tobecame the largest ethnic group in California. In Texas, the image of awhite cowboy hardly captures the demographics of a minority-majority
state in which Hispanic Texans will soon become the largest ethnic group.
For the nearly 1.5 million people of Texas’s Rio Grande Valley, for instance, where most residents speak Spanish at home, a full three fourthsof the population is bilingual.39 Political commentators often wonder
what political transformations these populations will bring about when
they come of age and begin voting in larger numbers.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  437

IX. Conclusion
The collapse of the Soviet Union brought neither global peace nor stability, and the attacks of September 11, 2001, plunged the United States into
interminable conflicts around the world. At home, economic recession,a slow recovery, stagnant wage growth, and general pessimism infected
American life as contentious politics and cultural divisions poisoned social harmony. And yet the stream of history changes its course. Trends
shift, things change, and events turn. New generations bring with themnew perspectives, and they share new ideas with new technologies. Ourworld is not foreordained. It is the product of history, the ever-evolving
culmination of a longer and broader story, of a larger history, of a raw,
distinctive, American Yawp.

X. Reference Material
This chapter was edited by Michael Hammond, with content contributions by
Eladio Bobadilla, Andrew Chadwick, Zach Fredman, Leif Fredrickson, Michael
Hammond, Richara Hayward, Joseph Locke, Mark Kukis, Shaul Mitelpunkt, Michelle Reeves, Elizabeth Skilton, Bill Speer, and Ben Wright.
Recommended citation: Eladio Bobadilla et al., “The Recent Past,” Michael
Hammond, ed., in The American Yawp, eds. Joseph Locke and Ben Wright (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2019).
Not e s to C h a pt e r 3 0
1. William Faulker, Requiem for a Nun (New York: Random House,1954), 73.
2. Bill Minutaglio, First Son: George W. Bush and the Bush Family Dynasty(New York: Random House, 1999), 210–224.
3. Roger Simon, “How a Murderer and Rapist Became the Bush Campaign’s
Most Valuable Player,” Baltimore Sun, November 11, 1990.
4. See especially Dan T. Carter, From George Wallace to Newt Gingrich:
Race in the Conservative Counterrevolution, 1963–1994 (Baton Rouge: LSU
Press, 1996), 72–80.
5. Sean Wilentz, The Age of Reagan: A History, 1974–2008 (New York:
HarperCollins, 2008).
6. James F. Clarity, “End of the Soviet Union,” New York Times, December
26, 1991.
7. Francis Fukuyama, “The End of History?” National Interest (Summer1989).
8. William Thomas Allison, The Gulf War, 1990–91 (New York: Palgrave
Macmillan, 2012), 145, 165.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

438

chapt er 30

9. Charles W. Dunn, The Presidency in the Twenty-first Century (Lexington:
University Press of Kentucky, 2011), 152.
10. Robert M. Collins, Transforming America: Politics and Culture During
the Reagan Years (New York: Columbia University Press, 2009), 171, 172.
11. For Clinton’s presidency and the broader politics of the 1990s, see James
T. Patterson, Restless Giant: The United States from Watergate to Bush v. Gore
(New York: Oxford University Press, 2005); and Wilentz, Age of Reagan.
12. Patterson, Restless Giant, 298–299.
13. United Nations International Organization for Migration, “Migrant
Deaths Remain High Despite Sharp Fall in US-Mexico Border Crossings in
2017,” press release, February 6, 2018. https://​news​.un​.org​/en​/story​/2018​/02​/1002101.
14. Carolyn Skorneck, “Final Welfare Bill Written,” Washington Post, July
30, 1996, A1.
15. Frank Newport, “Clinton Receives Record High Job Approval Rating,”
Gallup, December 24, 1998. http://​news​.gallup​.com​/poll​/4111​/clinton​-receives​-record​-high​-job​-approval​-rating​-after​-impeachment​-vot​.aspx.
16. Dexter Filkins, The Forever War (New York: Vintage Books, 2009).
17. See, for instance, Lawrence Wright, The Looming Tower: Al Qaeda andthe Road to 9/11 (New York: Knopf, 2006).
18. Thomas R. Mockaitis, The Iraq War: A Documentary and Reference
Guide (Santa Barbara, CA: ABC-Clio, 2012), 26.
19. Judy Keen, “Bush to Troops: Mission Accomplished,” USA Today, June
5, 2003.
20. Bruce Nolan, “Katrina: The Storm We’ve Always Feared,” New Orleans
Times-Picayune, August 30, 2005.
21. Douglas Brinkley, The Great Deluge: Hurricane Katrina, New Orleans,
and the Mississippi Gulf Coast (New York: HarperCollins, 2006).
22. On the Great Recession, see Joseph Stiglitz, Freefall: America, Free Markets, and the Sinking of the World Economy (New York: Norton, 2010); andMichael Lewis, The Big Short: Inside the Doomsday Machine (New York: Norton: 2010).
23. Harold Meyerson, “Corporate America’s Chokehold on Wages,” Washington Post, July 19, 2011.
24. Thomas J. Sugrue, Not Even Past: Barack Obama and the Burden ofRace Book (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2012).
25. Kate Zernike and Megan Thee-Brenan, “Poll Finds Tea Party Backers
Wealthier and More Educated,” New York Times, April 14, 2010; Jill Lepore,
The Whites of Their Eyes: The Tea Party’s Revolution and the Battle over American History (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2011).
26. Kerry Close, “The 1% Pocketed 85% of Post-Recession Income Growth,”
Time, June 16, 2016. http://​time​.com​/money​/4371332​/income​-inequality​-recession/. See also Justin Wolfers, “The Gains from the Economic Recovery
Are Still Limited to the Top One Percent,” New York Times, January 27, 2015.
http://​www​.nytimes​.com​/2015​/01​/28​/upshot​/gains​-from​-economic​-recovery​-still​-limited​-to​-top​-one​-percent​.html.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

T he Re ce n t P a st  439

27. Julia Queen and Christian Hilland, “2008 Presidential Campaign
Financial Activity Summarized: Receipts Nearly Double 2004 Total,” Federal Election Commission, June 8, 2009. http://​
www​
.fec​
.gov​
/press​/press2009​/20090608PresStat​.shtml; Andre Tartar and Eric Benson, “The Forever Campaign,” New York Magazine (October 14, 2012). http://​nymag​.com​/news​/politics​/elections​-2012​/timeline​-2012​-10/.
28. Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Climate Change 2013: The
Physical Science Basis (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2014).
29. Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Climate Change 2014: Impacts, Adaptation and Vulnerability: Global and Sectoral Aspects (Cambridge,
UK: Cambridge University Press, 2014).
30. Philip Bump, “A Quarter of Americans Dislike Both Major-Party Presidential Candidates,” Washington Post, July 14, 2016. https://​www​.washingtonpost​.com​/news​/the​-fix​/wp​/2016​/07​/14​/a​-quarter​-of​-americans​-dislike​-both​-major​-party​-presidential​-candidates​
/​
?tid​
=​
a​
_inl; Aaron Zitner and Julia Wolfe, “Trump andClinton’s Popularity Problem,” Wall Street Journal, May 24, 2016. http://​graphics​.wsj​.com​/elections​/2016​/donald​-trump​-and​-hillary​-clintons​-popularity​-problem/.
31. Paul Taylor, The Next America: Boomers, Millennials, and the Looming
Generational Showdown (New York: Public Affairs, 2014).
32. “Gay and Lesbian Rights,” Gallup, December 5–7, 2003. http://​www​.gallup​.com​/poll​/1651​/gay​-lesbian​-rights​.aspx.
33. Janet Hook, “Support for Gay Marriage Hits All-Time High,” WallStreet Journal, March 9, 2015.
34. Ibid.
35. Monica Anders, “Technology Device Ownership: 2015,” Pew ResearchCenter, October 29, 2015. http://​www​.pewglobal​.org​/2016​/02​/22​/smartphone​-ownership​-and​-internet​-usage​-continues​-to​-climb​-in​-emerging​-economies/.
36. Monica Anderson and Andrea Caumont, “How Social Media Is Reshaping News,” Pew Research Center, September 24, 2014. http://​www​.pewresearch​.org​/fact​-tank​/2014​/09​/24​/how​-social​-media​-is​-reshaping​-news/.
37. See, for instance, Nicholas G. Carr’s 2010 The Shallows: What the Internet Is Doing to Our Brains, a 2011 Pulitzer Prize finalist.
38. Bijan Stephen, “Social Media Helps Black Lives Matter Fight the Power,”
Wired (November 2015). http://​www​.wired​.com​/2015​/10​/how​-black​-lives​-matter​-uses​-social​-media​-to​-fight​-the​-power/.
39. U.S. Census Bureau, 2016 American Community Survey 1-Year Estimates. https://​factfinder​.census​.gov​/bkmk​/table​/1​.0​/en​/ACS​/16​_1YR​/S1601​/05​00​
000​US48061|0500000US48215.
R e c omm e n d e d R e a d i n g
Alexander, Michelle. The New Jim Crow: Mass Incarceration in the Age of Colorblindness. New York: New Press, 2012.
Canaday, Margot. The Straight State: Sexuality and Citizenship in TwentiethCentury America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2011.
Carter, Dan T. From George Wallace to Newt Gingrich: Race in the Conservative
Counterrevolution, 1963–1994. Baton Rouge: LSU Press, 1996.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

440

chapt er 30

Cowie, Jefferson. Capital Moves: RCA’s 70-Year Quest for Cheap Labor. New
York: New Press, 2001.
Ehrenreich, Barbara. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting By in America. New
York: Metropolitan, 2001.
Evans, Sara. Tidal Wave: How Women Changed America at Century’s End. New
York: Free Press, 2003.
Gardner, Lloyd C. The Long Road to Baghdad: A History of U.S. Foreign Policy
from the 1970s to the Present. New York: Free Press, 2008.
Hinton, Elizabeth. From the War on Poverty to the War on Crime. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, 2016.
Hollinger, David. Postethnic America: Beyond Multiculturalism. New York:
Basic Books, 1995.
Hunter, James D. Culture Wars: The Struggle to Define America. New York:
Basic Books, 1992.
Meyerowitz, Joanne. How Sex Changed: A History of Transsexuality in the
United States. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2004.
Mittelstadt, Jennifer. The Rise of the Military Welfare State. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, 2015.
Moreton, Bethany. To Serve God and Walmart: The Making of Christian FreeEnterprise. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2009.
Nadasen, Premilla. Welfare Warriors: The Welfare Rights Movement in the
United States. New York: Routledge, 2005.
Osnos, Evan. Age of Ambition: Chasing Fortune, Truth and Faith in the New
China. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 2014.
Packer, George. The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America. New
York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 2013.
Patterson, James T. Restless Giant: The United States from Watergate to Bush v.
Gore. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Piketty, Thomas. Capital in the Twenty-First Century. Translated from the French
by Arthur Goldhammer. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press, 2013.
Ricks, Thomas E. Fiasco: The American Military Adventure in Iraq. New York:
Penguin, 2006.
Schlosser, Eric. Fast Food Nation: The Dark Side of the All-American Meal. New
York: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, 2001.
Stiglitz, Joseph. Freefall: America, Free Markets, and the Sinking of the World
Economy. New York: Norton, 2010.
Taylor, Paul. The Next America: Boomers, Millennials, and the Looming Generational Showdown. New York: Public Affairs, 2014.
Wilentz, Sean. The Age of Reagan: A History, 1974–2008. New York: HarperCollins, 2008.
Williams, Daniel K. God’s Own Party: The Making of the Christian Right. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2007.
Wright, Lawrence. The Looming Tower: Al Qaeda and the Road to 9/11. New
York: Knopf, 2006.

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

Contributors
E di t o r sJoseph Locke, University of Houston-Victoria
Ben Wright, University of Texas at Dallas
E di t o r i a l A dv i s o r s
Edward L. Ayers, University of RichmondRandall Balmer, Dartmouth University
Robin Blackburn, University of Essex
Edward J. Blum, San Diego State University
Christopher L. Brown, Columbia University
Jorge Cañizares-Esguerra, University of Texas
Joyce Chaplin, Harvard University
Jefferson R. Cowie, Cornell University
Hasia R. Diner, New York University
Darren Dochuk, Washington University in St.
Louis
Ellen DuBois, University of California, Los
Angeles
Erica Armstrong Dunbar, University of
DelawareNicole Etcheson, Ball State University
María Cristina García, Cornell University
Thavolia Glymph, Duke University
Pekka Hämäläinen, University of Oxford
Leslie M. Harris, Emory University
Allyson Hobbs, Stanford University
Woody Holton, University of South Carolina
Daniel Martin HoSang, University of Oregon
Stephen Kantrowitz, University of Wisconsin
Michael Kazin, Georgetown University
David Konig, Washington University in St. Louis
Karen Kupperman, New York University
T. J. Jackson Lears, Rutgers University
Chandra M. Manning, Georgetown University
Kate Masur, Northwestern University
W. Caleb McDaniel, Rice University
James Merrell, Vassar College
Jo-Ann Morgan, Western Illinois University

Susan O’Donovan, University of Memphis
Margaret O’Mara, University of Washington
Heather C. Richardson, Boston College
Edward Rugemer, Yale University
John D. Saillant, Western Michigan University
Martha A. Sandweiss, Princeton University
Claudio Saunt, University of Georgia
Leigh Eric Schmidt, Washington University in St.
Louis
Carole Shammas, University of Southern
California
Richard White, Stanford University
Samuel Zipp, Brown University
Dig i ta l C o n t e n t A dv i s o r sDavid J. Bodenhamer, Indiana University
Christopher D. Cantwell, University of MissouriKansas City
Amy Earhart, Texas A&M University
Kathleen Fitzpatrick, Michigan State University
Tona Hangen, Worcester State University
Jason Heppler, Stanford University
Kim Gallon, Purdue University
Alex Gil Fuentes, Columbia University
Matthew K. Gold, CUNY Graduate Center
Jennifer Guiliano, University of Maryland
Cathy Moran Hajo, New York University
Lauren Klein, Georgia Tech
Jeffrey McClurken, University of Mary
Washington
Tara McPherson, University of Southern
California
Lincoln Mullen, George Mason University
Robert K. Nelson, University of RichmondBethany Nowviskie, University of Virginia
Miriam Posner, University of California, Los
AngelesDarren R. Reid, University of Edinburgh© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 4 2 c ontr ibu tor s

Kyle Roberts, Loyola University Chicago
Jentery Sayers, University of Victoria
Kelly Schrum, George Mason University
Lisa Spiro, Rice University
Erik Steiner, Stanford University
Mark Tebeau, Arizona State University
Lauren Tilton, Yale University
Kathryn Tomasek, Wheaton College
Andrew J. Torget, University of North Texas
William J. Turkel, University of Western
Ontario
Lauren Tilton, Yale University
Kathryn Tomasek, Wheaton College
Andrew J. Torget, University of North Texas
William J. Turkel, University of Western Ontario
C h a p t e r E di t o r sSamuel Abramson, Rice University
Ellen Adams, Alice T. Miner Museum
Richard Anderson, Princeton University
Lauren Brand, Southern Nazarene University
Edwin Breeden, Old Exchange Building and Old
Slave Mart Museum
Emily Conroy-Krutz, Michigan State University
Ari Cushner, San Jose State University
Matthew Downs, University of Mobile
Angela Esco Elder, Converse College
Jesse Gant, University of Wisconsin
Jane Fiegen Green, American Historical
Association
Paula Fortier, Independent Researcher
Nathaniel Green, Northern Virginia Community
College
Michael Hammond, Taylor University
Michael Hattem, Yale University
Mary Anne Henderson, University ofWashington
David Hochfelder, University at Albany, SUNY
Daniel Johnson, Bilkent University
Amy Kohout, Colorado College
Gregg Lightfoot, The Girls Preparatory School
James McKay, University of Wisconsin
William Schultz, Princeton University
Nora Slonimsky, Iona College
Tara Strauch, College of Wooster
David Thomson, Sacred Heart University

Nicole Turner, Virginia Commonwealth
University
Andrew Wegmann, Delta State University
Brandy Thomas Wells, Augusta College
Jonathan Wilfred Wilson, University of Scrantonand Marywood University
I m ag e C u r a t o r sErin Holmes, University of South Carolina
Katherine Lennard, Stanford University
Jo-Ann Morgan, Western Illinois University
Christina Regelski, Rice University
Amy Sopcak-Joseph, University of Connecticut
Whitney Stewart, University of Texas at Dallas
Colleen Tripp, California State University,
Northridge
Con tr ibu tor s
Christopher L. Abernathy, University ofOklahoma
Gregory Ablavsky, Stanford Law School
Sam Abramson, Rice University
Ellen Adams, William and Mary
Alvita Akiboh, Northwestern University
Jim Ambuske, University of Virginia
Richard A. Anderson, Princeton University
Seth Anziska, University College London
Kelly B. Arehart, William and Mary
Carolyn Arena, Omohundro Institute of Early
American History and Culture
Emily Arendt, Montana State University
Billings
Jeffrey Bain-Conkin, Notre Dame University
Andrew Baker, Texas A&M University–
Commerce
Thomas Balcerski, Eastern Connecticut State
University
Simon Balto, Ball State University
Laila Ballout, Northwestern University
Seth Bartee, Guilford Technical Community
College
Marco Basile, Harvard University
Jeremiah Bauer, University of Nebraska
Joshua Beatty, SUNY Plattsburgh
Amanda Bellows, The New School
Jacob Betz, Harvard University© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

c on trib u t o r s 443

Marsha Barrett, University of Illinois at
Urbana-Champaign
Ian Beamish, Johns Hopkins University
Myles Beaupre, Notre Dame University
Ethan R. Bennett, Washington University in
St. Louis
Daniel Birge, Boston University
William Black, Rice University
John Blanton, The City College of New York
Drew Bledsoe, Lee University
Cameron Blevins, Northeastern University
Nicholas Blood, Emory University
Eladio Bobadilla, Duke University
Lauren Brand, Southern Nazarene University
Edwin Breeden, Old Exchange Building and Old
Slave Mart Museum
Michael Brenes, Yale University
Marjorie Brown, Houston Community College
Kyle Burke, Northwestern University
L. D. Burnett, Tarleton State University
Alexander Burns, Ball State University
Carole Butcher, North Dakota State University
Matthew A. Byron, Young Harris College
Michael T. Caires, University of Virginia
Christina Carrick, Boston University
Michelle Cassidy, Central Michigan University
Peter Catapano, New York City College ofTechnology
Steffi Cerato, Johns Hopkins University
Andrew Chadwick, University of Maryland
Tizoc Chavez, Vanderbilt University
Christopher Childers, Pittsburg State University
Micah Childress, Grand Valley State University
Mary Beth Basile Chopas, University of North
CarolinaFrank Cirillo, University of Virginia
Justin Clark, Nanyang Technological University
Dana Cochran, Virginia Tech
Kristin Condotta Lee, Washington University in
St. Louis
Emily Conroy-Krutz, Michigan State University
Christopher Consolino, Johns Hopkins
University
Adam Constanzo, Texas A&M Corpus Christi
Wiliam Cossen, Penn State University
Aaron Cowan, Slippery Rock University

Mari Crabtree, College of Charleston
Michell Cresfield, Vanderbilt University
Ari Cushner, San Jose State University
Lori Daggar, Ursinus College
Andrew David, Boston University
Morgan Deane, Brigham Young UniversityIdaho
Jenifer Dodd, Vanderbilt University
Jean-Paul de Guzman, University of California,
Los Angeles
Matthew Downs, University of Mobile
Jennifer Donnally, University of North Carolina
Mary Draper, Midwestern State University
Dan Du, University of Georgia
Blake Earle, Southern Methodist University
Ashton Ellett, University of Georgia
Angela Esco Elder, Converse College
Alexandra Evans, University of Virginia
Sean Fear, University of Leeds
Maggie Flamingo, University of Wisconsin
Paula Fortier, University of New Orleans
Jeff Fortnoy, University of Oklahoma
Michael Franczak, Boston College
Leif Fredrickson, University of Virginia
Zach Fredman, Dartmouth College
Stephanie Gamble, Johns Hopkins University
Jesse Gant, University of Wisconsin
Josh Garrett-Davis, Autry Museum of theAmerican West
Zach P. Gastellum, University of Oklahoma
Jamie Goodall, Stevenson University
Jonathan Grandage, Florida State University
Larry A. Grant, The Citadel
Anne Gray Fischer, Brown University
Kori Graves, University at Albany, SUNY
Jane Fiegen Green, American Historical
Association
Nathaniel Green, Northern Virginia Community
College
Robert Gudmestad, Colorado State University
Joseph Haker, University of Minnesota
Blaine Hamilton, Rice University
Tracey Hanshew, Washington State University
Caroline Bunnell Harris, University ofCalifornia, Los Angeles
Michael Hattem, Yale University© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 4 4 c ontr ibu tor s

Karissa Haugeberg, Tulane University
Chris Hayashida-Knight, Penn State University
Richara Leona Hayward, University ofPennsylvania
Timothy C. Hemmis, Texas A&M University–
Central Texas
Mary Anne Henderson, University ofWashington
Mariah Hepworth, Northwestern University
Jordan Hill, Virginia Tech University
Hidetaka Hirota, Columbia University
David Hochfelder, University at Albany, SUNY
Nicolas Hoffmann, Oak Mountain Academy
Lilian Hoodes, Northwestern University
Rebecca Howard, University of Arkansas
Amanda Hughett, Duke University
Kylie A. Hulbert, Texas A&M University–
Kingsville
Matthew C. Hulbert, University of Georgia
Jonathan Hunt, Stanford University
Jun Suk Hyun University of Georgia
Hendrick Isom, Brown University
Zachary Jacobson, Northwestern University
Destin Jenkins, University of Chicago
Nathan Jérémie-Brink, New Brunswick
Theological Seminary
D. Andrew Johnson, Rice University
Daniel Johnson, Bilkent University
Christopher C. Jones, Brigham Young University
Matthew Kahn, Northwestern University
Suzanne Kahn, Columbia University
Micki Kaufman, CUNY Graduate Center
Lindsay Keiter, Penn State Altoona
William Kelly, Rutgers University
Brenden Kennedy, University of Montana
Western
S. Wright Kennedy, Rice University
William Kerrigan, Muskingum University
Krista Kinslow, Boston University
Jonathan Koefoed, Belhaven University
Gerard Koeppel, Independent Scholar
Stephn M. Koeth, Columbia University
Amy Kohout, Colorado College
Erin Bonuso Kramer, University of Wisconsin
Dale Kretz, Texas Tech University

Matthew Kruer, University of Chicago
Mark Kukis, Keck Graduate InstituteLucie Kyrova, Charles University
Guy Lancaster, Central Arkansas Library System
Allison Lange, Wentworth Institute ofTechnology
Kathryn Knowles Lasdow, Columbia University
Brooke Lamperd, Brown University
Scott Libson, Emory University
Gregg Lightfoot, The Girls Preparatory School
Matthew Linton, Brandeis University
Kyle Livie, Oholone College
Jennifer Mandel, Mount Washington College
John Garrison Marks, American Association forState and Local History
Dawn Marsh, Purdue University
Valerie A. Martinex, University of Texas
Paul Matzko, Penn State University
Ashley Mays, University of North Carolina
Lisa Mercer, University of Illinois at
Urbana-Champaign
Spencer McBride, Louisiana State University
Keith D. McCall, Rice University
Charles McCrary, Florida State University
Katherine J. McGarr, University of Wisconsin
James McKay, University of Wisconsin
José Juan Pérez Meléndez, University ofCalifornia, Davis
Ryan T. Menath, U.S. Air Force Academy
Samantha Miller, University of Pennsylvania
Shaul Mitelpunkt, University of YorkElisa Minoff, University of South Florida
Maria Montalvo, Tulane University
Celeste Day Moore, Hamilton College
Erik A. Moore, University of Oklahoma
Gregory Moore, Notre Dame College
Jessica Parker Moore, Texas Christian University
Joseph Moore, Gardner-Webb University
Isabella Morales, Princeton University
Felicia Moralez, University of Notre Dame
Melissa Morris, Bridgewater State University
Christen Mucher, Smith College
Andrea Nero, University at Buffalo, SUNY
Christopher Null, University of California,
Los Angeles© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

c on trib u t o r s 445

James Owen, University of Georgia
Brooke Palmieri, University College London
R. Joseph Parrott, The Ohio State University
Adam Parsons, Syracuse University
Ryan Poe, Duke University
Matthew Pressman, Seton Hall University
Emily Alise Prifogle, Princeton University
Bradley Proctor, University of North Carolina
Ansley Quiros, University of North Alabama
Laura Redford, UCLA
Michelle Reeves, US Naval War College
Ronny Regev, The Hebrew University ofJerusalem
Emily Remus, University of Notre Dame
Colin Reynolds, Emory University
Leah Richier, University of Georgia
Julie Richter, William and MaryBryan Rindfleisch, Marquette University
Angela Riotto, University of Akron
John P. Riley, Binghamton University, SUNYJames Risk, University of South Carolina
Andrew Robichaud, Stanford University
Michael Robinson, University of Mobile
Cara Rogers, Rice University
Katherine Rohrer, University of North Georgia
Emily Romeo, Depaul University
Nick Rowland, University of Texas
Brent Ruswick, West Chester University
Matthew K. Saionz, University of Florida
John Saillant, Western Michigan University
Christopher Paul Sawula, Emory University
Ian Saxine, Northwestern University
David Schley, Hong Kong Baptist University
John Schmitz, Northern Virginia Community
College
Kristopher Shields, Rutgers University
Evgenia Shnayder Shoop, University ofPennsylvania
Cameron Shriver, Ohio State University
Matt Simmons, University of Florida
Donna Sinclair, University of Central Michigan
Phillip Luke Sinitiere, College of Biblical Studies
William E. Skidmore, Rice University
Elizabeth Skilton, University of Louisiana at
Lafayette

Nora Slonimsky, Iona College
Katherine Smoak, Johns Hopkins University
Christopher Sparshott, Northwestern University
in Qatar
Bill Speer, American Military University
Daniel Spillman, Oklahoma Baptist University
Kate Sohasky, Johns Hopkins University
Marie Stango, California State University,
Bakersfield
Megan Stanton, University of Wisconsin
Rowan Steinecker, University of Central
OklahomaColin Stephenson, Ohio State University
Gregory N. Stern, Florida State University
Whitney Stewart, University of Texas at Dallas
Tara Strauch, University of South Carolina
Joseph Super, University of West Virginia
Jordan Taylor, Indiana University
Michael Harrison Taylor, University of Georgia
Emma Teitelman, University of Pennsylvania
Chris Thomas, Reynolds Community College
Susan Thomas, University of North Carolina at
Greensboro
Robert John Thompson III, Southern Mississippi
David Thomson, Sacred Heart University
Patrick Troester, University of Akron
Ann Tucker, University of North Georgia
Nicole Turner, Virginia Commonwealth
University
Ashley Rose Young, Smithsonian Institution
Caitlin Verboon, Yale University
Alyce Vigil, Northern Oklahoma College
James Wainwright, Prince George’s Community
College
Kevin Waite, Durham University
Kaylynn Washnock, University of Georgia
C. Ruth Watterson, Harvard University
Benjamin Weber, Harvard University
Kelly B. Weber, Rice University
Andrew Wegmann, Delta State University
James Wellborn, Georgia College
Brandy Thomas Wells, Augusta College
Benjamin Wetzel, University of Notre Dame
Luke Willert, Harvard University
Mason B. Williams, Williams College© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

4 4 6 c ontr ibu tor s

Naomi R. Williams, The College at Brockport,
SUNY
Jonathan Wilfred Wilson, University of Scrantonand Marywood University
Kevin Wisniewski, University of Maryland,
Baltimore County
Nicholas Wood, Spring Hill College

Michael E. Woods, Marshall University
Garrett Wright, University of North Carolina
Nathan Wuertenberg, Ball State University
Charlton Yingling, University of Louisville
Kevin Young, University of Georgia
Rebecca Zimmer, University of Southern
Mississippi© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com

© 2019 by the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University.
Licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0. www.americanyawp.com